r. Allen's money

i
ROBERT ALLEN'S MONEY
POWER SYSTEM
FOR MAKING YOUR REAL
ESTATE FORTUNE
“STRATEGY UNITS”
TABLE OF CONTENTS
UNIT ONE: THE BIG PICTURE: THE CASE FOR REAL ESTATE AS A WEALTHBUILDING
VEHICLE
General Considerations 1
Uncle Sam's Tax Reform 3
Real Estate: Still The Golden Opportunity 4
Income Potential 4
Depreciation (Tax Benefits) 5
Equity Buildup 6
Appreciation 7
Leverage 8
How Much Can I Make? 8
What Does It Take To Succeed In Real Estate? 9
What Is The Action Model For Real Estate? 12
General Considerations 12
Surprise: Real Estate Has An Action Model, Too 13
Put On Your Thinking Cap: PICNIC CAP 17
Chinese Boxes 18
An Assignment 19
ii
What Kinds Of Properties Are In Your Future? 20
UNIT TWO: HOW TO LOCATE ULTRA-BARGAINS
General Considerations 1
A Few Terms You Should Know 2
Key Points About Finding Flexible Sellers 4
Two Kinds Of Flexible Sellers 5
What Causes Sellers To Be Flexible? 7
Personal Causes of Flexibility 9
Property Causes of Flexibility 11
Economic Causes of Flexibility 12
How Curable Is The Problem? 13
Narrow Down Your Search 15
How To Find The Bargains 15
Newspaper Advertising 16
Realtors 20
Referrals 26
Personal Research 28
Other Advertising 37
Efficiency Factors In Finding Flexible Sellers 38
A Note About the Win/Win Philosophy 40
How Well Have Your Learned? 40
Putting It All Into Practice 41
The Ten Most Asked Questions About Finding Flexible Sellers 44
UNIT THREE: ANALYSIS MADE EASY
General Considerations 1
The Governing Focal Points 2
The Property Selection Grid 3
Four Test Cases 4
The Bargain Finder Form 5
Bargain Finder Checklist 5
Questions For The Seller 11
Assignments 11
UNIT FOUR: NEGOTIATING A WIN/WIN DEAL: THE "HIGH TOUCH" OF REAL
ESTATE
General Considerations 1
A Few Terms You Should Know 2
Key Points About Negotiating 4
iii
How To Negotiate To Win 5
Three Major Objectives Of The Initial Contact 7
What Questions Should I Ask? 10
Fourteen Rules for Successful Negotiation 10
Rule 1: Negotiate In Person 10
Rule 2: Negotiate Price, Rates, Payments, and Dates 16
Rule 3: Ask Questions 20
Rule 4: Be Patient 23
Rule 5: Build Trust By Being Sensitive To The Seller's Interests 24
Rule 6: Use Pre-established Boundaries of Price/Terms Tolerance 30
Rule 7: The First One To Mention A Number Loses 31
Rule 8: Keep It Simple 34
Rule 9: Remind The Seller Of The Problems You Are Saving Him From 36
Rule 10: Explore "Stab-In-The-Dark" Offers 37
Rule 11: Persist and Persist Again 39
Rule 12: Take Time--Time Lessens Tensions 42
Rule 13: Be Flexible, Be Creative, Be Ready With Alternatives 44
Rule 14: Step Back And Give Yourself A Chance To Think 46
Negotiating Checklist 47
Reasons For Flexibility: And How To Turn Them To Your Advantage 50
Three Tactics To Try When All Else Fails 51
Applying The Win/Win Philosophy In Negotiation 55
How Well Have Your Learned? 56
Putting It All Into Practice 57
The Ten Most Asked Questions About Negotiation 60
UNIT FIVE: CREATIVE FINANCE
General Considerations 1
The Major Factors Of Creative Finance 4
At What Price? 4
Using Whose Financial Resources To Buy? 5
How Soft Or Hard Are The "Other People" Involved? 5
With What Size Of Down Payment? 6
When Is The Down Payment Due? 6
In What Form Of Consideration? 7
At What Rate Of Interest On The Unpaid Balance? 7
For What Repayment Terms? 8
Creative Finance Score Card 8
A Hypothetical Case Study 9
Tricks Of The Trade 12
The Big Secret 13
Creative Footnotes 14
Six Universal Creative Finance Cookie Cutters 15
iv
The Ultimate Paper Out 15
Blanket Mortgage 17
The Second Mortgage Crank 18
Wrap-Around Mortgage 21
Creating Paper 23
Lease Option 24
Assignments 25
Practicum 26
Chart: Situation Analysis Matrix 27
UNIT SIX: MAKING RISK-FREE OFFERS
The Five Major Benefits Of The Written Offer 1
A Few Terms You Should Know 3
Key Points About Offers and Documentation 6
How To Document Real Estate Offers 6
Steps For Real Estate Documentation 9
Seven Common Mistakes Often Made By Beginning Investors 10
Negotiating The Ranges 14
Establishing The Value Of A Property 20
Which Elements Are Essential To The Real Estate Offer? 22
Documenting The Purchase Agreement Terms 28
Earnest Money Agreement 31
Detailed Explanation Of The Earnest Money Agreement 35
Using A Documentation Checklist 43
Providing For Contingencies 44
How To Make The Counter Offer Your Tool 46
A Note On The Need For Making Offers 48
How Well Have You Learned? 48
UNIT SEVEN: CLOSING THE REAL ESTATE TRANSACTION
General Considerations 1
A Few Terms You Should Know 2
Key Points About Closing The Real Estate Transaction 3
Closing The Real Estate Transaction 4
A Typical Closing or Settlement Meeting 5
Closing Through Escrow 6
Help From Professionals 8
Considerations Before Closing 10
Checklist of Key Action Items In The Closing Process 11
Important Documents 17
Escrow Agreement 27
Making The Closing Go Smoothly 29
Considerations After Closing 32
v
A Title Closing Checklist 32
How Well Have You Learned? 34
Putting It All Into Practice 35
The Ten Most Asked Questions About Closings 37
UNIT EIGHT: CREATIVE MANAGEMENT PART A
General Considerations 1
A Few Terms You Should Know 2
Vital Points About Managing Real Estate 3
Keys For Managing Real Estate 4
Key 1: Prepare The Property 5
Beware Of Yuppies 7
Look For Stable Workers 8
How To Find Out What Tenants Want And Are Willing To Pay 8
How To Outdo The Competition 12
How To Get Out Of Doing The Work 14
Key 2: Setting Your Rental Policies 16
An Aside: Consider The Lease Option 25
Key 3: Advertising 27
Key 4: Showing The Property 35
Key 5: Pre-Screening Your Applicants 40
Controlling The Appointment 43
How Well Have You Learned From Part A? 44
Putting Part A Into Practice 46
UNIT EIGHT: CREATIVE MANAGEMENT PART B
A Quick Review 1
A Few More Terms You Should Know 3
More Vital Points About Managing Properties 4
How To Be An Effective Property Manager 5
Key 6: Watch For The Little Things 7
Key 7: A Good Application Is A Must 9
Verification Permission Forms 12
Key 8: Verify The Facts 14
Key 9: Choosing The Right Tenant 17
Key 10: Finalizing The Rental 20
Tenant Policies (Sample) 23
Key 11: You Are Running A Business 27
Key 12: Tenant Relations 34
Key 13: The Responsibility For Profits Is All Yours 38
Key 14: Your Tenants Have Responsibilities, Too 42
Key 15: Don't Forget To Say Thank You 47
vi
Key 16: Help Your Tenants Leave 50
Move Out Checklist 52
Key 17: When You Invite Tenants To Leave 55
Key 18: Stop Managing 61
A Note On Effective Management 62
How Well Have You Learned From Part B? 64
Putting Part B Into Practice 68
The Most Frequently Asked Questions About Managing Properties 71
Rental Application 79
Residential Rental Agreement 81
UNIT NINE: PORTFOLIO BALANCE AND CONTROL: CREATIVE ENDGAMES
What You Will Learn In This Unit 1
A Few Terms You Should Know 2
Key Points About Portfolio Balance And Control 4
How To Balance Your Portfolio And Control Its Profits 5
How To Define Your Investment Objectives 8
Expanded Goals Of Portfolio Ownership 11
Basic Investment Criteria 17
How To Build A Portfolio 18
Creative Endgames: Strategies To Increase Profits 20
Split and Double 21
Controlling Your Portfolio Growth Through Diversification 22
Exercising Risk Control 24
Using Teams To Help You Control Your Portfolio 26
Using Options 28
Developing Real Estate For Profit 31
How To Recognize Good Development Real Estate And Turn It Into A Profit 33
What is a Good Development Property 33
How Do You Estimate Market Acceptance? 41
Site Analysis Form 42
What Makes Zoning The Key To Success? 49
How Do You Write An Offer For Development Property That Makes Sense? 53
How Do You Arrange Financing That Protects Your Profits? 56
A Note On The Risks And Rewards Of Developing Real Estate 59
How Well Have You Learned? 60
Putting It All Into Practice 63
The Ten Most Asked Questions About Material In This Unit 68
UNIT ONE
THE BIG PICTURE
The Case For Real Estate
As A Wealth-Building Vehicle
Unit One, Page 2
UNIT ONE
THE BIG PICTURE
The Case For Real Estate
As A Wealth-Building Vehicle
1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
There are compelling reasons to be active in the real estate
investing field today.
For many years, real estate investors have spoken of income
property as the "ideal" investment. They have used the word "ideal" as
an acronym for the five key factors of real estate investing that have
made it attractive over the years as an investment alternative: (1)
income generation, (2) depreciation (tax advantages), (3) equity buildup
through tenant debt service, (4) appreciation, and (5) leverage.
By now, most people who have been active in this field or who
are now in training for it are familiar with this succinct formula:
Unit One, Page 3
I = Income from rents
D = Depreciation (tax benefits allowed
by Uncle Sam)
E = Equity buildup as tenants make
their payments
A = Appreciation as the value of real
estate grows
L = Leverage through the use of "other
people's money"
For historical reasons, we have to conclude that this formula is
in part true, and in part misleading. It is important to enter the real
estate field with a clear picture in mind of its advantages and
disadvantages. That is why we begin this course with a little reality
therapy.
There have indeed been times during the past quarter century
when equal weight could have been placed on all five of these important
factors as dimensions of profit potential. For example, during the
heyday of speculative real estate investing by throngs of beginners in the
mid to late 1970's and early 1980's, even novices with only the most
fundamental knowledge of this field stood a good chance to make a
profit.
The reason was that all five of the "ideal" factors were at work
at the same time. Income from rents were not yet widely under pressure
from factors like rent control. The government gave generous
preferential treatment to real estate investors through tax write-offs in
Unit One, Page 4
the real property arena. Equity could build up relatively quickly.
Appreciation was advancing with unprecedented vigor in many sectors
of the economy, such as California. And leverage was just becoming a
household word as a number of celebrated "gurus" were active
introducing the secrets of OPM to millions of receptive would-be
investors. Such ambitious investors were being enticed out of the side
streets of Everywhere, USA, by ambitions to create for themselves a
higher quality of life via the American Dream.
But a funny thing happened on the way to the real estate
closing.
1.2. UNCLE SAM'S TAX "REFORM"
In 1986, the government "reformed" the tax laws in a major
way and, for all intents and purposes, clipped the wings of this kind of
investing, except for a few lingering and selective advantages. At the
same time, appreciation took a U-turn in many areas of the country.
And thousands of new investors who had jumped into the fray with
minimal business sense found themselves enrolled in the School of Hard
Knocks--without a scholarship.
All of this (believe it or not) was really for the best.
It meant that the "IDEAL" investment had to be spelled a little
differently: "I-d-E-a-L," with a small "d" and a small "a." Let's see why.
Today's real estate investors can still enjoy the benefits of
income generation through tenant debt-service. They can still enjoy
equity build-up (even while they are asleep at night). And leverage is
still a vitally important dimension (in many respects the most important
dimension) of this type of wealth building.
However, the tax benefits of owning income real estate have
been seriously reduced when compared with those available in the
"good old days," and appreciation is at best regional and unpredictable
because of the downward economic trends of the past five years.
The consequence of this historical shift has been to place real
estate investing forcefully into the only context where it makes any kind
Unit One, Page 5
of sense at all, i.e., that of a business based on principles of good,
professional, business practice. In other words, your chances of
succeeding in real estate investing are now precisely linked to how
professionally you proceed with this kind of enterprise from a business
point of view. That is the way things should be if they are to have any
longevity and profitability.
Fortunately, the real estate bubble of "get rich quick" fantasies
with unlimited appreciation and fail-safe but often accidental profits has
given way to reality. But the reality has turned out to be nearly as good
as the fantasy--if you know what you are doing.
Here is the bottom line: if you have the desire to enter the field
of real estate investing today, then enter it with your eyes open, with a
commitment to weighing and analyzing all of the factors objectively,
making informed decisions based on factors of profitability and
predictability, and operating your enterprise in every respect like a
legitimate business, with legitimate goals, legitimate controls, and a good
measure of creativity to gain advantage in the market place.
1.3. REAL ESTATE--STILL THE GOLDEN OPPORTUNITY
Real estate investing is still one of the most attractive
alternatives available to the investor at any level of expertise. Let's
count the ways, keeping in mind that the aggregate layering of these
benefits makes them all the more appealing.
INCOME POTENTIAL
Where can you find an investment that pays you in predictable
and (for the most part) controllable installments, month in and month
out? You can, of course, invest in the stock market and speculate on
the ability of the blue chips--or the more risky issues--to give you a
regular return. But the performance of the stock market over the years
is not without its roller-coaster qualities. And with stocks and bonds
you relinquish control over your funds totally--except for going in and
coming out.
By contrast, when you have a solid piece of income property in
Unit One, Page 6
place, together with the management controls you need, that income
stream, like Ol' Man River, just keeps on flowing. Yes, some mutual
funds have done well, and may continue to do well. But in the hierarchy
of needs, housing is basic. We all need a place to live. If you want the
security of servicing a need that will never decline, then housing has got
to be near the top of the list--if you follow certain basic rules outlined in
this course of study.
DEPRECIATION (TAX BENEFITS)
Congress changed the tax rules pertaining to real state four
times during the 1980's. That decade was not particularly kind to real
estate investing. The 1986 reformation was particularly damaging.
Moreover, capital gains lost its special treatment and further depressed
the real profit potential. And the new passive-loss rules were designed
to prevent you from offsetting income from normal sources (salaries or
investments in stocks and bonds) by expenses from passive sources
such as real estate or limited partnerships. In other words, you could
only use "passive losses" to offset "passive income," but not "regular
income." To pass the "passive test," you had to "materially" participate
in your business and satisfy tough criteria such as:
M You had to work in your business at least 500 hours per year
(around ten hours per week).
M If you worked less than the 500 hours a year, you had to be the
primary person involved, almost to the exclusion of anyone else.
M If you put in at least 100 hours a year, it had to be more time than
anyone else put in, including employees.
This kind of sophistry forced investors to look at real estate
through different eyes. The old rules of writing off real estate losses
against salaries and wages vanished into thin air.
Was there nothing left of value?
Fortunately, yes.
M Legitimate expenses within your passive activity (such as interest,
Unit One, Page 7
depreciation, property taxes, insurance premiums, management fees,
advertising, legal or accounting fees, repairs, etc.) can still offset income
from that passive activity. Uncle Sam only exacts his pound of flesh
from the net profits.
M Any excess loss from a passive enterprise can be used to shelter
income from other passive enterprises.
M Any unused loss can be carried forward to future years where you
will have passive income that needs to be sheltered.
M Your losses from passive enterprises could make it attractive for you
to plan to find "passive income generators" (known as "PIGS") in the
future--such as the new breed of real estate limited partnerships
designed (heaven help us!) to make profits rather than generate losses
through high debt-levels.
M You still can play the imaginary game of "depreciation" where Uncle
Sam pretends that your real estate property loses all of its value in 27.5
years (for residential) or 31.5 years (for commercial), and let's you
write it off over time as an expense. (For properties placed in service
before 1987, the more favorable rules of the "Accelerated Cost
Recovery System" applied.)
M If you qualify as an active participant in your business activity, you
can still use up to $25,000 of losses against other income (such as
salary or interest and dividends). However, this $25,000 bonanza is
reduced by 50% in stages when your adjusted gross income exceeds
$100,000, and evaporates altogether at $150,000 AGI. (Keep in mind
that this policy applies only if you own 10% or more of a rental
property or limited partnership.)
Thus Uncle Sam still left some valuable crumbs on the table
even though the banquet was over--enough to make it still fairly
tempting to enter the real estate field from the tax point of view,
provided you treated your investment with the care of an astute
business person. Tax laws change. Be sure to check current laws and
regulations.
EQUITY BUILDUP
Unit One, Page 8
When your tenants make their payments, part of the money
stream goes to pay interest on the debt, and part goes to retire the
principal amount. This unique feature means that every payment causes
your equity position in the property to improve. As the debt is serviced,
your net worth increases. This simple characteristic makes real estate
unique. You make money while you sleep--because someone else is
servicing the debt in exchange for the privilege of using your property.
APPRECIATION
In some parts of the country (currently in the mountain states
and in the north west, for example), real estate is appreciating at a
respectable rate. At the same time, other regions of the country are
experiencing flat or declining values. What is the implication of this? It is
that you can make real estate work for you--wherever you live--if you
structure transactions to emphasize those elements of the I-D-E-A-L
formula that will give you the highest return in your area. At the same
time, if you are fortunate enough to live in areas of the country where
property values are rising, then you have that profit "booster" of
appreciation to add to the other factors of profitability that pertain to
your investment.
Keep in mind that real estate (despite regional fluctuations) is
still a "forgiving" undertaking, in that eventually real estate values in most
areas of the country will recover from occasional corrections and
declines. The reason for this is tied inseparably to the market forces of
supply and demand. "They aren't making land anymore" is a phrase that
real estate investors are fond of quoting. And it is true. There is indeed
only so much land to be developed; that fact, coupled with the fact that
housing is a necessity, will cause most real property to rebound after
market declines. But you must either have the staying power to wait it
out in those cases, or you must use combinations of creative acquisition
techniques that make it prudent to invest in those areas despite a lack of
appreciation. In any case, the street-smart investor can always target
properties that lend themselves to profit-taking on a quick turn-around
transaction. More on this later.
Unit One, Page 9
LEVERAGE
There is no more exciting or stimulating factor about real estate
investing than the concept of "leverage." It means, simply put, that you
can control an entire piece of real estate and benefit from its full slate of
cash favors, even if you don't pay for it all at once. In fact, even with
a nothing down transaction where you don't put a dime into a property,
you can still reap the harvest of the entire property as if you had paid it
off entirely. This, coupled with the principle of using "other people's
money" when a down payment is called for in a given transaction,
makes real estate leverage so powerful. The yield through leverage can
be very high indeed.
By contrast, try buying stocks and bonds with nothing down.
Try starting up a franchise with nothing down. Try opening up a retail
store with nothing down.
With real estate, you can sit on the throne of profit without
having royal blood flowing through your veins. In fact, in many respects,
real estate is the "little guy's" only chance to make it big without a fat
wallet. And it works.
These five factors of profitability--income generation,
depreciation and tax advantages, equity build-up, appreciation, and
leverage--make real estate still one of the most attractive opportunities
for the average person, provided the action plan for real estate is
followed with care.
This course of study outlines in considerable detail what that
action plan is, and how you can put it to work profitably.
2. HOW MUCH CAN I MAKE?
It's an age-old question. The answer is: "How much do you
need and by when?" The hardest thing for the beginning investor to
understand is that he/she is in the driver's seat. When goals are set and
commitments made, then you just follow the plan, step-by-step, until
you reach your destination, whatever that might be.
Unit One, Page 10
A few years ago we were following the case study of a
California woman who had made real estate development her primary
wealth vehicle. She had it down to a science. For every lot she
developed and sold, she made $25,000, more or less. Her goal was
very specific--one million dollars a year in earnings. That meant that she
had to follow her cycle 40 times a year. That's just about one
development lot per week (with some time off for holidays and
getaways). She did it like clock work, because she knew the precise
steps to follow on a daily basis--and she followed them.
For every such case there are thousands of others where
people have lesser goals--but still succeed just as well from the stand
point of their own personal needs and circumstances. At one time it
was estimated that as many as many as 5% of the adult population of
the United States owned and operated at least one income property
other than their own home. Such people did not often make a million
dollars a year as a real estate investor, but many thousands of them
regularly earned hundreds or even thousands of dollars of extra income
each month through that rental home or small multi-unit they were
conscientiously tending.
Setting goals for earnings in the real estate field is no different
than in other fields, except that the formula "IDEAL" gives you greater
opportunity for leveraged yield than perhaps any other kind of
investment. This is especially true for the tens of thousands of eager and
ambitious investors who are willing to put into deals all the money they
have--nothing. Where courage, energy, creative enterprise, and sweat
equity are the only assets to invest, real estate is perhaps the only
viable alternative to attaining the American Dream.
Whether you are targeting a hundred dollars a month in profits,
or a hundred-thousand, there are models in the real estate investing field
that you can apply to attain your goals. It is the purpose of this course
to provide a comprehensive training experience in such models so that
you can exercise the options you want to attain the goals you need.
3. WHAT DOES IT TAKE TO SUCCEED IN REAL ESTATE?
If you were asked to characterize the successful real estate
investor, what would that profile be? By and large, those who succeed
Unit One, Page 11
at this business seem to follow a certain pattern of behavior that
includes the following key elements:
M 1. VISION. They cultivate an unwavering vision of what they want
to achieve. This vision is not fuzzy or tentative, but specific and tangible.
They have in their mind a sensory-rich image of where they want to be,
what they want to be doing at the end of their journey, what rewards
they want to be enjoying, and with whom they want to be enjoying
them--family, friends, loved ones, people they serve.
M 2. GOALS. They translate their vision into specific, tangible, timeconscious
goals that can be measured, monitored, and adjusted on a
regular basis. Like the woman who needed to make $25,000 per deal,
week in and week out, they follow a precise set of goals without
wavering.
M 3. ACTION PLAN. They translate their specific goals into a set of
behaviors designed to produce specific results. Real estate investing,
like any other business activity, must be reduced to daily and weekly
actions that are tied to the goals and the vision of the enterprise.
M 4. TEAM WORK. The successful real estate investor, without
exception, knows the power of working within the team context. Real
estate investing is a networking activity that involves not only buyers
and sellers, but bankers, real estate agents, title company officers,
attorneys, accountants, insurance agents, appraisers, contractors,
partners, and a host of other key people whose services and support
are indispensable from time to time. Real estate never works in a
vacuum. You must have a "high touch" affinity in order to bring together
the various people constituencies into a win/win configuration that gets
results.
M 5. CREATIVITY. We will spend a great deal of time diagnosing
this mysterious quality and attempting to clarify its meaning and
operation. Real estate investing rests on the foundation of creative dealmaking
and creative financing. This means that the tried and true
formula for buying--put down ten or twenty percent in cash, expose all
our secrets to intense scrutiny by the loan officers, and use the hardmoney
lenders to finance the rest of the deal--must be declared oldfashioned
(unless you have partners in your back pocket who are flush
with capital and willing to put it to work to induce high discounts). In its
Unit One, Page 12
place you must put an array of interlocking creative techniques designed
to solve problems for a very small constituency of property sellers--
those who are flexible in price and terms because of high motivation.
This ability to apply creative techniques to the particulars of a
given transaction is a key ingredient to successful real estate investing.
The "big guys" have been doing this for decades--perhaps from time
immemorial. No one in the upper echelons of investing puts their own
money on the line. It is always OPM ("other people's money") that
makes the macro world of real property enterprise go around. This
insight has filtered slowly to the rest of us down on Main Street. It is
only in the last quarter century that these insider strategies and
techniques have become accessible to the "little guy" in full force. High
time! No one need have a monopoly on creativity. These techniques
can be learned--and it is this will to learn and apply creative measures
that can lift the "little guy" out of the rut of a self-imposed incarceration
of negative conditioning and limited vision.
M 6. PROFESSIONALISM. What is required in successful real estate
investing is the same thing that is required of any business venture: a
profit-and-loss mentality, attention to the bottom line, reading the "small
print" in every lease, every document, and every contract involved. If
you are willing to keep score, then you can play the game. Records
must be kept, taxes paid, the balance sheet maintained. There is no
magic wand. It takes keen business sense. And if you don't have it, then
learn it, or get someone on your team who knows it inside and out.
There is more to fishing than pulling in the big ones. You have to know
where to fish and when, what bait to use, what equipment to put to
work, and how to clean those slimy critters after you get them on shore.
And you have to have a fishing license. It's all a conspiracy by the
fateful forces of the capitalistic system--but if you know how to play the
game of professionalism, you will win.
M 7. HONEST EFFORT. It has to be honest--win/win in every
respect--or you will slip and fall eventually. What goes around, comes
around. What comes around, goes around. We are not working in a
vacuum. Everyone has to win, or no one wins in the long run. And it has
to be effort--lots of effort. Real estate investing is hard work. If you set
high goals, you set high work standards. If you set modest goals, you
set high work standards. If you set low goals because that is all you
need, then you set high work standards.
Unit One, Page 13
There is no free lunch (although you can learn to work smarter,
rather than harder). We have been following the case of one real estate
investor in Milwaukee who never even looked at a piece of real estate
before making an offer. He simply knew his town backwards and
forwards and sent dozens of offers a week to declared sellers in areas
he wanted to buy in. Naturally, his offers were low-ball and based on
formulas that assured his success. Naturally, most were rejected out of
hand. But a few--one or two a week--would say "yes." And the sellers
came to his doorstep, on his terms, hat in hand, ready to do business.
Smart. But still hard work--sort of. Get the idea?
4. WHAT IS THE ACTION MODEL FOR REAL ESTATE?
4.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Understanding and applying action models is fundamentally
important to your success. Therefore, let us take some time to generate
a clear picture of how they work.
AN ILLUSTRATION
Picture this: It is a dreary, rain-drenched night. You are riding
along the highway with windshield wipers sloshing back and forth
rapidly. You are leaning forward and straining to catch a clear view of
the slippery roadway before you.
Suddenly a confused scene flashes before your eyes. There has
obviously been a serious accident. You slam on your brakes to avoid
hitting several cars along the side of the road. Smashed and crumpled
vehicles spring into view. There are bodies on the ground.
You pull your car off to the side and step out to help. A number
of people are wandering around in a dazed stupor. Your confusion and
shock renders you ineffectual. What is to be done? You don't know.
No one seems to know.
Suddenly another car screeches to a halt along side the road
and the driver bounds out and into the midst of the chaos, shouting firm
orders in a forceful manner so that people spring into action.
Unit One, Page 14
He points at you and says: "You. Get a flashlight and go down
the road to ward off the oncoming traffic." You obey instantly.
He points to another person and shouts: "You. Go immediately
over to that farm house and call for an ambulance and the police."
To another person he shouts: "You. Get coats or blankets and
cover up the injured people on the ground to keep them warm. Do not
move them."
To another person he shouts: "You. Get several others to help
you push those cars further off on to the side of the road to avoid
further collisions."
To the other onlookers he shouts: "The rest of you move away
and get into the background."
Then the man goes immediately to gather up the dazed
survivors and render comfort and assistance.
Soon police and paramedics arrive to take charge of the
situation. But the leader who preceded them has already done much to
alleviate suffering and prevent further injury.
WHAT IS AN ACTION MODEL?
An action model is a sequence of interrelated actions designed
to produce a target result. The story illustrates the application of a
particular action model to use when you come upon the scene of a
traffic accident. In this case, the model is relatively simple:
M Warn or stop oncoming traffic to prevent further collisions
M Get help (police, medical)
M Improve conditions for the injured
M Clear the area for additional safety.
When we examine an action model of this type, our reaction
goes typically something like this: "Right. Anyone could and would do
Unit One, Page 15
precisely these things under those conditions."
Actually, the opposite is true. In times of crisis, it is a rare
person who can take an action model and apply it in a practical way to
the situation at hand. That is why the stranger in our little story is a hero,
because he intervened with leadership and power at a time when
everyone else was confused and helpless. He applied a simple action
model that produced the desired results immediately. In a way, he was
like a professional acting among amateurs.
Professionals are trained to apply specific action models to
particular situations. Consider these procedures and the chain of actions
that must be followed with precision if good results are expected:
M brain surgery
M farming
M training show dogs
M building a house
M fishing
We could outline with precision the exact sequence of steps
that must be followed in each of these and many other similar situations.
In fact, virtually any objective we can think of is governed by a
particular action model or set of action models. It appears to be a
universal truth that results flow from the application of such
models.
The opposite is also true: when we go about targeting results
without a clear action model in mind, our success is more a function of
accident than design. In fact, much failure in life can be traced back to
situations where an incomplete or faulty action chain has been followed.
4.2 SURPRISE: REAL ESTATE HAS AN ACTION MODEL,
TOO
Now we can make our point. When it comes to action models,
real estate investing is no exception. If it is to be done effectively, it
must be done "professionally," i.e., through the application of a
particular action model.
Unit One, Page 16
Once you have determined the type of real estate you wish to
be involved with, the model is virtually always the same. Here are the
steps:
M GATHER A PROSPECT BASE
M SELECT THE MOST PROMISING PROSPECTS
M CONTACT THE SELLERS
M NEGOTIATE THE DEAL
M WRITE THE OFFER
M FUND THE PROJECT
M CLOSE THE DEAL
M AUGMENT THE VALUE
M HARVEST THE PROFIT (KEEP OR TURN)
This sequence of nine steps is relatively simple. The logic of it is
manifest. It has organic integrity; that is, one step flows naturally into the
next to form a completed chain of events.
So what's the big deal?
The big deal is that few people follow the chain with rigor and
thoroughness. The temptation is to jump into the action model at
whatever point seems congenial to one's personality--and to take off
from there without regard to context.
SOME AMATEUR EXAMPLES
M Jim fancies himself a real "wheeler-dealer" with a silver
tongue. He flourishes in the negotiating arena where he can go after the
killer deal. But Jim doesn't like to gather prospects and zero in on those
who are most likely to be flexible; he takes on every seller in sight.
Therefore, he almost always strikes out. Jim is an amateur who doesn't
understand the action model.
M Denise goes down the action chain to the point where
writing offers occurs. She is pretty thorough to that point but has a
phobia about the written idiom. She doesn't go after the close and get
the signature. Therefore, the chain is incomplete and she never gets the
results she wants. Denise is an amateur who doesn't understand the
action model.
Unit One, Page 17
M Fred spends his time spinning wheels with all kinds of
contacts and properties. His hang up is creative financing. He can figure
the bottom line but never how to get there. His deals lack that
innovative, problem-solving core that enables people to jump over
walls and around obstacles and put successful deal together. Fred is an
amateur who doesn't understand the action model.
M Mary is a whiz with everything except getting out. She is
poor at back-end management and tends to get into things without an
exit plan in mind. Thus, when harvest time comes around, she comes up
short and leaves big bucks on the table. Mary is an amateur who
doesn't understand the action model.
M Harvey goes through the whole chain of events in the action
model and does pretty well. But for some reason he always forgets
how to augment the value of his properties before turning them--often
small cosmetic improvements can pay big dividends--and therefore puts
up with mediocre returns. He could almost double his results if his
action model were complete. But Harvey is an amateur who doesn't
understand the action model.
You say: "Well, stupid them!"
Okay. Let's see how smart you are. Without looking back at
the action model outlined above, write down the exact sequence of
actions that make up the investment real estate action model. We'll give
you a clue: there are nine steps in this model.
Write them down now:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unit One, Page 18
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
How did you do? 100% correct? Great--you are well on your
way to becoming a pro.
Did you miss some of the steps? Not to worry. Simple things
can sometimes be a vexation. But let's give you a mnemonic device to
fix this model firmly in your mind.
4.3 PUT ON YOUR THINKING CAP
Let's restate the action model in a slightly different way so that
remembering its nine steps will be a "picnic" for you. It might seem a
little silly, but suspend judgment for a moment and spell out the words
"PICNIC CAP" as follows:
P = PROSPECTS (GATHER A PROSPECT BASE)
I = IDENTIFY THE BEST (SELECT THE MOST PROMISING
PROSPECTS)
C = CONTACT THE SELLERS
N = NEGOTIATE THE DEAL
I = IN WRITING (WRITE THE OFFER)
C = CASH (FUND THE PROJECT)
C = CLOSE THE DEAL
Unit One, Page 19
A = AUGMENT THE VALUE
P = PROFIT (HARVEST THE PROFIT--KEEP OR TURN)
With this memory trick in mind, put on your "Picnic Cap" and
try your hand at recreating the action model once more. See if it flows a
little more smoothly this time:
P
I
C
N
I
C
C
A
P
4.4 CHINESE BOXES
It will not surprise you to learn that each one of these nine steps
in the action model gives rise, in turn, to another action model consisting
of a sequence of steps. That is, each step in our investment real estate
action model has its own set of steps leading to a specific targeted
result.
For example, if the targeted result in step one is to develop a
set of prospects, how do you go about gathering prospects? There is a
particular action sequence, or rather a set of action sequences, that will
get you the results efficiently and professionally. This set of action
sequences is explained in the next unit. In fact, each of the action steps
Unit One, Page 20
to step one can be broken down further into more detailed steps. There
is truly an art and a science to this profession (just as you would
expect).
Similarly each of the other eight steps in the action model gives
rise to its own action model (of sub steps) that will be elucidated in the
units that follow.
It is rather like a set of Chinese boxes, one fitting inside the
other, in sequence, until the most fundamental building block is attained.
What you are to learn in this course is how to fit all of these
Chinese boxes together into an organic whole that will get you the
results you want.
4.5 AN ASSIGNMENT
To get you ready for the units that follow, take a sheet of paper
and write down the key words PICNIC CAP in a vertical column.
Translate each letter into one of the action steps of the model. Then
write down at least five action steps after each letter that you would
logically imagine belong to the next layer of action models for each. See
how far you can go with this exercise on your own. Don't be afraid to
spend an hour or so with it.
You will no doubt come up with some very good answers. Can
you accept the probability that your answers will only be partially
complete? Does this arouse curiosity as to what the complete action
models will look like in future units?
If you find that your understanding of some of these nine action
steps is skimpy, can you accept the possibility that you will need to
become an especially good student of those weaker links in the training
experience that is to follow? Everyone has different strengths and
weaknesses. You can use the fundamental action model as a training
tool to zero in on your own strengths and weaknesses.
And when you are finished with your PICNIC CAP exercise,
write down the word IDEAL and identify the five major elements of
profitability in real estate investing. Define each and pick out the ones
Unit One, Page 21
that you feel are the most important for your area and your own
personal situation.
How can you stay motivated with this exercise? Think money.
The more astute you become at understanding and applying the action
models for this profession, the more money you will make. Period. It is
a universal truth. Believe it!
4.6 WHAT KINDS OF PROPERTIES ARE IN YOUR "BIG
PICTURE"?
Before we jump into the details of the action model for real
estate investing, we need to cover a vital point. Real estate is a broad
term. It includes raw land, farm land, residential real estate, and
commercial real estate. Residential real estate embraces condominiums,
single family houses, small multi-unit properties (duplexes, tri-plexes,
four-plexes, etc.), and larger apartment buildings and complexes.
Commercial real estate includes office and professional buildings, strip
malls, and all manner of property used in the manufacturing and service
industries.
The principles of locating bargain properties, analyzing their
profit potential, using creative finance in the acquisitions process,
making offers and closing deals, adding value, and carrying out the
management function--all of these factors apply more or less equally to
the various kinds of real estate that could be of interest to investors.
However, for the investor who stands at the beginning of his/her
career, the most logical place to begin is with the smaller properties--
single family homes and small multi-units. If you are in the process of
acquiring the skills and expertise associated with the real estate
investing field, would it not make sense to cut your "eye teeth" on the
simpler transactions where the risk is lower and the arrangement
relatively uncomplicated?
The larger residential properties are a step above, where more
sophisticated interactions and problem-solving come into play--and
where the risk is greater. And the commercial realm brings with it a
whole array of challenges related directly to the local, regional, and
national economy, and the viability and staying power of various
Unit One, Page 22
business tenants who are going through the ups and downs of
commercial life in ways about which residential tenants in general need
not worry. Similarly, real estate development and lot subdivision, while
offering the potential of high rewards, also presents a variety of
complex challenges not recommended for the untrained investor.
For this reason, we recommend the philosophy that a lot of
"little" deals can add up to a great deal of success. Single family houses
and small multi-units hold out the potential for considerable profit, if
acquired and managed (or sold) appropriately. There will be time
enough for the macro-transactions after you have developed a
professional modus operandi in the real estate field and learned the
ropes that are second nature to the "big guys." That is not to say that
the beginner or intermediate investor who comes upon a stellar bargain
in the large property arena should shrink from taking a close look at it.
After all, if needs be, a partner can be brought into the deal who has the
needed qualities and experience. We are saying only that the smaller
properties are the logical place to focus at the beginning.
If you have a special interest in the more complicated
transactions, we can refer you to the Power Module on Multi-Units
later in this course, and also to Unit Nine, where real estate
development is discussed.
UNIT TWO
HOW TO LOCATE
ULTRA-BARGAINS
Unit Two, Page 2
UNIT TWO
HOW TO LOCATE
ULTRA-BARGAINS
2.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Real estate investing, just like any other professional
enterprise, is a series of interrelated skills. Finding bargain
properties is one of the most important of these skills--in many
ways the most important. The key to finding bargain properties
is the ability to identify sellers who are highly motivated to sell--
who must sell--as opposed to those for whom it would be
desirable and useful to sell. Thus, by and large, real estate
investing (especially creative real estate investing) amounts to
finding both the right kind of seller as well as the right kind of
property. In fact, street-wise real estate investors tend to look
first for the motivated sellers before they go too far in analyzing
the properties.
Motivated sellers go by a variety of names: flexible,
Unit Two, Page 3
anxious, "don't wanters," etc. But they all have one thing in
common: they want you to solve some major problem for them.
It might be that they are being transferred and must therefore
hurry and sell. Or they might have personal problems such as a
serious illness or a divorce that is forcing them to sell.
Alternately, they may be motivated by financial pressures or
find income-property ownership not to their liking. Whatever
their reason, you can appear to them as a shining knight on a
white charger.
Do you find this role comfortable? With whom would
you rather deal: (1) someone who spreads rose petals before
you as you enter or (2) someone who is a hard-nosed, selfsatisfied
property owner who could care less if he sells or not?
Which type would cause you to experience less fear?
Obviously the seller who is motivated, flexible, and willing to
talk turkey right away. That is an important reason who the
savvy real estate investor will almost always start with the most
anxious sellers, because the job is simply easier in that
environment.
Think about it. Fear is one of the greatest destroyers of
progress. It can keep a perfectly capable person (like you or
me!) from even trying something new. As you go through this
unit, visualize yourself talking to the flexible sellers we describe.
Visualize yourself using the different sources of flexible sellers
we talk about. As you become more familiar with the ideas,
and as you apply them in a no-risk environment (which you can
do with the exercises at the end of this unit), you will find your
fears melting away.
2.2 A FEW TERMS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Balloon Payment: A payment that is larger than the normally
scheduled payments. This may be for the entire balance of a
loan or just a portion of it. For example, a buyer pays $500 per
month on a loan, then at the end of two years he must make an
additional lump-sum payment of $3,000. Sellers who face an
impending balloon are often very anxious. Beware of inheriting
problems like this from motivated sellers.
Unit Two, Page 4
Buyer's Broker Agreement: An agreement between a real
estate agent and a potential property buyer. The agreement
states that the agent will make efforts to locate property for the
potential buyer (both listed and unlisted) and will be paid a
commission if the property is purchased. The property may or
may not be listed with another real estate agent. Such an
arrangement can be a boon to your success in locating flexible
sellers.
Contract Sale: An arrangement where the seller agrees to
carry the loan (or part of it), thereby eliminating the need for the
buyer to get a mortgage from a bank or other financial
institution. With a contract sale, the buyer usually gets a lower
interest rate--and often there are no credit checks. This method
of financing is often used with highly motivated sellers.
Farming: A form of prospecting that is used in real estate
listing and sales. The same process can be used in finding don't
wanters. In farming, an investor concentrates on and becomes
an expert in a particular area.
Flexible Seller: A person who wants to sell his real estate
holdings so badly that he will be very flexible in price and/or
terms.
MLS: An abbreviation for Multiple Listing Service, a
cooperative service that gives member real estate agents access
to information on all properties listed. MLS gives maximum
exposure to listed properties. If Broker A lists a property,
Broker B and all other brokers on the service have the right to
market and sell it. The listing agent and selling agent then share
in the commission.
Notice of Default: A formal notice legally recorded against a
property, thereby beginning the foreclosure process. Reviewing
notices of default is one way of finding flexible sellers.
Notice of Sale: A notice, required by law, announcing the
date of sale of foreclosed property. Such notices almost always
lead you to flexible sellers because their back is against the
wall.
Unit Two, Page 5
Obsolescence: The point at which something has gone out
of style or out of date so that it is no longer useful or
practical. In real estate, a property can become obsolete when
it is outdated, when the economy changes, or when the
expectations of property owners change. Owners of such
property can often be flexible, especially if they cannot clearly
see how future use could be facilitated through conversion.
Realtor: A copyrighted term that applies only to real estate
agents who are members of the National Association of
Realtors. The broker for a given agency is called a Realtor and
agents licensed to him are called Realtor-Associates. Only
Realtors and Realtor-Associates have access to the Multiple
Listing Service. The National Association of Realtors prefers
that a "®" appears after this title as a superscript.
2.3 KEY POINTS ABOUT FINDING FLEXIBLE
SELLERS
As you read this unit, keep the following key points in mind.
They will guide your thinking and help you to keep the proper
perspective on the information you will be assimilating.
M Good deals come from a very small percentage of sellers.
M Finding the right seller is as important as finding the right
property.
M The more you know of a flexible seller's true motivation, the
better chance you'll have of concluding a good deal with him.
M Seller flexibility can be a communicable disease. Make
certain the property you're looking at is immunized before you
close the deal. In other words, avoid taking over someone
else's problem just to get a good deal.
M Flexible sellers can be found in many places, some easier to
discover than others. By prioritizing your efforts, you can save a
great deal of time.
Unit Two, Page 6
M As a real estate investor, you are a problem solver. As you
solve a flexible seller's problem, you'll be benefiting both of you.
2.4 TWO KINDS OF FLEXIBLE SELLERS
What Is a Flexible Seller?
A flexible seller is a rare breed. He is the real estate owner
who is so anxious to sell that he'll be very flexible with his price
or terms--or both. Flexible sellers represent the smallest
percentage of the population of sellers. Success in real estate
investment depends on finding flexible sellers and helping them
with their problems. The person who buys from inflexible sellers
ends up paying too much for properties and at too high an
interest rate. That's certainly no way to reach financial
independence!
Flexible sellers come in two varieties: wholesale and retail.
A wholesale flexible seller is willing to discount his price
substantially in order to sell his property quickly. A retail
flexible seller may not discount his price, but he is very flexible
in the terms he will accept.
Both varieties of flexible seller are good for the investor.
But it's important to know which variety you've got on your
hands because each requires different techniques and
strategies. To complicate things further, some flexible sellers are
a combination of the two, being a little flexible on price and a
little flexible on terms, but not too extreme in either direction.
Don't worry! The different kinds of flexible seller are easy
to distinguish. All you have to do is ask them.
THREE ILLUSTRATIONS
In the meantime, here are some examples to help you. Klaus
N. is the proud owner of a duplex--or, at least he was, until he
Unit Two, Page 7
got a promotion at work. He was moved from district
supervisor of sales to regional director. Now he has to make
the rounds through six states, with a significant stopover to
work with the salesmen in each major city. It seems like he is
gone more than he is home.
As time has gone by, the duplex has become more and
more burdensome. He isn't home enough to adequately manage
the property, and he feels the tenants are taking advantage of
him. His solution: sell the duplex, and do it fast. He is willing to
carry a contract with an interest rate that is just a bit less than
the going rate. Moreover, he will discount his price by several
thousand dollars, simply to move the property quickly. Klaus is
a wholesale seller.
Angela T. is in a different situation. She bought a rental home
a few years ago, and she has enjoyed watching its value
gradually climb. At the same time, she opened a small computer
store--and that's the source of her problem. The computer
store never did do very well, and Angela kept feeding more
and more money into it. Now, forced against the wall, she
knows she has to liquidate.
Unfortunately, the business is going to leave a bitter
legacy: several thousand dollars worth of debts. Angela knows
only one way out. She must sell her rental home.
She doesn't care much about the interest rate she gets from
the new buyer, but she is firm about the price. She needs the
money so she can pay her debts, and she needs it up front.
Angela is a retail seller.
Stephen W. is a rare combination of the two. He bought a
house two years ago, and its negative cash flow is draining him
dry. He is willing to discount the price and cut the interest rate
on the contract--anything to make a quick sale. But one caution
to the excited buyer: will you buy this once-in-a-century deal
only to find out a year later that you've become as desperate as
Stephen was when he sold?
A good deal is not necessarily always a good deal. Now,
Unit Two, Page 8
before anyone gets too busy contemplating the Zen of that
statement, here is a rough translation: Flexible sellers can help
us make our fortune--but, only if we buy properties that are
right for us.
2.5 WHAT CAUSES SELLERS TO BE FLEXIBLE?
When people buy real estate, they are almost invariably
excited about their prospects. The new property, they are
convinced, is going to open the door to their financial
independence. Then something happens to transform them into
very unhappy sellers. It's helpful to understand what does
happen to them so you can know how to deal with them. We
can learn how to be effective problem solvers. And, at the
same time, we can discover the secrets of avoiding becoming
flexible sellers ourselves.
The reasons people become flexible fit into three broad
categories: personal problems, property concerns, and
economic concerns. Sometimes a flexible seller will have a
combination of reasons.
When we seek to acquire real estate, we must keep one
caution always in mind: we want to solve the flexible seller's
problem, not buy the problem from him. In other words, the
reason he's a flexible seller may transfer with the property.
Those problems may be impossible or overwhelmingly
expensive to cure and should be avoided like a plague, no
matter how inviting the price or terms. Happily, many problems
can be solved inexpensively or with your knowledge and
creativity.
Here are the three categories of problems that motivate
sellers to become flexible:
1. Personal: This includes problems or situations that have to
do only with the seller. They will not pass on with the property.
These flexible sellers are often real finds.
2. Property: This includes factors that are inherent to the
Unit Two, Page 9
property. They may be curable or incurable, expensive or
inexpensive. Analyze carefully before you buy to see which
category applies.
3. Economic: This includes problems with the general
economy, problems with the city or the state, or problems with
the property's location. This category generally contains factors
that are out of control. Beware! You should generally avoid this
type of seller--or at least consider all the problems very
carefully before you buy. You may end up "don't wanting" the
property too.
These three categories break down into specific
situations as follows:
WHY OWNERS WANT TO SELL
M PERSONAL
Owner's location
Time/Health
Retirement
Divorce
Management
Financial
Partnerships
Estate Sales
Ignorance/Emotion
M PROPERTY
Management
Financing
Obsolescence
M ECONOMIC
Local Economic Changes
Unit Two, Page 10
Local Neighborhood Changes
Law Changes
Pending Changes
Now let's look at some examples in each category:
CATEGORY 1 -- PERSONAL CAUSES OF FLEXIBILITY
Owner's location. The location of the property owner can
affect the management of the property. For example, Bob
S. has recently been transferred to another state. Needing a
place to live, he bought a home in his new state--but he still
hasn't sold his first home. The result: the "double payment
monster" is eating him alive. At the same time, his home is
vacant and he is worried sick about vandalism. To say Bob has
become a flexible seller is putting it mildly.
Time constraints or sickness. The seller may have become
too busy to manage or worry about the property. Or, he may
have health problems that interfere with his ability or desire to
manage the property.
Retirement. The seller may have just retired. He wants to
travel, or take it easy, or simply not have to worry about
managing real estate any more. An older couple may also be
moving to a different climate or to a smaller home.
Divorce. Ruth and her husband were very active in building
a profitable real estate portfolio. But, after a bitter divorce,
Ruth had only bad memories about everything her husband had
touched. She quickly became a very anxious and flexible seller.
Management Approach. Some investors are frankly such
poor managers that perfectly good properties become pains in
the neck. Soon they become absolutely fed up with owning real
estate. A lack of knowledge of management and general
business principles can make a world of difference between a
happy landlord and an unsuccessful landlord.
Unit Two, Page 11
Financial A lot of things fall under this category. It may
include a seller's debts, bankruptcy problems, investment
capital needs, foreclosure concerns, a tax situation, or a need
for status symbols (a seller may be selling his property to buy
cars or jewelry or the like). (You'll note that foreclosure is also
listed in the property category--but the problem often begins
here, with the person.)
Partnerships. A good partnership can be heaven. A bad one
can be--well, you get the idea.
When partners no longer see eye-to-eye, they often have no
choice but to sell their properties. And, with emotions getting
involved the way they do, partners will sometimes go to great
lengths to get rid of the property fast so they can be rid of the
partnership.
Ernest and Vern are two old friends who started out as
partners investing in real estate. They were aggressive and
energetic, but they found that they could not see eye-to-eye on
management decisions. When things started to slip, each began
to blame the other. They finally decided to sell the properties
and dissolve the partnership before they would start to hate
each other. Ernest and Vern have become truly flexible sellers.
Estate sales. When a property owner dies, he often leaves
property his heirs don't want. They would rather make a quick
sale and have the money. And sometimes the executor of the
estate may need to liquidate assets to pay taxes.
Ignorance, neurotic fears, or emotions. Unfortunately, many
sellers make emotional decisions, seeking to sell a good
property because of ignorance of economic factors and market
conditions. Others have a fear of doomsday or an emotional
dislike for a particular property for some reason that is perfectly
valid to him, but does not affect the value or desirability of the
property itself.
Unit Two, Page 12
CATEGORY 2 -- PROPERTY CAUSES OF FLEXIBILITY
Management. Management sometimes falls into the personal
category, but it can also have much to do with the property
itself. Because of neglect or because of the condition of the
property, it may now require intensive management. The type
of tenants may also affect the management; certain tenants may
attract like-minded tenants while deterring the more desirable
variety. It is not unheard of for a building to be only 50 percent
occupied because of a single undesirable tenant.
Illustration: An attractive office building in a good part of
town had two spaces leased to "problem" tenants. Both paid on
time and both were legitimate. But one was a government
agency frequented by lower class individuals who were a
nuisance to visitors of the other offices. And the other space
was occupied by a private concern that promoted controversial
(though legal) family planning practices. The negative aspect of
these two tenants was such that the building remained 50
percent vacant.
Property owners in this kind of situation can quickly become
flexible. But problem cases like these can be quickly remedied
by getting rid of bad tenants or by changing the looks or "curb
appeal" of the property.
Existing Financing. The existing financing on a property can
create real problems. Negative cash flows can be extremely
discouraging, and they have a way of reasserting themselves
every month. Balloon payments and escalating interest rates,
due to variable rate loans and adjustable rate loans, can alter a
seller's financing situation all too quickly, not to mention his
disposition. And, in some cases, the seller secured financing
that he never should have agreed to in the first place.
For example, Bruce L. bought a property two years ago
that had a two-year balloon. He made no advance plans for the
balloon and, due to his personal circumstances, he is unable to
obtain additional financing to pay it off. Bruce has now become
a definite flexible seller.
Unit Two, Page 13
Obsolescence. All by itself, obsolescence might not be a
problem. But when it begins to affect rent levels, tenant quality,
or resale possibilities, it can cause the owner to become
seriously flexible. Obsolescence can come in many forms. The
style or structure of the property might be out of date. Think of
a four- or five-bedroom home that has only one bathroom, for
example. Or a four-story building without an elevator. Such
obsolescence can lead to overwhelmingly expensive changes.
In some cases, the obsolescence may be imposed suddenly,
as in the case of changes in zoning or fire codes. Sometimes this
type of change can simply be the last straw for an already
harried owner.
CATEGORY 3 - ECONOMIC CAUSES OF FLEXIBILITY
Local Economic Changes. Changes in the local economy
can affect the demand for a rental unit or the marketability of a
property that is for sale. A major employer in the area may
have shut down or laid off a large number of workers, for
example, or an entire city may be in decline.
Local Neighborhood Change. Over a period of time, certain
neighborhoods become less desirable. Properties become
harder to sell and good tenants harder to find. An owner who
finds himself in this situation often becomes anxious to sell
because management has become too intense.
Illustration: When Clyde A. bought his rental home about
twenty years ago, it was a nice, respectable neighborhood. But,
in the last few years, the area has become increasingly run
down and now Clyde couldn't bring in good tenants if he paid
them. The property is becoming more and more run
down--since Clyde has lost all desire to effectively manage
it--causing it to blend right into the neighborhood Clyde so
despises.
Another local change has to do with the competition. The
laws of supply and demand may bring deadly competition to a
rental unit that previously had little challenge. Perhaps there are
Unit Two, Page 14
more rental units in the area than before--or fewer tenants.
Either way the owner may become discouraged and become
flexible. You, as new owner, might possibly be able to cure the
problem either by upgrading the property or by lowering the
rents.
Laws and Government Changes. Local laws can sometimes
make a big difference in an owner's success. Perhaps a zoning
change affects the neighborhood. Or maybe rent controls have
been imposed, and an owner may be in a situation where he
can no longer raise his rents or is restricted in how much he can
raise them. Either situation can create flexibility--and the new
owners could well follow in their footsteps.
Pending Changes. A seller may know of some pending
changes that will adversely affect his property, and he may be
trying to sell before the changes take effect. For example, he
may know that a proposed highway will come near or possibly
through his property. Only if you do your homework will you
be able to learn the same kinds of things for certain, since the
seller may not disclose them to you.
2.6 HOW CURABLE IS THE PROBLEM?
Once you've learned the reason why a seller is flexible, you
must ask a hard question:
"What effect will this have on me, as a new buyer?" The
reasons that are under Category 1, which are personal to the
seller, will not have any effect on the new owner, but reasons
under Category 2 may pass on to a new owner. They may be
something you can correct--but sometimes making a correction
will be too expensive, time consuming, or impractical. Finally,
reasons under Category 3 are probably not curable.
You can see why it is vital to know what the seller's
motivation is and if it will have any effect on you as a new
owner. If it is a problem you will inherit, it is important to know,
in advance, whether you can correct it, how to correct it, and
how much it will cost.
Unit Two, Page 15
Remember, some flexible sellers have very good reasons to
be that way. In many cases, you may be attracted to the seller's
generous terms, but after analysis, you'll learn that you wouldn't
want his property even if he gave it to you.
The situation of Jason R. is a good case in point. He started
looking for rental homes in the newspaper ads. One ad read:
"NO DOWN. Assume 9%
on $65,000 home. 3
bedrooms, 1-3/4 baths, full
basement. Excellent condition.
By owner. Call 555-5555."
Jason had done his homework and he knew a good ad
when he saw one. And this buy seemed to be too good to be
true. During his lunch hour, he called the seller and had a little
chat. Everything was as advertised. There seemed to be no
hidden problems. In fact, the seller, Mr. Thomas, was so
anxious that Jason got the idea he might be even more flexible
than the ad had indicated.
Jason almost made an offer right then. But he decided to
take a look at the property, just to be safe. That evening, Jason
drove by the home. Suddenly his bubble burst and sailed away.
The home was just as Mr. Thomas had said. It was in good
condition, with no structural problems, a new exterior paint job,
a nice yard. But the neighborhood was a pit. Jason knew that it
would attract only the worst of tenants.
He breathed a sigh of relief as he drove away, happy that he
had not been hasty. Now he knew why Mr. Thomas was
flexible. And, he was glad he had not taken his place.
2.7 NARROW DOWN YOUR SEARCH
Only a small percentage of sellers at any given time will be
truly flexible sellers. Many of those, even though they
Unit Two, Page 16
desperately want to sell, either cannot or will not sell their
property with the terms or price you need. Many potential
buyers waste their time and energy trying to use their creative
financing techniques on sellers or properties that just don't
work. Such an approach is a short road to discouragement. ("I
knew that nothing down approach wouldn't work! Every seller
I talk to just laughs when I try to negotiate.") At the same time,
other investors are buying millions of dollars worth of real estate
because they have focused on sellers that both can and will sell
with good price or terms.
In a research project conducted by the Real Estate
Advisor during the mid-1980's, over a quarter million ads in the
major newspapers of America were surveyed and analyzed for
a period of some four years. It was found that less than 16
percent of the ads indicated any flexibility or motivation to
sell. Of these, only 2 percent indicated that the seller was highly
motivated and very anxious to sell.
The chart on the following page summarizes the findings
of this important research project.
It makes little sense to waste time with sellers who are less
likely to sell on your terms. The great majority of sellers who
will cooperate with you are those who have compelling reasons
to sell. So why spend precious time with the others?
2.8 HOW TO FIND THE BARGAINS
Now that you know what flexible sellers are, how do you
find them? Sellers don't just show up on your doorstep one
morning and say, "Hi, I'm flexible! Let's talk terms!" You'll
have to go out looking.
We have divided the sources of flexible sellers into five
different categories and have tried to arrange them in an order
that reflects the most valuable sources. They are ranked in
descending order, with the most productive listed first. But
don't be deceived by our ranking--the sources at the bottom
are perfectly legitimate and can yield some great flexible
sellers. We're simply trying to give you an indication of where
Unit Two, Page 17
you might want to start.
M CATEGORY 1 -- NEWSPAPER
ADVERTISING
Classified ads
Property buying ads
M CATEGORY 2 -- REALTORS
Realtors
MLS book and computer
Trade and exchange clubs
M CATEGORY 3 -- REFERRALS
Finder's fees
Friends and referrals
Attorneys and accountants
M CATEGORY 4 -- PERSONAL RESEARCH
Foreclosures
Repossessions
Out-of-state owners
Drive arounds
Legal papers
Public notices
Suits and liens
Bankruptcies
Estate sales
Corporate relocations
M CATEGORY 5 -- OTHER ADVERTISING
Flyers
Business cards
Farming
2.81 CATEGORY 1 -- NEWSPAPER ADVERTISING
To give you some idea about the relative importance of
newspaper ads as a source of flexible sellers, we need only
refer to the case book How To Write A Nothing Down Offer
So That Everyone Wins by Dr. Richard J. Allen. This book,
Unit Two, Page 18
which was compiled after a review of thousands of actual
transactions based on the Robert Allen methods, discloses the
following important summary:
LEAD SOURCES FOR CREATIVE TRANSACTIONS
39% From Classified Ads
31% From Real Estate Agents
13% From the MLS Book
9% From Friends and Colleagues
6% From "For Sale By Owner" Signs
2% From Exchange Brokers
From this summary it is clear that the newspaper is the
single most important source for finding flexible sellers. The
classified ads of nearly every city are filled to the brim with real
estate properties for sale. As indicated earlier, some 16% of
these ads, on an average, are placed by owners who are at
least moderately motivated to sell quickly. Around 2% of the
ads are placed by owners who are, in effect, crying for help.
These are the intensely motivated sellers who will most likely be
willing to deal with you on flexible price and/or terms.
THE IMPORTANCE OF PERSISTENCE
Remember: only 2% of the ads come from sellers who
will be truly flexible. Does that suggest the need for patience
and persistence?
Here is an illustration. When Steve and Donna
B. decided to start investing in real estate, they turned right to
the classifieds for leads. Steve got home from work first, and
before he did anything else, he scanned the ads. When Donna
came home, they took turns calling the sellers who seemed like
good prospects.
On the first few nights it seemed they were getting
nowhere. They began to believe there was not a single flexible
seller in the entire city! But the more they called, the more they
Unit Two, Page 19
were able to refine their approach. Then they realized that they
had been asking the wrong questions, or at least, asking
questions of the wrong people. Soon they developed more
skills at reading the ads like the experts--by going after the
clues of flexibility. And Steve discovered that Donna was more
effective in the initial contact. Every night thereafter, Donna
began making the calls while Steve made supper.
In the second week, things began to pick up. Donna found
three sellers who passed her screening. After she finished
talking to the third one, she hung up the phone and danced from
the study into the kitchen. "I've found some! I've found
some!" she shouted. "And we're going to be rich!"
That weekend they went to take a tour of the
properties. One was in a horrible part of town, as they learned.
They made a note to do better homework. The second house
had already been sold. The third was a possibility--but they
decided after a failed negotiation with the seller that he wasn't a
flexible seller after all.
So they continued their search. In the third week they found
more possibilities, and in the fifth week they made their first
formal offer. Again, their negotiations broke down.
But they didn't give up. After six months they owned two
rental homes, and by the end of the year they owned a duplex
as well. All had break-even cash flows (necessary, given
Steve's and Donna's financial picture), and all had been bought
with little or none of their own money down.
USING BUYING ADS.
Some investors have found a short-cut to success--a
lazy man's way to finding truly flexible sellers. Their approach is
simple: they place their own ad in the newspaper under the
section of Real Estate Wanted. It also helps to use the For Sale
sections. Prospective sellers often read other people's ads
before placing their own. You might get calls from owners who
haven't even put their properties on the market yet.
Unit Two, Page 20
Three different kinds of ads have been successful: "Fast
Cash," "Win/Win," and "Mom & Pop." You should use the
kind that works best for you.
M FAST CASH. This ad concentrates on purchasing
properties at discounted prices from "wholesale" sellers. It
usually says something like this:
FAST CASH. We buy real estate. Call
555-1234. Ask for Jane.
This ad can be very attractive to the seller who finds himself
in a pinch. When he calls, you can explain that in exchange for
your cash up front, you will need him to discount his price.
Some sellers will balk (they are not truly flexible sellers); others
will jump at the chance. And where do you get the cash? Find a
partner, or use another method discussed in the unit dealing
with creative finance techniques.
M WIN/WIN. This ad indicates that the seller will get his
price, but that you, the buyer, must be able to name the terms.
It goes after the "retail" seller. It reads:
FULL PRICE
I will give you full price for
your home if you will sell to
us on flexible terms. Call
John at 555-4321.
This ad appeals to many people. Large numbers of
homeowners are unable to see the correlation between price
and terms, and they'll ignore terms to get the full amount they
think their home is worth. In essence, they are letting their
emotions control their decisions--at a significant savings to you.
M MOM & POP. This ad appeals to many people because
of its ring of a "down to earth, home town" type investor instead
of a large, inconsiderate company that is out to get them. It
reads like this:
Private investor would like to buy real estate. Good price and
Unit Two, Page 21
terms. Call Annette at 555-1111.
These ads can be placed in local papers, "nickel ads," free
Real Estate Circulars, and local magazines. Creative individuals
have even had success placing such ads in larger papers like the
Los Angeles Times and the Wall Street Journal.
Does this approach really work? Absolutely! Some highly
successful investors do nothing else. They place their ads,
answer the phone, use the Nothing Down techniques to close
the deals, and watch their total net worth grow and grow.
2.82 CATEGORY 2 -- REALTORS
We begin this section with an illustration. Zachary F. was a
down-and-out factory worker during the latest of a series of
discouraging economic downturns. After he lost his job, he
found work at a gas station, but he felt there had to be a better
way to survive in a tough world. One day, while visiting the
library, he picked up a book on real estate. He was impressed
by the possibilities, but he didn't have a lot of confidence in his
ability to find the right kind of properties.
The next day, before he went to work, he visited a real
estate agent whose office was near his home. He explained his
situation and said he wanted to get into a rental home for little
down. The agent almost laughed in his face. "I've heard of
people trying to buy for nothing down," he said. "But you might
as well know it doesn't work. If there's one thing I've learned in
my fifteen years in this business, it's that money talks when
you're dealing in real estate."
Zachary was discouraged, but he didn't quit. He visited
another agent, then a third, then a fourth. On his fifth try, he hit
the jackpot. The agent talked the language Zachary wanted to
hear. "Nothing down?" he said. "Of course. Why spend your
own money when there are so many other ways to structure
deals."
He asked Zachary what his parameters for buying
Unit Two, Page 22
properties were. Zachary wasn't entirely prepared with an
answer, so he went home and did some figuring. Then he went
back. "I don't want to look at anything larger than a
single-family home," Zachary said. "Let's see if we can find
something for little or nothing down, with a reasonable interest
rate. Something that doesn't cost more than $70,000."
"Sounds good," the agent replied. "Of course, you know
these kinds of properties don't just grow on trees. I'll have to
look for a while, and even then I might have to cultivate a deal.
But we'll get something to work. Don't worry."
Several weeks later, Zachary closed on his first investment
property, using money from a new partner to help with the
down payment. Then he sent his agent out looking for another
home. He had learned an important principle about buying real
estate: the professionals can be your best friends.
Let's look at how real estate agents--and their best tool, the
Multiple Listing Service--can help us in our finding efforts.
Real Estate Agents. A great number of the good properties
you find will come through working with real estate agents or
"Realtors," as agents who are members of the National
Association of Realtors are called. But there are good and bad
times to work with agents, good and bad ways to work with
them, and good and bad techniques and properties to work
with them on. Your success will come by knowing the
difference. Here are some basic tips:
M Don't be greedy.
M Be realistic.
M Be clear about your goals and follow through.
M Work with more than one agent until you find the right one.
M Use a "Buyer's Broker Agreement."
M Use third-party negotiations to your advantage.
Don't be greedy. Agents have to eat too. Avoid performing
"commissiondectomies" on them by trying to take all their
money. Be fair with them and let them earn what they
deserve. The win/win philosophy needs to apply here too. If
Unit Two, Page 23
your agent is doing a lot of work, pay him back by arranging
the kinds of deals that will generate some cash for a
commission. Asking an agent to work hard and then expecting
him to take his commission on a note sounds good and may
work in some instances, but not in most.
On the other hand, if you are doing most of the work in
finding the properties and the agent helps only with negotiations
and closing, then partial commissions and commissions paid
over a period of time may become more acceptable.
Be realistic. If you waste an agent's time searching for
properties that are not realistic, then pretty soon they won't give
you any more of their time to waste. Know exactly what you
are looking for (a little practice will help you here), and don't try
to move out of the parameters that work for you.
Be clear about your goals and follow through. It is vital that
you give your agent clear instructions on what you are looking
for, preferably in writing. For example, you may say, "I want a
single-family dwelling with three bedrooms and 1-1/2 baths, in
the $55,000 to $60,000 price range. Also, the seller needs to
give one or more clues that he is willing to be flexible." When
your agent finds a property that fits into those parameters, be
ready to act quickly to check it out. If you don't, you'll wind up
with a disgruntled agent who soon refuses to work for you.
You'll also wind up making no progress on your investment
program.
Work with more than one agent. For a variety of reasons,
agents do not always follow through on finding you
properties. As a safety feature, don't rely on just one agent, but
do be loyal to the ones who prove to be helpful. And if you do
find an agent who can locate for you as many good properties
as you can handle, then by all means work with him or her. But
such agents are rare, and the odds are that you might need to
work with two or three agents at once until you find the
"golden" one.
Use a "Buyer's Broker Agreement." One of an agent's big
concerns is that he will bring you a property and you will follow
Unit Two, Page 24
through on your own or with another agent. It is helpful for an
agent to know you are working with other agents, but he needs
to know that he is protected when he brings you a property. A
"Buyer's Broker Agreement" (or "Purchase Agency") will
accomplish that goal. In the agreement, you state that you will
work with no other agent on a particular property for a set
period of time. That protects the agent from competition; with
his commission protected, he will work hard to help you make
the deal.
One of the biggest advantages of the Buyer's Broker
Agreement is that it can help the agent in his negotiations. By
most state laws, a selling agent is considered a sub-agent of the
listing agent. This means that he legally represents the seller and
is bound to do the best job for the seller that he can. But all this
changes with a Buyer's Broker Agreement. Then your agent is
responsible to you, the buyer.
To avoid double commissions and the agent relationship
with the seller, point out to the listing brokerage that the selling
agent is taking his commission from you, the buyer. The listing
brokerage should therefore agree to take only half of the
normal commission--or the price of the property should be
dropped accordingly. This is exactly what the listing brokerage
would have received in the first place, since they would have
split the commission with the selling brokerage. With a Buyer's
Broker Agreement, the same amount of commission is paid to
the same people as in a typical transaction, except that half
comes from the seller and half comes from the buyer. No one
pays more and no one receives less. Yet the selling agent is
more free to negotiate in your favor, which will surely be
reflected in the terms and price.
Use third party negotiations to your advantage. Having a
third party involved in the negotiations can be an important
benefit for you. It can provide a wonderful protection: if you are
negotiating with the seller personally, he can put you on the spot
and ask questions that you would prefer not to answer.
An agent worth his salt can usually save you more money
Unit Two, Page 25
than his commission amounts to. He can take a positive
approach with the seller and follow the philosophy of "don't tell
me what you won't do, tell me what you will do." A good
agent will try not to leave without a counter offer if the original
offer is not accepted.
One way to improve your negotiations is to have an
agreement with your agent that provides an increased
commission if he can get better terms and a better price than
you were hoping for. That way, negotiation is to his advantage.
Without such a provision, he knows that the more he discounts
the property, the less commission he gets.
MLS book and computer-assisted searches. The Multiple
Listing Service provides a cooperative exchange of listing
information to subscribing Realtors. All of the properties listed
through this service appear in a book that is usually published
two to four times per month. Though it is confidential
information, many Realtors will still tend to let you look at it.
You shouldn't have much trouble getting access to a copy of a
current listing book. You don't have to have a copy to
keep--just ask your agent if you can look through the book in
his presence.
The listing book pulls together a great deal of information
about each property. It gives the location of the home, its size,
its amenities, and special terms the seller may consider (if any).
A picture of the property is even included.
The "remarks" section of each listing will often contain clues
about the seller's motivation. You'll often find information about
a seller who is in foreclosure, being transferred, "very anxious
to sell," or "desperate."
Many agents will have access to the listing files through a
computer. The computer can save both agent and investor a lot
of time. With its "search" function, you will be able to look for
particular types of property or seller conditions by simply
punching a few keys on the keyboard.
Unit Two, Page 26
For example, you can ask the computer to give you every
reference to "foreclosure." Type in the request, wait a few
minutes, and the computer will give you a printout of every
listed property that is in foreclosure.
If you have a home or business computer, you might be able
to hook into your Realtor's system. Simply make a deal with
the brokerage that you will write your offers through them. The
monthly connection fee is sometimes as low as $50.
Here is a sample of some of the clues that can be searched
for using the MLS book or computer: foreclosure, desperate,
anxious, flexible, must sell, quick sale, transferred, vacant,
trade, exchange, low down, discount, below appraisal,
reduced, motivated, fast sale.
These are just a few of the clues to look for in the "remarks"
section of a property's listing. Of course, some clues have a
higher priority than others. For example, the term "desperate"
shows a lot more motivation than the terms "must sell." But any
of these terms can put you on a direct line with a flexible seller.
The computer can also search for other helpful items such as
free and clear properties or properties with low loan balances.
It can even be very specific, searching for properties, for
instance, that are free and clear and that say in the remarks that
the seller will take a low down payment and a contract for the
balance.
Trade and exchange clubs. Much of the concepts of
creative finance originated in the field of "exchanging." All
around the country, groups meet on a regular basis to exchange
real estate. These agents and sellers are much more creative
and flexible than the general public (and most regular
agents)--and they are often aware of flexible sellers.
Most clubs do not require you to be a real estate agent
before you can attend. If they do, arrange with an agent to
attend with him. You can also call the Creative Real Estate
Magazine in Leucadia, California, and subscribe to their
publication, which lists all such exchange groups in the country
Unit Two, Page 27
in each monthly issue (including the names of the group leaders,
plus addresses and phone numbers).
2.83 CATEGORY 3--REFERRALS
Once again, let us begin with an illustration. Shirley M.
had no time to spend looking for the flexible seller, or so she
thought. She was so convinced that the system would work for
her, though, that she tried to make time. She analyzed her
schedule and decided to get up a half-hour earlier every
day. During that "extra" time she had created, she would go
through the newspaper and mark ads that seemed promising;
then, she could call the seller later in the day.
During the first week, Shirley got up faithfully. She read and
marked the paper every morning, making notations beside the
properties she felt were red-hot. But she never had time to
follow through. She didn't make a single call all week.
At the beginning of the second week, she got a heavy cold.
Even though she wasn't sick enough to stay home from work,
she really needed all the sleep should could get.
During the third week Shirley was better, but she couldn't
get her body off the mattress when the alarm rang in the
morning. Yes, it was good to be financially independent--but it
was also good to get enough sleep so she could function from
day to day.
It was a real dilemma. She was about ready to give it all up
when she realized she was going at it all wrong. She didn't have
to do all the work. What if she got others to do the looking for
her?
She talked to friends and asked them to be on the lookout
for good possibilities for her. But even more directly, she asked
a college student if he would be willing to help her. She agreed
to give the college student a
percentage of the purchase price on every property she was
Unit Two, Page 28
able to buy.
The student went to work, and Shirley slept an extra
half-hour every day. When the student finally began to bring
possibilities to her, she had to rearrange her schedule to look at
them. She was surprised that she was able to do it--a house in
the hand seemed to be worth more than two in the ads.
Now Shirley's gross worth is in excess of a million dollars.
And the college student has earned enough to put himself
through college. (An interesting postscript: the student has
become so proficient at finding good properties that he has
purchased some himself. And he is thinking of investing full-time
after graduation, instead of pursuing his accounting
career. Shirley realizes that she soon may have to find another
finder!)
Using other people's referrals can sometimes save a lot of
time and effort. Here are three ways that have proven
successful:
M Finder's Fees. Some investors, like Shirley, are kept
running by a good finder. And the finder is able to maintain a
moderate earning off the fees he earns.
This idea can be expanded. More than one investor has
found that he can multiply his efforts by teaching others how to
spot good properties. Then he turns them loose with a promise
of a finder's fee on every property he closes on.
Others have been even more specific. They may, for
example, teach a finder how to search out foreclosures by
looking at records in the County Recorder's office. The finder
does all the tedious research work, but when he finds a good
buy, he gets rewarded accordingly. And so does the buyer.
If you use this technique, check to make sure paying a
finder's fee in your area does not violate any laws.
M Friends and Referrals. Friends are an inconsistent
Unit Two, Page 29
source of help--even a best friend won't go too far out of his or
her way to help you find good deals. But if you let friends know
what you're looking for, they may remember if they happen
across a possibility. If you put the word out, through business
cards or any other method, that you are looking for flexible
sellers, every once in a while you'll hear in reply, "You ought to
call my neighbor. Just the other day he said he would give
anything to get rid of a rental he has across town."
M Attorneys and Accountants. Attorneys sometimes
know of divorced or divorcing couples who have properties to
sell. They also may know of people who are having financial or
legal troubles--and a number of those will be flexible property
owners.
Accountants are good sources of people with financial
or tax problems. They will very likely hesitate giving out
names--as will attorneys. But tell them what you are looking
for. They may be willing to give your name to their clients. If the
client is a truly flexible seller, he will get in touch with you.
2.84 CATEGORY 4--PERSONAL RESEARCH
William Z. was having the worst year of his life. First his
wife divorced him. Then he lost the job of his dreams, and the
new job brings only boredom. And now he has just received a
notice that the bank is foreclosing on his four-plex. If someone
would only make him a halfway decent offer, he would quickly
unload the property and save his credit rating.
Jenny H. was on top of the world when she bought her
three homes. They were perfect rentals--the people paid on
time, and when there was trouble she had to drive only a few
blocks to deal with it. Then she was transferred out of state,
and everything fell apart. She'd love to sell and start over again
in her new city. But her homes are just sitting there, along with
the thousand others for sale in her old area.
Carlos A. inherited his parents' home after his widowed
mother passed away. He was busy with his work and really
Unit Two, Page 30
wasn't interested in managing a rental home. He put the house
up for sale, but the market was so saturated that no one even
looked at it. Meanwhile, tax time is coming up, and he is going
to have to pay property taxes on a home that is vacant and that
he doesn't even want.
What do these three people have in common? Yes,
they are all flexible sellers. In addition, their situations are such
that someone committed to financial independence could easily
find out about them. All it would take is a little personal
research. This section will tell you how to be successful with
this excellent source of flexible sellers.
M FORECLOSURES. Foreclosures almost inevitably
create flexibility. Not all foreclosures are good deals, of
course. But some can practically be a steal.
There are four different times to work with foreclosure
properties. Each requires a totally different procedure and
strategy. Let's look at the four opportunities to work with
foreclosures:
M 1. Before foreclosure begins. This can be the best
point in time to work with a foreclosure property. After the
costs and back payments start adding up, the property
becomes harder and harder to buy. At the same time, the
seller's motivation increases. Another motivator: the tone of the
bank's letters sometimes scares the seller to the point where he
thinks he is already in foreclosure. The seller's plight is not
generally known at this point, and you will have little
competition.
Real estate agents are the best source before
foreclosure begins. Many times the property will be listed, and
the agent knows that it is approaching foreclosure. Perhaps the
best way to get the information is to have your agent put the
word out to his associates in the city: "I have a client who is
particularly looking for properties with pending foreclosures."
Another vital source is the newspaper. Even if the ad
Unit Two, Page 31
says nothing about foreclosure, you can get to the seller's true
motivation in a hurry by asking one question: "Are the payments
current?"
Another source can be the bank or financial institution
that holds the mortgage. Of course, they generally won't give
you the names of those who are facing foreclosure, but they
may give the property owner your card or phone number.
M 2. During the foreclosure process. Once a
foreclosure is started, it becomes a matter of public record. A
short trip to the County Recorder's office can tell you which
properties in your area are at this stage in the process. A letter
and a phone call can let you know, without a good deal of
effort, if they are willing to sell. Many owners take a while
before they realize that they really need your services, so a
follow-up letter and a call in two to three months would be well
worth your time.
But walk softly. Once foreclosure has begun, a seller tends
to feel very pressured. He will not respond very well if
additional pressure comes from you. Do your best to convince
the seller that you come as a friend with the creativity to help
him solve his problems--not as a shark waiting for his financial
boat to sink.
M 3. At the foreclosure sale. Even though some of the
best properties are bought before the sale, a number of good
properties are still available.
The key to buying properties at a foreclosure sale is to
be able to get the essential information you need without
spending much time. You need to be familiar with the value and
condition of the property. Try to make an inspection; though in
some cases, if someone is still living on the premises, you may
have to be content with seeing only the outside of the
property. The financial institution or individual who is foreclosing
will be able to help you to see the property. In addition,
it is standard practice for financial institutions to provide a
"foreclosure inspection report" and an appraisal at this time.
Unit Two, Page 32
To buy a property at the sale, you will need cash or
some kind of financing. Establish short-term credit with banks
or partners so that you can buy the property at the sale, then
follow through with some long-term financing later.
M 4. After the sale. That hard-nosed banker you
thought was impossible to deal with will sing an entirely different
tune when he has to foreclose on a property. Many times
bankers become very flexible and anxious when they end up
with foreclosed properties. In fact, a bank could even lose its
charter if it ended up owning too much real estate. Their
R.E.O. (real estate owned) properties are therefore something
they like to get rid of quickly. At times, they will discount the
price drastically to move the property off their books. Other
times, to avoid a loss, they must receive the full amount of their
investment. In exchange, they will often agree to very soft
terms. Low interest and no interest loans are sometimes made
available; some banks will even loan extra money to fix up the
property. Even when they require a down payment, they may
let you call that down payment "pre-paid interest," and they
may defer payments for a year or two so that you can have
positive cash flow and money to fix up the property.
The major reservation banks have is that they do not
want to take that same property back again. Sometimes they
feel so strongly about this that they will not loan against the
foreclosed property. In this case, try to find two
properties--one with bank A and one with bank B. Then get
bank A to loan on bank B's property, and get bank B to loan
on bank A's property, all as part of a package deal.
Surprisingly, this often works.
REPOSSESSIONS. Banks are not the only institutions that
end up with unwanted properties after foreclosure. Others
include:
FSLIC--Federal Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation
FDIC--Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation
VA--Veterans' Administration
Unit Two, Page 33
FHA--Federal Housing Authority
FNMA--Federal National Mortgage Association
IRS Seized Property
Private Sellers
FSLIC. The Federal Savings and Loan Insurance
Corporation was set up to insure deposits at savings and loan
associations. At times they had to step in and help out a
struggling or failing savings and loan. Over time they built up a
considerable portfolio of unwanted properties that had to be
sold. With the wholesale failure of many S & L's in recent
times, the RTC, or Resolution Trust Corporation, was set up to
dispose of properties left over in the wake of the S & L crisis.
FDIC. The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation
insures deposits at banks. As with the FSLIC, they may end up
with foreclosed properties picked up from struggling or failing
banks.
VA. The Veterans' Administration insures certain loans
made by banks or mortgage companies. When those loans go
bad, they are taken back by the bank--but the VA often gets
them in the end.
The VA has local offices and people hired full-time just
to advertise and market foreclosure properties. Your real estate
agent can get on their mailing list (they work only through
agents) and even get a "lock box key" that will open the doors
to their properties.
For more information, contact the nearest regional
office of the Veterans' Administration.
FHA. The Federal Housing Administration has similar
procedures to the VA and will also have a local office. For
more information, contact the nearest regional or area office of
the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development.
Unit Two, Page 34
FNMA. The Federal National Mortgage Association
(nicknamed "Fannie Mae") buys loans from financial institutions
like banks and mortgage companies. They foreclose on many
properties around the country, then have to resell them.
IRS seized property. The IRS sometimes seizes
property due to nonpayment of taxes. For more information,
contact the nearest district office of the Internal Revenue
Service.
Private sellers. Pay particular attention to loans that
have been foreclosed on by a private party rather than a
financial institution. While financial institutions are invariably
bound by rules and regulations, a private party can do whatever
he wants to sell you his unwanted property. He can be creative
and flexible. If you catch him before the foreclosure is
completed, he might even sell you the loan at a discount. You
could then have the right to foreclose and profit.
Note: you can find foreclosures by private sellers by
conducting research at the County Recorder's Office. Look for
Notices of Default or Notices of Sale posted on public bulletin
boards and advertised in the newspapers.
Now let's return to our consideration of other
possibilities based on personal research.
Out-of-state owners. Out-of-state owners often have a
strong desire to sell their properties. It is truly a hassle managing
a property by long distance--even when you have a
professional management company doing most of the work for
you.
You locate out-of-state owners through the public
records at the County Recorder's office or through the Tax
Assessor's records. Some investors have built an enviable
portfolio strictly through buying from out-of-state owners. They
write a simple letter explaining their approach and asking if the
owner is interested. Many won't be flexible sellers. But many
will.
Unit Two, Page 35
Drive arounds. Drive through neighborhoods that
contain acceptable properties and look for "for sale" signs and
"for rent" signs. Stop and speak with the owner. "I notice your
home is for sale. I buy properties and wondered if I might ask
you a few questions." Then determine if the owner is a flexible
seller--and if you can solve each other's problems in a win/win
way.
Also, look for properties that are extremely neglected.
Neglected or vacant properties sometimes mean a struggling
seller who is flexible. You might be able to help.
Legal Papers. Legal notices are published in special
legal papers--and a legal notice sometimes means a new seller
who is flexible. The legal papers list everything from divorces to
lawsuits to foreclosures. Subscriptions to these papers are
typically quite expensive, but you can get access to them much
more cheaply if you try. See if your local library has a copy of
them. Or, see if you can buy used copies from attorneys, title
companies, banks, or anyone else who might have a
subscription.
Once you've identified some people to contact, send
letters asking if they would be interested in selling their real
estate. Be careful how you word your letter, taking pains not to
be blunt or abrasive. Letters such as "now that you life has
crumbled into pieces, are there any chances you would like to
sell?" are probably not going to get a favorable response.
Here is a better way:
"I understand you have recently
gone through some difficult
changes in your life. If one
result is that you now have
some unwanted real estate
properties, perhaps I can
help. I am not a real estate
agent, just a private investor
trying to buy some real
estate. If you are interested in
Unit Two, Page 36
talking about the possibilities,
please call me at
555-5555. Thank you very
much."
Another letter that has proven successful reads as
follows:
"We understand that because
of changing circumstances in
your life, you may be interested
in selling your real estate. We
would be more than happy to
make an offer. If you are
interested, please contact me at
555-5555."
Public Notices. Public notices are usually posted on
bulletin boards around the County Recorder's office and other
public buildings. When the final stage of foreclosure is
approaching, for example, a "notice of sale" must be posted in a
public place. This will give you the date and time of the sale.
Public notices also give information on estate sales and
tax sales. Another source of public notices is your local
newspaper. They are often listed toward the back of the paper,
adjacent to the classified ads.
Suits and liens. Still another potential source of
flexibility are suits and liens. A person suffering such financial
reverses sometimes needs to liquidate his real estate holdings.
You can find out about lawsuits and liens that have been filed
through public records and legal papers. Approach them with
the same kind of letter discussed earlier.
Bankruptcy. Bankruptcy is also a matter of public
record, and many times such information includes references to
properties that must be sold. In some cases, heavy discounts
are available, especially when legal officials are anxious to close
the case.
Unit Two, Page 37
Information about bankruptcies is available in legal
papers or at the bankruptcy court. Included in the papers will
be the name of the trustee who has been appointed to handle
the details of the case. A glance at the papers should tell you if
the bankruptcy includes real estate. If they don't, a quick call to
the trustee will get you the information.
Some creditors at this point will take extreme discounts
if you buy out their position. In some cases, they are happy to
get anything at all. Even though the bankruptcy has just been
filed and may not have been closed, the court can release the
property for sale if it deems it the proper thing to do.
Estate sales. Heirs of an estate often find themselves
owners of a property they don't want--or can't afford.
Sometimes the property must be sold to pay taxes and debts.
Whatever their reasons for selling, heirs can be very anxious to
sell quickly. They may be willing to discount the price or accept
very flexible terms.
An estate can be viewed as a partnership that has been
formed unwillingly. The same type of problems as exist in a bad
partnership can sometimes be found among heirs. A creative
offer that finds a way to divide up the proceeds might be
precisely what is needed.
For example, when five heirs do not get along and
would just as soon avoid future dealings with one another, a
buyer might suggest a trust deed with five separate promissory
notes. This will give each heir his or her own note, and all can
go their own way.
Notices of estate sales appear in the papers, as well as
in public notices at the County Recorder's office.
Corporate Relocations. When a large corporation
relocates an employee, the company sometimes ends up
marketing or even buying the home. They can become flexible
amazingly fast and may not necessarily need cash.
How do you find these kinds of deals? Mass mail
Unit Two, Page 38
letters to the major employers in your state--the ones that also
have offices or factories in other states. (You may need to
address the corporate headquarters, which itself may be out of
state.) Tell them what you are looking for. If they have nothing
at the moment, ask them to keep your letter on file so they can
contact you when they do acquire such a property.
2.85 CATEGORY 5--OTHER ADVERTISING
We've included this final category simply by way of
information. These approaches to finding flexible sellers do
work, but they are not nearly as effective as those listed in other
categories. Perhaps you would want to use these approaches
as supplements to your other, primary finding strategies.
Flyers. Some investors have had success in distributing
flyers door to door and in parking lots. Door hangers can also
be made and distributed very inexpensively by young kids going
door to door.
The flyer need only advertise what you are looking
for--flexible sellers--and how interested parties can contact
you. The more graphically interesting your flyer is, the greater
chance you will have that others will look at it.
Business Cards. This can be one of the cheapest ways
to find good properties. A simple card with your name and the
statement "I BUY REAL ESTATE," along with your phone
number, might bring you some good calls.
Of course, you can't just sit back and wait for someone
to ask for your card. Pass out business cards to friends,
relatives, and anyone else you meet. Set a goal and pass out a
certain number of cards every week. But if you want your
investment program to move steadily ahead, use other finding
methods at the same time.
Farming. Farming is a sales-prospecting technique
whereby you concentrate your efforts in a particular area. As
the term implies, it involves planting seeds and waiting for a
Unit Two, Page 39
crop to grow.
To farm, pick a particular area that you would like to
buy properties in, then begin to plant. This could include
knocking on doors, mailing out flyers, or hand-delivering flyers
or business cards. It can even include keeping track of who
owns what properties and letting them know that you would be
interested in buying if they ever choose to sell.
Farming involves a lot of work and commitment. Other
methods can yield more fruit in less time. But farming does
work (after you've done your work), and some real estate
experts swear by it.
2.9 EFFICIENCY FACTORS IN FINDING FLEXIBLE
SELLERS.
Which sources of flexible sellers will give the best return
for your expenditure of time and money? You can prepared a
chart that will help you make the decision. It will help you
evaluate sources by five criteria--cost, time, size of city,
economic seasonality, and types of flexible seller.
Indicate on your chart by an A-B-C rating how
productive a given source is for each of the criteria. An A
means the source is most productive, while C is least. These
ratings break down as follows:
M Cost Category:
A = Minimal cost or time only
B = Less than $100.00
C = More than $100.00
(Of course, costs vary from city to city and also from person to
person. Advertising, for example, can be expensive or
inexpensive, depending on where or how you advertise.)
M TIME CATEGORY:
Unit Two, Page 40
A = High results for time spent
B = Average results for time spent
C = Low results for time spent
M SIZE OF CITY CATEGORY:
A = Good source in all cities of all sizes
B = May not be available in some smaller cities
C = Probably not available in smaller cities
M ECONOMIC SEASONALITY CATEGORY:
A = Good in all seasons
B = Some fluctuation
C = A great deal of fluctuation
M TYPES OF FLEXIBLE SELLER CATEGORY:
1. Owner's location
2. Time constraints or sickness
3. Retirement
4. Divorce
5. Management approach
6. Personal finances
7. Partnerships
8. Estate sales
9. Ignorance or emotion
10. Management-problems with property
11. Existing financing
12. Obsolescence
13. Local economic changes
14. Local neighborhood changes
15. Law changes
16. Pending changes
2.10 A NOTE ABOUT THE WIN/WIN PHILOSOPHY
Some of the foregoing information might appear
contrary to the win/win philosophy. Some of the people who
are flexible sellers have reached a low ebb in their lives
Unit Two, Page 41
(divorce, bankruptcy, foreclosure, etc.). Isn't it taking
advantage of them to try to buy at very favorable price and
terms, even for nothing down? Actually, the opposite is true.
We are not encouraging you to be hungry wolves, preying upon
widows and orphans.
Instead, by taking a win/win attitude, you can truly help
the down-and-out flexible seller by solving his problem at a
time when he is truly looking for a solution. If you are sensitive
to his needs and make sure he goes away satisfied, then he has
won; if at the same time you strike a deal where you win, too,
then you have a win/win relationship with your seller. Being a
problem-solver is a gratifying vocation--especially if you can
turn a reasonable profit at the same time!
2.11 HOW WELL HAVE YOU LEARNED?
The better you've learned the information and concepts
in this unit, the more you will be able to apply them. Test your
learning by answering the following questions. The best way to
help the information stay in your head is to reprocess it through
your fingertips! If you are uncertain of a particular answer, look
back through the unit. The answers to all the questions can be
found in the preceding pages.
1. What is a flexible seller?
2. Why is the flexible or "don't wanter" seller so important to a
good real estate investment program?
3. What are the three major categories of problems that cause
flexibility among sellers?
4. Which category of flexible-seller problems is the least likely
to pass on to a new buyer?
5. What should you do if you find a property with a problem
that appears to be incurable?
6. What is the difference between a wholesale and a retail
flexible seller?
7. How common are flexible sellers? What percentage of all
sellers fit into the flexible category?
8. What are the two best sources to use in finding flexible
sellers?
Unit Two, Page 42
9. Is it a good idea to work with more than one real estate
agent at one time? Why or why not?
10. What is the real estate agent's most valuable tool?
11. What can you use with an agent to make certain he
represents you, instead of just the seller?
12. What are the key clues a flexible seller might include in a
newspaper ad?
13. How many stages does the foreclosure process have, in
terms of making a possible purchase? Which stage provides the
greatest opportunity for getting a great deal?
14. Out of the many possible sources of flexible sellers, which
ones should you concentrate on?
15. How is it possible to deal with a flexible seller on a win/win
basis?
2.12 PUTTING IT ALL INTO PRACTICE
In going through the above information, you've learned
what you need to know to find flexible sellers. But book
learning will take you only so far--then you have to get out and
practice to make the information truly workable for you.
How can you learn the details of finding flexible sellers
without taking the risk of moving ahead before you know the
entire Nothing Down approach? The answer is incredibly
simple. Do the following assignments and do nothing more. To
start with, we are not asking you to find real estate to buy. We
are asking you to find real estate just for practice, just to see
how the finding process works.
And what if you happen to find that once-in-a-lifetime
deal while you're practicing? Don't let it slip between your
fingers, ask an experienced person to help you analyze the
property. If it really is a hot buy, get an experienced partner to
purchase it with you as a joint-venture. Or, you might offer the
property to someone else, in exchange for a finder's fee.
In the meantime, go ahead with your assignments. You
need not do all the assignments we have listed, particularly if
you are a more advanced investor who simply wants to polish
Unit Two, Page 43
skills and make sure you are not neglecting some good sources
of flexible sellers. Select the assignments that will be most
helpful to you in your circumstances. But don't skimp in your
efforts. You'll be hurting only yourself.
1. Get a business card. Have a business card made that
you can begin to pass around. If people call you, ask questions
about their property. Tell them you're comparison shopping at
the moment.
2. Go out to eat. Locate a successful investor to take to
lunch and interview. Ask him what made him successful in real
estate, and ask what he would do if he were just starting in your
area. For the price of a lunch, you will doubtless gain valuable
tips and instruction.
3. Check the paper. Buy a local newspaper and see if
there are any buying ads. Call the ads and try to establish what
type of properties those investors buy and why. Ask how
successful the ads are. Be honest. If you are a beginner, tell
them this. Some of those with ads will be happy to chat with
you and help you out.
4. Place a buyer's ad. A weekend ad should cost only
a few dollars, and it will give you a feel for what type of calls
you will receive--and how many there will be. Remember, you
are just warming up now. When people call, try to determine if
they are anxious and just how flexible they will be. But don't
worry about buying at this point, unless you feel ready and can't
resist. (Even then, proceed with great caution--or you might
end up being flexible and anxious yourself.)
5. Find three good real estate agents. Begin talking to
agents and telling them that you are in the market to buy
properties. Ask them questions to find out how they feel about
the type of investing you are doing. Don't be discouraged if
some of them have negative opinions. Learn from what they
say, if you can, then move on to the next agent. You may have
to go through twenty or thirty agents to find three or four who
have the attitude and ability to find you good properties. But if
you use referrals from one agent to another, you should be able
Unit Two, Page 44
to find your ideal agent much more quickly.
6. Locate an MLS book. Find an agent who will let
you familiarize yourself with your local MLS book. Spend
some time with the book (perhaps with the agent present)
looking for clues to flexibility.
7. Check into the MLS computer. See if agents use a
computer in your area. Find an agent who knows how to use it
and have him show you the "search" functions.
8. Learn where your bread and butter is. Determine
which areas in your city contain the areas of "bread and butter"
homes, as far as your investment purposes go. Use the MLS
book (which is divided by area) to find the ten most appealing
investment properties in one of those areas. Remember, your
first step is to screen the listings for flexible-seller clues.
9. Find the public notices. Locate the area or areas in
your city where public notices are posted. Read a couple of the
notices and become familiar with them. Particularly look for a
notice of sale for real estate. Mark down the date of the sale
and the property address. If the address is not on the notice of
sale, copy down the legal description and take it to the County
Recorder's office and ask for help in finding the address. Now
drive by the property and take a look at it. If possible, also
take a short tour through the inside.
Next, attend the sale itself. Notice how it is conducted
and how much the property sells for. Notice how many people
are at the sale. (NOTE: Call the trustee the day before to see if
the sale is still going to be held. Sometimes sales are postponed
or canceled.)
10. List a Classified Top 10. Complete the exercise
called "Match Wits With the Experts," included below. Then
search through the classified section of your own paper,
reviewing several columns of ads. Using what you know at this
time, mark what looks like the top 10 flexible sellers.
11. Call the Top 10. Now call these ten ads and find
Unit Two, Page 45
out more information. Are they truly flexible sellers? How
flexible are they in price and/or terms? What is the property
itself like? Ask searching questions. Your job is to screen the
properties over the phone so that you spend further time only
on the best prospects.
12. Find the legal paper. Track down and look at the
legal paper that is used in your area. Your best sources will be
the library or an attorney.
13. Drive around. Drive through one of the "bread and
butter" areas you identified earlier. Notice what properties are
for sale. Take especial note of those that appear to be vacant
or neglected.
Look elsewhere as well. Take a different route to work
each morning. Look as you go to the store, to the cleaners, or
anywhere else you drive. Keep a notebook and pen with you
to jot down numbers and addresses. You'll begin to notice the
gold that has been right under your nose all the time.
14. Call five banks. Ask if they have any properties
they are trying to sell. Find out how you should go about
gathering information on them.
15. Assess property curability. When you locate some
flexible sellers through the previous exercises, jot down why
these sellers are so anxious to sell. Then analyze in each case
how "curable" the problem is, should you acquire the property.
2.13 THE TEN MOST ASKED QUESTIONS ABOUT
FINDING FLEXIBLE SELLERS
The following are some of the most frequently
encountered questions on this subject.
1. "This talk about people becoming flexible sellers scares me.
How can I avoid becoming flexible myself?"
The key is making sure you buy the right property in the
Unit Two, Page 46
first place. If you carefully analyze the price, the terms, the
location, and property itself, you'll have a good idea whether or
not the property will work for you. Buy only if the property
passes your most stringent tests. That's a nearly fail-safe
insurance policy for staying away from properties that cause
flexibility.
2. "Why all this discussion on the reasons a person becomes a
flexible seller? Isn't it enough simply to find out that he is one?"
No, that is not enough. Not only do we need to know
whether or not a seller is flexible, but we also must know why.
If we don't get down to the bottom of the matter and find out
why, we might inherit a terrible problem without even knowing
it. Only those who do their homework are able to avoid making
the kinds of mistakes that drive people out of business.
3. "Are all flexible sellers good prospects for the investor?"
Not necessarily, though you'll know only after you ask
them the hard questions. A seller might want in the worst way
to get rid of his property, but his situation won't allow him to
give you the terms you must have. Or, the seller and terms
stack up fine, but you find on analysis that the property itself (or
location, or underlying financing) makes the problem incurable.
4. "You indicated that the first two categories of sources of
flexible sellers--classified ads and real estate agents--are far
and away the best. Why should I even bother with the others?"
Those first two sources are indeed the best, partially
because that is where the bulk of real estate is made available.
And many investors focus only on those two areas and have
more to do than they have time for. You may wish to do the
same.
But in doing so, realize that other great opportunities
are still waiting to be explored. One investor gets every one of
his new properties through finder's fees. (The finder goes to the
other sources we've listed, especially real estate agents and
classifieds--but the investor doesn't. He deals only with his
Unit Two, Page 47
finder.) Others specialize in foreclosures (where almost
everyone is a flexible seller), estate sales, or farming.
What should you do? At the beginning, it might be wise
for you to experiment. Try a variety of approaches, working
with different sources. After you're familiar with a number of the
best sources, you'll have the background you need to pick the
ones that work best for you and your area.
5. "Do I need to become a real estate agent to find good
properties?"
Not at all. The education that you would receive in
getting your license might be beneficial, but you can take the
course without getting the license. While being a real estate
agent gives you first crack at some good deals, that doesn't
outweigh one major disadvantage--as a real estate agent, you
are obligated by law to represent the seller of the property. Of
course, that absolutely weakens your position as buyer.
6. "Don't real estate agents buy all of the good properties
themselves?"
Surprisingly, no. Many agents don't recognize a truly
good deal, even when they sign the seller up. Others are not
sold on the idea of investing for themselves. Besides, most
good deals are created out of the needs of both buyer and
seller. It takes the specialized knowledge you are now gaining
to be able to put the best deals together. Most of what you are
learning is not a part of the typical education of real estate
agents.
7. "The sellers I have talked to don't seem to be very
motivated. What am I doing wrong?"
Most likely you are dealing with the wrong sellers. How
many sellers did you screen before you found this one? Are you
emotionally involved with the seller or property? Are you trying
to use creative financing to make a good deal out of one that's
really mediocre? Does the seller fit the description of flexibility
given earlier?
Unit Two, Page 48
If a seller is unwilling to be creative no matter what you
suggest, he probably isn't truly a flexible seller. Stop wasting
your time with him and keep looking for someone who is willing
to talk terms.
8. "Sellers and Realtors don't answer some of the questions I
ask. How do I find out what I need to know?"
Sellers and their agents are typically hesitant to give you
information you need to know. Try asking the questions in a
different way. Be persistent, but still pleasant. If you still don't
get answers, you may decide you are not dealing with a flexible
seller. Move on to someone else, polishing your skill as you go.
9. "I don't have much time to look for properties. How can I
get going on buying real estate for nothing down?"
The key here is to teach others how to find flexible
sellers for you. Perhaps a spouse or teenage son or daughter
could help. Perhaps you will need to hire someone and pay him
or her a finder's fee for properties you buy. And by all means,
get a real estate agent looking for you. Commissions and
finder's fees can be well worth the cost.
10. "When I find a flexible seller, how do I know a good deal
from a bad deal?"
Good question! Unfortunately, analyzing properties
(and deals) is beyond the scope of this unit. But don't despair.
Subsequent units will tell you everything you need to know.
UNIT THREE
ANALYSIS MADE EASY
Unit Three, Page 2
UNIT THREE
ANALYSIS MADE EASY
3.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Once you have found a property that appears to fall
within your range of interest, your next task is to objectify the
decision-making process as much as possible. "Do I really want
this property?" is a question best taken out of the realm of
emotions and coin-tossing and placed within the realm of hard
facts and cautious analysis.
This is not a time for guesswork. You must know
whether this property deserves serious consideration. Such
assurance requires that you quickly master a complex web of
interconnecting factors in order to come up with a wise and
reasoned decision. This process of "street wise" elimination can
be daunting to the inexperienced; however, it does not have to
be so, if one focuses on certain "governing" focal points that get
Unit Three, Page 3
to the heart of the matter.
What are the "governing" focal points of your decision?
See if you can pick out the most important ones from this
potential list:
M Age of structure
M Location
M Architectural style
M Condition
M Number of bedrooms
M Price
M Flexibility of seller
M Zoning
M Listed or owner sale
M Population of community
M How long it has been for sale
M Time of year
M Property tax assessment
M Financing required
3.2 THE GOVERNING FOCAL POINTS
All of the factors listed above (and many others we
could have listed) are important and may have a bearing on
your decision.
However, only five are truly governing focal points that
will render your decision easier and more objective. They are:
M location
M condition
M price
M flexibility
M financing required
If you can quickly zero in on these five factors and
make a decision about each of them, then you can put together
Unit Three, Page 4
a fairly objective profile of the target property in the form of an
aggregate score.
Consider the logic of this approach. If the owner is not
flexible with terms or price or both, then you may not be able to
swing your deal--no matter what other positive factors come to
light. On the other hand, if the owner is ultimately flexible but
you are going to wind up with a dog in a decaying area, then
you need to stop in your tracks. Similarly, if everything seems
to fall into place but you then learn that a very large down
payment is required for the financing, then the stock of the
property goes down (unless you have a very wealthy partner in
your back pocket).
These governing factors then form an interlocking grid
of decision points that you can pull together into a final score
for a given property. What if you had a decision matrix ready at
hand for each property you were considering? And what if the
scoring process were relatively simple and fast? Would this not
give you the ability to compare scores for various properties
you are interested in and thus reach a more objective
determination?
3.3 THE PROPERTY SELECTION GRID
The Property Selection Grid included in your “Power
Forms” Looseleaf is a powerful way to keep score during your
analysis phase. We have assigned a potential of three points for
each of the five governing focal points. Thus a perfect score will
be fifteen.
Experience has shown that properties scoring nine or
less should very likely be passed over, while properties scoring
12 or higher should be seriously looked at and scrutinized with
a more positive eye. Those scoring near perfect will deserve
your closest attention.
How does the scoring work? We have summarized the
most important points in the grid shown on an adjacent page.
Study carefully the logic behind the scoring and become familiar
Unit Three, Page 5
with the main contours of this decision grid. With a little
practice, you can begin to make decisions very rapidly--even in
your head while you are on the phone or out in the trenches.
Imagine the power you have while facing a prospective
seller if you can instantly "size things up" and arrive at a decision
with lightning speed. If the score turns out to be marginal but
still of interest, there is nothing like "walking away" to stir up the
juices of compromise in a seller, especially sellers who need to
be taught lessons in flexibility. On the other hand, the decision
grid may well protect you from hours of useless negotiating if
you can tell from the outset that the prospects are just not
worth haggling over.
3.4 FOUR TEST CASES
Below are four fictitious test cases that will help you to get used
to the Property Selection Grid. There is enough information
given in each of the test cases for you to arrive at a score for
each. Your assignment is to score each case and thus identify
the most desirable property from this batch. Take a few
minutes and complete this exercise before you go on with this
unit.
Test Case One
You find a fairly decent house where cosmetic improvements of
perhaps $1,000 would help raise the value by perhaps 15%.
The owner is retired and does not seem pressed for cash on the
balance provided you put 15% or more down. However, the
price seems to be around 10% higher than the market place.
All amenities are within a comfortable distance from the
pleasant suburban neighborhood where the house is located.
Score:
Test Case Two
The owner of this clean-as-a-whistle 3-bedroom rental is
moving to a different city and thus is flexible. His price is around
Unit Three, Page 6
10% below the market for a fast sale. The neighborhood is a
working-class area that is okay but somewhat older. The
owner wants you to refinance the loan, but he is still willing to
carry back a part of the equity.
Score:
Test Case Three
The owner of this single-family rental property is getting a
divorce and needs to liquidate. There is quite a bit of structural
work to do before this one can be rented out. The owner needs
cash because of his situation--at least 20% down. However,
the price is heavily discounted--perhaps 30% below the market
place. The neighborhood is very appealing, with easy access to
all amenities.
Score:
Test Case Four
Here is a newly renovated rental home that needs no work
before renting. Because of a tax problem, the seller is willing to
carry all but 5% of the price, which is around 15% below the
market place. However, the neighborhood is rather dowdy, a
factor somewhat offset by fairly good proximity to schools,
churches, and shopping malls.
Score:
Well, what is your decision? Which property receives the
highest score according the decision grid? Does any property
receive a score in the "greater fool" range where you had best
back away?
3.5 THE BARGAIN FINDER FORM
To keep you organized and on task, you can keep notes on a
sheet called the "Bargain Finder." Each time a property attracts
your attention, you reach for the Bargain Finder and follow its
logical flow as you collect data and interview the seller or agent.
A conversational yet professional tone is best. Fill in the form as
you go.
Unit Three, Page 7
3.6 BARGAIN FINDER CHECKLIST
Here is a checklist of important issues and factors to consider
as you fill out each Bargain Finder Form.
Q Owner or Agent? Be clear who it is you are speaking with.
Your negotiation strategy will vary according to this
information.
Q Address. Include also the name of the development,
subdevelopment, or neighborhood in order to understand the
context of the property and aid in gathering more detailed
information about number of homes, different models, etc.,
through title companies or agents.
Q Square Footage. The owner will probably have at least the
approximate square footage, which can be confirmed through a
title company, real estate agency, Multiple Listing Service, etc.
Include the square footage of the basement, garage, or other
structures as separate numbers. The square footage
information will help in your comparative shopping, especially if
you are using cost per square foot as a benchmark for
comparative analysis.
Q Age. The age of the property will assist you in looking for the
important things. For example, if the structure is more than five
years old, you will want to check water heaters, plumbing
fixtures, roof, etc. The age can be confirmed through a title
company, real estate agency, documents at the county
recorder's office, etc.
Q Bedrooms and Baths. The most popular "bread and butter"
homes will have three bedrooms and two baths. Hence it is
important to concentrate on such homes. If a home has only
one bath, you may want to consider adding a second bath to
increase its value. In that case, you should make sure the
property is at least 10% to 20% below the market after you
factor in the cost of adding the bath. If the property scores a 12
or higher using the Decision Grid, you might consider propertyUnit
Three, Page 8
improvement financing, such as FHA Title One Loans and
FHA 203K loans. A local mortgage broker in your area can
provide more details. Check the current FHA regulations.
Q Garage or Carport. One or the other will add considerable
value to the property. If there is neither, then indicate whether
there is room to add one or the other. Be wary in situations
where a garage or carport have been converted to another
room (family room or bedroom) as this may in fact detract
from the value of the property. Also, if you have are interested
in a property that has been converted in this way, be sure to
obtain copies of all plans and building permits that were used
for the conversion. Many lenders will require a copy of them
when a borrower is seeking new financing. That could be at the
time of purchase or when you sell the property in the future. Be
cautious about buying properties with "bootlegged" additions of
any kind.
Q Brick or Frame. Brick homes may be more valuable in
some areas but less valuable in earthquake zones.
Q Other Features. Make note of positive features such as:
pool, spa, tennis court, built-in sauna, 3-car garage, panoramic
view, etc. Negative features might include: master bedroom
overlooking busy intersection, property below flight corridor,
foul odors near by, etc. All such factors affect the property
value.
Q Asking Price. When the seller gives you the asking price,
respond politely with something like: "With so many different
opinions of value in the market place today, how did you arrive
at the asking price?" Then be quiet and listen. Don't haggle over
price yet; you are just testing the seller's motivation at this time
to see how flexible he/she might be. The seller may be using
wishful thinking or setting up a comparable price based on what
he/she thinks neighboring properties might be worth. Your job
will be to determine the true market value, especially using the
Comparable Sold Property section of the Bargain Finder.
Q Why Are You Selling? This question gets to the heart of the
seller's motivation. If there is a compelling reason to sell
Unit Three, Page 9
(moving, divorce, money problems, weary of management,
etc.), the motivation will be high and the flexibility will probably
increase. You should approach this question from several
different angles in order to get to the truth of the matter. Often
the seller will need to be asked this question (or variations)
several times before you get to the bottom of things.
Q What if the Property Doesn't Sell? This is another way of
getting at the seller's motivation. Perhaps his contingencies don't
include alternative financing techniques such as a contract of
sale, seller carry back, or a lease with an option. Perhaps these
techniques would solve the seller's problem.
Q How Long On the Market? This fact is often a clue to
flexibility. If the property has been on the market a long while
(6 months or more), the seller may be more amenable to
creative solutions. If the property has just come on the market,
the seller may be more patient and less flexible. However, if the
property has good potential, you may wish to return to it in 30
or 60 days to see if the flexibility has increased.
Q Any Offers? Once again, this question will likely generate
more clues about the seller's flexibility and tolerance. If you ask
why offers have not been accepted, the seller may divulge his
price range or other important points that will be useful to you
in negotiating.
Q How Soon Do You Need To Sell? If the seller needs to sell
quickly, then you have a clue about flexibility. Fast sales may
require financing techniques such as: contract for sale, lease
option, seller carry back, etc. If the seller is not under pressure
to sell, then you may need to adjust your approach accordingly,
provided the property scores high in the Decision Grid.
Q Lowest Price?. This question is about as close as you can
come to getting at the truth about the seller's price tolerance.
Another way of asking the question would be: "If I gave you all
cash today, what would your lowest price be today?" Streetwise
sellers will probably hedge with this kind of question, since
it is an old adage that the one who divulges the hidden price will
lose. Nevertheless, some sellers will come right out and tell you
Unit Three, Page 10
what the bottom line is. It always pays to ask.
Q How Much Of Your Equity In Cash? Here is yet another
way of getting at the seller's flexibility. This question is a "high
touch" question because it shows that you are sensitive to the
seller's needs.
Q Comparable Sold Property. There is a place on the Bargain
Finder form for you to accumulate information about what
similar properties have sold for. This information is relatively
easy for a real estate agent to obtain. You can also work
through a title company or consult county tax records. In some
areas of the country, you can also subscribe to data base
services where this kind of information can be obtained. A real
estate broker can point you in the right direction. Keep in mind
that sold "comps" provide a powerful way for you to establish
value for the properties you wish to buy. It is your responsibility
to gather this data.
Q Do You Own the Property Free and Clear? If the seller
says "yes," you have a gold mine before you, since flexibility
generally increases in proportion to the equity size. If the seller
responds that he/she has a mortgage on the property, then you
need to get the pertinent facts by asking questions like:
* "What is the remaining balance on the loan?"
* "Is the loan assumable?"
* "Is there a balloon payment coming due?" "When?"
* "Is the note fully amortizing?" "Over what period of time?"
* "What is the interest rate charged on the loan?"
* "Who is the note holder?"
* "What is the monthly payment on this loan?"
All of these questions will help you understand the seller's
motivation and help you to prepare financing solutions. For
Unit Three, Page 11
example, if the loan is assumable, you may need to qualify for it
(although the assumptions fees may be cheaper than the fees to
originate a new loan). If the loan documents state that the loan
is not assumable, it may still pay to negotiate with the lender,
especially if the current interest rates are lower than the loan
interest rate. Also, if there is a balloon payment due soon, you
may have a powerful clue to the seller's flexibility.
Q Secondary Financing. If the seller has borrowed against the
property using a second mortgage (trust deed) or even a third
or subsequent loans, you will need to gather these facts as well
in order to determine equity.
Q Equity. Below the offering price on the right-hand side of the
Bargain Finder write in the total of all the loans against the
property. By subtracting, you can determine what the seller's
equity is. Your whole agenda is to find a way to give the seller
his/her equity in a form acceptable to both parties. Often you
can trade property (boats, cars), assume indebtedness of equal
value, or even exchange other equity in compensation. It does
not always require money to make things work.
Q Proposed Financing. Having determined the value, offering
price, and equity, you are in a position to begin to put together
a financing plan. The unit on creative financing will assist you to
formulate a workable plan. It is essential to be clear from the
outside what end goal you have in mind (controlling
temporarily, buying an keeping, or buying and turning).
Q End Games. At the bottom of the Bargain Finder is a place
for you to establish a preliminary goal for this property (quick
cash or long-term wealth building):
"Assigning contract" -- You tie up the property
with an earnest money form (contract to
purchase) and then assign the contract to
someone else for consideration.
"Sell for cash" -- You buy the property and
then quickly turn it for a profit, with or without
improvements.
Unit Three, Page 12
"Sell for paper" -- You buy the property and
then quickly turn it on a contract for payments.
"Property Management" -- You buy the
property and manage it for profits.
"Partnership" -- You buy the property with the
help of partners, manage it, and split the profits.
Sometimes the partner is a tenant ("equity
participation").
"Trade" -- You buy the property and then trade
it for another property that gives you higher
advantages.
Q Rent Amount. If the seller does not live in the property,
record what the current rent arrangement is.
Q Cash Flow. Below the rent amount, record the total of all
monthly mortgage payments. If the taxes and insurance
payments are not included, then write these down on the
respective lines. Write also any additional costs (monthly figure
to cover ongoing repairs, maintenance, homeowners
association fees, property management expenses, etc.).
Estimate high. Subtract all the expenses from the rental amount
to determine the cash flow for the property (negative or
positive).
3.7 QUESTIONS FOR THE SELLER
The next unit is designed to help you strengthen your
information-gathering and negotiating skills. Included there is a
chart of additional questions to ask the seller, including the
"hidden agenda" reasons you are really asking these key
questions. As in all business transactions, the "high touch"
dimension is important to master.
3.8 ASSIGNMENTS
Unit Three, Page 13
1. Process a Bargain Finder Form for at least six different
properties. Be thorough and complete. Get the feel for the
decision-making parameters of this kind of property analysis.
2. Do any of the six test properties hold out potential as
profitable and desirable ventures? Do any of them qualify to be
taken to the next step of negotiating and making written offers?
In our research over the years, we have found that it
takes, on an average, around ten offers to wind up with a truly
creative and profitable deal. This being the case, how many
Bargain Finder Forms do you think you would have to process
in order to identify ten properties that qualify to receive written
offers? The answer depends, of course, on your own skill at
weeding out the less-than-desirable candidates and assembling
a target sampling from which to choose the most highly qualified
properties.
However, it is not unreasonable to suppose that you
would need to analyze two or three properties before finding
one that you felt was worthy of carrying to the next level of
negotiating and offer-making. This being the case, your ten
offers would follow the analysis of up to thirty different
properties that seemed interesting to you. In other words, this
(like all business ventures) is really a numbers game--but one
with carefully worked out rules and screening parameters.
3. Work on your "mind set." Most beginning real estate
investors fail to grasp the fact that this kind of business depends
on numbers. To wind up with a great investment deal, you will
likely have to make at least ten offers (on a variety of
properties)--and sometimes multiple offers in sequence on a
given property. Therefore, you will have to process several
dozen Bargain Finder Forms in order to penetrate to the ten
best properties to make offers on. And, regressing even further,
to locate those several dozen Bargain Finder type properties,
you will need to consider many dozens more as part of your
investigation.
Knowing this ahead of time will spare you the trauma of
a long sequence of inevitable reversals and rejections as you
Unit Three, Page 14
move along the pathway to that one acceptable deal. Each "no"
is just another milestone along the way to that "yes" you are
looking for.
4. Further Assignment. Let's assume that you could make $250
dollars per month free and clear for every unit of residential real
estate (single family home) you purchased and put into service
over time. Ignoring appreciation and profit-taking at the point of
sale in the future, how many such units of real estate would you
need in order to reach your monthly income goal? Write this
answer down in the following chart and then calculate the rest
of the "numbers" that apply to your particular goal:
M Number of units needed to reach goal:
M Number of offers I need to make in order to acquire this
many units (assume that each offer you make is accepted, and
that you will need to make ten offers for each unit acquired):
M Number of Bargain Finder Forms I need to fill out to find
this many properties to make offers on (assume you will need
to fill out at least three Bargain Finder Forms for each offer you
wind up making):
M Number of properties I will need to screen (in classifieds,
through real estate agents, through for sale signs, etc.) in order
to find enough to analyze in order to meet my goal (assume that
you will have to consider at least three properties before finding
one that will qualify to do a Bargain Finder Form on):
Note: you may have a heart attack when you finish this
exercise and find that you will need to screen and consider
perhaps hundreds of properties in order to wind up with one
or two great deals. Do not lose heart! This is a numbers game.
Sometimes you will luck into a tremendous deal right off the
bat. But in most cases, it takes a considerable amount of
screening and analyzing before you can make a purchase. That
is the way it should be, since you are a professional who will be
going "by the numbers."
With experience, the screening process can go very
Unit Three, Page 15
quickly, and as you internalize the patterns of decision making
covered in this unit, you will begin to develop an intuitive sixth
sense about the properties you are considering. In the
meantime, move carefully and cautiously in order to minimize
risk and maximize control over the consequences of your
decisions. Best of success!
UNIT FOUR
NEGOTIATING A
WIN/WIN DEAL
THE "HIGH TOUCH" OF REAL ESTATE
Unit Four, Page 2
UNIT FOUR
NEGOTIATING A
WIN/WIN DEAL
THE "HIGH TOUCH" OF REAL ESTATE
4.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Negotiating to win involves two distinct skills: negotiating
and winning. In this unit, you will learn both how to negotiate and
how to win.
The acquisition and exchange of real property offers one of
the best opportunities for productive negotiation available in our free
enterprise system. That opportunity is due in large part to the fact
that the value of real estate is uniquely market-determined. What
does that mean? To a significant degree, the value of real estate
depends on how valuable someone thinks it is--and your ability to
negotiate an outstanding deal depends on your ability to influence a
seller's thinking. We call it negotiation.
Unit Four, Page 3
This unit will help you develop the skills that will enable you
to build a professional residential and commercial real estate
portfolio. It will show:
M What to buy, and why
M How to mesh the seller's true needs with your own carefully
established goals
M How to satisfy both buyer and seller at the same time
M How to close without pressure
M How to perfect timing, tone, and preparation
And you won't stop at learning the mechanics of these skills--
you'll also learn how to effectively apply them.
You will learn that the negotiating process is not only the most
potentially important of the steps in a successful real estate
transaction, but that it is the most educational. As your knowledge
grows, so will your confidence in your ability to favorably negotiate
price, rates, payments, and dates. You will become skilled at
questioning, clarifying, isolating needs, and illustrating solutions. You
will learn how to eliminate foot-dragging in your negotiating
counterpart by inviting him or her to join you in the winner's circle.
This unit will help hone your negotiating vision so that you can
identify the opportunities others usually overlook, and
it will provide you with the tools you need to become a success
at buying prime real estate!
4.2 A FEW TERMS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Blanket mortgage: A legal instrument providing as security not
only the property being purchased, but other properties owned by
the buyer as well. It can be included in negotiations to persuade a
seller who balks at your offer of little or no money down.
Deferred maintenance: Required maintenance that has not
been done that you will have to finance after you have acquired the
property. Deferred maintenance is a bad situation except when
thoroughly researched, and it is used to generate price/terms
concessions at least equal to the projected cost of the deferred
Unit Four, Page 4
maintenance.
Down payment: The initial payment on a property. The down
payment is one of the prime negotiating variables, and it can vary
markedly in amount, makeup, and time of delivery. it does not have
to be in cash. Some sellers need cash to buy another property, but
some use it merely to hold the buyer to the transaction--and some
don't need it at all.
Escrow: A disinterested third party who prepares and holds
appropriate documents and who facilitates the purchase, sale, and
exchange of real property. Title research and insurance are often
included. The escrow is usually a title company, an attorney, the
arm of a financial institution, or some other company established for
the purpose and expert in document preparation. The escrow's
neutral posture guarantees that all the i's still be dotted and all the t's
will be crossed. It's a good idea to employ an escrow agent, even
when purchasing property from your brother-in-law.
Flexible seller: A real estate owner who strongly wants to sell
his property. The reasons for his desperation vary, and are key
factors to successful negotiation. Common reasons are insufficient
cash flow, too much time involved in management, and the need to
move out of state.
Homework: An activity that must precede any successful real
estate transaction. Why? Because most "impulse" acquisitions
aren't very successful. Homework helps you avoid disaster because
it establishes a link between your investment of time and the
probability of profit.
Interview: The fact-finding you conduct during negotiation,
just like a newspaper reporter interviews before he writes a story.
Your offer will depend on the facts you learn during the interview.
Always use a previously determined, well-thought-out list of
questions.
Negotiation: A process of discussion with unknown end
results. Negotiation implies give and take, the offering and/or
acceptance of alternatives, and mutual flexibility. Negotiation is
almost always involved in real estate transactions.
Unit Four, Page 5
Offer: The buyer's suggested price and terms. An offer
should always be in writing. Under the contract laws in most states,
the offer becomes a contract if signed by both the buyer and the
seller. If the seller changes a single word, he makes a "counteroffer"
that essentially lets the buyer off the hook. Many verbal offers that
are refused would probably be much more seriously considered if
they were presented in writing with an earnest money check
attached.
Win/win: A negotiating philosophy that allows all parties to
secure their original or revised objectives and to complete a
transaction that they feel has successfully served their own best
interests. It implies different interests on the part of each participant.
Win/win is especially successful when negotiations are approached
as a set of mutual problems to be mutually resolved.
4.3 KEY POINTS ABOUT NEGOTIATION
As you read this unit, keep the following points in mind:
M Patience is more than a virtue. It is the key to thoroughness,
opportunity, and financial reward.
M If you don't like someone, it may be difficult to willingly grant him
advantage during negotiations, and he will feel the same way about
you. Follow the Golden Rule in your transactions, and the "gold"
will begin to follow you.
M Self-interest is selfish interest. Your seller's problems are
obstacles in the path toward your goals. Listen. Learn. Help your
seller solve his problems, and you'll reach your goals.
M Negotiating is like riding a bicycle: you seldom fall off after you
learn the technique, you get a little bit better every time out, and you
never forget how.
M A negotiation is a process, not a product. It takes place over
time, and begins with your first interest in the property. Take your
time. Deadlines can lead to redlines.
Unit Four, Page 6
M If the seller doesn't want to sell the property at least as badly as
you want to buy it, you'll both lose. You will pick up on an
extraordinary value only if you are dealing with a truly flexible seller.
If your seller isn't flexible, look over his shoulder. There's one just
down the road.
M Don't assume anything. Seller motivations can be incredible: high
rises have sold for $1 down.
M If you feel your emotions rising, let your interest fall. An ugly
black box that produces a cash flow is worth much more than a
breathtaking rental that doesn't.
M If you have questions about any of this material, High Touch is
only a phone call away.
4.4 HOW TO NEGOTIATE TO WIN
You've honed in on an investment property, and you think
you're ready to start negotiating. But hold on to your checkbook.
Before you begin any negotiations, you must objectively review the
investment requirements you've already established. And you need
to emphasize the word objective.
Remember: successful real estate investing is done on a
numbers basis. While certain intangibles--such as the pride of
ownership--contribute to the overall desirability of real estate as an
investment vehicle, the property you're considering must always be
viewed simply as a mechanism for obtaining wealth. The real, and
realistically projectable, numbers must remain your primary
motivation for buying. "Visual appeal" or uptown location aren't
important unless those factors have a direct impact on the numbers.
Your desire to purchase, in other words, must be as objective
as the figures that originally generated it. One way to guarantee
your objectivity is to have more than one property at the negotiating
stage simultaneously, each an equally acceptable addition to your
real estate portfolio. If you find yourself particularly attracted to a
property, your prospects for a win/win negotiation might be dim.
Why? Just as successful negotiation requires flexibility on the seller's
Unit Four, Page 7
side, it also requires a realistic "don't carer" on the buyer's side.
The fact that you are entering the negotiations will signal to the
seller that you obviously have an interest in his property, buy you
must be willing to break off the discussion immediately if the
numbers do not meet your previously (and calmly) established goals.
If you carry that kind of an attitude to the negotiations, the seller will
notice, will quickly lose interest in playing games with you, and will
start negotiating on a straightforward, nonemotional basis.
Before starting the actual negotiating discussions, review your
motivation for beginning the search, your investment goals, and the
specifics of the opportunity under consideration. Does the property
fit? Are the figures realistic? Are they verifiable? Is the seller really
flexible?
Be careful and realistic. Don't hesitate to discover negative
answers to any of these questions, and respond accordingly. Other
properties are available! The considerable effort you've invested so
far on this property is decidedly not a waste of time if you decide to
reject it for any sound reason. The real estate investment market is
literally humming with "average" transactions that provide average
(which can mean negative) returns. You must avoid that market.
By focusing on research, preparation, attitude, and negotiating skills,
you will bypass the average in favor of the truly extraordinary
opportunities, and you will be prepared to deal with them when you
find them.
While the process requires a more highly developed sense of
patience than that found in the typical impulse or emotional buyer,
you'll find that patience pays off!
When Andrew S. was negotiating with the seller of a singlefamily
home, he found that the house had an existing appraisal of
over $65,000. He learned further that the seller was willing to
accept a price of only $54,000 if Andrew could relieve him of
personal debt obligations of more than $15,000.
How did Andrew know what the seller would accept? Did he
have a crystal ball? Of course not! He learned the seller's
conditions by following successful negotiation. Let's review those
rules and see how effectively they can ensure your success.
Unit Four, Page 8
THE ONE CLUE YOU CANNOT OVERLOOK
The most critical factor to look for in analyzing the seller and
his situation is flexibility. If the seller is a flexible don't wanter to
begin with, the buyer's task is 90 percent completed. The rest is a
matter of win/win problem solving.
In general, there are two broad phases of interaction between
the buyer and the seller. The first is the initial "sounding out" contact.
The second is the more detailed negotiation related to the formal
offer to purchase. During the first, it is absolutely essential that you
determine the degree to which the seller will be flexible. Even if you
are coming in with cash from partners, you will need to understand
the general degree to which the seller is willing to discount. Without
the foundation of flexibility established, there really is no reason to
proceed to the next phase of detailed negotiation.
4.5 THREE MAJOR OBJECTIVES OF THE INITIAL
CONTACT
1. The first objective, then, is to assemble and interpret clues that
will indicate flexibility of the seller (a direct function of how much a
don't wanter he is).
2. The second objective is to gather significant information about the
property and how it might eventually be financed.
3. The third objective is to build up trust with the seller so that he
will have confidence in you.
SETTING THE STAGE
Since the buyer-seller interaction is the most important scene
in the investment "drama," it is critical that the buyer be clear about
his or her role.
The attitudes, assumptions, and objectives of the buer vis-avis
the seller--i.e., his role--need to be clear prior to the interview.
Unit Four, Page 9
Naturally each buyer will proceed from a slightly different frame of
reference; however, the following five points will begin to outline a
pattern that has proven very successful over the years.
1. People First. Your primary objective, of course, is to obtain
solid investment properties with little or no money down from your
own pocket. However, all interests are best served if yhou
remember to approach the seller as a person, rather than as a means
to an end. Cultivate a genuine interst in the people you contact; they
are, after all, fascinating to interact with. Each seller has his or her
own needs, problems, talents, goals, interests, philosophy of life.
Not all will be willing to give the price or terms you need. But in
nearly all cases, they can be enjoyable klto meet and talk with if
appraoched in a spirit of friendship and genuine interest. This makes
the work rewarding and fun.
2. Play the Role of Problem Sover. The don't wanter seller
always has a problem that can be solved or alleviated through
disposing of the property. Problems create willingness on the part of
the seller to be flexible in price or terms (or both). In such cases the
buyer can enter the scene as a problem sovler. This role is neither
self-deception on the buyer's part nor a case of the exploiting wolf in
sheep's clothing. In fact, if the deal is structured correctly, the buyer
does solve a problem for the seller with the result that all parties win.
To look at it in a somewhat humorous light, the buyer is like a
physician who "examines" the patient (seller) for tell-taler clues and
symptoms of "don't wanter-itis" and then prescribes certain
remedies. Naturally, the poers and resources of the physician are
not without limits. He might, therefore, take the followng approach
(to carry the comparison a little further):
"I see that you have certain challenges and needs that must be
satisfied. I can help you to the extent of my resources. And I
want to help if I can. If it turns out that my resources are not
adequate, I sincerely hope things will work out for you soon."
If the seller is not receptive to your "remedies," then you know
that he is not a don't wanter. Don't waste your time with him. Keep
on looking for someone you can help.
Unit Four, Page 10
This problenm-solving attitude, if genuine and pervasive
throughout the interchange, will infuse your interactions with a sense
of humanity and higher purpose. Real estate, after all, is not an end
in itself but a means of leading to the solution of people problems.
Of course, the attitude of problem solver is largely an innter affair on
the part of the bueyur and should not manifest itself in any but the
most subtle ways. The p[oint is, you are dealing with a particular
group of seller (the don't wanters), and you will find your work more
rewarding if you can cultivate a genuine interest in them as people
whom you can help while you are helping yourself.
3. Be Penetrating But Polite. In your questioning, you must be
thorough. However, thoroughness can be accompanied by good
taste, politeness, discretion, and sesitivity to the don't wanter's
circumstances. The recent widow or divorcee, for example, should
be handled differently from an out-of-the-area seller who simply
wants to get rid of a property he does not have time to manage.
4. Pace Your Delivery. Generally speaking, you will want to pace
your initial interview with the seller so that it is fairly leisurely and
low-key. This will put the seller more at ease and give you the
opportunity to build trust. In fact, act somewhat like a "don't wanter
buyer." Toss in a line like: "You really should keep t his property." It
will surprise you how the seller will open up.
5. Be Persistent. The final element of the buyer's attitude is
acceptance of the fact that he will be playing a numbers game. Of
100 sellers you contact, perhaps only a few will be the type of don't
wanter you will readily want to deal with. However, it may take only
two or three good don't wanters a year to enable you to reach
financial independence over time. Stick with it!
SUMMARY: THE FIVE P'S OF INTERACTION
The major points for setting the stage can be summarized as follows:
1. People First
2. Problem Solving
3. Penetrating But Polite
4. Paced Slowly
Unit Four, Page 11
5. Persistence.
4.6 WHAT QUESTIONS SHOULD I ASK?
The preceding section outlined the tone and underlying
philosophy of how to approach the seller in the initial contact. We
have included a list of questions to guide you in negotiating and
gathering information. The list on the adjacent page includes the
basic questions that might be asked, together with the "hidden
agenda" reasons for asking these questions. You might want to
record these questions on small note cards for quick reference and
note taking during the interview.
4.7 FOURTEEN RULES FOR SUCCESSFUL
NEGOTIATION
This section contains general information on real estate
negotiating that will help you to have more success with the followup
of your interaction with prospective sellers. You will find many of
the questions in the summary chart above will come up as you go
through these fourteen rules.
RULE 1: NEGOTIATE IN PERSON
Buildings may be boards and bricks; but real estate is a
people business. As obvious as it may seem, the first rule for
successful negotiation is that you must be there, in person, to do it.
Unit Four, Page 12
"I NEED MORE MONEY."
A. I'm real estate conscious: I'm going to buy
additional property with my proceeds, so I need cash
down.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. I'll raise the purchase price by the amount of your
down payment. You can have your asset, the contract,
and borrow against it for your investment needs.
2. My credit is good. I'll give you a note against which
you can secure a loan for your down payment.
3. I'll make you an equity participant in this property
when it is sold.
4. I'll put you in touch with a syndicator who uses
investor's trust deeds in place of cash.
5. I'll refinance this property and make advance
payments to you in the amount of the down payment.
6. I'll buy back my note and trust deed from you, at a
discount.
7. I'll find you a property for no money down.
B. I'm debt conscious.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. I'll assume your debts.
Unit Four, Page 13
2. I'll guarantee a loan to pay off your debts.
3. I'll lend you money myself.
4. I'll make advance payments.
5. I'll assign collected rents to you in the amount of the
debt.
C. I'm security conscious. Why should I sell with
nothing down? You could run my property into the
ground.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. I'll give you a blanket mortgage on another property.
2. I'll give you a one-year option to rescind in the event
of improper maintenance.
3. Let's go see other properties I own (or have owned).
4. I'll permit you to stay in as part-owner. You can
oversee maintenance yourself.
5. We can escrow rent payments, and pay a
management company of your choice to run the
property.
6. I'll pay you to manage this property.
D. I'm investment conscious. I need an income stream.
I'm going to invest the down payment and collect
interest.
You respond with ideas such as:
Unit Four, Page 14
1. I'll raise the interest rate, and my payments, to equal
what you would receive by investing the down
payment.
2. I'll guarantee resale within five years. You'll have
your cash balloon to invest by then.
3. I'll pay you to manage this property. That way you
can have money coming in.
E. I'm tax conscious. If I sell this property, taxes will
eat me alive.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. You're taxed only on money actually received. No
down, no tax.
2. I'll send you a CPA who can fully explain the tax
ramifications of this sale.
3. We can delay closing until January 1 of next year.
4. I have a copy of the Tax Reform Act right here, and
it says....
5. We can set up a trust for your children.
6. We can set up a tax-free exchange for another
(smaller or larger) property.
"I NEED MONTHLY PAYMENTS."
A. That's just the way it's done.
Unit Four, Page 15
You respond with ideas such as:
Most major investments pay quarterly or annually.
Stocks are an example. Real estate syndications may
take years to pay off.
B. I need the monthly income.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. The less you draw, the more interest accumulation
you'll have at balloon time.
2. My payments to you will be a percentage of the
property's net income. The better the price to me, the
better the payments to you.
3. Part of your need for income was to feed this
property. I'll be doing that now. And the time you'll
have available by not managing the property can be
used to generate an income elsewhere.
4. I can get you a job.
5. I'll hire you to manage this property, and others as
well, if you wish.
Unit Four, Page 16
For years, and for a variety of reasons, otherwise professional
investors have found other avenues for this most critical activity: the
phone company, the post office, the Realtor, the brother-in-law.
Perhaps these intermediaries were meant to "buffer" what was felt to
be a difficult or unpleasant task. What they actually accomplished,
however, was to confuse, stretch out, and otherwise muddle up
what should have been an opportunity for spontaneous, timely, and
clear communication between those who really had the most at
stake.
People prefer peers. Presidents feel at one with presidents,
carpenters with carpenters, real estate principals with real estate
principals. Intermediaries are fine for preliminary fact-finding, but
the actual negotiation of price and terms--followed by contractual
documentation--is hardly preliminary.
Andrew S. could have sent his attorney, agent, or even a
friend to meet with the seller of the $65,000 single-family home.
Instead he took the time and effort to meet personally with the
owner of the property. He knew that one of his important roles was
to be a problem solver and the only way to solve a seller's problems
is to understand them. Andrew was much more confident of his
ability to recognize the potential problems if he could meet
personally with the seller. He could read the seller's body language
and establish a feeling of trust by meeting with the man one on one.
Agents dealing with agents do perform a service, but they also
act as insulation, preventing you from doing some "creative listening"
and from discovering the negotiating nuances that can thus be
revealed. At the negotiation meeting the functionaries have come
and gone. These are summit talks. You hold them face to face.
You can't interpret body language over the phone. voice inflections
are difficult to assess when the words are typed. The very real
benefits of eye contact, a friendly manner, and a firm handshake
can't be readily transmitted through walls.
Negotiating is not just another step in the process. It is the
culmination of all of the steps that have come before. It is the key to
your ultimate success as a real estate investor. Do not send a
henchman. Go yourself.
Unit Four, Page 17
RULE 2: NEGOTIATE PRICE, RATES, PAYMENTS, AND
DATES
If Rule 1 involves the who in the process, Rule 2 brings in the
what. "Negotiate" implies discussion, give and take, the offering
and/or acceptance of alternatives. It is a way for buyer and seller to
weigh incentives--and to permit excess air to escape from inflated
demands.
There is more than a single "ante" in the game of real estate
negotiation. There are five: price, interest rate, down payment,
monthly payment, and closing date.
After Andrew S. and the seller were comfortable with each
other, Andrew asked the seller what he wanted for his home. He
didn't start by asking what the seller would accept, but rather what
he wanted.
The seller said he wanted $65,000, with no time contract, all
cash, and an immediate closing. In effect the seller said that the
price was $65,000; the interest rate did not apply, since he did not
want to carry a contract; the down payment was one hundred
percent cash; there would be no monthly payment because of the
cash price; and the closing date was within seven days.
Andrew's previous research on the property and the seller told
him that the seller's initial request was only the starting point. As the
negotiation proceeded, Andrew was able to negotiate each of these
five areas in a profitable win/win situation.
Relatively few real estate transactions are consummated to
precisely the price and terms originally asked. Due to the nature of
the marketplace, few sellers anticipate the receipt of a full-price, fullterms
offer. They have learned that sophisticated buyers
traditionally massage the competitive seller for concessions to
"sweeten" the deal--which may, after all, be under simultaneous
negotiation with another of perhaps equal merit.
Frequently, those concessions will be built in to the stated
Unit Four, Page 18
price and terms. In other words, there will be some things the seller
can automatically give up without sacrificing the financial objectives
he established for the ultimate sale. While these concessions are
frequently available, they are virtually never granted freely. They
must be requested--specifically, skillfully, and persistently.
It is imperative, then, that you enter the negotiations with a
completely open mind, not only because of your own mix of
requirements, but because of the seller's as well. Particularly, you
must drive from your mind any notion that the seller's thought
processes operate anything like your own, or that what might appear
outrageous to you will automatically be seen in the same light by the
seller. Tens and even hundreds of thousands of dollars worth of
buyer benefits often go down the drain simply because the buyer
was embarrassed to ask! Sure, your request may seem to border
on the ludicrous given your particular set of circumstances, but it
may fit the seller's circumstances like a glove.
There are two points to remember: one, your seller has a
reason for selling, and, two, going in, you don't know what it is.
Don't assume! If he has a $5,000 note reaching the end of its
second extension tomorrow and you're offering 6 percent down on
a $100,000 property, all other terms--save inclusion of immediate
family members--may be, in fact, quite acceptable. Don't lie down
on the job. Inquire. You snooze, you lose.
Regardless of the seller's motivation, or, in, fact, the logic of
his "hot button", you still possess the tools to effect a profitable
transaction. When preparing your offer, think of the five negotiating
elements from the seller's perspective. By patiently questioning the
seller, you find out not only which of the five negotiating elements are
the most significant in this case, but, by definition, those that are less
so. Focus on the important elements, and you may be pleasantly
surprised at the overall benefits available to you.
For some, price is the overriding consideration. Perhaps the
seller bought wrong, and is trying to recoup the results of his own
lack of sophistication. Perhaps his assessment of the market has led
him to a faulty assessment of value--but one he "knows" is right.
Perhaps Uncle Louie is looking for his down payment back, with
Unit Four, Page 19
interest, out of profits.
For others, interest rates can be greater determinants than the
asking price itself. A seller who is adamant about the price may be
flexible enough on rates for you to make up the difference between
what you want to pay and what he wants to receive. By having your
bank prepare two mortgage amortization tables--at the asking price
but with different rates--you can readily determine the out-of-pocket
difference at the end of each period, and negotiate from a position of
knowledge.
Jay C. had held an eleven-acre wooded hillside in Minnesota
for twelve years,
and had settled on a hell-or-high water value of $13,000 for the
rural plot. Frank B., a neighboring farmer who was looking for
timber and grazing space, had no problem with the price, but
thought interest was a communist conspiracy and refused to pay it.
After several negotiating sessions, all focused on the single factor of
interest, the deal was made on a small down payment, a three-year
carryback and balloon, and interest payments that were half the
going rate. Jay got his price, and Frank got his timber and
grassland, all because interest rates were negotiated.
Another flexible element in the negotiating process is down
payment. The down payment is definitely not viewed uniformly by
sellers. It may be used to meet emergency cash requirements, to
provide the cash for additional investments, or to simply bind an
unknown buyer to the sale. If relatively large periodic payments or
an early balloon date will satisfy the seller's cash needs, then the
down payment requirements may be minimal.
Once again Andrew S. began listening to the seller, he began
to understand why he was selling his property. The $65,000 home
had a first trust deed of $27,000 at 8 percent interest. The home
had a second of $7,000 at 21 percent interest and payments of
$568 per month. The seller's wife and two children had recently
been in an automobile accident--and they were uninsured. Hospital
and doctor bills exceeded $8,000. Other pressing debts added
another $7,000.
Unit Four, Page 20
The seller was not well versed in real estate financing and
frankly believed that an all-cash offer was the only way to solve his
problems. Andrew asked him if he would forgo the down payment
if Andrew could take care of the seller's debt payments for him.
The seller said yes.
Major transactions have been completed with as little as one
dollar down. The point to remember is that the amount, and even
the form, of the down payment is traditionally on the table for
discussion as another recognized element in your negotiating arsenal.
Monthly payments are usually computed through the use of
amortization tables, based on the length of the financing period. On
a private transaction, a "stop" date is usually included, at which time
a balloon payment of the remaining monies is due. The length, the
stop date, and even the actual monthly outlay are all negotiable.
Many transactions are completed with interest-only payments.
Some don't even require full interest to be paid, creating a negative
amortization that is expected to be offset by income and/or
appreciation. Payments can be monthly, quarterly, or annually.
Where the down payment is sufficient, there may be no periodic
payments at all.
When Andrew S. was negotiating the down payment for the
$65,000 home, he found that the seller was very flexible on other
items once he learned Andrew could solve the immediate $15,000
problem
. The seller even offered to drop the price of the home as an
incentive.
Andrew proposed to refinance the property with a new loan
that would pay off the existing first trust deed, the second high
interest mortgage, and the $8,000 in medical bills. Because the
payments would be higher, Andrew proposed that the seller take
back his equity of $12,000 (the difference between the purchase
price of $54,000 and all the encumbrances, including medical bills)
in the form of a note that was payable over the next 15 years at
eleven percent per annum. The payments would be $136.39 per
month. The seller agreed.
Finally, the closing date for the transaction may vary
Unit Four, Page 21
substantially, according to the needs of both parties. Bound by a
personal note for earnest money, some closing dates are delayed by
90 to 180 days or more to permit the buyer to raise the required
funds. Sophisticated investors often automatically extend closing to
the maximum limit allowed in order to find buyers and realize
extensive profits from a simultaneous closing.
A dramatic example of that philosophy occurred recently in
Tucson, Arizona. Twelve thousand acres of prime industrial and
residential land owned by the estate of the reclusive billionaire
Howard Hughes was purchased by a local savings institution and its
British parent company for some $70 million . Less than half the
acreage was sold for $50 million within weeks of the original closing.
Is anything sacred in negotiations? No. Not in real estate
transactions. If a productive discussion is to be held, virtually every
aspect of the transaction must be available for negotiation. If the
seller is firm in price, then negotiate terms to your advantage. If the
range of terms appears to be non-negotiable, hone in on price. If
the seller won't give much on either price or terms, he probably is
not truly anxious, and isn't motivated enough to ensure you of a
profitable transaction. There is another deal for you--a better one--
down the road.
RULE 3: ASK QUESTIONS
By now, you should be realizing the importance of conducting
these discussions in person. They are rich with potential, by far the
most productive hours you will invest in any particular deal. For that
potential to be realized, however, it is necessary for you to be an
active participant. But by no means does this imply that you will be
doing the majority of the talking.
You would do well, in fact, not to consider these as
negotiating sessions at all, but as educational sessions. You are here
to find out certain things. If this investigation reveals the quantity and
quality of facts you are seeking, you have the option of purchasing
the property. If not, conduct another inquiry elsewhere.
As a result, the seller--not you--should do most of the talking.
Unit Four, Page 22
You must exercise skill as an interviewer and as a creative listener,
but your counterpart is the one who should be offering the
information.
Let's go back to the example of Andrew's interview with the
seller of the $65,000 home. When Andrew sat down with the
seller, the first real question he asked was, "Why are you selling?"
Then Andrew listened.
Once Andrew understood those reasons, he was able to
negotiate a purchase that provided a solution for the seller, at the
same time meeting his own objectives. The seller told Andrew what
he needed--$15,000 of debt relief, and Andrew was able to
provide it. The payments on Andrew's new first loan of $42,000
(over twenty-five years at 11 percent) were $412 per month. Now
Andrew was facing a debt service of $548 per month, including the
payment to the seller. Andrew was certain that he could rent the
house for at least $625 per month, an amount high enough to
provide a break-even cash flow.
To be a good interviewer, you must do your homework. This
is not a "free-association" interview or a spontaneous exchange.
You must determine what it is that you wish to accomplish, and you
need to formulate the questions that are most likely to generate the
appropriate response. If you want to determine whether the seller is
flexible, your questions might revolve around terms, timing, and
near-term seller activities.
"Would you consider a lease-purchase arrangement?" may be
a conversational inquiry, but a positive response tells you that the
seller does not need a substantial amount of cash immediately--and
that the value of having someone else take the property now is
greater to him than the possibility of some future sale.
"When would you like to close?" is intended to do more than
permit you to clear your calendar for the selected afternoon. If
you're negotiating in September and the seller says he'd just as soon
wait until after the first of the year for tax purposes, you know you
have an entirely different set of needs than if he'd responded,
"Friday!"
Unit Four, Page 23
If social chit-chat reveals that your seller has the movers
dropping by the first part of the week for his transfer to Atlanta, you
know something about his motivation that you wouldn't have known
if you hadn't asked.
The point is, do ask--and listen attentively to the response.
Once your seller's flexible status has been established, your
questions should be directed to the property itself, with a view
toward neutralizing any expectations of high profit the seller may
have had in mind. Review current and planned zoning for the area,
for example. Upzoning may be potentially profitable over the long
run, but the potential of a convenience store being built on the vacant
lot down the street could certainly have a negative effect on value
today.
Other location-related questions might have a similarly
enlightening effect on the seller's mind: "Do those trucks make that
much noise at night?" "Isn't that where the break-in occurred?"
"My daughter would have to walk a mile to the nearest school?" All
are almost insignificant questions individually, but their cumulative
effect can set the seller into a much more realistic frame of mind.
Ask about anything you notice that appears to require
attention, and some things that don't. "When was the roof last
replaced?" might establish a negative, even if it doesn't leak. "How
long have you been trying to sell?" can, too. Point out any deferred
maintenance, and jot it down on a clipboard or notebook you carry
for the purpose. You're an investor, after all, and evidence of your
thoroughness and professionalism will be noted and remembered by
the seller when--and if--negotiations actually begin. Any odors,
stains, or other evidence of past events should be questioned rather
than simply commented on. Requiring the seller to provide answers
that may not be immediately available, and from which negative
implications may be drawn, is a part of the "attention-getting"
process that can convert an aloof or unrealistic seller into one more
able to observe the sale from your perspective.
Carol T. had purchased her first investment property and was
now looking for her second. She had placed an ad in the local
newspaper saying she purchased homes as a private investor.
Unit Four, Page 24
Whenever someone responded to her ad, she immediately took out
a form and asked literally fifty questions or more. The truly flexible
sellers didn't mind answering the questions; Carol told them she
needed the information in order to put together an offer that
provided for the needs of all parties.
Martin S. called Carol back and provided the information she
needed. After going through her form, she made an appointment to
meet with Martin at the property. When they met, Carol brought
her questionnaire with her, visibly attached to a large clipboard.
Martin knew that Carol was serious and was interested in getting
correct information.
As they began their conversation, Carol kept glancing at the
clipboard, asking questions. Martin began to look at the property a
little differently when Carol asked, "Have the tenants ever moved
out without paying the rent?"
"When was the last time you had the sewer pipe flushed to the
street?"
"Has the property ever experienced a loss from vandalism?"
Carol didn't really expect a negative answer to any of these
questions, but she wanted Martin to start looking at the property as
a potential buyer instead of as a seller.
By getting into the habit of examining prospective properties
with a fine-toothed comb, involving your seller, you will become
adept at "eye-opening" and may well save yourself from buying
properties whose deferred maintenance requirements consume the
bulk of your anticipated profit.
RULE 4: BE PATIENT
Buying property properly is similar, in some respects, to
youthful romance. The eager suitor is often rejected, while the
person who plays "hard-to-get" is strangely enticing. It is an
undeniable human trait for people, or things, that seem inaccessible
to become particularly attractive.
Unit Four, Page 25
The scenario works in real estate, too. When reviewing the
property, take care not to appear too eager, too interested. Remain
somewhat aloof, indifferent. Imply, directly or otherwise, that this is
but one of several properties you are considering. Using the
information from your question session, justify your indifference with
summary comments relating to overall suitability, condition, and
value.
When Martin S. Heard Carol T. ask questions that imposed a
slightly negative atmosphere on the negotiating process, he asked,
"Are you serious about this property?"
Carol responded that she was, but it was one of three
properties she was seriously considering. Martin knew that Carol
was a serious potential buyer, but that she wasn't going to act from
emotion alone. The property would have to stand on its own
investment potential alone. At no time during the interview process
did Carol act overly excited about the property. Martin could tell
she was interested, but nothing more.
RULE 5: BUILD TRUST BY BEING SENSITIVE TO THE
SELLER'S INTERESTS
Negotiation, of course, is a two-way street. No one needs to
tell each person to care for his own interests. The wise negotiator,
however, will spend an equal amount of time demonstrating a
willingness to protect the interests of the "other side". This is not a
misapplication of altruism, but an operating philosophy that will serve
you well and profitably over the long run.
It is the seller, not the buyer, who most frequently operates
under circumstances of some tension. Buyers, typically, are
pursuing an optional course. Acquiring property is a desire for
them, but usually not a need. While divesting properties is frequently
optional for sellers, it is seldom so for flexible sellers. Whether the
reason be money, management headaches, job transfer, or some
other factor, the flexible seller typically feels a need to sell, and
experiences the full range of pressures (and real or imagined fears)
that can accompany it.
Unit Four, Page 26
When Carol and Martin were negotiating the purchase of the
duplex, Carol began to feel a certain amount of reserved tension
coming from Martin. As the negotiation interview progressed, she
learned that Martin was selling because he had come to hate the
management of rental property. During the preceding month, Martin
had spent eighteen different evenings at the duplex for one reason or
another. (Most of the problems could have been solved if Martin
had appointed one of the tenants as resident manager, and then
given him a $25 rent allowance for handling small repairs.)
Carol recognized this anxiety and began to focus her
negotiation accordingly. She saw that she could help Martin win
while winning herself.
The seller's pressure and fears can provide a real opportunity
for you. But rather than attempting to take advantage of the
cornered seller, and causing a defensive reaction, you must adopt
the manner of a counselor. The opportunity is not to get an unfair
position, but to help the seller out of a tight spot, while helping
yourself.
To make this work, you must come to understand why the
seller is selling. You need to find the real reason or reasons. Quite
probably, as you probe for problems, you will find the answers to
be both candid and revealing. The chances are great that you will
be the first to have shown an interest in the seller's needs. Once
your legitimate concern is established, and you establish your
willingness to work creatively to solve the seller's problems, a bond
will have been created that can lead to a mutually beneficial
relationship not only for this property, but for others in which the
seller may have an interest.
"Where there's a will there's a way" is more than a nice maxim.
There really is a way, particularly in the real estate business, with its
virtually limitless cache of optional methods of putting transactions
together. All that is required is mutual motivation, a little patience,
and imagination.
Establishing mutual motivation means not only that the seller
feels the incentive to deal, but that he wants to deal with you. The
power of the personal relationship is seldom so clearly illustrated as
Unit Four, Page 27
in private-party business transactions. Frequently, terms offered by
an overbearing buyer will be rejected, while those same terms will
be accepted and even sweetened, when suggested by someone for
whom the seller has developed feelings of respect and confidence.
As Carol and Martin continued their negotiations, she told
Martin of her success in managing her other rental units. She acted
excited about rental property, and Martin began to have confidence
in her ability to make the property a viable real estate investment.
This confidence and respect allowed Martin to consider
Carol's initial proposal very seriously. Rather than buy the property
immediately, Carol proposed to take over the property on a lease
option for one year. During that year Carol would sign a master
lease on both units at a discounted rent of $275 per month. Martin
was presently renting the property for $300 per month per unit. In
exchange for the lower rental amount, Carol would assume all
management and would pay for all repairs. Martin would have no
financial involvement at all. Because the total mortgage payment
against the property was only $524 per month, including taxes and
insurance, Martin accepted the proposal.
The lease option allowed Carol to make a $50 per month
immediate cash flow, and when she was ready to exercise the option
to purchase at the end of the twelve months, Martin would credit her
with $5,000 towards her total down payment of $7,500. This
transaction worked because of the respect and confidence Martin
had for Carol's managerial talents.
"Arm's-length" dealings with prospective sellers are fine when
it's time for attorneys to review the contracts. But when you're
dealing with the person who controls the property and could alter his
terms to suit your needs with a single sentence, you'd better be
within hand's length--and the hands should be shaking.
Establishing rapport is where the patience comes in. Take
your time; don't schedule yourself to see three properties in a single
morning. Even if you point out faults, it is essential that you appear
interested in the seller's property; act like it is of potential
consequence to you, not simply an afterthought worthy of only
passing attention. If you are dealing with a truly flexible seller, the
Unit Four, Page 28
property is much on his mind. Let him feel your empathy.
People develop confidence in those who have the interest,
skills, and resources necessary to help them meet their needs. Once
you've established that you have the interest, the first step in
demonstrating the other two qualities is to determine the actual
scope of those needs. Here again, your skills as an interviewer will
come into play.
Be blunt. You're dealing, hopefully, with a new friend. Treat
him as you would an old one. Do so gracefully, but get to the point.
Expecting his prospective buyer to walk through the door with
a low offer (if any at all), the seller often comes to the discussion in a
wary, if not defensive, frame of mind. By shifting the conversation to
his motivations, with nary a mention of dollars, you will relieve some
of the pressure. A grateful seller will then be all too happy to begin
persuading you that his needs are real and legitimate. Each time he
does, you will have an opportunity to demonstrate that you are
equipped and willing to meet them.
"Why are you selling this property?" would seem like a logical
question to ask when you want to know why a person is selling, but
few buyers think to ask it. It is your business. If a motorcycle
endurance course is slated for the parking lot next door, that may
have some effect on your decision. You are perfectly within your
rights to ask.
"What would happen if you didn't sell for six months?" If your
question is greeted by the verbal equivalent of a fainting spell, you
must let the seller know that you are able to move immediately--to
close within forty-eight hours if necessary.
"What are you going to do with the cash proceeds of the
sale?" If retiring pressing obligations is the answer, offer to assume
them; you may be able to prolong payment of these debts,
conserving your precious supply of cash while removing the seller's
immediate need for it. If the answer is to develop another piece of
property, an opportunity may exist for joint venturing, with the
seller's subordinated parcel of land providing the equity essential for
development funding.
Unit Four, Page 29
"What is the real reason you want to sell?" A question to be
asked once you feel you've established rapport with the seller
(which may be after more than one visit), this direct approach may
provide a range of opportunities for you to demonstrate your
problem-solving skills.
Consider again the case of Carol's negotiation for the duplex
owned by Martin. Before making her lease option proposal, Carol
asked Martin very bluntly, "Why are you selling?" It took a little bit
of time, but finally Martin responded, in very graphic language, that
he didn't like his tenants.
If Carol had not asked Martin why he was selling, she might
have spent a tremendous amount of time finding out how much
Martin really despised management. In the end she may have
missed the real reason for selling, and she could have paid too high a
price or possibly not have structured a deal at all.
If day-to-day management is a source of dismay to him, stress
your own management skills. If he's moved across town and is
bothered by the forty-five minute commute, offer him an equity in a
property near his home--and then, if necessary, find one.
"Will you take paper?" "Paper"--or mortgages, deeds of trust,
and other real-estate-secured instruments held by private parties--
can look very appealing to an individual who spent the last three
weekends replumbing his sixteen units and who just received the
fourth call this month from Mrs. Pickens, whose bathroom lights
"keep flickering". When hours of management time and operating
expenses are deducted from gross revenues, the "weekend"
investment property owner will often find net profits sufficiently low
that a nice, clean, seasoned (with a record of on-time payments)
deed of trust offers an attractive alternative. With discounts, these
instruments generally provide greater returns than savings accounts,
and give a seller an immediate avenue of escape from both people
and property problems.
"What is the lowest cash offer you will accept if I give you all
of your equity in forty-eight hours?" This question is similar to the
one you ask an auto dealer before you mention your trade-in. You
may, indeed, not have the cash required for such a transaction, or
Unit Four, Page 30
you may not want to invest it all in this property. The seller's
answer, however, will generally reveal the extent of the seller's
flexible tendencies and will provide you with knowledge of the true
"last-ditch" negotiating base. On the other hand, it may reveal such
a favorable opportunity that you decide to tie up the property with
an option, low earnest money, or a long-close contract while you
locate the necessary funds.
Greg P. owned several rental properties, including three
single-family homes located in the same geographical neighborhood.
As a result, he was quite familiar with the true market value of rental
homes in that area. One day as he was driving to one of his
properties he noticed a property for sale by owner. Greg called the
number on the sign and conducted his initial interview over the
phone, using a question-answer format. He found that the seller was
leaving the area to go into the military service. He made an
appointment to meet the seller, Brent L., at the property.
When they met at the house, Greg found that Brent was very
anxious to sell. When he asked him what was the lowest price he
would take for a cash offer, Brent said, "$44,000." Eighteen months
earlier, Greg had purchased a house almost identical to the one
owned by Brent--for $57,000. There was no doubt that the price
was truly a remarkable one.
Greg proposed an option-purchase for all cash, with closing in
ninety days. Brent agreed and they closed the option agreement. In
less than three weeks, Greg resold the property for $54,000, then
simultaneously closed the sale with his purchase from Brent, walking
away with $10,000 from the closing.
The list of questions that can open doors with the seller is as
endless as the solutions themselves. Particularly if the negotiations
involve seller financing, those solutions depend much more on
imagination and good faith than on the availability of capital. You
supply the imagination. You acquire the good faith by interpreting
and relieving the seller's fears.
Unit Four, Page 31
RULE 6: USE PRE-ESTABLISHED BOUNDARIES OF
PRICE/TERMS TOLERANCE
This key to successful real estate investing is perhaps the
simplest, yet it is somehow one of the most difficult to consistently
apply.
In most instances, the benefits sought by today's investor can
be quantified: time, dollar return, number of units, and so on. The
trouble is that in many instances, they aren't quantified--or they are
done so on the spot during a price/terms negotiation.
This apparent indifference to investment return staggers the
mind. In virtually no other endeavor is effort undertaken without the
anticipation of a specific, measurable result. A trip to the doctor, a
drive to the store, a new business call, or a deposit in a savings
account are all undertaken with the expectation of specific return.
Spoken or unspoken, that return is usually quantifiable. Yet there
are those who will approach a real estate investment opportunity
without having established just what mix of benefits would, for them,
constitute a "successful" transaction.
For the hobby investor, or one for whom the "thrill of the hunt"
is its own reward, this casual approach to prospective gain may be
all right. For the serious investor, it is a bad practice--one that could
lead to indecisive negotiating and the acquisition of undesirable
properties.
For example, Peter and Marsha W. got such a tremendous
emotional high when they were negotiating that the sellers knew they
wanted the property in the worst way.
One such seller, Victor M., sold a four-unit apartment building
to Peter and Marsha. The purchase was negotiated with nothing
more than $450 each month, and a balloon payment for over
$40,000 was due at the end of nine months. Such a purchase was
no way to create wealth and financial independence. It could have
been avoided through correct negotiations.
If a preliminary investigation reveals a property worthy of
further consideration, the first thing you should do is establish a
Unit Four, Page 32
realistic set of investment objectives for that property. Those
objectives can be both tangible and intangible and will reflect
tradeoffs from property to property. You may willingly enter into
known management "challenges," for example, in return for
prospects of a uniquely high short-term return. Before sitting down
to discuss a possible purchase, quantify both an acceptable
investment of time and a minimum rate of return.
Gross rents, net income, prospects for resale and/or lease-up,
price, payments, and interest rate must all be weighed relative to the
returns--financial or otherwise--that you expect from the property.
If you expect financial returns, your minimum acceptable
requirements must be quantified and held to. They are hitching
posts, beacons in the often subjective world of real estate
negotiation. The problem with a "few dollars more" is that the
parameter is not a clear one; "few" may well lead into "many" in the
rush of the moment, and you may find yourself obligated to a
property you would not, under more rational circumstances, have
purchased.
Successful win/win negotiating requires that you establish
minimum price and terms, based on realistic financial analysis,
before meeting with the seller.
RULE 7: THE FIRST ONE TO MENTION A NUMBER LOSES
Successful real estate buying isn't buying at all. It's selling--
and permitting the seller to buy--your interest, your capabilities, your
own financial requirements. Successful sales people, regardless of
their product, service, or idea, have one trait in common: they know
when to stop selling. Picture this scenario, repeated hundreds of
times in every city each day:
"...and so, Mr, Buyer, that sums it up. My product will work
longer, harder, more effectively, and at less cost than any other
available on the market today."
"I'll take it."
"As you can see, it's a very handsome unit. It will fit in well
Unit Four, Page 33
with your office decor, and..."
"Fine. I'll take it."
"If money is a problem, we have a number of financing plans
that can help to..."
"That's no problem. I have the ca..."
"We could even delay the first payment until..."
"Um, I guess I don't need your product after all."
Maddening as the exchange may seem, it typifies a common
characteristic of buyer/seller meetings: anxiety. In virtually every
instance, the seller is the one who jabbers anxiously, and he will
usually do so at the earliest opportunity, if given the chance.
You can provide that chance by simply being quiet.
By being quiet, you accomplish two things: you require your
negotiating counterpart to fill the silence with talk, and you require
yourself to listen. A circumstance in which both actions are
simultaneously present creates a uniquely favorable environment for
true communication.
Jerry B. applied this idea in his very first negotiation. When he
met with the seller, he asked him what he would take for the
property if he received cash within thirty days. Immediately the
seller asked, "How much will you give me?"
The silence was very uncomfortable, but Jerry just looked at
the seller. He knew the seller would have a figure if Jerry would
remain silent long enough. It took almost three minutes of continual
silence, but finally the seller suggested a price that was 15 percent
below market value. This was the seller's starting point. By the end
of the negotiation process, Jerry was able to purchase the property
for cash at a 20 percent discount from current fair market value.
Don't blow it. The first one to mention a number loses. Look
at it from the seller's perspective. You, as the buyer, are interested.
Unit Four, Page 34
You've already said so. You're qualified, and "real"; in so many
words, you've already said so. You can close early. You're a
capable manager. You are going to buy, as soon as possible, a
property that fills your needs. You know what you want. And you
know, as currently presented, that the seller's property does not
quite fill the bill.
And there you stand, with your checkbook in your pocket.
Silent.
Do you think the seller feels compelled to fill that silence? As
a flexible seller, you bet he does. Remember, has a need to sell--
and here stands someone who can meet that need.
Faced with such circumstances, most flexible sellers think
deeply before trading this bird-in-the hand for those that may--or
may not--lie in the bush. Their tendency is to initiate, since you
apparently will not, some action that may well solve their propertyrelated
problems before the meeting ends.
They do that by talking.
Since they already know what you think of their property, and
that your reason for not handing over an earnest-money check is a
gap between buyer and seller, their conversation must eventually--if
you let it--get around to narrowing that gap. Once again, they have
the active role: that of persuading you to accept the new gap they
are proposing.
This was exactly the case when Jerry allowed the seller to
come up with the starting figure. After the seller named a figure for
the property, Jerry looked carefully at his written information on the
property, and said that he couldn't even consider anything over a
price some $10,000 less than that amount. Then Jerry shut up. He
allowed the seller to talk. Eventually the seller knew that he had to
narrow the $10,000 gap between his stated "lowest price" and
Jerry's proposal.
After thoughtful negotiation, Jerry and the seller agreed to a
purchase price that approximated the middle of the gap. Jerry
would have been willing to pay a higher price, but through this
Unit Four, Page 35
negotiation process he was able to purchase the property for
substantially less.
Your role, once you have established your interest, credibility,
timing, and financial requirements, becomes almost that of counselor
to the seller: listening to proposals, suggesting modifications, and
defining the point at which the proposals will achieve their desired
end.
RULE 8: KEEP IT SIMPLE
Human nature guides most of us along the path of least
resistance. By definition, that is the path in which the fewest
obstacles are placed, the fewest barriers erected.
The optimum for the seller, of course, is the path that satisfies
all of his expressed wishes. An offer that fully satisfies price and
terms requirements is seldom turned down. (It does happen,
though, when buyer eagerness convinces the seller that those
requirements were too low in the first place.) But even when those
requirements are met, you will fail unless both your position and your
purchase proposal are stated in concise, simple terms that are
readily understandable to the seller.
John E. wanted to purchase a single-family rental from a
recent divorcee who wanted to be rid of the property.
John negotiated with the seller for several days and seemed to
be getting nowhere. So he decided to simplify. He sent to the seller
and gave her a simple earnest money offer that was typed out very
clearly. It stated the price, the down payment, and the contract
terms (including interest, time, and amount). Once the seller saw the
negotiations put down in simple terms, she accepted John's offer,
and both John and the seller had a win/win situation.
Why the emphasis on simplicity? An illustration might help
you understand.
Do you regularly file your income tax returns during the first
Unit Four, Page 36
week of January each year? Relatively few Americans do, even
those who have refunds coming. The reason is seldom financial. As
a people, we have a tendency to put off that which we do not fully
understand. Income taxes--and the accompanying myriad of forms,
schedules, and interpretations--are an extreme example of the
difficult-to-understand, but a clear illustration of the principle. That
which is easiest to do is the thing we do first, delaying those tasks
that require extensive effort or thought until "later".
Real estate sellers are no different in that respect. Once you
have made up your mind, however, the last trait you want in a seller
is procrastination. To avoid it, you need to make your purchase
proposal one that can be understood, and approved, on the spot. It
is decidedly not in your interest to encourage the seller to seek
counsel from mate, brother-in-law, bartender, or other
nonprofessional adviser, each of whom may feel obliged to wrench
their friend from the clutches of a "stranger" who obviously is
seeking to purchase property in his own terms.
Professional counsel, in the form of an attorney and/or
accountant, will traditionally be sought in a real estate transaction;
how it is sought depends on you. If your proposal is complex, your
seller-client may approach his adviser with an open-ended "I don't
understand this," inviting wholesale rewording. That rewording often
includes additional phrasing that may well upend the original intent of
your document. If, on the other hand, the counselor is hired to
"smooth the rough edges" on an agreement that was satisfactory to
both parties, his changes are likely to be of a much more limited
nature. The original parameters are likely to remain intact.
Simplicity does not, by definition, mean brevity. It means
clarity. If replacing an eight-word sentence with a thirty-three-word
paragraph eliminates the possibility of confusion, the change should
occur. As an example, "How about a second-mortgage crank on
your property?" may be crystal clear to weathered real estate
specialists, but it may draw an embarrassed "Huh?" from your
prospective seller. It may also raise the flag that brings friends and
relatives into the negotiating process.
A longer, but simpler, way of saying the same thing would be:
"Would you be willing to take back a second mortgage for a portion
Unit Four, Page 37
of your equity? By refinancing the property, I could give you a
down payment of $5,000, and the remainder of your equity in cash."
It's also much more understandable.
Avoid "jargon", or real estate-related terms familiar to insiders,
in all of your discussions with prospective sellers. Consistent with
the "win/win" philosophy, it is your intent to befriend your seller, not
overpower him. The "aw, shucks" approach may not fit in with your
image of yourself as a soon-to-be high-powered real estate
investor--but, if not, step back a moment and remember who it is
that you want to impress with your sophistication. Your creditors
and your banker will probably be toward the top of the list, your
seller near the bottom.
RULE 9: REMIND THE SELLER OF THE PROBLEMS YOU
ARE SAVING HIM FROM
One of the cardinal rules for public speakers is "Tell 'em what
you"re going to tell 'em. Tell 'em. And then tell 'em what you told
'em."
An extended, frustrated negotiating session may actually cause
him to forget the problems that originally motivated the sale. As a
win/win negotiator, you should clarify those problems once again
near the conclusion of the negotiations to remind the seller of the
negatives that you are offering to remove. The seller can then add to
your financial offer the value of being out from under those
problems, and he will come up with the true value of the transaction.
Wilma M. was a recently widowed lady in her mid fifties. Her
husband had left her with an eight-unit apartment building that was
some twenty-five-years old. When her husband was alive, he spent
at least ten hours a week at the property doing maintenance and
management.
The apartment building was free and clear of all liens and the
income was Wilma's sole source of support. She didn't want to give
up the income, but she had absolutely no desire to manage the
property.
Unit Four, Page 38
Dan S. wanted to buy the property and add it to his portfolio
of investment properties. When he was negotiating the purchase of
the property with Wilma, she started to forget her reasons for
selling. Dan reminded her of the management problems as well as
the memories it might stir up. He offered her a contract payable
over the next thirty years that would provide for her support for the
rest of her life. She felt good about Dan's solutions to her problems,
and allowed him to purchase the property for virtually nothing down.
Once into the "dollars" phase of your discussions, the seller
may momentarily forget that he was doing some emergency
plumbing at 10:00 last night, or that Mrs. Robbins--out of a job with
four mouths to feed--is now three months late with her rent, or that
the property taxes, which exceed current net income, are due
tomorrow. Since you earlier asked questions to determine his
problems, and since you listed the problems in an orderly fashion in
your notes, you should now point out the solutions that you are
providing to each of these problems. By bringing them back into
appropriate focus--perhaps by adding a factor for the time and
expense necessary to adequately deal with them--you are
sweetening your deal in a way that appeals to the "human factor" as
well as to the purse. These few sentences may be the extras that
ultimately tip the balance of the negotiations in your favor.
When Dan provided for the emotional and financial needs of
Wilma, he was able to structure a completely win/win transaction on
the eight-unit apartment building. The approved purchase offer was
finally signed because of the appeal to both the "human factor" and
the "financial incentive."
RULE 10: EXPLORE "STAB-IN-THE-DARK" OFFERS
At this point, if the seller is still "in the game" but hesitant to
commit, there is a technique that can be particularly effective if the
seller's expressed value is tied to other than pure market conditions.
An introductory step would be to remind the seller that you
are interested in the part of the property that he owns--the equity
portion. Once an acceptable range of value for that portion is
established, you as buyer might propose a dozen or more "stab-inUnit
Four, Page 39
the-dark" swaps of property for property, listening carefully to each
response in order to narrow down true needs and true valuation.
"Would you take my new Buick as down payment?" does
more than assess the seller's affection for Buicks or need for an
automobile. If the possibility is admitted, you have just established
an acceptable level of down payment--one that may differ from that
originally expressed.
If free-and-clear raw land, valued at or in excess of the seller's
equity, is of interest, it may signal that absence of management
headaches is of greater importance to the seller than cash at this
time.
If "Would you take a note as down payment, payable in two
years at a third over face value, with this property as security?"
sounds like a pretty good deal for your seller, you may have before
you a transaction in which the seller will lend you the money to buy
his own property, a certain-enough indicator of the degree of
flexibility you're dealing with.
In your preparations for the negotiating session, determine
what it is about the seller that you wish to find out, and structure
your "stab-in-the-dark" questions accordingly. You might determine
he doesn't want any management properties at all, because he's
been transferred by his company. Traditionally, that places a certain
time pressure on him to sell the property he already owns. If no
non-cash proposals appeal to him, he may need a specific amount of
cash to purchase a family home in another city. Perhaps that
specific amount would satisfy his down payment requirements. And
so on.
By providing the seller with real, or hypothetical, examples on
which to base his value, you are able to assemble a set of facts that
he may have been reluctant to provide if asked directly. You can
then use those facts to construct your formal offer.
As Dan S. negotiated the purchase of the apartment building
with Wilma M., he asked her such questions as, "Would you take an
offer that didn't require you to ever visit the property again? Would
you accept an offer that provided you with $2,011.56 per month for
Unit Four, Page 40
the next thirty years?"
When the questions were phrased in this manner, Wilma
accepted and Dan was able to purchase the eight-unit apartment
building for nothing down and a contract for $250,000 over thirty
years at nine percent interest.
RULE 11: PERSIST AND PERSIST AGAIN
As a win/win negotiator, you will be constructing formal offers
a lot less frequently than will "ordinary" investors. First of all, you
will likely be dealing only with truly flexible sellers--a limited
population. You will have very carefully assessed your own
objectives and the way this property fits into those objectives. You
will have spent considerable time locating the correct property,
interviewing its owner, and getting background for the pre-offer
negotiating session.
You will have, in other words, invested substantially of your
time and expertise in coming to the point of offer. In addition to the
value of the property, this investment of self must lead you to the
conclusion that if at first you fail, you must try and try again. And
again, and again. It is not the attempt that separates those who win
from those who do not. It is the success. And few, indeed, are
those who attain success on the first try.
By their personal nature, and the fact that they may be
cancelled with a word from either party, negotiations are always on
the verge of collapse. Any single element, or the manner in which it
presented, may trigger an emotional response that appears to end
the discussions on the spot. Overlooked in such an assessment,
however, is the fact
that there are probably dozens of other points on which the
parties have already agreed. The point in contention is often merely
a burr under the saddle of one of the negotiating parties, with a
smooth ride assured once you find a way to remove the burr.
Don't give up! The skills and the attitude that brought you to
this point are probably quite sufficient to enable you to "find a way
out." After all, that is what you're there to do. If it was to be a cutUnit
Four, Page 41
and-dried, "rubber stamp" meeting, you could have sent an assistant.
It was your tenaciousness and creativity that got you successfully to
this point; the same will get you successfully through it.
Examine your offer. Listen to its rejection. What part of it is
insufficient? Do the seller's remarks suggest something other than
what is being said? Does the seller indicate a willingness to continue
discussions? Would concessions in another element of your offer
permit you to retain those terms that appear unsatisfactory to the
seller? Keep digging. There is a will. You will find a way.
"No" frequently means "I don't understand." Have you made
the terms on which you will sign quite clear? Clear to the seller?
Often, a verbal review will provide a seller who is reluctant to
acknowledge his lack of understanding with an opportunity to
"confirm" his perception of your offer.
"Mr. Seller," you might suggest, "I understand that we're apart
on some aspects of my offer, but permit me to run through those I've
suggested so far. That way we can separate those that there is a
question on." Where possible, use terms like it appears", and "I
suggest"--terms calculated to provide an opening for the seller when
you review an aspect that's bothersome to him. Keep in mind that
the creative offer is not the typical offer, and that the concepts you
are proposing may be so new to the seller that he almost instinctively
reacts defensively. Don't be afraid to illustrate as you go along. A
few graphs or columns of figures computed on a note pad can often
do wonders to clarify both your intent and the mutual benefit they
demonstrate.
Consider again the case of Dan and Wilma negotiating the
purchase of the eight-unit apartment building. When Dan asked
Wilma if she would accept an offer that paid her $2,011.56 per
month, he did something simple, yet original. He made a monthly
chart for the next thirty years, with the monthly payment to be
received. In this way Wilma was able to visualize the benefits she
would receive from the creative offer.
Just as "No" can mean "I don't understand," "It can't be done"
can mean "I've never done it" or "I don't know how to do it."
Unit Four, Page 42
Listen! How many times have you said, "You look wonderful,
dear," when what you were really saying--by inflection, or tone, or
glance--was something quite different. You are more than an equal
participant in these talks. You convened them. You are the host. It
is your responsibility to guide both parties successfully through them.
If you have ever been accused of "hanging on every word," now is
the time to do so without fear of recrimination. Listen. Interpret.
Confirm your response. If necessary, illustrate again.
You are a win/win negotiator. You know that what you are
proposing is good for both parties. If your counterpart fails to
agree, it must be because he doesn't understand. Cause him to
understand.
Dan knew that the offer for Wilma's eight-unit apartment
building was a win/win situation. It allowed him to own the property
with a break-even cash flow right from the start, and yet it would
provide Wilma with a regular income for the next thirty years, at an
interest rate that was higher than she could get on bank certificates
of deposit. When he was able to put the offer in terms that Wilma
could understand, she was willing to accept the proposal on a
win/win/ basis.
Persistence does not have to mean, or appear to mean,
stubbornness. "Stubborn" usually applies to the immovable adoption
of a position, and the unwillingness to be swayed from it--regardless
of the facts. "Persistence," on the other hand, is stubbornness
applied to the result, not the process or position. The persistent
person is convinced of the value and the achievability of the goal, but
he will try a variety of approaches toward its realization.
Hannibal was persistent about crossing the Alps. That
persistence eventually caused him to choose a means of mountaincrossing
conveyance never before used. Like many other
unconventional, but creative, solutions, it worked perfectly.
True, ingrained persistence cannot be faked. It must be literal,
real, internal. It is not an independent attitude, but an offshoot of
equally real confidence and optimism.
Unlike higher philosophies, the nothing down, win/win method
Unit Four, Page 43
of real estate investing does not ask that you adopt its principles on
faith. Its tenets have been, and continue to be, proven on a daily
basis in virtually every major city in the United States (and many
smaller ones as well). It has worked, it does work, and it will work
for you. Once you know that, the attitude of enlightened persistence
necessary to broaden your spectrum of opportunities will
automatically be yours. With each success, with each satisfied
seller, your confidence, your skills, and your net worth will continue
to grow.
RULE 12: TAKE TIME--TIME LESSENS TENSIONS
Do you remember your first date? Your first job interview?
Your first meeting with the in-laws? If you're like most of us, they
were meetings involving some tension. And the greatest degree of
tension probably occurred at the beginning of those meetings.
Once again, we run into a common human characteristic.
Anthropologists judge humans to be a race of gregarious,
social animals, forming families, living in bands, seeking out one
another's company. What anthropologists usually don't dwell on are
the beginnings of those social relationships--often periods of tension,
suspicion, and even outright hostility. Wandering tribes of old liked
to be able to meet strangers with their backs up against a wall. The
handshake has evolved from a practice of showing the palm to
demonstrate that no weapons were hidden there.
Historically, the earliest moments of relationships are "onguard"
times, periods of assessment and feeling out. "Hello,
Madam, My name is Fred. May I engage in a torrid romance with
you in fifteen minutes?" may be the stuff of off-color fiction, but most
aspiring Lotharios, anxious to avoid public humiliation, exhibit more
restraint in their introductions.
Business relationships, too, begin on a more formal note. The
lawyers even have a term for it--"arm's length." Consider the initial
buyer/seller meeting in a real estate transaction, if the buyer were to
be perfectly candid:
Unit Four, Page 44
"Mr.Smith, my name is Fred Norman. I realize that you don't
know if I am honest, have any money, know anything about real
estate, appreciate your property's value, or beat my wife, but I am
here to come into ownership of that property without demonstrating
any of those things or giving you any of my own money. I'll want to
offer you thousands of dollars less than what you think the property
is worth, and perhaps ask you to lend me the money to do so. My
personal financial statement is none of your affair, and, for all you
know, I may want to return your property to you after mismanaging
it for several years and draining its bank account. Now, may we
chat?"
An exaggeration? Not if you're the seller and you've heard of
any of those things happening in the past. Only in court are you held
innocent until proven guilty. In real life, economic life, the reverse
frequently holds true.
The initial moments of your meeting, then, should be used to
establish rapport with the seller--almost exactly the same way you
do with anyone else. It should not be a period of tension for you
because, as a win/win negotiator--a "believer," as it were--you
literally do observe this new acquaintance as a potential friend. You
are there not to take advantage or to "hoodwink" him, but to
examine his needs and determine whether they might dovetail into
yours in a mutually beneficial way.
Do not be rushed in this very important meeting. You never
get a second chance to make a good first impression. Arrive a few
minutes early. Schedule nothing immediately following. Take the
time to do what you're there to do--review his needs. By exhibiting
a true interest in finding solutions to those needs, you will be
figuratively opening your palm and helping to ease whatever tensions
he may have brought to the meeting.
Frank M. was a beginning investor who found a three-unit
apartment building that passed his preliminary requirements. He
made an appointment to meet the seller at the rental property to
inspect the property and to begin serious negotiations.
Unit Four, Page 45
When Frank met Stewart A., the seller, at the property, he
tried to make a favorable first impression. He was prompt, he
dressed properly, and he drove up in an immaculate and recently
washed car. Frank looked and acted professional. He had factual
data about the property and had even gone to the courthouse and
purchased a survey plat on the property itself.
Stewart was responsive to this professional approach. He
was receptive to Frank's questions and truly believed that Frank
was trying to solve Stewart's problem with the property, while still
purchasing the property as a good investment for himself.
Remember: you represent a VIT ( Very Important
Transaction) to the seller, involving his past judgments, his present
cash flow, perhaps the very welfare of his family. At the very least,
a substantial portion of his ego is involved. Treat it with the patience
and respect it deserves, and you will have gone a very long way
toward refining "arm's-length negotiations" into thoughtful discussions
with a friend.
It's much more pleasant that way. And more productive.
RULE 13: BE FLEXIBLE, BE CREATIVE, BE READY WITH
ALTERNATIVES
Several years ago, a young woman, a writer by trade, applied
for a position in the public relations department of a major
midwestern utility. She successfully passed her first battery of
interviews and finally reached the spacious offices of the regional
vice-president for her final test.
During the discussions, the executive acknowledged that the
job for which she was applying required a great deal of creativity,
and expressed admiration for anyone who possessed the trait. "I'm
just not creative at all," he said.
"I'm sorry, but I disagree," my friend said. With some feeling,
she went on to dispute the notion that creativity was the exclusive
domain of writers, artists, and others traditionally tabbed with that
label.
Unit Four, Page 46
She pointed out that there was no "manual" for dealing with
the myriad of responsibilities the executive handled each day, but
that individual solutions had to be formulated--or created--as
situations arose. The fact that the executive had achieved an
advanced position with the company, she noted, proved that he had
demonstrated abilities as a creative manager, and was able to "build"
solutions from a broad, but uncataloged, array of resources.
"In the final analysis, that's all we do," she said.
The interview not only got her the job, but it demonstrated a
unique level of perception on her part.
Her well-taken view applies equally to the field of real estate
investment. Real estate investing, in fact, provides one of the most
fertile fields for the application of personal creativity. It is incredibly
broad. While customs relating to the transfer of ownership of its
various "products" do exist, they are largely just that--customs.
Dealing in real estate is often a largely unstructured process. The
variety of solutions to identified problems is almost endless. For
example, mathematical science shows that if each of the five
elements of negotiation (price, rate, down payment, payments, and
dates) had only five alternatives available, there would be more than
fourteen thousand offer combinations that could be presented in a
single real estate transaction. While such an exhaustive process will
certainly never take place, it does prove that the successful, creative
negotiator is equally unlikely to run out of alternatives to propose
when putting a deal together.
Your task in all of this is two-fold: you must remember that
this awesome bank of options is available for "withdrawals" at any
time, and you must unloose the reins of your own imagination to
determine when, whether, and how to bring them into play.
RULE 14: STEP BACK AND GIVE YOURSELF A CHANCE
TO THINK
When you have gathered all of the information you feel you'll
need to exercise good business judgment, don't exercise it--not then
and there, at least. Take the information, leave the seller, and retire
Unit Four, Page 47
to a place of privacy. Then take as much time as you need to
check, and double-check, the information you have received against
your own objectives. Be sure that they fit. Play "devil's advocate"
with yourself, and try to find flaws in your own arguments.
One effective way of evaluating the deal is to draw a line
down the center of a piece of paper. On the left, write all of the
advantages of owning this piece of property. Match those
advantages against your written list of objectives. Throw out those
that do not support one or more of your objectives.
On the right side of your paper, write all of the negatives you
can think of--and there are a variety that come with the ownership
of any property. Is management going to be a problem? How
much deferred maintenance is there? How about zoning, neighbors,
vacancy rates, negative cash flows, interest rate?
When you're done, bring your lists to a presumably neutral
friend or adviser you respect. Ask him to try to talk you out of your
pending deal. If you have done your work, and your friend cannot
mount effective arguments against the transaction, you can pretty
safely assume that your investment is sound and will help you meet
the realistic objectives you require from it.
Now go back to your seller, and present your offer to him.
To the extent possible, adopt the public speaker's credo: tell him
what you're going to tell him, tell him, then tell him what you told
him. Lead him not only into the what of your offer, but the why.
Present your case as honestly and thoroughly as you can, using
whatever illustrations you may need to highlight your points. If
appropriate, inform your seller that you are looking at other
properties and that you will conclude whichever transaction meets
your financial goals.
While indicating that timeliness is of value to you, leave the
offer, if necessary, for the seller's consideration. Remember, as a
don't-carer buyer you must not exhibit too much eagerness to tie up
the property.
Then, wait. You have accomplished your negotiating tasks.
Unit Four, Page 48
The seller need only sign to complete the deal. He must take an
overt action, returning your earnest money and contract, to reject it.
The transaction is now in his hands.
4.8 NEGOTIATING CHECKLIST
As you negotiate the many variables in a real estate purchase
transaction, you may find the seller responding to your initial
proposals in a negative manner. In order to help you respond to the
most common objections to creative financing proposals, we have
included this Negotiating Checklist. It doesn't provide a specific
response to individual objections, but it does provide many
generalized responses that can be adapted to meet most probable
seller objections. Review it carefully and visualize yourself
conducting face-to-face negotiations with a seller who voices the
following objections:
"I NEED MORE MONEY."
A. I'm real estate conscious: I'm going to buy additional property
with my proceeds, so I need cash down.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. I'll raise the purchase price by the amount of your down payment.
You can have your asset, the contract, and borrow against it for
your investment needs.
2. My credit is good. I'll give you a note against which you can
secure a loan for your down payment.
3. I'll make you an equity participant in this property when it is sold.
4. I'll put you in touch with a syndicator who uses investor's trust
deeds in place of cash.
5. I'll refinance this property and make advance payments to you in
the amount of the down payment.
Unit Four, Page 49
6. I'll buy back my note and trust deed from you, at a discount.
7. I'll find you a property for no money down.
B. I'm debt conscious.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. I'll assume your debts.
2. I'll guarantee a loan to pay off your debts.
3. I'll lend you money myself.
4. I'll make advance payments.
5. I'll assign collected rents to you in the amount of the debt.
C. I'm security conscious. Why should I sell with nothing down?
You could run my property into the ground.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. I'll give you a blanket mortgage on another property.
2. I'll give you a one-year option to rescind in the event of improper
maintenance.
3. Let's go see other properties I own (or have owned).
4. I'll permit you to stay in as part-owner. You can oversee
maintenance yourself.
5. We can escrow rent payments, and pay a management company
of your choice to run the property.
6. I'll pay you to manage this property.
Unit Four, Page 50
D. I'm investment conscious. I need an income stream. I'm going to
invest the down payment and collect interest.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. I'll raise the interest rate, and my payments, to equal what you
would receive by investing the down payment.
2. I'll guarantee resale within five years. You'll have your cash
balloon to invest by then.
3. I'll pay you to manage this property. That way you can have
money coming in.
E. I'm tax conscious. If I sell this property, taxes will eat me alive.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. You're taxed only on money actually received. No down, no tax.
2. I'll send you a CPA who can fully explain the tax ramifications of
this sale.
3. We can delay closing until January 1 of next year.
4. I have a copy of the Tax Reform Act right here, and it says....
5. We can set up a trust for your children.
6. We can set up a tax-free exchange for another (smaller or larger)
property.
"I NEED MONTHLY PAYMENTS."
A. That's just the way it's done.
You respond with ideas such as:
Most major investments pay quarterly or annually. Stocks are an
Unit Four, Page 51
example. Real estate syndications may take years to pay off.
B. I need the monthly income.
You respond with ideas such as:
1. The less you draw, the more interest accumulation you'll have at
balloon time.
2. My payments to you will be a percentage of the property's net
income. The better the price to me, the better the payments to you.
3. Part of your need for income was to feed this property. I'll be
doing that now. And the time you'll have available by not managing
the property can be used to generate an income elsewhere.
4. I can get you a job.
5. I'll hire you to manage this property, and others as well, if you
wish.
4.9 REASONS FOR FLEXIBILITY: AND HOW TO TURN
THEM TO YOUR ADVANTAGE
In addition to the financial reasons outlined above, there may
be other clues used by sellers that can give you the upper hand in the
negotiations. For example, if the seller complains about property
management, jump on this theme by tressing your experitise in
management and your tolerance for management detail. If he
mentions the fact that his depreciation is used up, show him how you
can solve his problem. Offer to help negotiate a tax-free exchange
into a newly depreciable property, with your services as down
payment. Negotiate with a knowledgeable professional--usually a
CCIM (Certified Commercial Investment Member) Realtor--to
provide expertise and be compensated over time. With his help,
compute the actual financial impact of the loss of depreciation on the
owner, and use that knowledge in your discussions.
If the seller appears "cash poor," find the reasons for his
Unit Four, Page 52
problems and offer to step in with solutions; e.g., assuming his debts
to relieve pressure, providing him with personal property that he
needs (to preclude his having to come up with pocket money),
increase monthly payments at first, etc. Keep probing until he is
satisfied.
If the seller is in a time bind (divorce settlement is impending,
a transfer is in the works, etc.), offer to close quickly. Express a
willingness to put yourself into a tight contract where your lack of
performance will trigger heavy penalties for you. Build trust.
Then again, if the seller is looking more for an income stream
than a heavy down payment, structure your offer to provide the
exact benefits wanted, and then present it with confidence and in the
context of what the owner wants.
Once again, the value of fact-finding becomes apparent.
You are a professional, just like a lawyer, doctor, or accountant.
Your own experience with these professionals should confirm that
none of them begins interviews by offering solutions! Instead, each
follows a carefully structured process of questioning aimed at
determining needs, symptoms, and goals. You must not do less.
You cannot offer mutually beneficial "cures" unless and until you
know all of the facts.
The first one to mention a number may indeed lose, but so
will the last one to know that number.
4.10 THREE TACTICS TO TRY WHEN ALL ELSE FAILS
You've done it all. You've researched the market, the
property, the individual. You've backed into a corner with your
own offer, giving as much as you possibly can. You like the seller.
The seller likes, and respects, you. But nothing is happening!
What to do? First, do not do nothing. That may take you to
the successful conclusion of a lose/lose transaction. That's not what
you're there for! Try these three tactics when all else fails:
Unit Four, Page 53
THE LAY-THE-CARDS-ON-THE-TABLE APPROACH
This approach appeals to emotions rather than to strict logic;
its success depends to a significant degree on your rapport with the
seller. It requires not only honesty, which you've exhibited
throughout, but full-disclosure honesty--the kind that literally lays on
the table any and all negotiating "chips" you may have been
withholding for the last moment.
This is the last moment.
Say something like, "Mr. Seller, let's face it. I'm sufficiently
attracted to your property that I probably would come up with your
down payment if I had it. I don't. And the cash-flow situation here
won't allow me to make payments on both a down payment loan
and your contract. Here's what I can do." Then proceed to
review the problems you will assume, the payments--perhaps slightly
larger--you can make, and whatever concessions you may have
been saving.
There are endless concessions. Hire him, or a family
member, as manager. Move the balloon up a year (but only if you
can handle it). Show him a personal statement that illustrates both
your substance and your inability to stretch any further. Review the
concessions you had made earlier as an indication of your sincere
interest in his property, always keeping within the financial
framework you had established. Show him your calculations. Ask
him if he would enter into the transaction if he were in your shoes.
Do not, in other words, hold back at this point. Remember,
though, that you are not attempting to persuade him to sell you the
property simply for no money down, but within specific financial
parameters. Since you've revealed to him what those parameters
are, and how they were derived, you can now be perfectly open
with him. Knowing that he's reached the breaking point with you, he
may indeed be motivated to lay his own negotiating hold-outs on the
table.
Tom and Helen P. located a single-family home that was for
sale by a truly flexible seller. The seller was disposing of the
property in order to raise cash to invest in a fast food franchise.
Unit Four, Page 54
When Tom and Helen made contact with the seller, they told him
that they were interested in making the best investment they could,
while at the same time providing the cash necessary to meet the
seller's needs. They laid all their cards on the table. Once the seller
understood the facts, he was receptive to their offer to buy the
property for a substantial discount for cash.
Tom and Helen were able to bring in a partner who loaned
them the money to buy the property, and the seller raised the
necessary cash to purchase the fast food franchise. The entire
negotiation process worked because all the parties were willing to
openly discuss their needs and their objectives.
STUDENT-TEACHER APPROACH
"Mr. Seller, you've been in this for longer than I have. I'd
like to own your property. I've tried everything I know to
accomplish that goal. Nothing has
worked. What would you do if you were in my place?"
Frequently, where relative age or experience in property
ownership might qualify the seller for a guiding role, simply
requesting help can bring forth an almost paternal (or maternal)
response.
Vicki H. tried this approach when negotiations broke down
on a property she was particularly interested in. The seller didn't
especially view herself as an expert, but she was delighted to share
what she knew. The seller showed Vicki exactly how to structure a
deal that was attractive to both parties--all because Vicki had dared
to ask for help! Vicki ended up with a choice property, a new
friend, and some invaluable real estate information she otherwise
would have been unable to get.
Your seller may also be someone whose expertise is seldom
acknowledged. Acknowledge it. Request it. You may be
pleasantly surprised at the result.
SHARE-THE-PROBLEM APPROACH
Unit Four, Page 55
As a win/win negotiator, you have spent a healthy amount of
time helping the seller to solve the problems that induced him to sell
in the first place. You have asked appropriate questions, and you
have listened attentively to the answers. You have charted and
reviewed the financial ramifications of the purchase. You have
proposed alternative solutions, and then revised those proposals to
better suit the needs of the seller.
At this final stage of the negotiations, it is now time for the
seller to help solve your problem. Your problem, of course, is the
gap in the purchase terms between what makes economic sense for
you and what the seller feels makes economic sense for him.
The first step in soliciting the seller's help is to share your
problem with him. Identify it as a problem. Show why you cannot
exceed the offer you have finally made. Ask for his agreement stepby-
step as you review the "number-crunching" process that led to
your offer.
"Did I do that right?" "If I understood you correctly, you said
such-and-such. Is that right?" "If I extend the monthly negative cash
flow over the term of the loan, I'll be out X dollars in cash. Do you
see how I got that?" If the seller logically agrees with you on each of
the steps that contributed to your final offer, it becomes somewhat
indefensible for him to reject the summary of those contributions.
Share your problem. Don't just say "no" to his price and
terms. Show him why you must say no, and directly request his
personal help in leaping this one final hurdle on the way to a
transaction that will permit both parties to place their problems in
perspective, as well as in the past.
4.11 APPLYING THE WIN/WIN PHILOSOPHY IN
NEGOTIATION
"Win/win" is not simply a catch-phrase or a moral theme; it is
a tested and proven operational philosophy for generating
extraordinary financial returns from a particular method of real estate
investment. In order for those returns to be maximized, it is
Unit Four, Page 56
necessary that both parties do, in fact, come out as winners when
the negotiations are concluded.
Win/win transactions appeal to both parties. Hostile feelings
and defensiveness are neutralized. The probability of acting hastily--
out of emotion--is greatly reduced when the greed-related decisionmaking
of a win/lose transaction is eliminated.
Win/win negotiating is tension-free. It is a process of mutual
investigation, not confrontation.
Consider the case of Tom and Helen P. as they were
negotiating the purchase of the single-family rental. When the
negotiating process took place, all three of the parties sat down at a
table and attempted to solve each of the other's problems. As a
result, the negotiation process was one of cooperation and not
confrontation.
Win/win negotiating does involve preparation, however, and
it carries with it the necessity of predetermining what winning and
losing mean. It also involves negotiating with a truly flexible seller.
"Winning" is a relative term. While it is necessary for both you and
your negotiating counterpart to emerge as victors, "victory" for a
legitimate flexible seller is usually proportionately less than "victory"
for an unmotivated, at-the-market seller.
When you find a property that fits your objectives, and it
appears that a win/win transaction is a real possibility, approach the
opportunity with purpose and enthusiasm.
"Every man takes care that his neighbor shall not cheat him,"
said Ralph Waldo Emerson. "But a day comes when he begins to
care that he not cheat his neighbor. Then all goes well. He has
changed his market-cart into a chariot of the sun."
As you move forward with your win/win strategy,
remember these indispensable keys: deal only with a flexible
seller, enter the negotiations in the role of problem solver who
has the ability to deal with the seller's needs and anxieties, find
out exactly what the seller's problems are, and then select those
Unit Four, Page 57
alternative solutions that will cause both you and the seller to
win.
It's a simply formula, but it can work miracles.
4.12 HOW WELL HAVE YOU LEARNED?
The better you have learned the information and concepts in
this unit, the more successfully you will be able to apply them. Test
your learning by answering the following questions. Do not skip this
step--the best way to help the information stay in your head is to
reprocess it through your fingertips!
(NOTE: If you are uncertain of a particular answer, look
back through the unit. The answers to all the questions can be found
in the preceding pages of the unit.)
1. Whom should you authorize to negotiate in your behalf? Why?
2. Name the five variables in negotiation.
3. What is the key characteristic you must find in a buyer in order to
conclude a successful transaction? Why?
4. Who should do most of the talking during negotiation? Why?
5. How do you determine which questions to ask during
negotiation?
6. Why is a "don't-carer" buyer as important as a "flexible" seller?
7. Why should you work so hard to protect the seller's interests?
8. Why is it important to establish a powerful personal relationship
with the seller?
9. Why do you need to quantify your investment return?
10. What role does silence play in negotiation?
11. Is it wise to use complex terminology in negotiation? Why?
12. At what point(s) in the negotiation process should you remind
the seller of his problems (his reasons for selling)? Why?
13. How can it benefit the negotiation process to calculate figures in
front of the seller?
14. Name a few non-threatening strategies you can use to help a
seller understand your terms.
15. By what method can you clearly evaluate a deal, starting by
drawing a line down the center of a piece of paper? Explain the
process step by step.
Unit Four, Page 58
16. List three ways you can negotiate with a real estate-conscious
seller.
17. List three ways you can negotiate with a debt-conscious seller.
18. List three ways you can negotiate with a security-conscious
seller.
19. List three ways you can negotiate with an investment-conscious
seller.
20. List three ways you can negotiate with a tax-conscious seller.
21. How can you respond successfully to a seller who needs
monthly income?
22. List five common reasons for seller flexibility, and explain how to
turn each to your advantage.
23. What three tactics can you use when all else fails?
24. Why is it said that the most creative part of win/win negotiating
occurs after you finish your research on a property or a buyer?
25. Make up a sample list of goals from which to negotiate on an
older, single-family residence on a street that's turning commercial in
character.
4.13 PUTTING IT ALL INTO PRACTICE
When the book learning is over and all is said and done, the
surgeon must still perform his first appendectomy, the barber his first
haircut. And you must conduct your first negotiating session. Onthe-
job training is still the best, and your turn has come.
How can you learn to negotiate without taking the risk of
moving ahead before you know the entire creative-financing
approach? The answer is incredibly simple. Do the following
assignments, and do nothing more. We are not asking you to
actually buy real estate. We are asking you to go through a few
negotiating sessions, just to see how the process works. Those of
you who are already experienced real estate investors can use the
opportunity to polish your skills and add to your arsenal of
techniques.
What if you happen to find that once-in-a-lifetime deal while
you're practicing? Don't let it slip between your fingers--but don't
do something you're not ready for! Find a local investment group
and get an experienced person to help you analyze the property and
Unit Four, Page 59
the outcome of the negotiations. Better still, call High Touch and
speak with an expert about your concerns. If it really is a hot buy,
get an experienced partner to purchase it with you as a joint venture.
Or, you might offer the property to someone else, in exchange for a
finder's fee.
In the meantime, go ahead with your assignments. You need
not do all the assignments listed; select those that will be most helpful
to you in your own circumstances. But don't skimp on your efforts.
You'll only be hurting yourself.
1. Get a copy of your local classified advertisements and
find some prospects. With a red felt-tip pen, circle all the singlefamily
homes or small commercial buildings that are for sale by
owner, particularly if the ad indicates that the seller is anxious to sell.
Watch for "low down," "fix-up special," or "leaving town"; there are
many other phrases that should alert you to possible seller flexibility.
Virtually every ad that specifies a down payment of $2,000 or less
will be a good prospect.
2. Choose the five most promising ads. Eliminate all but five
of the properties, based on your own criteria. Maybe you don't
want to own a former laundromat, or perhaps the south side of town
is not what you have in mind. Made a list of your criteria, and use
your own list to eliminate all but five of the ads.
3. Investigate the properties. Begin by driving by the five
properties. Are they appealing? What is the neighborhood like?
What kind of people live in the neighborhood? What's the current
zoning? Does the town have an area plan that may change that
zoning in the near future? Would the change be to your advantage?
Find out enough about each property to intelligently decide whether
you want to keep pursuing it.
4. Narrow your choice to two properties. Keep asking
questions, and don't be afraid to get into detail. Interview neighbors,
officials at city hall, and area Realtors to uncover everything you can
about the properties. Narrow your choice to two of the properties.
5. Arrange for an interview with the owner of each
Unit Four, Page 60
property. Call the owner of each property and explain that you are
interested in talking to him about the property. Set a specific time
and date; remember to allow yourself plenty of time for the
interview.
6. Do your homework. The day before the scheduled
interview, read through this unit again, using a yellow marker to
highlight information that's important to you. Then make a checklist
of everything you want to find out about the property. Clamp it
boldly to a clipboard and approach the interview with confidence.
Remember, the seller invited you to come by virtue of his ad in the
paper!
7. Conduct the interview. You are a welcome guest, but
remember: your seller will probably be a little nervous. Start out by
establishing a rapport and putting him at ease. Take your time;
there's no hurry. Ask the questions about the property directly from
your checklist; if the seller seems impatient, apologize for the time
you are taking but point out that each property has unique
characteristics, and you want to be certain you make the right
choice.
Find out why the seller is selling--and try to get to the real
reasons. If you have a truly flexible seller on your hands, he will
probably have some very definite problems that he hopes to solve
by selling his property. Make note of them in writing at the bottom
of your checklist.
Conduct this same interview with the owner of the second
property you have selected. Do not make any offers; remember,
you are just practicing for now. If the owner seems anxious, tell him
you are looking at a number of properties, and are in the process of
assessing each for potential purchase.
8. Identify solutions to the sellers' problems. In the privacy
of your own home of office, go over the questions you asked and
review your assessment of each owner's problems. Using a
separate sheet of paper for each property, draw a line down the
center of the piece of paper. On the left side, write each problem
the seller has. On the right side, list three or four ways you could
solve that problem. Use this unit to spark your imagination, and
Unit Four, Page 61
think of your own creative solutions in addition.
9. Conduct an imaginary negotiation. With your
problem/solution sheet in hand, begin an imaginary negotiation
session--starring you as your own "devil's advocate!" First, write
what you would offer the seller. Next, jot down what you think his
objections would be. Then come up with new terms or perspectives
that would soothe his objections. Continue this process until you
can't think of any more reasons why a seller would balk at your
offer. Congratulations--you're on your way!
4.14 THE TEN MOST ASKED QUESTIONS ABOUT
NEGOTIATION
The following questions are among those most frequently
asked by clients of High Touch. If you have additional questions,
don't hesitate to call your mentor.
1. "Thinking about negotiation really makes me nervous. I'm afraid
I won't be quick enough to come up with the next line in what must
be rapid-fire succession. How can I prepare for negotiation?"
The kind of negotiation that is most successful in real estate is
not the kind of rapid-fire exchange that you see between seasoned
attorneys in exaggerated television dramas. In fact, it's best to take
your time. Why? The seller will come into the negotiation feeling a
little nervous and anxious. You'll be miles ahead if you do whatever
you can to ease that tension--including establishing some personal
rapport. You may find that the best use of your first session is to get
acquainted and become friends--and save the negotiation for a later
session.
2. "You mention saving the negotiation for 'a later session.'
Shouldn't all of the negotiation take place in one session to avoid
losing steam?"
Not at all. Unless you're looking at a once-in-a-century deal,
you want to take your time and let the seller take his. If you feel it
appropriate to propose an offer and then let the seller take some
time to consider it, go ahead. No rule says you have to start and
Unit Four, Page 62
finish in the same session.
3. "It's difficult for me to imagine making friends with a prospective
seller that I scarcely know. Why is it so important to make friends?"
The success of your negotiation process is going to depend on
how well you can solve the seller's problems. He will hesitate to
share those problems with you unless he feels that you are his friend.
There's another reason why it's important to be friendly: a seller
would much rather deal with someone who is genuine, likable, and
easy-going than with someone who is abrupt and harsh.
4. "I've tried negotiating before,but the sellers I've worked with
don't seem to want to negotiate. What am I doing wrong?"
You may not be taking the time to find truly flexible sellers. A
flexible seller is extremely anxious to sell his property, and he is
willing to do whatever it takes to get it sold--including going through
negotiations. Someone who is not a flexible seller can afford to stay
firm on price and terms--and he probably isn't interested in hearing
any other offers.
5. "How can I identify a flexible seller so that my negotiation will
have the greatest chance at success?"
Start out by asking the obvious: "Why are you selling your
property?" Go from there. Probe. A seller who is casually
interested in getting rid of his property so he can use the money to
invest in another property won't be nearly as motivated as a seller
who is facing bankruptcy unless he comes up with some immediate
cash. Review the unit on finding properties for complete instructions
on identifying flexible sellers.
6. "I'm terrified of the prospect of lengthy silences--I'm afraid I
won't be able to keep things moving. How can I prepare in advance
so I can avoid those silences?"
Don't! Silences can--and do--work to your advantage in
negotiation. By staying silent, you force the seller to keep talking--
and the more he talks, the more you learn and the closer you get to
concessions.
Unit Four, Page 63
7. I've always been taught that I should come out ahead in
negotiations if I want to be a success. The win/win philosophy
seems to be at odds with that. Which is right?"
According to the win/win philosophy, both parties come out
ahead. How is that possible? You achieve your goal (you acquire a
desirable property), and the seller achieves his (he achieves a fair
and effective solution to his problems). Nothing could be more
successful than that! It is possible for both parties in negotiation to
come out ahead at the same time.
8. "What if I've done everything I can think of and the seller still
won't budge? What then?"
There are two different answers to that. There are several
tactics you can use as a last resort; to learn more about those
tactics, review this unit carefully. But there's something else: you
don't have to buy this particular property. It may be appealing to
you, and you may be convinced that it will fit perfectly into your
portfolio, but if you cannot negotiate a win/win deal, walk away. It's
as simple as that. If a seller isn't automatically flexible, no amount of
negotiation will turn him into one.
9. "I've found that when I negotiate with sellers who are not
experienced in real estate, the negotiation isn't as successful. What
am I doing wrong?"
There's probably a very simple answer: the seller probably
doesn't understand you. You may be using terms that are foreign to
him; you may be proposing solutions he has never heard of before.
Take your time. Go slowly. Stop often to ask, "Am I making
myself clear? It might be easier if I sketched out an illustration of
what I'm proposing, because it can get very confusing." Don't be
patronizing--but realize that you need to communicate with great
clarity if you are to be successful at negotiating. Take time to teach-
-but don't talk down.
10. "Why is negotiation so important?"
Unit Four, Page 64
It is probably the single most important step in buying
investment properties. Why? When you approach a seller, there is
a wide gap between your desires and his. You want a property at a
great price and at great terms, and so does he--only on the opposite
end of the spectrum! Negotiation is the process by which you
narrow that gap until the two of you meet in a mutually beneficial
deal. You get your great price and terms, and the seller gets more
than he bargained for--he gets a solution to his problems. Everyone
wins!
UNIT FIVE
CREATIVE FINANCE
Unit Five, Page 2
UNIT FIVE
CREATIVE FINANCE
5.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
What really separates the sheep from the goats in real
estate investing is the skill of putting financial deals together in
creative ways. The nickname for this skill is "creative finance."
The term "creative finance" has been used so often in so
many different contexts that it has taken on the aura of a cliché.
Our purpose here is to attempt to define the term in practical,
down-to-earth ways that will demystify what is, after all, a very
learnable skill, i.e., putting profitable deals together so that
everyone wins.
Unit Five, Page 3
Ask the man on the street what "creative finance"
means and you will get a variety of answers:
M clever ways of coming up with cash
M innovative solutions for bridging the gap in making deals
M "cookie cutter" formulas that can be repeated over and over
again in order to buy and sell assets successfully
M sneaky deals à la Donald Trump, etc.
Let us take a very different approach to defining
"creative finance," i.e., not as a fixed action or thing, but rather
in terms of ranges, or rather a series of points moving along a
range of options that relate to certain financing issues.
AN ILLUSTRATION
Let us take one of those issues in order to illustrate
what we mean. If we want to purchase an asset or a property
using the time-honored approach of "cash on the barrel," then
we settle on a price with the seller and reach into our pocket
and give him/her the agreed-upon value in the form of currency.
That enables us to walk away with the property or asset and
call it our own. We are happy, assuming the thing we have
purchased is what the owner has represented it to be; and the
owner is happy because he has his money.
Creative finance? Not in the least. This is the most
ordinary, mainstream, garden-variety financing in the world.
However, what happens if we don't have the money it
will take to buy the property or asset, but still really want it?
Then we must turn to our creativity in order to consummate the
deal. Where will we get the money from? Suppose we have a
friend with plenty of money and a willingness to share with us
the thing we want to buy. If we now bring our friend to the
negotiations and say to the seller:
Unit Five, Page 4
"Mr. Seller, I want to purchase your property for the
price we have agreed upon, and I have a friend here
who will put up the money."
Will the seller object to that? Not if the money is bona
fide currency. Thus you and your friend can walk off with the
property or asset, share it according to your arrangement, and
everyone is happy.
Especially you, because you didn't put up a dime--and
still get to use the property. You have just used creative
finance to close a deal.
The issue here is one of several that go to define
"creative finance." In this case we are asking, "Who will put up
the finances?" In our example, your partner put up all the
financial resources. But it is possible that you could have put up
some and he/she could have put up some--a combination of
shared investment.
Maybe you put up half and your partner puts up half.
Or maybe you put up a fourth and your partner puts up threefourths.
Or maybe you put up 37.681 per cent and your
partner puts up 62.319 per cent. Whatever! It's a matter of
mutual agreement. That kind of arrangement makes it clear that
we are talking about a range of options all relating the issue of
who puts up the finances to close the deal.
From your perspective, the range covers all the
possibilities from your putting up all the consideration (hardly
creative) to your putting up none of the consideration (highly
creative)--plus every possible combination in between.
Let's look at this range in graphic form:
Issue: "Who puts up the finances?"
YOU...............................................SOMEONE ELSE
(COMBINATIONS)
Unit Five, Page 5
Think of the answer to the question about the source of
financing as a dot that ranges along this line. The further the dot
moves along the line, the higher the level of creative finance; the
more the dot tends to stay close to the beginning point, the
lower the dot falls along this line the lower the level of creative
finance.
Thus, in the case of this illustrative issue, we can define
"creative finance" as a financing arrangement in which the
maximum share of the invested finances comes from other
people rather than from yourself. The more you can induce
others to pay, the more creative the deal. The better you are at
structuring financial arrangements in which your input is
minimized and the use of other people's money is maximized, in
the context of everyone winning, the more "creative" you are at
financing.
5.2 THE MAJOR FACTORS OF CREATIVE
FINANCE
There are at least seven other major factors that figure
into the process of creative financing. Here is a listing of these
issues, including the issue of OPM (Other People's Money) that
we have just discussed. Each of these issues generates a range
of options that can serve to define more fully the nature of
creative finance from the standpoint of the results it brings:
M 1. AT WHAT PRICE?
Range: from high above the market to high below the
market
Commentary: all other things being equal, you are going
to be looking for a price as far below the market as
possible. It doesn't take a lot of additional creativity in a
deal if you can get it at 30% or 40% below the market.
That may well be "creative" enough, because you pick
up a big chunk of equity as the outset, before anything
else happens.
Unit Five, Page 6
M 2. USING WHOSE FINANCIAL RESOURCES TO
BUY?
Range: from our own resources to other people's
resources
Commentary: as we have already explained, if there
must be money put into a deal, then let it be someone
else's money. This is especially true if you don't have
any money! Sometimes circumstances constrain you to
be creative in this sense. A lot of deals are creative
because they have to be!
M 3. HOW SOFT OR HARD ARE THE "OTHER
PEOPLE" INVOLVED?
Range: from bankers to partners to sellers, i.e., from
hard to soft
Commentary: it's one thing to depend on other people's
money; it's another to make sure you are dealing with
the right kind of "other people." The terms "hard" and
"soft" are ways to characterize "other people" by how
tough they are with the terms of the deal. Typically
bankers and institutional lenders are more conservative
and demanding when it comes to the terms of their
involvement. They want to check you out and force you
to pass through their fine qualifications filter before they
will let you have their money. They want to charge you
as high an interest rate as possible (especially the
"finance institutions" of the type that specialize in
second-mortgages), and they watch you like a hawk to
make sure that you pay every penny back on time.
That's why they are characterized as "hard money"
lenders.
Alternately, sellers can be "soft," i.e., they might be
willing to play banker for you without any scrutiny,
credit checks, or behind-the-scenes detective work.
Unit Five, Page 7
The more anxious the seller is to sell, the more willing
he/she might be to carry back a portion of the equity in
the form of a note. That's why sellers are at the high
end of the creativity scale. Generally the more creative
the investor, the more he/she will push for seller
involvement with the financing.
Partners occupy a somewhat intermediate position on
this scale. They have to be courted, like the hardmoney
people, but they may be more flexible and
willing to deal by qualifying the deal more than the
person. Still, they are not as soft as the seller, because
they are going to want their pound of flesh in a timely
manner. They are going to watch the pot boil to make
sure they get their just dues.
M 4. WITH WHAT SIZE OF DOWN PAYMENT?
Range: from 100% of the value up to 0% of the value
Commentary: with creative finance you throw out the
traditional down-payment rules and negotiate what will
get the deal done in a win-win fashion. Naturally, you
have to do this in the context of the numbers, since
"nothing down" deals are a dime a dozen if you are
willing to buy into "alligators" with high negative cash
flows. The trick is to get away with the minimum input
of capital and still have positive cash flow.
Some people with unlimited resources or well-heeled
partners will argue that the best way is to pay all cash
and force high front-end discounts. They give up downpayment
creativity in favor of discount creativity. You
can't argue with them--unless you are broke and have
to fall back on low-down deals in order to survive.
We'll have more to say about this below.
M 5. WHEN IS THE DOWN PAYMENT DUE?
Range: from way before the deal is closed to way after
Unit Five, Page 8
the deal is closed
Commentary: all other things being equal, you may
want to put off the inevitable as long as possible. You
may even want to take the down payment and spread it
out over the initial period after the deal is closed so
that it never bites you too hard--assuming the seller will
let you get away with it. Creative deals sometimes have
to be structured around down-payment flexibility. The
trick is to realize that there can be flexibility in such
cases. Sometimes all you need to do is ask. In the
"asking" is the creative energy!
M 6. IN WHAT FORM OF CONSIDERATION?
Range: from cash to property to secured paper to
unsecured paper
Commentary: the further away from cash, the more
creative. What if your seller is willing to take some
personal property in lieu of cash? What if he/she won't
take property but will take a note secured by property
(such as real estate)? What if the seller doesn't insist on
the note being secured, and just takes a piece of paper
with your promise on it (i.e., an unsecured note)? All of
these possibilities form a sequence from less creative to
more creative. If you don't ask, the assumption is "Give
me cash." But if you ask creatively, you can sometimes
get away with "murder" and still have a win-win deal.
M 7. AT WHAT RATE OF INTEREST ON THE
UNPAID BALANCE?
Range: from way above the market to way below the
market
Commentary: often this factor is tied in with other
creativity factors in the deal. If you don't get your way
Unit Five, Page 9
with one of the other factors, you might insist on forcing
the interest rate down (and hence the "creativity" up).
Alternately, if you want to force your hand with one of
the other factors, you might choose to yield on the
interest-rate factor. This may make you seen to be less
creative with respect to it, but you will get even on one
or more of the others! More of this later.
M 8. FOR WHAT REPAYMENT TERM?
Range: from long-term to short-term
Commentary: all other things being equal, the longer
you can postpone the repayment, the better. The
reason for this has to do with the time value of money.
The longer you have your money in your own clutches,
the more you can put it to work for you. The moment
you pass it on to the seller, you lose the option of
putting it to work for you. Naturally, this has to be
counterbalanced against the cost of borrowing it from
the seller.
In each of these eight ranges, creative finance can be
defined as a point along the line defining the range: the further
the point moves along the line, the more "creative" the deal you
have put together.
5.3 CREATIVE FINANCE SCORE CARD
Let's put our findings in the form of a chart summarizing
the eight scales we have used. Let us give our ranges a span of
five points for the sake of relative comparison. What we are
doing is separating "creative finance" into its constituent parts in
order to gain a better understanding in how deals are put
together. This is called the analytical approach. Later on we
will talk about creative finance in terms of a synthetic approach
where we see how combinations of factors add up to optimum
results.
Unit Five, Page 10
Each deal is a little different, with different sets of
demands and needs. We are attempting to set up a way to
"keep score" in the game of creative finance, to measure the
degree of creativity needed in order to put deals together.
A HYPOTHETICAL CASE STUDY
Let us suppose, for example, that you want to purchase
a valuable painting and are able to structure an arrangement
according to the criteria listed above, with the following details.
How creative is your deal?
M 1. AT WHAT PRICE?
You are able to negotiate a price that is 50% below the
market for the painting in question. Thus, whatever
financing source you come up with, you are already
50% ahead of the game. Since 50% below the market
can be considered a very unusual opportunity, your
creativity shoots to the top of the range in this case.
M 2. USING WHOSE FINANCIAL RESOURCES TO
BUY?
You are able to set up an arrangement where little or
none of your own resources are to be put into the deal,
hence your creativity along this scale also rises to a
point close to the top.
M 3. HOW HARD OR SOFT ARE THE "OTHER
PEOPLE" INVOLVED?
Now, who your participating partner is in the deal is
very important from the standpoint of creativity. Let us
take the position that the most desirable partner is the
seller himself; the next most desirable partner would be
Unit Five, Page 11
one or more non-institutional investors or participants
within your circle of acquaintance; and the least
desirable source would consist of the hard-money
lenders. The reasons for this judgment are fairly
obvious: sellers who serve as bankers usually don't
require involved credit checks or approvals by august
high-level committees; non-institutional partners, while
usually requiring a good piece of the action are still
easier to work with than the hard-money lenders.
Let us suppose in our illustration that you are able to
induce the seller himself to finance the purchase of the
painting. Thus your "creativity" stock rises upward
along the vertical line toward the top, since this kind of
financial arrangement is perhaps the least "mainstream"
option you have.
M 4. WITH WHAT SIZE OF DOWN PAYMENT?
Let us suppose your seller insists on at least 5% down,
despite all of your creative badgering. Your creativity in
this regard does not go completely to the top, but at
least it approaches maximum.
M 5. WHEN IS THE DOWN PAYMENT DUE?
The good news is that you ask your seller to allow you
to delay payment of your 5% down payment for six
months--and much to your surprise he agrees! This is
not "much later," as indicated on the payment-due
scale, but at least it carries you upward toward the top.
M 6. IN WHAT FORM OF CONSIDERATION?
You talk your seller into letting you take care of your
payment obligation in the form of an unsecured note
that provides for monthly payments. Thus your
"creativity" in this regard is high.
Unit Five, Page 12
M 7. AT WHAT RATE OF INTEREST ON THE
UNPAID BALANCE?
You work hard to come to terms on this issue, but find
that your seller simply won't go lower than market rate.
Your creativity in this regard is only moderate, but at
least you got him to come off his initial insistence that
you pay him several points above the market due to the
fact that you were giving him an unsecured note.
M 8. FOR WHAT REPAYMENT TERM?
When it came to this issue, you were somewhat
embarrassed to
ask your seller for ten years to service the note. Much
to your amazement, he accepted. Thus your creativity
on this scale rises to the top.
Now, if we take our hypothetical example and assign a
score for each of these eight ranges of creativity, you can come
up with a chart
From your chart it is apparent that your deal was, on
the whole, very creative indeed. You bought a valuable asset at
50% below the market (1) without a dime of your own money
(2). In fact your "banker" was the seller himself (3), who was
satisfied with only a modest down payment (4) delayed for a
full six months (5). Your payment was to be in the form of an
unsecured note (6) no higher than market rates (7), with a long
term for fulfillment (8).
Not bad! If we assigned an actual comparative score to
this transaction, then you would have scored 5, 5, 5, 4.5, 4, 5,
3, 5 for a total of 36.5 out of a possible 40 points. This works
out to 91.3%--which would give you an "A" in a creative
financing course at college.
Compare this with the fellow who might have walked in
Unit Five, Page 13
with a pocket full of money and simply plunked down the
equivalent of the full market price for the painting. He would
flunk our course outright!
5.4 TRICKS OF THE TRADE
"But," you say, "is there not something missing? Where
are the neat little tricks and innovative twists that I often
associate with so-called 'creative financing'? Where are the
brilliant flashes of intuition that get over the hurdles and around
the obstacles?"
Good point. Our little illustration gives only the highlights and
doesn't let us in on any of the behind-the-scenes intrigue that
we like to imagine as the fabric of creative finance. Okay, have
it your way. Let us fantasize a little and hypothesize what might
have contributed to the creative facilitation of this deal.
What will surprise you is that you really only need one
major "trick" to make creative finance work in your favor, the
trick of tradeoff. In other words, most of your bargaining
power comes from within our range in the form of yielding on
some issues in order to gain on others that may be more
important to you. Your seller is really not fully aware of your
tolerance levels with respect to the eight issues included in our
lineup. He/she does not know which of the issues is critically
important to you on the basis of your circumstances.
For example, what if you are flat broke and therefore
you must have your way with respect to the second issue
(OPM). You simply have no choice but to look to the
resources of others to swing the deal. Furthermore, what if you
have poor credit and no partners to step in from behind the
scenes, and thus the OPM you must turn to is the seller himself.
How can you assure yourself that the seller will finance the
deal?
Easy. You give up something in one of the other
categories of less importance to you than that. For example,
you might yield on price, even giving the seller above-market
Unit Five, Page 14
consideration for the asset you are purchasing. Or you might
give the seller a higher interest rate that you would normally
tolerate.
Alternately, you might yield on the form of payment.
For example, if the seller demands some form of down
payment so that your neck is on the line, but you don't have
cash to give him/her, then you might consider property, i.e.,
personal property instead. You could give up a car, boat,
horse, or whatever else you might have that would satisfy the
need. Moreover, if you are offering a secured note as the
instrument of payment for the obligation, you could increase
the security on the note in exchange for the OPM/Seller
Finance issue.
For example, if it is real estate you are purchasing, you
could secure the note not only with the subject property as
collateral, but with other properties you might already own. The
technical term for this creative technique is "the blanket
mortgage," because it covers two or more properties at once
and thus increased the collateral of the seller and therefore the
trust and tolerance factor.
To use a further example, suppose you have plenty of
your own money to use in a deal, or at least access to plenty of
money through partners, but you are very keen on price. In that
case, you might yield on the second and third categories and
focus on what is more important to you: price. Your hot button
is to acquire the asset at a price that is far below the market so
that you will be picking up great amounts of equity right from
the start. Here you can yield on some other issue, such as the
form of payment, in order to get what you want.
The name of this game is "cash talks." Rather than
exerting your creative muscle to pay in the form of non-cash
resources, carry-back notes, etc., you simply reach in your
pocket (or your partner's pocket) and pull out cash. But you
insist on lowering the price in exchange for giving up that cash in
the deal.
Unit Five, Page 15
5.5 THE BIG SECRET
By now you know the big secret about creative finance:
i.e., there is no big secret. It really amounts to mixing and
matching your options within the range grid we have outlined.
Creative finance means being creative in how you mix these
options in keeping with your own circumstances.
Your motto is: "You win some battles and you lose
some battles, but you always win the war." In other words, you
are purposely uncreative in some categories in order to be
creative over all and bring home the bacon.
Does that make sense?
5.6 CREATIVE FOOTNOTES
Now, having covered that point, we hasten to add that
the whole world of creative finance is not covered by our
simple chart. There is much room for your own creative
thoughts and strategies outside this chart. You will learn how to
add other categories and tricks that harmonize with your own
style and needs.
For example, what if your interest in not to acquire an
asset immediately but only to get control of it for a time. Then
your creativity will suggest to you getting an "option" on the
asset. In real estate or business acquisition, it is possible to tie
up an asset with an option that gives you a chance either to find
another buyer who will give you consideration for your option,
or to find the financing to buy the property outright. In any case,
the proper instrument in this case is the option instrument, or the
lease-option. You don't purchase for the time being, you just
control.
Furthermore, you will become very adept at facilitating
creative deals by offering things that are out of the ordinary. If
security is a big thing with a given seller whom you are
approaching on a seller-carry-back basis, then it might occur to
you to take out an insurance policy in the name of the seller in
Unit Five, Page 16
order to add security to the deal. If you are short on cash and
personal property to put into a deal, then you might use your
credit to buy something on time that the seller wants as part of
the consideration. Or you might take over an obligation of the
seller on another of his assets and shift the credit back to the
asset you are interested in buying. If you don't want to refinance
a target property as part of a purchase, you can use a "wraparound"
mortgage or contract instrument to purchase it, etc.
Where do such facilitative ideas come from? Your
creative brain--encouraged by the circumstances you find
yourself in. Often the choice of trade-off is dictated by your
circumstances--thus there is no creativity about such choices.
You take a certain approach because you must take it. The
creativity comes in mixing and matching the trade-off
parameters.
In fact, virtually all of the so-called "cookie cutter"
techniques are rooted in our creative finance grid, sweetened
by small creative gestures along the way to grease the skids. In
our next section, we'll turn to some of those cookie cutter
techniques to show you how they can be used.
5.7 SIX UNIVERSAL CREATIVE FINANCE
COOKIE CUTTERS
Let us discuss six of the "classic" creative finance
techniques that everyone needs to have in his/her arsenal of
strategies. As we discuss these techniques, we will refer to our
creative finance chart to see where a given technique fits in.
5.71 THE ULTIMATE PAPER OUT
Every investor has a secret desire to trot into a deal and
trot out with a valuable asset without putting anything down.
Naturally, in the case of an income-producing asset, this desire
includes no negative cash flow
Unit Five, Page 17
Are such deals possible? Yes. All the time. Ask any
veteran who has used his benefits to purchase a house for
nothing down (here the "negative" cash flow is tolerable
because it amounts to rent).
Such deals are even possible for the real estate
investor--if he/she is willing to look around to find the ultimately
flexible seller.
Let's suppose we can find a flexible seller who is willing
to carry back paper on a property in order to facilitate the sale.
He is not willing to discount the price, so we cannot be creative
in that regard. But he is willing to take on the role of banker.
Why would a seller be flexible in this regard? Perhaps
his property has been on the market for a long time and he is
weary of the hassle of trying to get it sold. Perhaps he has a
large portfolio and needs to reduce a tax burden. Perhaps he is
just a philanthropic old gentlemen who wants to help us out!
For whatever reason, he is willing to carry back.
If the carry-back is for 100% of the seller's equity, then
we have a so-called classic "Ultimate Paper Out." Very likely
the seller will demand and get his full price. Possibly he will also
insist on a fairly high interest rate. And perhaps he will want a
balloon payment in the short term (three to five years).
You may even have to "sweeten" the deal by offering a
blanket mortgage to increase the security for a time. Perhaps
you will have to purchase an insurance policy on your own life,
with the seller as beneficiary, in order to get the deal closed.
All of these inducements and sweeteners don't really
matter to you. You do what it takes to close the deal and take
advantage of the one creative factor that really matters to you:
nothing down.
Naturally, you will have done your homework by
assembling good evidence that the property will likely hold its
value or even appreciate in time to come in and solve the
balloon problem. Naturally you will have looked into the
Unit Five, Page 18
bottom line to assure yourself that you will have positive cash
flow despite the 100% financing on the property.
On your creativity chart for the Ultimate Paper Out, we
will note that the price may be at the market level or even
somewhat above (score 3 or lower). Who pays will be OPM
(other people's money--score 1). Hard or soft will be the seller
(score 1). How much down will be zero (score 1). When due
will be a moot point in this case (there is no day of reckoning--
score 1)!. Form of pay will be secured note (score 4). The
interest rate will probably be at market levels or somewhat
higher (score 3). And the term will likely be intermediate and
perhaps somewhat shorter (score 3).
5.72 BLANKET MORTGAGE
In the "Ultimate Paper Out" we mentioned the
possibility of cementing the deal with a "Blanket Mortgage."
Let's go back and analyze what that means in terms of our
creativity grid. The Blanket Mortgage is really an inducement
technique that falls under the "Form Of Payment" column in our
creativity chart. The logic of it is quite simple, especially in a
nothing down deal.
The seller in a 100% carry-back situation will say to
himself: "Why should I let this investor take over my property
with nothing down? If his head is not on the block, then he may
not follow through. With nothing invested, he has nothing to
lose."
There is a compelling logic to this conclusion. A nothing
down investor may really not have much to lose in just walking
away from a deal that isn't going his way. Hence security
becomes an issue for the seller.
How can you increase the seller's security and still take
advantage of a nothing down deal? The answer has to do with
the nature of a secured
note. A mortgage is really a combination of two interlocking
instruments: a promissory note and a collateral agreement. In
Unit Five, Page 19
essence, the note memorializes your promise to pay a certain
sum of money according to agreed-upon terms. The collateral
agreement pledges something of value to back up your
promise. If you don't perform on the note as
promised, then you allow the holder of the note to take over the
property (collateral) you have pledged.
In most real estate transactions, the collateral is in fact
the subject property itself that is being purchased. If the seller
turns over a property to you then you give back a trust deed
note (or mortgage note) plus a security agreement pledging the
subject property as collateral.
But what if you pledged more than the subject
property? What if you secured your note with the subject
property plus something else of value, such as another property
you own? If you offer more security in this way then you are
setting up a "Blanket Mortgage" or "Blanket Trust Deed"
situation.
Why would you want to do this? To help the seller
overcome his security doubts in a nothing-down situation. The
Blanket Mortgage is a financing technique that is analogous to a
"security blanket" for the seller. You say to him: "I'll give you a
security blanket if you give me a nothing down deal."
Naturally you will want to include in your Blanket
Mortgage Agreement a provision to release the second
property as collateral in the event you perform on your
agreement for a specified period of time. Let's say if you make
all of your payments for a year in a timely way and keep the
property in good condition then the additional collateral can be
released. In a year's time, the value of the subject property may
well have increased in value anyway, thus increasing the seller's
security.
The "Blanket Mortgage" creativity chart will look just
like the chart for the "Ultimate Paper Out." The variation is that
you will be using an additional property as collateral for the
secured note.
Unit Five, Page 20
5.73 SECOND MORTGAGE CRANK
The term "crank" is an old creative finance term that
implies pulling money out of a property at closing, or "cranking"
money out of a property in order to close a deal.
In order to crank money in this way, there must be
considerable equity in a property. In fact, the "Second
Mortgage Crank" can only work well if the financing on a
property is 25% or less. Where there is 75% equity in a
property, the parties to a transaction can use their creativity to
arrange a win-win deal.
How does it work?
What is important to the seller is to get a lot of his
equity converted to cash. What is important to the buyer is to
get into the deal with little or none of his own money. Thus the
buyer will probably have to yield on price and terms in order to
get "creative" with the source of the funds to buy the property.
There are two variations:
A. SELLER REFINANCE
In this case, the seller, in order to facilitate the sale,
agrees to refinance the property himself with around a 75% -
80% new loan, pay off the existing loan (which should not
exceed 25% of the value of the property), and take the balance
of the refinance proceeds in the form of cash. The buyer then
gives the seller a second trust deed (or second mortgage in
some states) for the remaining portion of the equity. Thus the
buyer gets in for nothing down.
Again, there may need to be inducements like a
"Blanket Mortgage" for the carry back portion of the deal, or
an insurance policy with the seller as beneficiary. Or the price
of the property or the interest rate on the second may need to
be generous for the seller.
Unit Five, Page 21
The key is for the buyer to creative where it counts.
Why would a seller go to the trouble to refinance the
property himself and "cranking" out his own proceeds? Perhaps
he has had difficulty selling the property and needs to do
something special to get rid of it. Perhaps he is tempted by a
price that is generous, or perhaps the buyer pays back a bonus
when the second is paid off. With some clever negotiating, such
deals can be put together.
B. THE "CLASSIC" SECOND MORTGAGE CRANK
With this variation, the buyer takes out a new loan on
the property, pays off the existing loan, and gives the proceeds
to the seller. The down payment (which is always essential in a
new hard-money loan that is part of a purchase) comes in the
form of a note that the buyer executes in favor of the seller,
using another property as collateral. In other words, there is no
second trust deed (or second mortgage) on the subject
property; rather, the buyer has paid for the remaining equity in
the form of a note--which does indeed have value.
The seller does indeed receive consideration for his
remaining equity, but it is not in the form of cash. It is in the
form of a note secured by another property. Thus there is no
secondary financing on the subject property--just the new first
trust deed (or mortgage).
What is the catch? No catch. Just the need to find a
lender that will be willing to arrange for such a transaction.
What if the lender wants proof that the down payment part of
the transaction has really come out of the buyer's pocket. In
that case, the lender may require the seller to sign a "verification
of deposit" stating that the seller has received consideration for
his equity in the form of an exchange. If the lender is aware of
the kind of consideration involved, perhaps he will require that
the note by appraised in order to demonstrate that the requisite
value in there. It stands to reason that lenders will be more
amenable to this kind of creative financing in times when capital
is plentiful.
Unit Five, Page 22
In any case, the money needed to complete the deal
has been "cranked" out of the property (in the form of the
proceeds of the new loan less the payoff for the old loan).
Actually, the remaining proceeds to complete the deal have
also been "cranked" out of the secondary property in the form
of the exchange. It's like a double crank.
This is the classic form of the Second Mortgage Crank
because the seller does not need to do anything except agree to
a highly creative deal.
Once more, the buyer is likely to yield on the factors of
price, interest rates, terms, etc., in order to get the advantage
concerning the source of the capital. Thus the creativity is
selective.
If you do a chart on, the "Second Mortgage Crank"
you will note that the price will probably be at market level or
higher (score 3). Who pays will be OPM (score 5). Hard or
soft is a mixed bag: hard for the bank (score 1) and soft for the
seller (score 5). The average will fall in the middle, so score 3
for this factor. How much down will hopefully be zero (score
1). When due--score 1 again because without any down
payment, this point is moot. Form of pay is a secured note
(mortgage or trust deed--score 4). Interest rate will probably
be at market level or higher (score 3). The term will probably
be intermediate or longer (score 3).
5.74 WRAP-AROUND MORTGAGE
What happens during tight-money times when the poor
old buyer cannot qualify for a loan in order to buy a property?
There is a powerful variation on the seller-carry back
that works well when the underlying loan has a relatively low
interest rate and when that loan is assumable.
Let's say the seller has a $100,000 property with a
$60,000 mortgage at 8%. The seller's equity is therefore
Unit Five, Page 23
$40,000. You want to buy this property but cannot qualify for a
new loan to buy the seller out. What can you do?
You can give the seller a new mortgage that
incorporates the old and a large part of the seller's equity. Let's
say you can come up with $10,000 down in cash and give the
seller a new mortgage for $90,000 at 10% interest. This new
mortgage "wraps" around the old underlying mortgage of
$50,000. There is a $40,000 portion of the new mortgage that
covers the rest of the seller's equity. We refer to this financing
instrument as a "Wrap-Around Mortgage" or "All-Inclusive
Trust Deed (AITD)."
Why would a seller carry back such a mortgage? One
reason is that he is getting 10% interest not only on the $40,000
portion, but also on the underlying $50,000 portion as well.
Thus he gets a 2% "spread" on the underlying portion--which
he can put into his pocket until that underlying mortgage has
been paid off. Alternately, you may perhaps agree to terms that
will require you to pay off the new mortgage before the
underlying mortgage comes due. In that case, the proceeds you
deliver will pay off the new mortgage and old mortgage at the
same time.
Thus you have yielded concerning the interest rate, and
possibly the time span, but have gained in the area that is
important to you: who comes up with the money. True, you
probably have to come up with a down payment, but the rest of
the equity is financed by the seller himself. And perhaps you
can negotiate a price that is below the market. These factors
make this deal creative.
How do we score this technique on your creativity
chart? Hopefully the price can be somewhat below the market
(score 4). Who Pays? Essentially the seller carries back for
much of the equity, so score 4 for this part. However, you may
have to put something down (score 1). The average will be
around 2.5 on the chart for his factor. Hard or soft (score 5).
How much down (score perhaps 4 since you may have to put
some money down on the deal). When due? Probably at close
(score 3). Form of pay? This is a blend of cash for the down
Unit Five, Page 24
payment (score 1) and secured carry back (score 4). The
average will be around 2.5 for this factor. The interest rate will
likely be at the market level (maybe somewhat higher to induce
the sale--score at least 3). The term will likely be intermediate
(score 3).
5.75 CREATING PAPER
Few people realize that things can be bought with
"paper," but it is true. If you start to build up a portfolio of real
estate properties with growing equities, you can begin to take
advantage of these assets by using them in cash-less deals.
It works like this: if you find a property that you would
like to acquire, you can offer the seller a note as down
payment, in lieu of cash. The note can be secured by the equity
in one of your other properties.
How do you create paper? You sit down at a
typewriter and write out a promissory note. Then you back it
up with a security agreement that pledges your real estate as
collateral. If you prefer, a title company or attorney can whip
this kind of instrument up in no time.
Then you take your note over to the seller and say: "I
want your property, and here is a note as down payment."
Naturally, the terms of the payments on the note will have to be
worked out, just as with any note. And you will have to
perform on the note, or else the seller is entitled to take over
the collateral for the note.
But the beauty of creating and using paper in this way is
that it permits you to buy property without cash (or with less
cash). And you can put your portfolio to work while your
equities are growing. Furthermore, the subject property is not
encumbered with any carry-back financing, thus leaving you
free, if you choose, to refinance it, and pull out money for other
purposes.
Unit Five, Page 25
Why would a seller accept a note in lieu of cash? Not
all sellers will do this. But an anxious seller, or one who is used
to creative financing techniques, might be most willing to engage
in this kind of deal-making. It is better to pick up a performing
note than not to sell the property at all.
Now you may have to be generous with the price and
terms in a paper deal. But you will have your way concerning
the form of payment. Thus your creativity is selective where it
counts.
How will you score this technique? Your price will
likely be around the market level (score 3). Who pays? In this
case you do (score 1); however, you are the softest form of
revenue (hence score 5 for hard or soft). Score 4 for down
payment. When due? At closing, hence score 3. The form of
payment is a secured note (score 4). The interest rate will likely
be around the market rate or higher (score at best 3). The term
will likely be intermediate (score 3).
5.76 LEASE OPTION
A powerful way to have your cake and eat it, too, is to
get control of a property through a Lease With An Option To
Purchase.
This is using your "creativity" without even purchasing
anything except the right to purchase. With the Lease Option
you can make use of the subject property under the terms
specified in the agreement, plus you have the right to buy the
property at a certain price within a certain time frame.
Typically you must pay something for the option
(anywhere from a few hundred to a few thousand dollars);
however, a portion of the monthly rental fee can be applied to
the eventual down payment or purchase price. Thus a lease
option is almost like a purchase where the down payment is
paid over time. Moreover, the prospective buyer will want to
lock in a price that will be advantageous at the time the option
Unit Five, Page 26
is due. It is a gamble, of course, but by locking in the price for
one, two, or three years (whatever the term of the option is), he
might just be able to get the property at a good discount when
the time comes. This would be analogous to a "below market"
deal when the purchase goes through.
Why would an owner agree to a Lease Option? It
could be that he has had trouble selling it and thus wants to
attract a larger prospective audience. Certainly a lease option
will make his management burden lighter since the tenant will
want to treat the property with the respect due to a future
acquisition. The seller also retains the tax advantages of
ownership until the option is exercised and the title passes to
the new owner. Plus the option money is not taxable until the
option is exercised.
All in all, the Lease Option can be good for both
parties involved.
Naturally the greatest advantage for the prospective
buyer is that he can control the property without having to
come up with much cash.
5.8 ASSIGNMENTS
1. Define "Creative Finance."
2. What is the "secret" to Creative Finance?
3. Using your own Creative Finance Score Card, chart out the
following techniques:
Ultimate Paper Out
Second Mortgage Crank
Wrap Around Mortgage
Creating Paper
3. What is a "Blanket Mortgage" and when is it useful to include
Unit Five, Page 27
in a deal?
4. In which kinds of situations is the "Second Mortgage Crank"
most viable?
5. What are the benefits to the "Lease Option" technique for
both buyer and seller?
6. What is the greatest liability with a pure "nothing down"
technique?
PRACTICUM
Contact at least ten sellers and negotiate a financing
solution for each property being offered. Use the mix and
match approach to arrive at a viable solution.
The "Situation Analysis Matrix" Chart included on the
next page may assist you to identify the creative finance
techniques that relate most to the circumstances at hand.
Unit Five, Page 28
SITUATION ANALYSIS MATRIX
SIX UNIVERSAL CREATIVE FINANCE COOKIE CUTTERS
AND WHEN TO USE THEM
1. The Ultimate Paper Out
2. Blanket Mortgage
3. The Second Mortgage Crank
4. Wrap-Around Mortgage
5. Creating Paper
6. Lease Option
CATEGORIES
BUYER
SELLER
PROPERTY
SITUATION AT HAND
You have good credit (or access to it) but no cash right now.
You have poor credit.
You wish to avoid credit checks, qualifying, and closing costs.
You wish to put down little or no money of your own.
You have absolutely no money to put down.
You have cash or inheritances to invest.
You need more a little more down payment to make it work.
You own property and want to generate cash down payments.
You have no property but wish to generate down payments.
You need to solve a negative cash flow problem.
You need to buy a home to live in but have no cash.
You have no equity at all.
You have a weak financial statement.
You have dead equities that you want to put to use.
You have real estate equities to use in transactions.
You want to use your equities without selling or refinancing.
You want to pyramid your assets into bigger properties.
You want to sell without incurring tax liabilities now.
You have an especially keen market sense.
Seller needs cash down at closing.
Seller with low mortgage needs much of equity in cash.
Seller mostly interested in monthly payments.
Seller doesn't need a lot of cash but wants more yield.
Seller will use second-trust note in transaction.
Seller is security conscious and suspicious of creative deals.
Seller is approaching retirement.
Seller must close quickly.
Seller would like to avoid closing costs.
Seller would like to avoid immediate tax liability.
Property lends itself to fix up.
Property is free and clear.
Property has low mortgage, high equity.
Property is assumable (VA, FHA, contracts, etc.).
Property is under market, discounted
Property rents are below market.
Pro
per
ty
is
list
ed
wit
h
real
est
ate
age
nt.
Pro
per
ty
is
off
ere
d
duri
ng
"lo
ose
"
ma
rke
t.
Pro
per
ty
is
off
ere
d
duri
ng
"tig
ht"
mar
ket
©
Cop
yrig
ht
1994
Robe
rt G.
Alle
n
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Unit Five, Page 29
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
UNIT SIX
MAKING
RISK-FREE OFFERS
Unit Six, Page 2
UNIT SIX
MAKING
RISK-FREE OFFERS
6.1 THE FIVE MAJOR BENEFITS OF THE
WRITTEN OFFER
The written offer is the backbone of real estate investing.
Most beginners either stand in awe of its "finality" or stand in
fear of its complexity. Actually, a little study will completely
demystify the offer and reveal it to be a fairly straightforward
means of "saving your bacon" if done correctly. In its final
version, it is nothing more or less than the crystallization in
written form of your best "deal." Through its essential
documentation, a written offer gives you five major benefits:
Unit Six, Page 3
M PRACTICE. The process of making offers is to the
real estate entrepreneur what the "internship" is to the medical
professional. It is the "clinical" part of your training. There is no
better way to come to grips with the ins and outs of real estate
investing than to make many, many written offers--especially
under scrutiny of more experienced associates who can coach
you forward.
M PERSUASIVE POWER. Used properly, the
written offer is one of your most powerful negotiating tools, and
(with the proper contingency clauses) should inaugurate rather
than terminate your "deal making." The offer begins the serious
negotiating process and may go through several generations
before both parties put their signatures to the final word.
M PROTECTION. The written offer memorializes in a
legally binding way what you and the seller have agreed to, and
thus serves as the foundation for getting mutually acceptable
results. The offer also summarizes for you the wisdom of tens of
thousands of deals before you and serves as the accumulation
of dozens of significant clauses that have been invented
precisely to redress problems in the past and are now included
in the "boiler plate" to prevent your going through the misery
that other less prudent predecessors have suffered.
M PERFORMANCE. Once signed, the written offer
serves to open "escrow" and starts the clock ticking inexorably
toward the close. Thus it becomes the agenda for getting the
deal done--period. If things were left to oral agreements, most
deals would never get done.
M POSSESSION. A signed offer, correctly structured,
is in itself a valuable asset, a possession that can even be
brought to market. You are, of course, bound by the terms of
the agreement; but in effect it gives you control over valuable
property, and this "interest" can itself be sold or traded.
A PREVIEW OF THE UNIT
This unit will give you several valuable keys. It will show:
Unit Six, Page 4
M What kind of documentation must accompany the offer to
purchase.
M How to make the documentation fit the negotiated terms of
the agreement.
M Which purchase terms must be documented.
M How to use a documentation checklist.
M How to provide for unexpected contingencies.
M How to use a counteroffer effectively.
M How to use options and lease options.
As you proceed through this unit, imagine yourself
negotiating with the owners of investment property. Picture
yourself and the owner completing the purchase agreement
form according to the methods taught in this unit. As you
become more familiar with the ideas, and as you apply them in
a risk-free atmosphere (which you can do with the exercises at
the end of this unit), you will find that the actual purchase
agreements won't frighten you into making investment mistakes.
You can earn significant real estate profits through proper
negotiation and documentation. This unit will show you how!
6.2 A FEW TERMS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Acceleration Clause: A clause in a deed of trust or
mortgage document that speeds the time when the debt
becomes due. It may specify that the entire debt will become
due upon the sale or transfer of title to the land, or when the
borrower defaults on the payment of either principal or interest.
The acceleration clause benefits the seller, not the buyer.
Assumption of Mortgage: The responsibility of the buyer
for payment of the original debt. In the event of foreclosure,
Unit Six, Page 5
the buyer assumes responsibility for satisfaction of the entire
amount owed.
Bill of Sale: A document that transfers title to all personal
property. In a real estate transaction, the personal property
should be transferred by a bill of sale.
Breach: Violation of a legal contract. When both the
buyer and the seller agree on the terms of sale, and one of them
fails to abide by those terms, he is in breach of contract. It is
imperative that all terms be documented in the agreement to
purchase and, subsequently, in the closing documents.
Closing Statement: The document outlining all costs and
credits for both the buyer and the seller of property. The
closing statement is drafted according to the terms of the
negotiated purchase agreement, so it is crucial that all agreedupon
terms be included in the purchase agreement.
Closing the Loan: The actual execution of the loan
agreement. If you purchase an owner-financed property, you
will close the loan at the closing settlement. In this case, the
terms of the loan must be stated in the purchase agreement.
Collateral: In mortgage lending, the real property or
assets pledged to protect the loan. If your negotiated purchase
terms include collateral other than the real estate being
purchased, you must document that collateral.
Contract: A voluntary agreement between legally
competent parties to do or refrain from doing some legal act,
supported by legal consideration. When you enter into a
purchase agreement, the contract becomes a legally binding
document upon the payment of consideration to the seller.
Deed of Reconveyance: The document by which the lien
holder releases all lien interest in the real estate. When
documenting your purchase agreement, you should provide for
the escrow of a deed of reconveyance.
Unit Six, Page 6
Exculpatory Clause: A clause that limits the borrower's
or buyer's personal liability exclusively to the property that is
pledged as collateral. If documentation of the clause is done
correctly, you won't involve other assets if you default on the
loan obligation.
Negotiation Range: The upper and lower purchase limits
the buyer should establish before negotiation. Each term that
the buyer negotiates with the seller should then fall within the
appropriate negotiation range. Fail to keep within range, and it
will come back to haunt you!
Subject to Mortgage: A situation in which the buyer
purchases a property but does not agree to be responsible for
paying the original mortgage debt. He does recognize that the
seller must pay the debt, or the property can be lost through
foreclosure. In the event of foreclosure, though, the purchaser
is not held responsible for the payment of any deficiency. In
purchasing real estate subject to mortgage, the borrower should
be aware of any accelerated payments that might be required.
"Time is of the Essence": A clause meaning that the
contract must be executed within the time limits stated. If this is
not done, the party who failed to perform is guilty of a breach
of contract.
Valid Contract: An agreement that complies with all the
essentials of a contract and is binding and enforceable on both
the buyer and the seller of a property.
Valuable Consideration: Consideration upon which a
promise may be based. It entitles the promisee (the one
receiving the promise) to enforce his claims against an unwilling
promisor (the one making the promise). In real estate
purchases, valuable consideration may consist of cash, personal
property, or promises.
Void Contract: A contract with no legal force or effect
because it does not meet essential contract requirements. In
real estate, proper documentation must include the essential
requirements for any contract.
Unit Six, Page 7
Voidable Contract: An agreement that seems valid on the
surface, but may be rejected or disaffirmed by one of the
parties. A minor who executes a contract is usually able to
disaffirm within a reasonable period of time after reaching legal
age.
Without Personal Recourse: A phrase meaning that the
holder of a defaulted note cannot hold the other party
personally responsible for payment of the note.
6.3 KEY POINTS ABOUT OFFERS AND
DOCUMENTATION
As you read this unit, keep the following key points in
mind. They will guide your thinking and will help you keep
proper perspective on the information.
M All purchase terms can and must be documented.
M Documentation is as important as negotiation in real estate
investments.
M The more you understand about the legal requirements for
documentation, the more profitable your real estate investments
will be.
M If a purchase term is worth negotiating, it is worth
documenting. Make certain that your documentation spells out
exactly what you negotiated.
M Problems almost always result from purchase agreements
that imply, but do not state, the exact terms of purchase.
M When the seller makes you a counteroffer, it is considered
an entirely new offer, and all the terms must be documented if
you expect success.
M As a real estate investor, you are a professional. When you
negotiate purchase terms, be professional in the way that you
document those terms.
Unit Six, Page 8
6.4 HOW TO DOCUMENT REAL ESTATE OFFERS
Which Steps in the Real Estate Purchase Transactions
Require Documentation?
A real estate purchase transaction consists of more than
simply signing an agreement and taking possession of the
property. As a potential real estate investor, you will need to
document your total transaction. As you become familiar with
the concepts taught in this unit, you will learn that
documentation all relates to one essential document: the earnest
money receipt and offer to purchase. (It is also known as the
"earnest money agreement," "offer to purchase," "purchase
money receipt," or "deposit receipt," "real estate purchase
contract and receipt for deposit," and by various other names,
depending on the area of the country in which it is used.)
A CASE STUDY
Harold R. was looking for a 2 or 3 unit apartment
building. He found a duplex for sale within one and a half
miles of his home. When he went to see the property, the
owner offered to sell the duplex for $58,500, with a
$1,500 down payment and the balance to be paid over a
period of twenty years at 10 1/2 percent interest.
Harold asked the owner if the rents were current and
if the property needed any repairs. The owner assured
Harold that the property was in top condition and that the
tenants were always prompt in paying the rent. After
reviewing the property, Harold asked to see the operating
statement on the property and asked to talk to the
tenants. The owner said that he didn't have the financial
history with him, and told Harold the tenants had asked
not to be disturbed.
The owner then pulled out an earnest money offer and
began to fill in the blanks. He wrote in the down payment
of $1,500, and told Harold he would need to pay the
total amount as earnest money on the property. He put in
no contingency clauses, but assured Harold that they
Unit Six, Page 9
wouldn't be necessary since the property was in excellent
condition. When he got to the section of the document
that referred to closing, he said that his accountant would
close the sale the following morning. Harold felt uneasy
about the whole transaction, but he believed that the seller
was an honest man and that the purchase was a good
one.
The following morning Harold closed the sale of the
property with the owner, and he regretted it within only a
few hours. What did he learn after he closed on the sale?
Q Only one of the two apartment units was rented, and
the existing tenant was more than two months behind on
the rent.
Q No proration for past rent was included on the closing
statement.
Q Harold, as owner, was responsible for the entire utility
payment--even though the seller had told Harold that the
tenants paid utilities. (The seller later claimed he was
referring to the telephone bill.)
Q The water heater in one of the units had been repaired
three times in the previous year, and the repair people
said that it would need to be replaced if it broke again. It
was not working when the property was closed.
Q Harold learned that the seller owed more than $72,500
on the property to a short-term, high-interest loan
company, and that he was behind on payments.
Q The taxes on the property were four years delinquent,
and the property was scheduled to be sold for back taxes
within three months.
Q The accountant who closed the sale was the seller's
brother-in-law.
Unit Six, Page 10
Needless to say, Harold was extremely disillusioned.
He tried to get out of the sale, but the seller said Harold
was now the owner and was responsible for the
payments associated with ownership. Harold asked the
seller about his verbal assurances, and the seller simply
referred him back to the earnest money agreement.
Harold threatened to consult a lawyer, which he did. The
lawyer's solemn response? Harold was stuck!
Harold then offered to deed the property back to the
seller and forfeit his $1,500 down payment. The seller
wouldn't accept the deed, and said the only way he
would take the property back would be through
foreclosure. Desperate, Harold went through foreclosure
and lost the property to the seller. Unfortunately, that
wasn't the end of it. The seller had purchased the
property back for much less than the loan amount. Harold
owed $18,750 in the form of a deficiency judgment.
This entire episode could have been avoided if Harold
had insisted on proper documentation, beginning with his
earnest money offer to purchase.
In any real estate transaction, you should follow these
steps to make sure that the documentation protects your
interests:
6.5 STEPS FOR REAL ESTATE DOCUMENTATION
M 1. Purchaser makes offer to purchase.
Documentation: Deposit receipt or earnest money offer,
including reference to all terms and contingencies.
M 2. Purchaser and seller sign offer to purchase or
counteroffer.
Documentation: Earnest money offer or counteroffer
containing all signatures and negotiated terms.
Unit Six, Page 11
M 3. Purchaser and seller authorize independent party to
handle closing of sale.
Documentation: Escrow instructions that relate to signed
offer to purchase.
M 4. Purchaser obtains funds through lender or seller.
Documentation: Notes, deeds of trust, and/or ownerfinancing
agreements.
M 5. Seller proves ownership of property to be conveyed.
Documentation: Title abstract and title insurance policies.
6. Purchaser becomes owner of property subject to purchase
money liens.
Documentation: Deed and closing statement.
7. Purchaser becomes owner of property free and clear of
purchase money liens.
Documentation: Deed of reconveyance.
6.6 SEVEN COMMON MISTAKES OFTEN MADE
BY BEGINNING INVESTORS
As you review the above steps, you can easily see the
mistakes Harold made in his first real estate purchase. Each of
these common mistakes could have been avoided with the
proper documentation:
Q Offer to purchase was drafted by the seller, not the buyer.
Q Earnest money receipt or offer did not contain reference to
all negotiated terms.
Q Qualified, independent party did not handle the closing.
Unit Six, Page 12
Q Financing agreements did not contain non-recourse or
exculpatory clauses.
Q Closing of the sale took place without a proper title search
and title insurance policy.
Q Closing statements did not properly reflect proration of all
negotiated items.
Q Deed of reconveyance was not placed in escrow.
Mistake #1:
Offer to purchase was drafted by the seller, not the
buyer. When you are purchasing any real estate property, you,
as the buyer, should be making the offer to the seller, not the
other way around. When Harold was purchasing the duplex,
the seller drafted the earnest money offer to himself and had
Harold sign it. This process eliminates the negotiating ranges
that are essential to your success (negotiating ranges will be
discussed later in this unit).
If the seller drafts the earnest money offer, he certainly is
not going to include reference to any item that is not expressly
in his best interest. Harold's first mistake was to allow the seller
to draft the earnest money offer. Most of his other mistakes
occurred because of this first error.
Mistake #2:
Earnest money receipt or offer did not contain reference
to all negotiated terms. Harold signed the earnest money offer
without including reference to the expenses and rents the owner
represented as fact. But that's not all. Harold failed to negotiate
most of the terms of the sale: a proper closing date, the
payment of proration items, title insurance, an independent
escrow closing agent, and contingency and exculpatory clauses.
As you begin investing in real estate properties, you will
find that a proper earnest money form that you fill out will insure
that you include all necessary documentation.
Unit Six, Page 13
Mistake #3:
Qualified independent party did not handle the closing.
Note two important words: "qualified" and "independent." If
you allow a real estate closing to take place without either of
these two necessary ingredients, you are teetering on a
tightrope over an investment disaster. When Harold allowed the
owner's accountant and brother-in-law to close the sale, he
immediately violated the requirement for an independent
relationship. When he used an accountant rather than a
professional escrow service or legal attorney, he forfeited the
qualified nature of a closing.
Obviously, an accountant is a professional, but an
accountant is not usually a qualified real estate closing agent.
Mistake #4:
Financing agreements did not contain non-recourse or
exculpatory clauses. These clauses limit your loss through
foreclosure to the property or asset pledged as security (your
collateral). It may not be possible to get this kind of an
agreement when negotiating a loan with a bank or lending
institution, but it should be a part of any agreement that
specifies owner financing.
When Harold agreed to pay the owner $57,000 over
twenty years, he should have spelled that out in the earnest
money offer. His failure to do so allowed the owner to
foreclose on the property and require Harold to pay $18,750 in
the form of a deficiency judgment.
Mistake #5:
Closing of the sale took place without a proper title
search and title insurance policy. We strongly recommend that
you delay the closing of sale until you have reviewed all
necessary property information, including all expense and
income information and the actual title and encumbrances of the
property.
Unit Six, Page 14
When Harold closed on the purchase of the duplex the
morning following the offer, he didn't have time to review the
necessary information. Harold later learned that a short-term
note was due on the property for more than its actual purchase
price. Never buy a property when the encumbrances total more
than you are financing!
When the title company does a title search on the
property, you will discover the total amount of encumbrances
against the property, including back taxes. In many states, the
property can be sold through a tax sale when the property
taxes become five years in arrears. (Remember that the taxes
were more than four years delinquent on Harold's duplex.)
Mistake #6:
Closing statements did not properly reflect proration of all
negotiated items. Once again, Harold's initial problem was the
earnest money offer to purchase--it was filled out by the seller,
and no reference was made to the proration of taxes, rents, and
so on. Harold should never have closed on a purchase without
proper proration. An independent and qualified closing would
have specified the proration.
It is possible to prorate an item according to terms agreed
to by both the buyer and the seller. If you wish to prorate the
items in a separate manner, make sure that such a reference is
included in the purchase agreement.
Mistake #7:
Deed of reconveyance was not placed in escrow. Harold
never got to the point of receiving a deed of reconveyance
because he lost the property through foreclosure. If he had paid
the original $57,000 in full, then he would have received a deed
of reconveyance from the seller that would have released all lien
interest in the property. Because the financing agreement
extends for a long period of time, you should have the seller
sign a deed of reconveyance and place it in escrow; then, when
you finally pay off the property, you can immediately receive
free and clear title to it.
Unit Six, Page 15
When dealing with commercial lending institutions, a deed
of reconveyance does not need to be placed in escrow.
As you prepare any earnest money offer to purchase,
make sure that you follow the steps for real estate
documentation and avoid the common documentation mistakes.
Knowing what to include in your offer is a major part of the
investment process.
6.7 NEGOTIATING THE RANGES
In the previous section of this unit you learned the
importance of documenting every term that is agreed upon by
you (the buyer) and the seller. It stands to reason, then, that
you also need to negotiate each and every term. Before
negotiation occurs, you need to establish upper and lower limits
for each of these items; the area between the two extremes is
called the "negotiation range." Your success in real estate
investing will be tied directly to your ability to keep all--or the
majority-- of your purchase terms within respective negotiation
ranges.
Once you have established your range, you can begin to
make the offer. The first and most important thing to learn is
that "cash" is an extremely valuable commodity and should be
conserved if at all possible. When making an offer to purchase,
remember: cash conserved is the key to increased investment
opportunities! If you consistently conserve your cash on real
estate purchases, you will have the resources to make
additional purchases.
A CASE STUDY
Dean E. Began investing in small rental properties that
he could purchase with little or nothing down. He made
offers only on properties that were excellent buys, could
be financed using "nothing down" techniques, and would
appreciate in value through inexpensive cosmetic repairs
and the raising of rents.
Unit Six, Page 16
His program was based on pre-established
negotiation ranges, and he always began his negotiation
process with the rule of cash conservation as a priority. If
the property required an excessive amount of cash from
his own resources, he refused it, even if the return was
excellent. Why? If he used the majority --or all--of his
available cash to buy the property, he would limit his
ability to meet unexpected cash needs and to continue his
investment program.
It is crucial to your success in the art of negotiation to
include "non-price" items as part of your negotiation. Used
correctly, they will allow you some room for give and take and
will make your "cash/price" items easier to obtain. Some of the
possibilities under this category include the following:
M The seller agrees to defer the date of settlement and closing
without changing the price.
M The seller agrees to let the buyer do property improvements
prior to closing, and to notify tenants that the rental rates will be
increased immediately following the completion of those
improvements.
M The seller agrees to finance all or part of the debt at terms
better than the buyer could obtain through commercial sources.
M The seller provides warranties that may be better than what
the buyer could ordinarily expect.
M The seller accepts an exculpatory clause that minimizes the
buyer's risk.
M The seller agrees to accept more than a prorated share of
the transaction costs and fees.
M The seller agrees to improve the property to the buyer's
specifications.
1. The seller agrees to defer the date of settlement and
closing without changing the price. If you can get the seller to
Unit Six, Page 17
agree to defer closing for an extended period, you are actually
getting the seller to absorb part of the interest costs and other
cash outlays. This tactic is extremely important if you are going
to do cosmetic repairs and raise the rents: you can't raise the
rents while the repair work is underway, and you may want to
do the repair work before you assume ownership. If you elect
this tactic, check with a legal professional as to the validity of
your contract before you make any improvements on the
property.
A CASE STUDY
Dean E. wanted to invest in a four-plex apartment that
was being rented at below market rates. The price of the
property was directly related to the rental income, and
Dean was able to buy the property at a very fair price.
He also knew that if he could raise the rents, he could
increase the value of the property.
When Dean first located the apartment building, the
units were all being rented for $225 per month. Why
were the rents so low? The building needed painting,
new carpets, and improved landscaping. When Dean
negotiated with the owner, he asked for a closing date of
120 days after acceptance of the offer by all parties. The
owner did not agree to 120 days, but did accept a 90-
day closing. (Dean had set a negotiation range on closing
of 30 to 120 days: he knew that he could do most of the
necessary renovation within 30 days, but he wanted to
give himself plenty of breathing room. When he got 90
days from the seller, he knew he could do the necessary
cosmetic repairs easily during this time frame.)
There were other items that Dean negotiated in the
purchase, but the ninety-day closing meant that he did not
have to absorb a negative cash flow during the fix-up
period. It allowed him to complete cosmetic repairs that
resulted in a rental increase from $225 to $295 per month
immediately after closing. (As a matter of interest, only
two of the tenants moved out, and their units were rented
Unit Six, Page 18
at the full rate within seven days after the closing of the
sale.)
2. The seller agrees to let the buyer do property
improvements prior to closing and to notify tenants that the
rental rates will be increased immediately following the
completion of those improvements.
When Dean negotiated this item with the owner of the
apartment building, he pointed out that he would do the
improvement work at his own expense and that there
would be no risk for the owner. The owner realized that
the cosmetic repairs would increase the value of the
property, boosting his own security in the property. The
range Dean had established prior to negotiation was that
the seller would allow the improvements but would not
allow the notification of rental increase. When he
negotiated, however, Dean got both--so it definitely fell
within his negotiation range.
3. The seller agrees to finance all or part of the debt at
terms better than the buyer could obtain through commercial
sources. It is important to contact local lenders in your area to
determine what financing is available, what the interest rates
are, and what loan-to-value ratio they will loan. Once you
know this, you are prepared to negotiate these terms with the
seller. If you can get the seller to finance you at a higher loanto-
value ratio and a lower interest rate, you will improve your
investment in the property.
Dean set his negotiation range for financing as 100
percent financing at 3 percent below the interest the
banks were charging; his lower negotiating limit was the
commercial rate obtainable from local lending sources.
When he negotiated the purchase of the property, the
owner agreed to 97 percent financing at 10 percent
interest. The banks would loan only 80 percent at 12 1/2
percent interest. The seller agreed to a loan term of
twenty-five years, which is what the banks would have
agreed to. The owner financed $81,500, at a payment of
$740.59 per month. If he had used bank financing, he
Unit Six, Page 19
would have been able to borrow only $67,200, with a
payment of $732.72 at 12 1/2 percent interest. In other
words, he was able to borrow an additional $14,300
from the seller for only $7.87 per month.
4. The seller provides warranties that may be better than
what the buyer could ordinarily expect. It is important to get as
many warranties from the seller as possible. If the seller tells
you that the expenses run only 28 percent of gross, then try to
get him to warranty this fact by accepting less on his financing
payment if expenses increase beyond the 28 percent figure.
This may not be possible, but it is worth a try. Other warranties
that you should ask for include a warranty or guarantee on the
appliances for a period of 90 to 180 days. This insures that you
will be able to detect make-shift repair work done to sell the
property.
When Dean made his offer to purchase the four-unit
apartment building, he had seen verified expense
information and did not request an expense warranty. He
did, however, request the owner to warranty all
appliances, furnaces, water heaters, and swamp coolers
for one year. The owner agreed to warranty those items
for a period of 120 days after closing. This fell within the
negotiation range that Dean had established. The owner
later had to pay for the repair of one furnace at a cost of
$158. If Dean had not negotiated the warranty
information, he would have had to pay this expense
himself.
5. The seller accepts an exculpatory clause that minimizes
the buyer's liability. No one expects that a property will be lost
to foreclosure, but it should be provided for.
Dean knew that none of the banks in his area used a
clause that limited risk to the property pledged as loan
collateral, but he was unwilling to accept any owner
financing agreement that did not include such an
exculpatory clause. His negotiating was very inflexible in
this matter. When he was negotiating with the owner, he
emphasized that if the property was worth the asking
Unit Six, Page 20
price, the owner had plenty of security, particularly with
the improvements that Dean was making at his own
expense. The owner agreed to this clause, which Dean
hoped he would never need. But Dean protected his
other assets from attachment or loss regardless of what
happened to the property.
6. The seller agrees to accept more than a prorated share
of the transaction costs and fees.
Dean was willing to prorate the costs of the
transaction, but he tried to get the seller to pay a higher
portion of those costs if possible. He asked the seller to
pay all closing costs that normally would be paid by the
buyer. The owner agreed, paying for a termite
inspection, all escrow fees, and all recording fees of loan
and title documents, which saved Dean $325 at closing.
7. The seller agrees to improve the property to the
buyer's specifications. Rather than negotiating purely on price, it
is sometimes possible to get the seller to pay for certain repairs
that you consider essential.
When Dean negotiated with the seller, he told the
seller that he was willing to do certain improvements to
make the property a better investment, but he wanted the
seller to resurface the parking lot. It had weeds coming
up through the asphalt and contributed to the low rents
that the property generated. The seller did not agree to
Dean's demand at first, but before the negotiations were
concluded he agreed to complete the resurfacing at his
expense prior to closing. The bill for the parking lot come
to $785 and was paid by the seller not by Dean.
Obviously, it is important to negotiate within your range
for all non-price items, but what about the actual price you are
willing to pay for the property? If you pay too much for a piece
of property, you will lose money from the first day. Many
investors believe that if they get extremely favorable financing,
they can afford to pay more for the property. That's true, but
only to a certain degree, but it is best to never pay more for the
Unit Six, Page 21
property than it is worth, regardless of the financing. If you
receive extremely favorable financing from the owner, then you
can afford to pay full market value. If financing is less than
favorable, you should pay less than market value.
6.8 ESTABLISHING THE VALUE OF A PROPERTY
How, then, do you establish the negotiation range for the
price of a property? When buying income property, you should
become familiar with all comparable rental properties sold in
your area. There are several other techniques that can help you
set the range:
M Use cash-flow analysis to determine value.
M Compare sales price with market.
M Get an official appraisal.
1. Use cash-flow analysis to determine value. You can
determine value for a property by dividing the net operating
income by the capitalization rate that is common to your area. If
you have questions about this, ask your mentor. (Simply stated,
to calculate the N.O.I., obtain the total gross revenue for the
year, subtract total vacancy losses and operating expenses, and
arrive at a net operating income prior to payment of debt
service.)
When Dean was evaluating the purchase of the
apartment building, he was buying the property based on
the existing operating history. He verified the expense
information and called several professional real estate
appraisers to find out the accepted capitalization rate in
his area. He found that the expenses on the property
were $3,200 per year; the gross rental income at $225
per unit was $10,800. This left a net operating income of
$7,600 per year. Two professional appraisers in his area
told him that an acceptable capitalization rate was 8.75
Unit Six, Page 22
percent. By dividing the $7,600 by 8.75 percent, he
arrived at the upper limit of his negotiation range:
$7,600
= $86,857
.0875
By using a cash-flow analysis then, Dean set his upper
limit at $86,850 and his starting point at approximately 90
percent of value, or $78,000. The 90 percent figure was
an arbitrary figure he felt comfortable with.
2. Compare sales price with market. Another method of
setting the price range for negotiation is comparing the property
with other properties that have been sold or are listed for sale in
the community. This is not an accurate method of determining
value, but it is a good yardstick for verifying the negotiation
range established through cash-flow analysis.
When Dean was evaluating the four-unit apartment
building for possible purchase, he compared it to other
rental units of similar size that had recently sold in the
area. He found that four-unit apartment buildings in his
area were selling for $80,000 to $120,000. The rents
varied from $210 to $340 per month per unit. Since the
existing rental income of the property was toward the
lower end of the scale, he estimated that the value of the
property should also be at the lower end of the scale.
Using the comparable sales price of other rental property,
he estimated his negotiation range to be from $80,000 to
$88,000.
3. Get an official appraisal. An official or certified
appraisal will give the most valid information for establishing the
negotiation range. If you decide to get an appraisal, have it
done by an appraiser who is recognized by conservative
lending institutions; then you'll be reasonably sure that the
estimated value is conservative. The seller probably won't pay
for an appraisal and then sell the property for much less than
the appraisal, so we recommend that you make your offer
subject to an appraisal of the property. In this way, the price is
Unit Six, Page 23
set before the appraisal of the property, and if the appraisal
comes in too low, you will be able to renegotiate with the seller.
The cost of a qualified, independent appraiser can save you a
possible loss of appreciation if you have made a mistake on
your figures. It also gives added reinforcement to the
negotiation range that you established.
When Dean reviewed all the available information, he
set his negotiation range for a price between $78,000 and
$86,500. He initially offered the seller $78,000, and
finally accepted a counteroffer of $84,000 (subject to an
appraisal of the property paid for by the buyer). When
the offer was completely accepted and signed by all
parties, he ordered an appraisal on the property. The
official appraisal came in at $85,750 (according to the
present condition and rental history of the property).
After Dean completed the improvements, purchased
the property, and raised the rents, he paid for another
appraisal by the same appraiser. The appraisal was based
largely on the added net operating income, so Dean was
not surprised when the final appraisal came in at
$109,500. This was at the upper end of the value for
four-unit apartments in the area, but the added
improvements and rental income justified the price.
The cosmetic improvements cost only $4,750, and
the property value had jumped by more than $23,000.
This substantial increase was largely a result of Dean
knowing what his negotiation range was for each separate
term in his purchase agreement.
6.6 WHICH ELEMENTS ARE ESSENTIAL TO THE
REAL ESTATE OFFER?
Once the buyer and the seller agree on the terms of
purchase and sign the earnest money offer or receipt, both
parties want to be confident that the document is a legal and
binding agreement. Why? That's the only way the parties can
rely on the promises and representations made in the
Unit Six, Page 24
agreement. Unfortunately, not all agreements are valid
contracts. If the agreement does not contain all the elements
required by law, the document may not be a valid contract.
We are not giving you legal or professional advice in this
matter, but are only offering general educational material that
you can use as a basis for questioning a contract. Once you
begin investing in real estate, we urge you to consult competent
legal counsel in determining the validity of any legal agreement.
A real estate purchase agreement may be considered
either a valid contract, a void contract, or a voidable contract.
A void contract is one that has no effect because it does not
meet the legal requirements of a contract. A voidable contract
is one that may become void if later circumstances negate the
agreement or if the parties to the contract are shown to be not
competent. When you are purchasing a real estate property,
you want the contract to be valid and voidable on the part of
the buyer. If your real estate purchase includes contingency
items on the part of the buyer, then you as the buyer will be
able to void the contract if those contingencies are not met.
The essential elements of a real estate contract will vary
from state to state and from time to time. The elements listed
below are those generally required in most jurisdictions:
M Competent parties
M Offer and acceptance
M Consideration
M Legality of object
M Agreement in writing and signed
M Description of subject real estate
1. Competent parties. Both the buyer and the seller must
be of legal age and must not be suffering from a mental
handicap that would make them incompetent. Most states have
Unit Six, Page 25
lowered the legal voting age for national elections to eighteen
years of age, and, as a result, most states accept eighteen as a
legal age to enter a contract. If either the buyer or the seller of a
real estate property is a corporate officer or agent, he must
have express written permission, signed by the proper
authority, to act for that corporation.
A CASE STUDY
Snell O. was interested in purchasing an eight-unit
apartment building. He investigated the property and
found that it was owned by the Miles Corporation. When
he began negotiating for the purchase of the rental
property, he requested from the individual a written
document giving him permission to negotiate for and on
behalf of the Miles Corporation for that piece of
property. Dennis W., the agent, said that he was
authorized to sell the property for the Miles Corporation
but that he didn't have a signed agreement authorizing that
action.
Snell's reaction? Snell said he was extremely
interested in negotiating the purchase of the eight-unit
rental property, but that he wasn't going to begin
negotiation until he was convinced that Dennis was in fact,
authorized to act for the corporation. Dennis finally
received the proper document from the Miles
Corporation. Snell then felt confident that he could
negotiate in good faith.
If either party is not of legal age, the contract will be
considered void--or, at the least, voidable by the minor-aged
person. For this reason, it is imperative to make sure that you
are dealing with someone of legal age.
Another element you must consider when entering into a
real estate purchase agreement is mental illness or intoxication.
If one party is considered to be incompetent, the real estate
contract could be considered valid, but voidable once
incompetency is affirmed.
Unit Six, Page 26
A CASE STUDY
Mitchell A. was negotiating for the purchase of a
single-family rental property. The seller agreed to all of
Mitchell's terms at the lower end of his negotiation range.
Mitchell was elated, and thought he was on the road to a
great investment.
Mitchell's elation was short-lived. After the contract
was signed, the seller changed his mind and said he
wouldn't go through with the sale as agreed to in the
earnest money offer to purchase. Why? On the day the
offer was negotiated, he had lost his job, had gone home,
and had gotten drunk. Several witnesses attested to the
fact that he had been drinking excessively just before
Mitchell arrived to negotiate the purchase of the property.
Mitchell thought that the seller had acted somewhat
peculiar during the negotiation process. Under the
circumstances, Mitchell realized that the courts would
probably rule the owner incompetent at the time the
agreement was signed. Mitchell accepted the refund of his
earnest money deposit and began looking for another
property.
2. Offer and acceptance. This requirement means that
there must be a "meeting of the minds." All the terms of the
agreement must be expressed in language that is understood,
agreed on, and accepted by both parties. If the terms are not
clearly understood by both parties, then there would not be a
meeting of the minds.
When Snell was negotiating with the Miles
Corporation for the purchase of the eight-unit apartment
building, both parties understood the need for complete
agreement and acceptance on each term. As the earnest
money agreement was completed and filled out, no blank
spaces were left; all special contingencies were spelled
out in simple language that was easy to understand. Snell
negotiated the right to review all the financial information
Unit Six, Page 27
concerning the rental property. A special clause was
agreed to and included in the contract, stating:
"Seller grants buyer the right to review and approve
all financial information concerning the subject property
prior to closing. Such financial information includes
management information, tax returns, expense payments,
etc. If buyer does not approve the financial information,
the contract will become void, and all deposits will be
returned to the buyer."
3. Consideration. Consideration is, in effect, what the
parties promise to give to each other. The courts have ruled
that consideration in a real estate purchase contract may consist
of money, property, or promises. The agreement must be
based on such good and valuable consideration.
Many real estate investors have used as consideration a
note that promises to pay a certain amount at a specified
interest rate and term of payment. This promise to pay a certain
sum in the future is considered good and valuable
consideration.
You can offer many possible consideration alternatives in
the earnest money offer. Whatever form of consideration you
use must be agreed to by both the buyer and the seller.
If your offer is subject to certain contingencies that must
be satisfied before the offer is finalized, try not to use a great
deal of cash when making the offer. The amount of
consideration will show the seller your earnest intention of
making the sale take place, but it will not increase the validity of
the contract.
Snell wanted to take the eight-unit apartment building off
the market while he finished his investigation. He told Dennis
that he would be willing to pay additional consideration when all
the contingencies in the offer were satisfied, but would give only
$100 earnest money until this happened. The offer was drafted
in such a way that an additional $900 earnest money was to be
paid to the seller as further consideration once all the
Unit Six, Page 28
contingency clauses were fulfilled. This satisfied both Snell (the
buyer) and the Miles Corporation (the seller).
4. Legality of object. The law provides that no agreement
will be considered a legally binding contract if the purpose for
which the contract is intended is illegal or against public policy.
Real estate earnest money agreements are generally considered
to have a legal object, and would not be considered void
because of this element. If the purpose of the earnest money
agreement or sale of the property was intended to defraud
someone, then the reverse would be true, and the contract
would be considered void.
5. Agreement in writing and signed. Every state has
enacted a statute of frauds that requires certain contracts to be
in writing. Real estate purchase or sales contracts fall into that
category. These statutes require that the following elements be
included:
Q The signatures of both the buyer and the seller are required.
The contract would not be valid if only one of the parties has
given written consent while the other party has verbally agreed
to the terms.
Q A spouse's signature is required on the earnest money receipt
when partial rights are being released. It is always in the buyer's
best interests to get both spouses' signatures on the earnest
money offer.
Q An agent may sign for a principal only if the agent has written
authority to do so. A power of attorney or corporate resolution
authorizing the agent to act for the principal should be attached
to the earnest money offer. If the agent is dealing for a
corporation, a corporate seal must be attached to the
authorization. That's why Snell required Dennis to get written
authorization from the Miles Corporation before he would
begin negotiations.
6. Description of subject real estate The property
covered by the purchase agreement must be adequately
described in accordance with a survey or adequate title
Unit Six, Page 29
evidence. Generally, the legal description is required, and the
property is usually also identified by its street address.
When Snell was writing the offer for the eight-unit
apartment building, he included the street address and
then wrote the exact legal description as found on the tax
assessment notice. In this way, Snell was positive that
both parties understood exactly which real estate was
covered by the agreement.
6.10 DOCUMENTING THE PURCHASE
AGREEMENT TERMS
The earnest money offer to purchase is a legal agreement
and must be documented properly. When we talk about
documenting the purchase agreement terms, we are expressly
talking about the written explanation of the terms that will be
agreed to in the earnest money offer. Because of the complexity
of the purchase agreement and the need to cover all the terms
of sale, we recommend very highly that you use printed forms.
These forms will not cover every contingency and purchase
term you agree on, but because most real estate transactions
are so similar, the forms will serve as a basis for the actual
agreement. These forms can usually be purchased in any office
supply or stationary store.
The use of forms raises three issues:
M How the blanks should be filled in.
M Which printed matter is not applicable to your portfolio real
estate transaction and should be ruled out by drawing lines
through the unwanted words.
M Which additional clauses or agreements (commonly called
"riders") are to be added.
1. How the blanks should be filled in. It is important to fill
in every blank on the contract. If the blank is not large enough
to clearly state the negotiated term, write the agreement in the
Unit Six, Page 30
margin or attach a separate agreement. If the legal description
of the property is too long to write in the blank, write "See
attached Exhibit A," and then attach the legal description as
Exhibit A.
2. Which printed matter is not applicable to your
particular real estate transaction and should be ruled out by
drawing lines through the unwanted words. Because the printed
form is designed for generic real estate transactions, certain
phrases or terms will not apply to the negotiated terms of your
specific real estate transaction. These items should be lined out
and then initialed by both the buyer and the seller.
A CASE STUDY
Mark B. was purchasing a rental property for which the
seller agreed to pay all the closing costs, including recording
fees and all the escrow fees. The printed form contained the
statement:
"Buyer agrees to pay for recording fees....and onehalf
of the escrow fees."
Because Mark and the seller had agreed that the seller would
pay all the closing costs, this entire sentence was lined out and
initialed by both parties.
3. Which additional clauses or agreements (commonly
called "riders") are to be added. As you learn to include
contingencies and terms that apply to your specific real estate
purchase and strategy, you will find that printed forms may not
include any reference to that particular item. If this is the case,
you must write in the additional clause, and then both you and
the seller must initial the change.
When Mark was negotiating the purchase of the rental
property with the seller, he got the seller to agree to substitute
other collateral as security for the financing. There was no
reference to a substitution of collateral on the earnest money
form, so Mark wrote in the following:
Unit Six, Page 31
"Buyer has the right to substitute collateral of equal or
greater value on the trust deed executed in favor of the
seller at any time, with the seller having the right of
approval, such approval not being unreasonably
withheld."
In this way, by adding a "rider" to the earnest money
agreement, Mark provided for the eventual substitution of
collateral.
All printed earnest money offers to purchase are not
necessarily the same. We have included a sample earnest
money form that can be adapted for most real estate offers. If
you understand how to correctly fill this form out and how to
document your negotiated terms, you should be able to adapt it
(and most other printed forms) to suit your needs. You will note
that the different items are numbered. As we discuss each item
on the form, you will understand the necessity of filling the form
out completely.
In reviewing the form, you will note that there are no
blank lines for contingency clauses. These clauses can be
inserted between the paragraphs listed on the document. If
there is not enough room to complete the entire rider, attach the
rider as an exhibit to the agreement. Remember that the
attached exhibits need to be initialed by both parties to the
agreement. Finally, if you wish to review dozens of real
examples of how to fill out earnest money forms, we
recommend the book How To Write A Nothing Down Offer
So That Everyone Wins by Dr. Richard J. Allen.
6.11 EARNEST MONEY AGREEMENT
We supply herewith a sample earnest money agreement,
also referred to as "Real Estate Purchase Contract and Receipt
for Deposit." You may adapt this for your own use, or use one
of the many similar forms in circulation in the various states,
provided you attend carefully to the language and make sure it
reflects accurately the terms and conditions of your transaction.
Unit Six, Page 32
Unit Six, Page 33
REAL ESTATE PURCHASE CONTRACT AND RECEIPT FOR DEPOSIT
"This is a legally binding contract. If not understood, seek competent legal advice."
1. DATE AND LOCATION OF OFFER: , 199 .
2. THIS CONTRACT IS MADE BY AND BETWEEN: hereafter referred to as
"BUYER," and (list names of all owners) hereafter referred to as
"SELLER," upon terms, provisions, and conditions set forth herein.
3. BUYER AGREES TO PURCHASE FROM SELLER AND SELLER AGREES TO CONVEY TO BUYER, that
certain real property located in , County of , State of , commonly known by the
street address of , and further described as
(attached legal description and tax parcel number if available), with a complete legal
description to follow in escrow; together with the following items, if any: permanently installed heating, air
conditioning, electrical, plumbing, security, fire detection, appliances including stove, oven, dishwasher, trash
compactor, water heater, water conditioner, garage door opener and controls, landscape and shrubbery, wall-to-wall
carpeting, custom window coverings, lighting fixtures, fans, television antennas, and other fixtures permanently
attached to property. All of the included items, together with the real property and improvements, shall be referred to
hereafter as the "SUBJECT PROPERTY."
4. CONTRACT SALES PRICE AND FINANCING SUMMARY:
A. EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT INCLUDED HEREWITH (Payable to: )
in the form of Check Promissory note Other (describe:) $
B. ADDITIONAL DOWN PAYMENT DUE ON OR BEFORE CLOSE OF ESCROW:
$
C. SUM OF ALL FINANCING DESCRIBED IN PARAGRAPH FIVE BELOW:
$
D. OTHER (describe:) $
E. TOTAL SELLING PRICE CONSIDERATION (A + B + C + D)
$
5. FINANCING (Note: The obtaining of BUYER'S financing is a contingency or condition of this agreement.):
A. $ BUYER to qualify for and obtain a new first loan in this approximate amount
from a lender of BUYER'S choice, payable at approximately $ per
month including interest ( fixed rate adjustable rate) not to exceed
percent per annum, all due and payable years from close of escrow.
BUYER to pay a maximum of $ as "points" (discount points in the
case of FHA or VA) or origination fees on behalf of BUYER. BUYER'S
signature on loan documents will be deemed as BUYER'S having obtained
financing.
B. $ BUYER to assume/ take title "subject to" the existing first loan of
record on SUBJECT PROPERTY, in the approximate balance of $
, in favor of , payable at approximately $ per month,
including interest and at % ( fixed rate adjustable) with all
remaining principal and interest due , 199 . In the event the loan
balance or payment differs substantially from that which is indicated above,
this contract may be terminated at BUYER'S option and the earnest money
Unit Six, Page 34
shall be refunded to BUYER without delay. BUYER'S fees to take over the
existing loan not to exceed $ .
C. $ BUYER to execute a note secured by a first second third
(mortgage or deed of trust) in favor of SELLER, payable monthly
quarterly annually at $ or more, including principal and
interest interest only, the interest being % per annum, the remaining
balance of principal and interest all due years from the date of origination.
Other terms and conditions:
D. $ BUYER to assume/ take title "subject to" the existing second,
third loan of record on SUBJECT PROPERTY, in the approximate balance of
$ , in favor of , payable at approximately $
per month, including interest and at % ( fixed rate adjustable) with
all remaining principal and interest due , 199 . In the event the loan
balance or payment differs substantially from that which is indicated above,
this contract may be terminated at BUYER'S option and the earnest money
shall be refunded to BUYER without delay. BUYER'S fees to take over the
existing loan not to exceed $ .
E. $ BUYER to qualify for and obtain a new second loan in this approximate
amount from a lender of BUYER'S choice, payable at approximately $
per month including interest ( fixed rate
adjustable rate) not to exceed percent per annum, all
due and payable years from close of escrow. BUYER to
pay a maximum of $ as "points" (discount points in the
case of FHA or VA) or origination fees on behalf of BUYER.
BUYER'S signature on loan documents will be deemed as
BUYER'S having obtained financing.
F. $ OTHER (describe:)
$ TOTAL FINANCING
6. TITLE: SELLER shall furnish BUYER with title that is free and clear of liens, encumbrances, restrictions, rights, and
conditions other than property taxes not yet due and restrictive covenants, conditions and restrictions of record,
including public utility easements, if any, provided that same do not adversely affect the continued use of the
property for the purpose for which it is presently being used. BUYER shall have days to reasonably
disapprove a preliminary title report furnished at expense. SELLER shall provide and pay for a standard
title policy or an abstract brought current on the SUBJECT PROPERTY.
7. ESCROW INSTRUCTIONS:. BUYER and SELLER shall open escrow with , the escrow holder, and
shall deliver signed instructions to escrow holder within calendar days of the acceptance of this offer, and shall
provide for closing within calendar days of this acceptance. Escrow fees to be paid as follows:
.
8. POSSESSION: Possession and occupancy shall be delivered to BUYER on close of escrow, or not later
than days after close of escrow. SELLER shall maintain the property in its present improved condition.
Unit Six, Page 35
9. PERSONAL PROPERTY: The following items of personal property, free of liens and without warranty of
condition, are included:
.
10. EXCEPTIONS WHICH DO NOT REMAIN WITH THE PROPERTY: BUYER and SELLER hereby agree that the
following items are not included with the sale of the property, and may be removed by SELLER:
.
11. SELLER TRANSFER/DISCLOSURE: SELLER agrees to provide BUYER with a Transfer/Disclosure statement
(and to use the official form as may be required by state law). Said statement shall include the identification of
equipment and items contained in the residence and lot and whether such items are operational; any significant
defects in structural components of the residence; information regarding the improvement and alterations made to
the property including compliance with building codes and issuance of building permits and any items of concern
regarding health, safety, regulation, violations, existing or potential lawsuits to the SUBJECT PROPERTY, nuisances
or neighborhood problems which may affect the BUYER'S decision to purchase the SUBJECT PROPERTY. Upon
receipt of the transfer/disclosure statement, BUYER shall have calendar days to review same and to disapprove
the property because of the disclosed conditions and defects, and to terminate the agreement by delivery of written
notice to the SELLER. Should BUYER not disapprove the property within the prescribed limits of time, the conditions
described in the transfer/disclosure shall be deemed to have been approved by BUYER.
12. TAX-WITHHOLDING (F.I.R.P.T.A.): Under the Foreign Investment in Real Property Tax Act (IRC 1445), every
buyer of real property must deduct and withhold from SELLER'S proceeds 10% of the gross sales price and to
deposit that amount to the Internal Revenue Service upon the close of escrow, unless an exemption applies. The
primary exemptions include, and no withholding is required, if any one of the following conditions exist:
A) BUYER purchases the property for use as a personal residence and the selling price is $300,000 or less and
the BUYER or member of the BUYER'S family has definite plans to reside in the property for at least 50% of the
number of days it is in use during each of the first twelve month periods after the transfer.
or B) SELLER provides BUYER with an affidavit under penalty of perjury that SELLER is not a "foreign person."
or C) SELLER provides BUYER with a "qualifying statement" issued by the Internal Revenue Service that
SELLER is exempt from withholding.
13. SUPPLEMENTS: The following supplements are incorporated as part of this agreement:
.
14. INSPECTIONS: BUYER shall have the right, at BUYER'S expense, to select a licensed contractor and/or other
qualified professional(s) to make "inspections," BUYER shall keep the property free of liens, and indemnify and hold
SELLER harmless from all liability, claims, demands, damages, or costs, and repair all damages to the SUBJECT
PROPERTY arising from said inspections. All claimed defects concerning condition of SUBJECT PROPERTY which
adversely affect the continued use of the property for which it is presently being used shall be in writing,m and
delivered to SELLER along with written reports within calendar days. If SELLER is unable or unwilling to correct
the deficiencies within calendar days of receiving notice or to agree in writing to escrow sufficient funds to correct
them, or BUYER and SELLER fail to stipulate in writing as to what defects are accepted "as is" and/or what
adjustment is to be made in the purchase price, then before close of escrow, or before any extension mutually agreed
upon by both BUYER and SELLER, BUYER shall have the exclusive right to terminate this agreement. SELLER shall
make the SUBJECT PROPERTY available for all inspections upon reasonable notice. BUYER'S failure to notify
Unit Six, Page 36
SELLER in writing of the defects which are unacceptable to BUYER within the time limit indicated shall be deemed
approval.
15. PEST CONTROL INSPECTION: SELLER agrees, at SELLER'S expense, to provide within calendar days a
written certificate from a licensed pest control operator that SUBJECT PROPERTY is free of wood-destroying
organisms. SELLER shall make necessary repairs as required for certification within calendar days, up to a limit of
$500.00. In the event the cost to repair exceeds $500.00, then BUYER has the right to accept the property "as is" and
receive credit from SELLER, in escrow, or BUYER and SELLER shall, within said days, mutually stipulate in writing as
to what repairs SELLER will perform and pay for and what items BUYER will accept "as is," or the BUYER may
terminate this agreement.
16. OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS:
.
17. TIME LIMIT OF OFFER: The SELLER shall have until ( am/ pm) on , 199 , to accept this offer
in its entirety by delivering a signed copy to the BUYER. If the SELLER does not accept the offer as written within
the time limit prescribed, then SELLER shall immediately cause BUYER'S deposit to be refunded to BUYER.
18. BOTH BUYER AND SELLER RESERVE THEIR RIGHTS to assign their respective interests and agree to
cooperate in effecting an Internal Revenue Code 1031 exchange or similar tax-deferred arrangement prior to close of
escrow, provided, however, that such arrangement does not adversely affect the basic agreements contained in this
contract, and that said arrangement does not incur additional expense on the cooperating party. BUYER'S obligation
under this agreement is further contingent upon and subject to BUYER'S first obtaining within calendar days the
following approvals:
.
19. REAL ESTATE COMMISSION: SELLER shall pay a % real estate commission on the total selling price as
follows: $ . is designated as BUYER'S agent and shall receive
% of all commissions paid. is designated as SELLER'S agent and shall receive
% of all commissions paid.
20. GENERAL AGREEMENTS: Upon approval of this offer by the SELLER, this agreement shall become a contract
between BUYER and SELLER, and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, and administrators, executors, successors,
personal representatives, and assigns of said parties. Time is of the essence and an essential part of this agreement.
This contract constitutes the sole and entire agreement between the parties hereto and no modification of this
contract shall be binding unless attached hereto and initialed by all parties to the contract. No representations,
promises, or inducements not included in this contract shall be binding on any party hereto.
21. BUYER'S STATEMENT AND RECEIPT: "I/We hereby agree to purchase the above SUBJECT PROPERTY in
accordance with the terms and conditions stated above, and acknowledge the receipt of a completed copy of this
agreement , which I/We have fully read and understand."
Dated , 199 Hour: , Social Security No.
Address: , City: , State: , Zip Code: .
BUYER'S signature:
Unit Six, Page 37
22. SELLER'S STATEMENT AND RECEIPT: "I/We approve the above offer, which I/We have fully read and
understand, and agree to the above terms and conditions this day and time." Or "I/We approve the above offer
with the additional provisions and modifications set forth in the attached and signed counter offer."
Dated: , 199 Hour: , Social Security No.
Address: , City: , State: , Zip Code: .
SELLER'S signature:
23. BUYER'S RECEIPT FOR SIGNED OFFER: The BUYER hereby acknowledges receipt of a copy of the above
agreement bearing the SELLER'S signature in acceptance of this offer.
Dated: , 199 . BUYER'S signature:
SELLER and BUYER acknowledge a receipt of a copy of this agreement, which consists of a total of pages.
SELLER'S initials
BUYER'S initials
6.12 DETAILED EXPLANATION OF THE EARNEST MONEY AGREEMENT
Now let us review the agreement clause by clause and provide action commentary for you to follow as
needed as you complete this form (or one similar to it) in the future.
REAL ESTATE PURCHASE CONTRACT AND RECEIPT FOR DEPOSIT
"This is a legally binding contract. If not understood, seek competent legal advice."
1. DATE AND LOCATION OF OFFER: , 199 .
COMMENTARY: To be valid, the agreement must be dated and signed. Use the date you present
the offer to the seller. This is the benchmark date from which all timed references in the offer are
measured. Write in the city and state where the offer is written (not the location of the subject
property); this will be the legal jurisdiction for any future legal action, if needed. Make this city
and state convenient for yourself!
2. THIS CONTRACT IS MADE BY AND BETWEEN:
hereafter referred to as "BUYER," and (list
names of all owners) hereafter referred to as "SELLER," upon terms, provisions, and conditions set
forth herein.
COMMENTARY: Add the phrase, after your name(s), "and/or Assigns." This gives you the
right to allow another substitute buyer to step in and complete the purchase without the
need of establishing an additional escrow to transact the sale. Thus this earnest money
agreement really can be used as a short-term option agreement that gives you control of the
subject property during the period of the offer.
3. BUYER AGREES TO PURCHASE FROM SELLER AND SELLER AGREES TO CONVEY TO
BUYER, that certain real property located in , County of ,
State of , commonly known by the street address of
Unit Six, Page 38
, and further described as
(attached legal description and tax parcel number if available), with a complete legal description to
follow in escrow; together with the following items, if any: permanently installed heating, air
conditioning, electrical, plumbing, security, fire detection, appliances including stove, oven, dishwasher,
trash compactor, water heater, water conditioner, garage door opener and controls, landscape and
shrubbery, wall-to-wall carpeting, custom window coverings, lighting fixtures, fans, television antennas,
and other fixtures permanently attached to property. All of the included items, together with the real
property and improvements, shall be referred to hereafter as the "SUBJECT PROPERTY."
COMMENTARY: Since the street address is an inadequate description to use in a legal
document, a legal description (recorded lot and block number from a drawn plat map, or
technical measurements known as metes and bounds, or by government rectangular
survey) must appear here or be provided as part of the escrow in order that there not be
future confusion and boundary/easement problems. The description may be obtained from
the seller's agent, the county recorder's office, or from a capable title company (or attorney
handling the closing).
4. CONTRACT SALES PRICE AND FINANCING SUMMARY:
A. EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT INCLUDED HEREWITH (Payable to: )
in the form of Check Promissory note Other (describe:) $
COMMENTARY: In order of priority, the holder of the earnest money should be the buyer's agent,
next the institution handling the escrow (title company), next the lending institute (if it is the
owner of the property). It would be rare that the seller would personally hold the earnest money. If
the earnest money is in the form of a check, then it is important to include on the check a note
that the holder is not to deposit it until the offer has been signed and accepted, after which time
the check may be deposited in the holder's account pending close of escrow. If the seller quits the
transaction in violation of the terms of the agreement, the earnest money is returned to the buyer.
If the buyer quits the transaction in violation of the terms of the agreement, the earnest money is
dispersed to the seller.
The earnest money can be in the form of check, promissory note, personal property, etc. Many
seasoned investors prefer to use a personal note as earnest money consideration because this
allows them to enter into many offers without actually tying up large amounts of cash as offers
are accepted. The note can be activated upon acceptance, or can be displaced in favor of other
consideration outlined in the agreement. For example, the note can be set up to mature at closing
and cause the buyer to provide the indicated amount of cash as part of the deal.
How much earnest money is required? This is negotiable. The rule of thumb for a buyer is
"As little as possible." Typically between $500 and several thousand dollars will suffice.
Usually the earnest money will not exceed 3% of the purchase price. Larger deals may
require more.
B. ADDITIONAL DOWN PAYMENT DUE ON OR BEFORE CLOSE OF ESCROW:
$
COMMENTARY: This is a negotiable item, and may be in effect zero.
C. SUM OF ALL FINANCING DESCRIBED IN PARAGRAPH FIVE BELOW:
$
COMMENTARY: Section five of the agreement will summarize the total financing package,
and will include any assumed loans, loans taken "subject to," new loans (firsts, seconds,
Unit Six, Page 39
etc.), seller "carry back" financing, or any other financing that is mutually agreed to under
the terms of the contract.
D. OTHER (describe:) $
E. TOTAL SELLING PRICE CONSIDERATION (A + B + C + D)
$
5. FINANCING (Note: The obtaining of BUYER'S financing is a contingency or condition of this
agreement.):
A. $ BUYER to qualify for and obtain a new first loan in
this approximate amount from a lender of BUYER'S
choice, payable at approximately $ per
month including interest ( fixed rate
adjustable rate) not to exceed percent per
annum, all due and payable years from close of
escrow. BUYER to pay a maximum of $ as
"points" (discount points in the case of FHA or VA) or
origination fees on behalf of BUYER. BUYER'S
signature on loan documents will be deemed as
BUYER'S having obtained financing.
COMMENTARY: Why specify the terms of the new loan? Because this clause will protect
the buyer. If the new loan cannot be obtained according to these specifications, then the
buyer can back out of the deal and get the earnest money back. As an incentive to sell a
property, the seller may agree to pay the points on the loan for the borrower. In some VA
transactions, the seller is obligated to pay some points to secure a loan for the borrower. In
the event the seller has not agreed to pay any of the borrower's loan points, enter N/A (not
applicable) into the appropriate space.
B. $ BUYER to assume/ take title "subject to" the
existing first loan of record on SUBJECT PROPERTY,
in the approximate balance of $ , in favor of
, payable at approximately $ per
month, including interest and at % ( fixed rate
adjustable) with all remaining principal and interest
due , 199 . In the event the loan balance or
payment differs substantially from that which is
indicated above, this contract may be terminated at
BUYER'S option and the earnest money shall be
refunded to BUYER without delay. BUYER'S fees to
take over the existing loan not to exceed $ .
COMMENTARY: Many loans are "assumable" and the buyer can take them over by
applying to do so through the lender and complying with the assumption requirements.
Many loans are not assumable, thus forcing the buyer to pay them off (usually by
originating a new loan to retire the old). If a property is taken "subject to" the existing loan
it means that the buyer does not formally assume the loan through the lender, but simply
takes on the responsibility to make the payments for the seller, who retains legal liability
Unit Six, Page 40
for repaying the loan. Taking title "subject to" the existing loan(s) may be risky for the
buyer to do, since the lender may consider the action a violation of the loan agreement and
thus call the note due. If the seller cannot pay it off, the buyer may have to step in and do so
or lose all interest in the property. Competent legal advice is highly recommended in such
transactions.
Why is it necessary to state the upper limits of fees to assume the loan? This is a protection
for the buyer, who then has the right to back out of the agreement if the assumption fees
prove to be higher than the tolerable limits.
C. $ BUYER to execute a note secured by a first
second third (mortgage or deed of trust) in favor of
SELLER, payable monthly quarterly
annually at $ or more, including
principal and interest interest only, the interest
being % per annum, the remaining balance of
principal and interest all due years from the date of
origination. Other terms and conditions:
COMMENTARY: This clause refers to seller "carry back" financing, one of the major
strategies in the buyer's arsenal of creative financing techniques. This note will be a "first"
if the property is free and clear of liens. It will be a second if there is already a first lien on
the property, and a third if there are already two liens, etc.
The terms of this kind of financing are negotiable. The phrase "or more" allows the buyer to
repay the note off without any prepayment penalty. Notice that the interest rate on seller
financing is typically lower than the market rate. The buyer should try to extend the payback
period as long as possible and avoid short-term balloons like the plague. If there must
be a balloon payment, then make sure you add an additional condition in the space indicated
that permits you to "roll the balloon over" for an additional period of time at buyer's option
when the balloon comes due. Often a seller will demand some quid pro quo consideration for
this privilege (higher interest rate, for example, on the roll-over).
D. $ BUYER to assume/ take title "subject to" the
existing second, third loan of record on
SUBJECT PROPERTY, in the approximate balance of
$ , in favor of , payable at
approximately $ per month, including
interest and at % ( fixed rate adjustable)
with all remaining principal and interest due ,
199 . In the event the loan balance or payment
differs substantially from that which is indicated
above, this contract may be terminated at BUYER'S
option and the earnest money shall be refunded to
BUYER without delay. BUYER'S fees to take over the
existing loan not to exceed $ .
E. $ BUYER to qualify for and obtain a new second loan in
this approximate amount from a lender of BUYER'S
Unit Six, Page 41
choice, payable at approximately $ per
month including interest ( fixed rate
adjustable rate) not to exceed percent per
annum, all due and payable years from close of
escrow. BUYER to pay a maximum of $ as
"points" (discount points in the case of FHA or VA) or
origination fees on behalf of BUYER. BUYER'S
signature on loan documents will be deemed as
BUYER'S having obtained financing.
F. $ OTHER (describe:)
COMMENTARY: There is no limit to the variety of creative financing that can be part of a
transaction. It is possible that personal property is included in a deal or that real estate
paper is made part of the deal. This space can be used to indicate such additional financing
aspects.
$ TOTAL FINANCING
6. TITLE: SELLER shall furnish BUYER with title that is free and clear of liens, encumbrances,
restrictions, rights, and conditions other than property taxes not yet due and restrictive covenants,
conditions and restrictions of record, including public utility easements, if any, provided that same do
not adversely affect the continued use of the property for the purpose for which it is presently being
used. BUYER shall have days to reasonably disapprove a preliminary title report furnished at
expense. SELLER shall provide and pay for a standard title policy or an abstract brought
current on the SUBJECT PROPERTY.
COMMENTARY: Never accept a property without first having the seller provide a policy of
title insurance or at least an abstract of title brought up to date. The former is preferable,
since it will provide insurance to cover damages to the buyer if it is later discovered that the
title company (or attorney) failed to discover some real underlying defect in the title that the
buyer was not made aware of (e.g. judgments, easement or ownership disputes, etc.).
The time aspect of this clause protects the buyer, who can (within the time period)
disapprove the property if there are unacceptable title problems. Typically 10 to 15 days is
considered a reasonable time frame. Usually the seller will pay for the title report, although
this is a negotiable item.
7. ESCROW INSTRUCTIONS:. BUYER and SELLER shall open escrow with , the
escrow holder, and shall deliver signed instructions to escrow holder within calendar days of the
acceptance of this offer, and shall provide for closing within calendar days of this acceptance. Escrow
fees to be paid as follows:
.
COMMENTARY: The buyer should try to specify the escrow agent, since the buyer may
very well have cultivated a good relationship with certain closing agents and may have
discount privileges for obtaining title insurance when it comes to selling properties. Usually
Unit Six, Page 42
3 to 5 business days is sufficient for delivering escrow instructions. Buyer and seller can
split the escrow fees, although this is negotiable.
8. POSSESSION: Possession and occupancy shall be delivered to BUYER on close of escrow, or
not later than days after close of escrow. SELLER shall maintain the property in its present
improved condition.
COMMENTARY. It is customary to allow the seller a reasonable period of time to vacate
after closing (usually not longer than three days). If the seller needs more time, then a
"Residential Lease Agreement After Sale" should be executed, providing for suitable
payment to the new owner.
9. PERSONAL PROPERTY: The following items of personal property, free of liens and without
warranty of condition, are included:
.
10. EXCEPTIONS WHICH DO NOT REMAIN WITH THE PROPERTY: BUYER and SELLER
hereby agree that the following items are not included with the sale of the property, and may be
removed by SELLER:
.
11. SELLER TRANSFER/DISCLOSURE: SELLER agrees to provide BUYER with a
Transfer/Disclosure statement (and to use the official form as may be required by state law). Said
statement shall include the identification of equipment and items contained in the residence and lot and
whether such items are operational; any significant defects in structural components of the residence;
information regarding the improvement and alterations made to the property including compliance with
building codes and issuance of building permits and any items of concern regarding health, safety,
regulation, violations, existing or potential lawsuits to the SUBJECT PROPERTY, nuisances or
neighborhood problems which may affect the BUYER'S decision to purchase the SUBJECT PROPERTY.
Upon receipt of the transfer/disclosure statement, BUYER shall have calendar days to review same
and to disapprove the property because of the disclosed conditions and defects, and to terminate the
agreement by delivery of written notice to the SELLER. Should BUYER not disapprove the property
within the prescribed limits of time, the conditions described in the transfer/disclosure shall be deemed
to have been approved by BUYER.
COMMENTARY: This clause is an important protection for the buyer, since the seller must
disclose here information that could adversely affect the use of the property after transfer.
12. TAX-WITHHOLDING (F.I.R.P.T.A.): Under the Foreign Investment in Real Property Tax Act
(IRC 1445), every buyer of real property must deduct and withhold from SELLER'S proceeds 10% of the
gross sales price and to deposit that amount to the Internal Revenue Service upon the close of escrow,
unless an exemption applies. Check current rules.The primary exemptions include, and no withholding
is required, if any one of the following conditions exist:
A) BUYER purchases the property for use as a personal residence and the selling price is
$300,000 or less and the BUYER or member of the BUYER'S family has definite plans to reside in the
property for at least 50% of the number of days it is in use during each of the first twelve month periods
after the transfer.
or B) SELLER provides BUYER with an affidavit under penalty of perjury that SELLER is not a
"foreign person."
Unit Six, Page 43
or C) SELLER provides BUYER with a "qualifying statement" issued by the Internal Revenue
Service that SELLER is exempt from withholding.
13. SUPPLEMENTS: The following supplements are incorporated as part of this agreement:
.
COMMENTARY: Supplements could include a partner's approval, an attorney's approval, a
statement by an accountant, etc.
14. INSPECTIONS: BUYER shall have the right, at BUYER'S expense, to select a licensed contractor
and/or other qualified professional(s) to make "inspections," BUYER shall keep the property free of liens,
and indemnify and hold SELLER harmless from all liability, claims, demands, damages, or costs, and
repair all damages to the SUBJECT PROPERTY arising from said inspections. All claimed defects
concerning condition of SUBJECT PROPERTY which adversely affect the continued use of the property
for which it is presently being used shall be in writing,m and delivered to SELLER along with written
reports within calendar days. If SELLER is unable or unwilling to correct the deficiencies within
calendar days of receiving notice or to agree in writing to escrow sufficient funds to correct them, or
BUYER and SELLER fail to stipulate in writing as to what defects are accepted "as is" and/or what
adjustment is to be made in the purchase price, then before close of escrow, or before any extension
mutually agreed upon by both BUYER and SELLER, BUYER shall have the exclusive right to
terminate this agreement. SELLER shall make the SUBJECT PROPERTY available for all inspections
upon reasonable notice. BUYER'S failure to notify SELLER in writing of the defects which are
unacceptable to BUYER within the time limit indicated shall be deemed approval.
15. PEST CONTROL INSPECTION: SELLER agrees, at SELLER'S expense, to provide within
calendar days a written certificate from a licensed pest control operator that SUBJECT PROPERTY is
free of wood-destroying organisms. SELLER shall make necessary repairs as required for certification
within calendar days, up to a limit of $500.00. In the event the cost to repair exceeds $500.00, then
BUYER has the right to accept the property "as is" and receive credit from SELLER, in escrow, or
BUYER and SELLER shall, within said days, mutually stipulate in writing as to what repairs SELLER
will perform and pay for and what items BUYER will accept "as is," or the BUYER may terminate this
agreement.
COMMENTARY: The report is generally provided within fifteen days of acceptance, or when
buyer contingencies have been removed.
16. OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS:
.
COMMENTARY: This space can be used to record any contingencies the buyer wishes to
make expressly manifest as part of the agreement as a protective element of the agreement,
for example:
"Buyer may at any time and without penalty pay in full all amounts owing to the seller
under the terms and conditions of this agreement."
Unit Six, Page 44
"Buyer shall have the right to extend the balloon payment due July 1, 1995, for one
additional year, provided buyer pays seller a principal payment of $5,000.00 on or before the
original due date of the balloon. If buyer extends the balloon payment, he will continue to
make the payment of $442.54 on the first day of each month until the balloon payment is
paid in full."
"Seller agrees that the note and trust deed referenced in this agreement will be fully
assumable, with no due-on-sale clause."
"Buyer and seller agree that the liability on the part of the buyer to satisfy the terms and
conditions of the note and trust deed executed in favor of the seller shall be limited to the
property securing said note and trust deed and shall not extend beyond this."
"Seller shall deliver all financial and tax records concerning subject property within three days to
the buyer. Buyer shall have seven additional working days to review said documents and approve
same. If approval is not given, this contract will become void."
"Both buyer and seller agree that the purchase of this property is subject to the inspection by
buyer's business partner within ten working days. Buyer's business partner must approve sale in
writing, or contract will become void."
"Seller shall deliver to buyer original lease agreements signed with the existing tenants of the
property. Said documents will be delivered to buyer within three working days and must be
approved in writing by buyer within an additional seven working days, or this contract will
become void."
"Buyer and seller agree that buyer has the right to review and approve the title record and
preliminary title report prior to closing. This approval can be given anytime prior to closing, but
approval must be in writing. In the event that the buyer does not approve the title record or
preliminary report, the buyer has the option of having the seller correct any problems, or buyer
can void this contract."
"In the seller carry-back financing, buyer reserves the right to substitute collateral that is
equal in value to, or greater in value than, the subject property, provided the seller first
approves the substitution."
[Note, this may be a great advantage to the buyer, who can then "definance" the
subject property by wiping off the seller-related liens and thus use the subject
property as a free and clear asset, or at least one free of seller financing.]
17. TIME LIMIT OF OFFER: The SELLER shall have until ( am/ pm) on , 199
, to accept this offer in its entirety by delivering a signed copy to the BUYER. If the SELLER does not
accept the offer as written within the time limit prescribed, then SELLER shall immediately cause
BUYER'S deposit to be refunded to BUYER.
COMMENTARY: The ideal time frame for the buyer is "upon presentation." However, as a
courtesy, it is not unusual to allow 24 to 48 hours to respond.
18. BOTH BUYER AND SELLER RESERVE THEIR RIGHTS to assign their respective interests
and agree to cooperate in effecting an Internal Revenue Code 1031 exchange or similar tax-deferred
arrangement prior to close of escrow, provided, however, that such arrangement does not adversely
Unit Six, Page 45
affect the basic agreements contained in this contract, and that said arrangement does not incur
additional expense on the cooperating party. BUYER'S obligation under this agreement is further
contingent upon and subject to BUYER'S first obtaining within calendar days the following
approvals:
.
COMMENTARY: The approvals referred to here might include such language as "Subject to
the inspection and approval of the subject property by my partner."
19. REAL ESTATE COMMISSION: SELLER shall pay a % real estate commission on the total
selling price as follows: $ . is designated
as BUYER'S agent and shall receive % of all commissions paid.
is designated as SELLER'S agent and shall receive % of all commissions paid.
20. GENERAL AGREEMENTS: Upon approval of this offer by the SELLER, this agreement shall
become a contract between BUYER and SELLER, and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, and
administrators, executors, successors, personal representatives, and assigns of said parties. Time is of
the essence and an essential part of this agreement. This contract constitutes the sole and entire
agreement between the parties hereto and no modification of this contract shall be binding unless
attached hereto and initialed by all parties to the contract. No representations, promises, or
inducements not included in this contract shall be binding on any party hereto.
COMMENTARY: This is essentially legal boiler plate, but it provided added clarity and
protection for the parties.
21. BUYER'S STATEMENT AND RECEIPT: "I/We hereby agree to purchase the above SUBJECT
PROPERTY in accordance with the terms and conditions stated above, and acknowledge the receipt of a
completed copy of this agreement , which I/We have fully read and understand."
Dated , 199 Hour: , Social Security No.
Address: , City: , State: , Zip Code: .
BUYER'S signature:
22. SELLER'S STATEMENT AND RECEIPT: "I/We approve the above offer, which I/We have
fully read and understand, and agree to the above terms and conditions this day and time." Or "I/We
approve the above offer with the additional provisions and modifications set forth in the attached and
signed counter offer."
Dated: , 199 Hour: , Social Security No.
Address: , City: , State: , Zip Code: .
SELLER'S signature:
23. BUYER'S RECEIPT FOR SIGNED OFFER: The BUYER hereby acknowledges receipt of a copy
of the above agreement bearing the SELLER'S signature in acceptance of this offer.
Dated: , 199 . BUYER'S signature:
SELLER and BUYER acknowledge a receipt of a copy of this agreement, which consists of a total of
pages.
SELLER'S initials
Unit Six, Page 46
BUYER'S initials
COMMENTARY: Ideally, each page of the agreement should be initialed by both parties to
avoid any claim, later on, that parts of the agreement were missing.
Unit Six, Page 47
6.12 USING A DOCUMENTATION CHECKLIST
Once you complete the earnest money offer, you should
review the document to make sure that all lines are filled in
correctly, that all changes are initialed, and that the terms of the
agreement spell out exactly what you are offering the seller.
Many find it helpful to review an earnest money agreement in
the form of a checklist. The following checklist is given as a
sample. As you become more experienced in your investment
program, you will be able to adapt a checklist that reflects your
own personal investment objectives.
EARNEST MONEY CHECKLIST
M 1. Have you conserved your cash by making the minimum
acceptable earnest money deposit?
M 2. Have you identified the property on the agreement using
both a street address and the legal description?
M 3. Are the price and terms accurately described in the
agreement?
M 4. Is the proposed seller financing realistic and
advantageous?
M 5. Have you included necessary subject-to clauses to
protect you in the event that you need to back out of the sale,
either because of problems associated with the property or with
you as investor?
M 6. Has the seller agreed to warranty his representations? If
the appliances are represented to be in top condition, will the
seller warranty the same?
M 7. Does the earnest money offer distinguish personal
property from real property? If you are receiving personal
Unit Six, Page 48
property as part of the purchase, will you receive title to same
through a bill of sale?
M 8. Have you allowed for a review of the title?
M 9. Are the time, location, and closing agent specified in the
agreement?
M 10. Do you fully understand all parts of the agreement that
you are signing? Did you consult a professional attorney and/or
real estate expert about any parts that you don't understand?
M 11. Have you checked with High Touch concerning any
questions you may have about the principles of making offers?
If you learn to use a checklist before submitting the signed
offer, you will eliminate many potential problems.
6.13 PROVIDING FOR CONTINGENCIES
In the previous sections of this unit, we have referred to
many contingencies that can increase your investment success.
It is important to include any necessary contingencies when
making the offer to purchase. The seller will want to remove as
many of the contingencies as possible, so you must set the
contingency clauses within your negotiation range.
What follows is a list of situations that can easily be
documented in the earnest money offer by using subject-to
clauses:
Q Purchase is subject to buyer obtaining financing acceptable
to buyer. (It is wise to include the exact terms of financing that
you are looking for.)
Q Purchase is subject to inspection and approval by another
party (specify). (This allows you an "out" if you need to back
out of the sale.)
Unit Six, Page 49
Q Purchase is subject to review and approval of all lease and
rental agreements by buyer. (If you don't approve of the
leases, you can void the contract.)
Q Purchase is subject to inspection and approval of all financial
records. (You are making an investment so you can increase
your financial freedom. If you fail to review the financial
records, you are making an investment mistake.)
Q Purchase is subject to seller providing a survey of the
property, which survey is to be approved by buyer. (This
allows you to examine the physical size and make sure it
corresponds to the legal description.)
Q Purchase is subject to review and approval of clear and
marketable title. (If the seller has over financed the property or
is not the legal owner, you need to know this in advance.)
Q Purchase is subject to all appliances, heating and air
conditioning equipment, and related items being in good
working order as of the day of closing.
Q Purchase is subject to walk through inspection and approval
by buyer 24 hours prior to closing.
If you use contingency clauses to provide for the
unexpected, your chance of investment success will be
increased dramatically.
A CASE STUDY
Tim H. made an offer for a single-family rental property
that appeared to be a good investment. He included several
contingency clauses that would allow him the right to back out
of the sale if the property or the investment didn't turn out to be
as it seemed. He also wanted to give himself the option to
market the property on excellent terms in the future, so he
included a few additional clauses, especially a clause stating that
the note and trust deed would be assumable by a new buyer.
He also limited his liability by using an exculpatory clause (see
Unit Six, Page 50
"A Few Terms You Should Know," earlier in this unit). In this
way Tim knew that he was protecting his investment and
increasing his chances of selling at some time in the future.
6.14 HOW TO MAKE THE COUNTER OFFER
YOUR TOOL
We mentioned earlier that both the buyer and the seller
had to agree on the terms of the contract and sign the
agreement in order for the contract to be valid. As you begin
your investment program, you will be making offers on many
properties and many of your offers will not be accepted by the
seller when he reviews the terms of your offer. A seller who
doesn't accept your original offer will usually make what is
called a "counter offer" and will submit it for your acceptance. If
you don't agree to the seller's counter offer, you may submit a
counter counter offer. This process can go on without
restriction until both the buyer and the seller come to a meeting
of the minds on all the terms of the contract.
Don't expect the seller to accept your original offer if you
are negotiating all the terms of sale at the lower end of your
negotiation range. In most cases, the negotiation process is a
give-and-take situation. As the seller agrees to some of your
terms, you may have to move up the scale on other terms to
make the offer more acceptable to him. This process can
become a profitable one if you keep your priorities straight. If
your main objective is a low price and excellent financing terms,
then you may have to sacrifice slightly on the amount of earnest
money deposit, the date of closing, or the proration of escrow
fees.
In order to make the counter offer a tool in your
investment program, remember three things:
M 1. Don't start from scratch each time.
M 2. Always begin negotiations at the lower end of your
negotiation range.
Unit Six, Page 51
M 3. Don't allow the seller excess time.
1. Don't start from scratch each time. When the seller
makes a counter offer, negotiate only those items that are still in
question. Those items that have been agreed to should remain
as they are. In this way, you will narrow down the number of
terms that you are negotiating each time you make a counter
offer.
A CASE STUDY
Todd A. made an offer to purchase a six-unit apartment
building. The owner was asking $147,000 for the property, and
was willing to carry the mortgage at 11 percent for twenty
years. Todd had reviewed the property carefully and believed
that the price was an excellent one. Since the owner was willing
to take only $5,000 down on the property and the rents were
very high, Todd thought that he could get the property into a
positive cash-flow situation in three to six months.
Todd wanted to make sure that he was allowed to have
an exculpatory clause, no prepayment, and the right to
substitute collateral, so he made an offer to the seller than
included all of these additional clauses. He offered only
$139,000, with $4,000 down and the balance at 10 percent for
thirty years.
When Todd got the counter offer, he found that the seller
had agreed to the three additional clauses, the lower interest
rate, the lower down payment, and the extended time of
payment. But didn't accept the lower price. Todd made a
counter counter offer with all the original terms the same,
except he changed the price to $144,000. The seller accepted
the offer, and Todd made an excellent purchase. The key to his
success was that he didn't add new negotiation items when he
got the counter offer.
2. Always begin negotiation at the lower end of your
negotiation range. When Todd made the offer on the six-unit
apartment building, he started at the lower end of his
Unit Six, Page 52
negotiation range on each of his terms. By using that approach,
he could give on one or more items, if necessary, and still
purchase the property according to satisfactory terms and
conditions.
3. Don't allow the seller excess time. If you allow the
seller a great deal of time to think about your offer, he will
usually try to negotiate more items. If you want to make a
successful purchase, keep the negotiation process moving along
with prompt and rapid offers and counter offers.
If Todd had allowed the seller a week to think about all
of his terms, the seller probably would not have agreed to the
lower interest rate and other terms.
6.15 A NOTE ON THE NEED FOR MAKING
OFFERS
A well-known real estate professional once said that you
will never buy a property if you don't make a lot of offers. It's
true! If you want to purchase good investment properties, you
will need to make many offers. We have found that it is
necessary, on an average, to submit eight to ten separate offers
in order to get one offer accepted. If you are making those
offers according to the principles that you are learning in this
manual, you will be able to find those people who want to sell
their property with nothing-down techniques.
If you want to be successful, take the time to understand
the principles--and then start making offers! As you begin,
don't be short-sighted by making offers that are not
documented with every term you believe to be important.
6.16 HOW WELL HAVE YOU LEARNED?
The better you've learned the information and concepts in
this unit, the more you will be able to apply then. Test your
Unit Six, Page 53
learning by answering the following questions. Do not skip this
step--the best way to learn is to reprocess what you've learned
in written form.
(NOTE: If you are uncertain of a particular answer, look
back through the unit. The answers to all the questions can be
found in the preceding pages of the unit.)
1. What is the purchase contract between a buyer and a seller
called?
2. Name at least five common documentation mistakes make
by real estate investors.
3. Why should the offer to purchase be drafted by the buyer
instead of the seller?
4. Why is it important to use a closing (escrow) agent?
5. When should a deed of reconveyance be placed in escrow?
6. What is meant by the rule, "cash conserved is the key to
increased investment opportunities?"
7. Name at least six non-price negotiation terms that should be
documented in the earnest money offer
to purchase.
8. Why would a buyer of a property agree to make
improvements without closing on a piece of property?
9. What is an exculpatory clause, and when would it be used?
10. What is meant by the negotiation range?
11. What are the three techniques used to set the price
negotiation range?
12. Name the six essential elements of a legal real estate
contract.
Unit Six, Page 54
13. What is meant by the buyer and the seller having a "meeting
of the minds"?
14. When making an offer on a piece of property, how do you
describe the subject real estate?
15. What are "riders" in an earnest money offer to purchase?
16. How is personal property transferred in a real estate
purchase transaction?
17. What should you do when you can't write the total
description of the negotiated terms in the space on
the printed earnest money offer form?
18. If the printed earnest money form contains a phrase that
doesn't pertain to your purchase agreement, what should you
do?
19. Why would the buyer require the right to review and
approve any and all lease agreements?
20. When do you use an earnest money checklist?
21. Name at least three contingency situations that can be
documented with proper "subject-to" clauses.
22. What are the three things you should remember in order to
make the counter offer your tool?
23. Why should you continue to make more and more offers?
[End of Unit 6]
UNIT SEVEN
CLOSING THE
REAL ESTATE
TRANSACTION
Unit Seven, Page 2
UNIT SEVEN
CLOSING THE
REAL ESTATE
TRANSACTION
7.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
You already know many of the basics of making real
estate investments, how to set financial goals and use win/win
Unit Seven, Page 3
principles, how to find real estate bargains, how to write offers,
and how to negotiate.
But the real estate transaction is ultimately made
through a process called "the closing." Without a successful
closing, the property title does not pass from the seller to the
buyer, and your valuable time and energy are lost. So it is vital
that you become familiar with the closing process.
In this unit, you will learn all about the closing process,
including the many considerations involved before, during, and
after the actual closing. You will learn about the documents
involved in the transfer of property ownership. And you will
learn the language of closing, which will give you confidence in
dealing with the professionals who will assist you in the closing
process and enable you to take an active role in protecting your
interests.
As you study this unit, imagine yourself as a buyer or a
seller. Ask yourself how each document or step in the closing
process would apply to you. The make your own checklist of
items to consider when closing your real estate transactions.
7.2 A FEW TERMS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Abstract: A written history of the title to a property.
Closing costs: The costs that buyer and seller pay at the time of
closing.
Closing statement: A settlement sheet that show and
accounting of funds to the buyer and the seller at the completion
of the transaction.
Deed: A document that transfers ownership of personal
property.
Escrow: The deposit of funds and documents with a neutral
third party, along with instructions on how to conduct the
closing.
Unit Seven, Page 4
Escrow agent: The person in charge of an escrow.
Prorations: The division of income and expenses between
buyer and seller.
Settlement meeting: A meeting at which the buyer pays for the
property, the seller delivers a deed to the buyer, and all other
matters pertaining to the sale are concluded.
Survey: An examination of a property's boundaries and
improvements.
Title: The evidence of ownership.
Title closing: The process that begins with signing the contract
of sale and ends with conveying and recording the title.
Title insurance: An insurance policy from a title company that
protects against losses arising from defects in the title.
Title search: A search of public records and documents to
determine current ownership and the condition of the property
title.
7.3 KEY POINTS ABOUT CLOSING REAL ESTATE
TRANSACTIONS
As you read this unit, remember the following key
points. They will help you put the information you will be
learning into a correct context.
* The closing process usually involves either a
settlement meeting, where all necessary
documents are signed and a deed is delivered
to the buyer, or an escrow arrangement
involving an escrow agent and delivery of the
deed and other documents in escrow.
* Most of the documents and details of a real
estate transaction are prepared and handled by
Unit Seven, Page 5
professionals, real estate brokers, title company
officers, attorneys, escrow agents, loan officers,
insurance agents, and so forth.
* Some important considerations before closing
include choosing a beneficial closing date,
ordering a title search, examining the title
report, inspecting the property, and obtaining
adequate hazard and liability insurance.
* Important documents used in a closing include
affidavits, abstracts or title insurance policies,
bills of sale, deeds, insurance policies,
mortgages, reports, surveys, and warranties.
* The actual closing usually involves examining
and executing the closing documents, accepting
the closing statements, paying the purchase
price and closing costs and delivering the deed.
* Considerations after the closing include
recording the documents, changing utility bills to
the buyer's name, verifying the adequacy of
insurance, and keeping the closing documents
in a safe place.
7.4 CLOSING THE REAL ESTATE TRANSACTION
UNDERSTANDING THE CLOSING PROCESS
Congratulations! You've found the right property,
presented an offer, and negotiated a win/win contract. Now
you can sit back and wait for the day when you will take title
and possession. Right? Wrong! Unless you take care of several
vital details now and on the day you receive the title, the most
brilliant transaction will fall flat.
For one thing, the title must be examined to verify that
the seller really owns the property and to identify any
Unit Seven, Page 6
mortgages, liens, or other restrictions on the property.
Financing must be arranged, insurance and property taxes must
be prorated, and documents must be prepared. Finally, you
must pay for the property and receive the deed from the seller.
This entire process is referred to as either the closing,
settlement, or escrow, depending on your area of the country.
The closing process varies from state to state. In many
states it is concluded at a meeting of the parties to the
transaction, where a deed is delivered to the buyer. In other
states, it is conducted by an escrow agent, with the deed
delivered in escrow.
Most details of the closing will be handled by
professionals such as lawyers, real estate brokers, title officers,
escrow agents, loan officers, insurance agents, and inspectors.
But it is very important for you to understand the process of
closing, the documentation involved, and the legal
considerations that might arise.
7.41 A TYPICAL CLOSING OR SETTLEMENT
MEETING
In a typical meeting to close a real estate transaction,
the buyer pays the seller for the property and the seller delivers
the deed. The real estate agents who brought the buyer and the
seller together are usually present, along with the representative
of the firm that conducted the title search. If a new loan is being
made or an existing one is being paid off, a representative of the
lender might be present. The buyer and seller might also choose
to have an attorney present to see that everything is properly
carried out.
If there are questions or disagreements during the
closing, they are usually resolved through negotiation. If
agreement cannot be reached during the meeting, the parties
may agree to adjourn the closing until a later time. If there are
major problems, such as a problem with the title, it may be
necessary to cancel the entire transaction.
Unit Seven, Page 7
Consider this example of a typical closing or settlement
meeting. Jill M. (the buyer) and Ray S. (the seller) arrive at
Integrity Title Company at 10:00 A.M. to close the transaction.
The meeting is conducted by the title officer for Integrity Title
Company. Jill's attorney is present at the meeting, as is the real
estate agent who listed and sold the house. Ray's attorney who
reviewed and approved the closing documents prior to the
meeting, is not present. In case of future dispute regarding
anything that transpires during the meeting, both Jill and Ray
make a list of those present.
The documents called for by the contract of sale are
exchanged for inspection by the parties involved in the closing.
Jill and her attorney inspect the deed, the title report and title
policy, the mortgage papers, the bill of sale, and any other
documents involved in the transaction. Then Jill and Ray sign
their names in the appropriate places.
The title officer gives Jill and Ray settlement statements
that summarize the financial aspects of their transaction. The
settlement statements are carefully reviewed and checked for
accuracy. Then Jill signs the buyer's settlement statement and
Ray signs the seller's settlement statement.
After all of the documents have been reviewed and
accepted, Jill pays the agreed upon amount to the title officer,
who will disperse the funds to Ray, and any other's who are
entitled to receive payment. The title officer then hands a
completed deed to Jill. (If a lender had been involved, Jill
would have signed a mortgage and note, and the lender would
have paid Sam.) Finally all of the documents are signed and
everyone is paid. The deed and other documents are then
recorded and the transaction is complete.
7.42 CLOSING THROUGH ESCROW
Sometimes real estate transactions are closed through a
neutral third party called an escrow agent. Instead of delivering
the deed to the buyer at a closing meeting, the seller gives the
deed to the escrow agent who delivers that deed to the buyer
Unit Seven, Page 8
after the promises made in he sales contract. As part of closing,
the buyer gives the escrow agent the money for the property,
and the agent gives that money to the seller after he has
completed all of his promises. The buyer, in turn, receives the
deed once his promises are kept.
The escrow arrangement is convenient for both buyer
and seller because they do not have to meet during the escrow
period or at the closing. The escrow agent accumulated all of
the documents, approvals, and funds prior to the closing date,
and does the closing alone.
After signing the contract of sale, the buyer and seller
select a neutral escrow agent to handle the closing. This agent
may be the escrow department of a bank or other lending
agency, an escrow company, an attorney, a real estate broker,
or a title insurance company.
The escrow agent places the earnest money in a trust
account and prepares a set of escrow instructions based on the
contract of sale. The instructions explain everything that each
party must do before payment is made to the seller and the
deed is delivered to the buyer. Usually the escrow agent orders
a title search and obtains title insurance. If an existing loan
against the property is to be repaid, the escrow agent contacts
the lender to determine the amount of money necessary to
repay the loan and to ask for a mortgage release. If an existing
loan is to be assumed, the escrow agent will ask the lender for
the current balance and any documents that the buyer must
sign.
When the title search is completed, the escrow agent
sends it to the buyer for his approval. A deed is prepared and
after it is signed by the seller, it is given to the escrow agent.
The escrow agent collects insurance forms, tax papers, leases,
and other documents for proration and future delivery to the
buyer.
After all of the escrow instructions have been carried
out, the closing can take place. The escrow agent usually
orders a last-minute check on the title. If no changes have
Unit Seven, Page 9
occurred since the preliminary title search, the deed, mortgage,
and other documents are recorded. After the recording, the
escrow agent pays each party who is to receive funds from the
escrow. The recorded documents and any other important
papers or information are then mailed to each party.
The following example illustrates a closing through
escrow. Rob L. (the buyer) and Elaine D. (the seller) have
signed a contract of sale for a duplex. The have agreed to have
Earl C. at Effective Escrow Company handle the closing. Earl
deposited the earnest money in his company's trust account and
prepared a set of escrow instructions based on the provisions
set forth in the contract of sale. Earl then ordered a title search
and title insurance from Integrity Title Company.
After the title search was completed, Earl sent a title
report to Rob for his inspection and approval. Elaine signed a
deed for future delivery to Rob. Earl also collected insurance
forms, tax papers, leases, and other documents for proration
and future delivery. All of the necessary closing documents are
signed by Rob and Elaine and held in escrow.
After all of the documents were signed and Rob
deposited the money to buy the property, Earl reviewed the
escrow instructions to make sure that all of the requirements
and conditions of the contract of sale had been met. Earl then
ordered a last-minute check on the title to make sure that no
changes had occurred since the preliminary title search.
After everything was completed, Earl recorded the
deed, mortgage, and other necessary documents. After the
documents were recorded, Earl paid Elaine and everyone else
who was to receive funds from the escrow. The recorded
documents and other important papers were then mailed to
Rob and Elaine.
7.5. HELP FROM PROFESSIONALS
You have already learned that most of the details of a
real estate closing are handled by experienced professionals.
Unit Seven, Page 10
These experts work as a team to help you accomplish your
investment objectives. Your team might include professionals
like the following:
Real estate agent or broker. Real estate agents and
brokers can be very helpful in arranging and performing
different aspects of the closing process. In some areas a real
estate broker actually conducts the closing.
Title company officer. The title company officer is one
of the most important professionals available to you. He serves
as a neutral third party and often prepares the legal paperwork
for the closing. The title company usually issues a policy of title
insurance.
Attorney. A good real estate attorney can advise you
on all the legal aspects of the real estate transaction. In some
areas closings are conducted by attorneys.
Escrow agent. If the transaction will be closed through
an escrow arrangement, an escrow agent will hold documents
and funds for you according to the escrow instructions.
Loan officer. When the transaction involves institutional
financing, a good loan officer can be of great assistance.
Appraiser. An appraiser can provide useful information
about the value of the property involved in the transaction.
Insurance agent. Every real estate transaction involves
questions about property insurance. A good insurance agent
can answer those questions and help you get the best coverage
for the lowest price.
Other professionals. Other professionals that might be
involved in a real estate closing are:
Accountants. Real estate transactions often involve
complex financial information and tax considerations;
accountants can provide needed expertise in these
areas.
Unit Seven, Page 11
Architects. Larger properties may involve architectural
considerations that require the assistance of an
architect.
Building inspectors. Many transactions require
inspection and approval of the property by an
authorized building inspector.
Engineers and surveyors. These professionals can
provide a survey of the property if one is required.
Property managers. Property managers often have
important information about specific properties, tenants,
lease agreements, deposits, and service contracts.
Public officials. Certain public officials (such as those in
planning and zoning departments) may also become
involved in real estate transactions.
Your team of real estate professionals could be
compared to the members of a professional football team. Each
member of the team has been recruited and trained to perform
specific tasks. You are the coach. You design the strategies
and call the plays, and the professionals execute their part of
the game plan.
Many real estate investors try to save money by doing
everything themselves, but professional assistance is usually well
worth the expense. Consider the case of Brad K. who signed a
contract to buy a large fixer-upper house with the intention of
converting it into a duplex. He had noticed several nice
duplexes just two blocks away form the house and assumed
that he could concert his house without any problems.
After the transaction was closed, Brad discovered that
his new property was in an area zoned for single-family
dwellings only. Even though the dividing line between the two
zones was only a block away, Brad could not legally convert
his house to a duplex. A good attorney or other real estate
professional would have advised Brad regarding zoning
restrictions. The cost of obtaining professional assistance in this
Unit Seven, Page 12
case would have been small compared to the expense of not
knowing the zoning restrictions beforehand.
7.6 CONSIDERATIONS BEFORE CLOSING
Before closing, you will need to consider a number of
routine matters that can nevertheless have a significant effect on
the outcome of the transaction.
The story of John Y. illustrates some of the problems
that may arise when these important considerations are
neglected. John signed a contract of sale to buy a threebedroom
house. Although he ordered a title search, he did not
examine the tile report very carefully. As a result, he failed to
notify the seller of a defect in the title and did not receive a clear
title to the property.
John agreed to assume the existing property insurance
policy without reviewing the coverage. He later found that much
of the premium went to cover personal property and that there
was no liability coverage. Since he planned to offer the house
for rent without furnishings, he would have been much better off
to obtain new insurance coverage.
John also failed to make a careful inspection of the
property. He later learned that the plumbing and electrical
systems were in poor condition and that the house was infested
with termites!
7.7 CHECKLIST OF KEY ACTION ITEMS IN THE
CLOSING PROCESS
Be sure to consider the following matters before the
closing takes place. Not all will be needed with all properties;
review this information when you have a specific property in
mind.
1. Choosing the closing date.
2. Choosing a closing agent.
Unit Seven, Page 13
3. Ordering the title search.
4. Examining the title report.
5. Notifying the seller of title defects.
6. Accepting or rejecting the title.
7. Obtaining a survey.
8. Inspecting the property.
9. Obtaining a chattel lien search.
10. Examining existing leases.
11. Making bulk sales affidavits and notices.
12. Obtaining property insurance.
13. Checking on property maintenance
1. Choosing the Closing Date
The closing date is usually stated in the contract of sale.
If not, it is presumed that the transaction will be closed within a
reasonable time. The closing date is generally determined by the
time required to secure title insurance, the time needed to
arrange for financing, the time needed to draft the necessary
documents, and the convenience of the parties.
Since the date of closing affects the proration of
interest, taxes, insurance, and other expenses, as well as the
amount of depreciation and interest income, you should choose
a closing date that will be most advantageous to you.
For example, if Kirk, the buyer, assumes an existing
loan from Betty, the seller, an interest proration will be
necessary. Interest is normally paid in arrears. So if the loan
payments are due the first of each month, Kirk can save closing
costs by closing near the end of the month. Property taxes are
levied annually, and the buyer and seller each pay their
proportionate shares. Insurance policies are paid for in
advance. If Kirk assumes Betty's policy, he must reimburse her
for the value of the remaining coverage on a prorated basis.
Kirk can calculate depreciation from the month that the
property is placed in service, even if the closing date is near the
end of that month.
In some cases, the seller will specify a certain closing
date to be sure that his holding period has been long enough to
Unit Seven, Page 14
have his profit from the sale treated as a capital gain rather than
ordinary income.
If the title search is not yet completed or if the lending
institution has not yet processed the loan, the closing may be
adjourned for a reasonable period of time. Whichever party is
not prepared on the date set for closing may request an
adjournment.
The other party in turn may specify that the prorations
be computed as of the original date or the adjourned date,
whichever is more favorable to him.
For example, if Betty requests the adjournment, and the
income form the property is greater than the carrying charges, it
is to Kirk's advantage to have the prorating computed as of the
original date. Kirk would receive the rents from the date
originally fixed for closing, and Betty would be entitled to
interest on the unpaid balance of the purchase price from the
original closing date.
If the contract fixes a closing date and provides that
"time is of the essence," then the party who is ready to close on
the fixed date does not need to grant the request of the other
party for adjournment.
2. Choosing a Closing Agent
Closing practices vary in different sections of the
country and even within the same state. In various areas,
closings may be conducted by title insurance companies,
escrow companies, lending institutions, real estate brokers, or
attorneys. Find out what type of closing agent is commonly
used in your area, and develop a good working relationship
with that closing agent.
3. Ordering a Title Search
After the contract of sale has been entered into, the
buyer should arrange to have a title search made to determine
whether the seller holds clear title. If the contract requires the
seller to furnish evidence of title, he should do so within the time
allowed by the contract. Most buyers are not qualified to do a
Unit Seven, Page 15
comprehensive search of the public records. Also, each state
has different laws and recording procedures. For this reason, it
is wise to have a title company, professional abstractor, or an
attorney perform the title search.
The abstract, or title history, is a summary of every
recorded document affecting the title to the property. It begins
with a description of the land and lists all deeds, mortgages,
wills, judgments, mechanic's liens, foreclosure proceedings, tax
sales, and other matters affecting the title to the property.
After an abstract has been prepared, it is often
examined by an attorney who then issues a certificate of title.
This certificate is the attorney's opinion of title, based on his
examination of the public record.
You cannot rely completely on the abstract or
certificate of title to guarantee a clean title, however. The
abstract or certificate of title will not disclose all debts in title;
forgery, fraud, or lack of delivery, for example. Suppose that
you own a house and someone forges your signature on a deed
purporting to deed the house to him or even to some innocent
person. Or suppose that a recorded deed was never properly
delivered. These defective deeds do not pass title.
Because of these risks, most buyers buy a title
insurance policy. Title insurance guarantees the title to the
property. The insurance company agrees to defend at its own
expense against any lawsuit based on a title defect covered by
the policy.
Once the buyer obtains a title insurance policy, it
remains in force, without further payment, until the property is
sold again. At that time the title is examined to cover the period
of time since the issuance of the policy, and a new policy is
issued to the new buyer.
4. Examining the Title Report
When you, as a buyer, receive the title report you or
your attorney must review it for defects. Since most investors
Unit Seven, Page 16
do not have enough legal experience to discover all the defects,
professional assistance is crucial.
5. Notifying the Seller of Title Defects
As soon as you or your attorney receive the abstract or
title report, notify the seller or the seller's attorney promptly so
that any title defects mentioned in the report can be corrected.
Almost every title examination will reveal some defects or
encumbrances.
6. Accepting or Rejecting the Title
The seller agrees to furnish you with good and
marketable title to the property, subject to any encumbrances
or exceptions mentioned in the contract of sale. After examining
the title report, you or your attorney may decide that the title is
defective. If the seller cannot or will not overcome the
objections, you can refuse to close the transaction.
If the seller believes that the rejection is unwarranted,
he may bring a lawsuit for damages or specific performance.
Then the court will decide whether or not the title to the
property should have been accepted. When the contract of sale
does not specify the kind or quality of title to be delivered, it is
implied that the seller must give a good and marketable title, or
one free from any reasonable doubt.
7. Obtaining a Survey
In many states, lending institutions require a survey
before lending money on a particular property. A survey shows
any encroachments on the property; for example, bay windows
or eaves that extend over the lot lines, or such subsurface
encroachments as footings of a building that extend into
adjoining property. The survey may also show a zoning
violation. If, for example, a zoning ordinance states that no
building shall be built less than fifteen feet from the property
line, a survey would show whether the buildings on the property
conform to that ordinance.
8. Inspecting the Property
Before making the offer, you should have carefully
inspected the property. Now, before closing, you should once
Unit Seven, Page 17
again thoroughly inspect the property for problems in structure,
sanitation facilities, drainage and mechanical systems. This
examination should also disclose whether there are any
unrecorded easements.
Sometimes you will want certain professional to check
for violations of zoning or building ordinances and for recent
construction or repairs that might be subject to a mechanic's
lien. It might also be wise to have an inspection for termites or
other pests. If income property is involved, you should also
determine what furniture and appliances are owned by the
tenants.
Howard B. was buying a small furnished apartment
building. By checking with the tenants, he learned that they
owned most of the furniture. Not knowing this could have
caused serious problems when the tenants later moved out and
took their furniture with them.
9. Obtaining a Chattel Lien Search
If valuable chattels (fixtures, personal property, etc.)
are included in the sale, a search should be made for any
financing statements affecting them. Furniture, stoves,
refrigerators, and other appliances found in homes are often
included in the contract of sale. You will need to find out
whether such fixtures or personal property included in the
contract of sale are actually owned free and clear by the seller.
10. Examining Existing Leases
If you are buying an income property with existing
leases, you or your attorney should examine those leases
carefully before closing. Find out the terms of the leases --
including the amount of rent received from each tenant and the
amount of deposits. It is also a good idea to have the seller
provide an affidavit stating that no rent has been paid in
advance by the tenants.
11. Making Bulk Sales Affidavits and Notices
If you are buying a retail establishment that includes a
stock of merchandise, comply with any state laws requiring you
Unit Seven, Page 18
to give notice of the pending sale to the creditors of the
business so that their rights may be protected.
12. Obtaining Property Insurance
Review the coverage of the existing insurance policy to
determine whether you will assume that policy or obtain new
insurance. An insurance agent can tell you about different kinds
of policies available so that you can make an informed decision.
If you choose to assume the existing policy, obtain consent
from the insurance company before closing. If you choose to
obtain new insurance, get an insurance binder before closing.
13. Checking on Property Maintenance
The seller is responsible to maintain the property in a
reasonable manner from the date of the contract to the date of
closing. If the seller allows the property to deteriorate before
the title passes, the buyer may sue him for damages.
7.8 IMPORTANT DOCUMENTS
The actual closing process involves the execution and
exchange of various documents. It is somewhat like the process
of graduating from school. The student prepares and completes
various papers and projects and quizzes and exams. The
teachers complete various evaluations and progress reports.
These could all be considered preliminary documents. Then
when all of the requirements for graduation have been met, the
student is given a diploma. This could be compared with the
delivery of the deed and bill of sale in a real estate transaction.
Although most of these documents are prepared by
professionals, you need to have a basic understanding of the
documents form and purpose. The parties often exchange
copies of certain of these documents before the actual closing
so that any problems can be ironed out in advance.
We will be considering the following documents in this
section:
1. Affidavits
Unit Seven, Page 19
2. Bill of sale for personal property
3. Certificates of compliance
4. The deed
5. Indemnity agreement
6. Insurance policies
7. Satisfaction of liens
8. Mortgages
9. Pest control report
10. Power of attorney
11. Tax receipts
12. The survey
13. Warranties
14. Water and other utility bills
15. Leases
16. Service contracts
17. Abstract of title or title insurance policy
18. Escrow agreement
19. Minutes of closing
1. Affidavits
Often the seller must furnish certain affidavits at closing.
For example, he often provides an affidavit of title certifying
that, during the period between the completion of the title
search and the date of closing, there have been no judgments
against him, no unrecorded deeds or encumbrances against the
property, and nothing else that would cause a defect in his title.
The seller might also provide an affidavit stating that all personal
property included in the sale has been fully paid for and that the
seller is unaware of any zoning or building code violations
affecting the property.
The following is a sample affidavit from the seller:
AFFIDAVIT
State of
County of
(hereinafter referred to as
"Seller") being first duly sworn states:
Unit Seven, Page 20
1. Seller is selling the property
located at and describe
as follows:
2. The above describe property is
being sold to
(hereinafter referred to as
"Buyer").
3. The above-described property
has been in Seller's peaceable
and undisturbed possession
since and Seller's title and
possessory rights have never
been disputed, questioned, or
rejected.
4. No court of this state, or any
other state, or of the United
States has rendered a
judgment against Seller that
remains unsatisfied as of the
making of this affidavit, nor are
there any court proceedings
pending against Seller affecting
the above-described premises.
5. The Seller has no knowledge of
termites or rodent infestation of
the buildings.
6. Present use of the property is no
in violation of law.
7. Seller has given no deed, grant,
contract, or encumbrance that is
not reflected in the public
records.
8. Seller has no knowledge of any
violation of building or zoning
Unit Seven, Page 21
ordinances affecting the
property.
9. All personal property included in
the sale has been fully paid for.
This affidavit is given to induce
Buyer to accept a deed to the
above described premises and
to pay the consideration
therefor, and it is Seller's
intention that Buyer rely upon
this affidavit.
Seller
Subscribed and Sworn
before me this day of , 19 .
Notary Public
2. Bill of Sale for Personal Property
The bill of sale transfers ownership of that property. The
more precisely the personal property is identified in the bill of
sale, the better. The bill of sale should also represent that the
seller has the full right to sell the property and that the property
is fully paid for and free of all liens and encumbrances.
If any personal property is included with a property you are
buying, be sure to take an inventory of the premises shortly
before the closing and to make a spot-check on the day of
closing to make sure you are getting the personal property you
have bargained for. But problems may still arise unless the
personal property to be transferred is specifically identified both
in the contract and in a bill of sale.
Unit Seven, Page 22
Steve N. purchased a house with a new stove and a new 22
cubic-foot Amana refrigerator. Steve inspected the house prior
to closing and found all the appliances in working order. After
the closing, Steve entered his new house and found that he no
longer had a new 22-cubic-foot Amana refrigerator. In its place
was an old Kelvinator refrigerator only half as large and in poor
condition. Steve's contract and bill of sale contained the word
refrigerator, but they did not specify what kind of refrigerator.
To avoid this type of problem, the contract and bill of sale
should list and specifically describe all the personal property to
be transferred. Appliances should be described by make,
model, and serial number. For example, "One 22-cubic-foot
Amana refrigerator, model number 110, serial number
1234567."
The following is a sample bill of sale:
BILL OF SALE
Know all men by these presents that Kurt
Jensen, the Seller, for and in consideration of the sum
included in the purchase price, the receipt whereof is
hereby acknowledged, has bargained, sold, assigned
and transferred unto Steve Nelson, the Buyer, that
certain personal property now at 35000 North Canyon
Road, Provo, Utah, particularly described as follows:
1. One 22-cubic-foot Amana refrigerator, model
number 110, serial number 1234567.
And the Seller upon the consideration recited
above warrants ownership of and good title to said
property, the right to sell the same and that there are no
liens, encumbrances or charges thereon or against the
same and to defend the title and possession transferred
to the Buyer against all lawful claims.
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand
this day of , 19 .
Unit Seven, Page 23
Kurt Jensen
Subscribe and Sworn
before me this day of , 19 .
Notary Public
3. Certificates of Compliance
When you are buying commercial or income property, you
need to know that the property is in compliance with the
various laws and ordinances relating to its use, occupancy, and
condition. If you are buying a new building, the seller will give
you a certificate showing that plumbing, heating, electrical, and
other building standards have been met. Local authorities will
often conduct and inspection of the property, and then issue a
certificate of compliance stating that no violations of building
codes, zoning regulations, or other ordinances exist.
The following is a sample of a letter certifying compliance:
July 29, 1985
City of Provo
P.O. Box 1849
Provo, Utah 84603
To Whom It May Concern:
On July 19, 1985, I made a special inspection at 35000
North Canyon Road in Provo. It appears that everything has
been done according to the present code, and there are no
violations of any code requirements.
If I can be of further service to you, please let me know.
Sincerely yours,
Unit Seven, Page 24
Albert Alsop
Provo City Building
Inspector
4. The Deed
The deed is probably the most important document in the
entire transaction. The provisions in the deed must agree with
those in the contract of sale. For example, if the contract of sale
requires a warranty deed with certain provisions, then that
warranty deed must be produced at closing. The deed sets out
the names of the parties, the amount of consideration, the
words of conveyance, and a description of the property.
There are many different kinds of deeds which convey title
to real estate. Some of the more common types of deeds are
listed below:
a. A bargain and sale deed conveys the property but does
not include any warranties of title.
b. A quitclaim deed conveys only the grantor's (the seller's)
present interest in the land. It contains no covenants,
warranties, or implications of the grantor's ownership.
c. In some states, a sheriff's deed is issued following a
foreclosure sale. It usually gives the grantee (the buyer) all of
the rights, title, and interest except those which were senior to
the foreclosed lien.
d. A special warranty deed contains only one covenant.
The grantor covenants that he has not encumbered the property
except as stated in the deed.
e. A tax deed is issued in some states when property is
purchased at a tax sale.
f. A warranty deed contains certain covenants and
warranties by the grantor that the deed conveys a good and
unencumbered title. Some states such as California, Idaho, and
North Dakota use a grant deed instead of a warranty deed.
Unit Seven, Page 25
5. Indemnity Agreement
The seller is often required to provide an agreement to
indemnify you form any unpaid or unsatisfied claims due anyone
prior to the closing.
6. Insurance Policies
It is important for the buyer to obtain adequate insurance
protection. If the existing insurance policy is assigned to you,
the seller is entitled to a refund for the amount of the premium
that applies to your ownership. If you acquire your own
insurance, the seller's insurance is canceled, and the seller
obtains a refund.
7. Satisfaction of Liens
If any liens have been imposed on the property, the seller
should furnish certificates showing that these liens have been
discharged.
8. Mortgages
In almost every real estate transaction, you will be either
obtaining or releasing some type of mortgage. Many offers are
made subject to the buyer's ability to obtain suitable financing.
Review all mortgage documents carefully. If there is an existing
mortgage on a property, you are buying and you do not intend
to assume the mortgage, the seller should furnish a satisfaction
of mortgage certificate. This certificate shows that the mortgage
obligation has been discharged.
A mortgage is a pledge of property to secure the payment
of a debt. A standard mortgage loan usually involves a
promissory note along with the mortgage itself. The promissory
note names the lender and the borrower, the amount of the
debt, the interest rate, and the terms of repayment.
A trust deed, or deed of trust, is a financing instrument
similar to a mortgage. A regular mortgage involves only two
parties, the lender and the borrower. With a trust deed, the
borrower conveys the property to a third party known as a
trustee. The trustee holds title to the property until the debt is
paid in full, keeping it in trust for the benefit of the lender or
holder of the note.
Unit Seven, Page 26
An installment contract; also known as a conditional sales
contract, a contract for deed, or a land contract; is used when
the seller does not wish to convey title to the property until the
purchase price has been paid by the buyer. The seller would
usually receive a down payment plus monthly payments until the
property is paid for. The seller can either deliver a deed to the
buyer at closing and have the buyer pledge the property as
collateral for the balance owed, or the seller can wait to deliver
the title after the buyer has paid the debt in full.
Most states have printed forms for mortgages, trust deeds,
and installment contracts.
9. Pest Control
In some states the seller is required to furnish a certificate
showing the property to be free of termites and other pests.
The contract of sale usually allows time for the report to be
obtained and often allows time for the seller to correct any
problems.
10. Power of Attorney
Occasionally a party is not able to attend the closing or
participate in the execution of the documents. When this
happens, the documents may be signed by someone who holds
a power of attorney conveying authority to act in behalf of the
actual buyer or seller.
The following is an example of a general power of attorney:
POWER OF ATTORNEY
STATE OF UTAH )
) ss.
COUNTY OF WEBER )
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
that I, JACK H. HOLMAN, the undersigned, of
Lyman, Wyoming, hereby make, constitute and appoint
CAROL W. HOLMAN, of Lyman, Wyoming, my
lawful attorney in fact for me and in my name, place and
stead, giving unto said attorney in fact full power to do
and perform all and every act that I may legally do
Unit Seven, Page 27
through an attorney in fact, and every proper power
necessary to carry out the purposes for which this
power is granted, with full power of substitution and
revocation, hereby ratifying and affirming that which said
attorney in fact or her substitute shall lawfully do or
cause to be done by herself or her substitute lawfully
designated by virtue of the power herein conferred upon
her.
This power of attorney shall not be affected by
my becoming disabled, incapacitated or incompetent,
but shall be terminated by my death.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have signed the
Power of Attorney at Ogden, Utah, this day of
, 1985.
Jack H. Holman
On this day of , 1985, personally appeared
before me Jack H. Holman, the signer of this Power of
Attorney, who duly acknowledged to met that he
executed the same.
Notary Public
Residing at , Utah
My Commission Expires:
11. Tax Receipts
The seller usually brings the most recent tax receipts to the
closing. If the seller has paid the taxes in advance, these
receipts are used to calculate the proration of the taxes. If
special assessments have been imposed on the property, the
seller should also furnish receipts for their payment.
12. The Survey
Some contracts of sale require the seller to provide the
buyer with a survey of the property. This survey will show if the
actual dimensions of the property conform to the legal
description. The survey will also show whether there are any
encroachments on the property, whether the structures on the
Unit Seven, Page 28
property encroach on adjacent properties, and whether the
setback and side line restrictions are met.
13. Warranties
The seller conveys any existing warranties (for plumbing,
furnace, refrigerator, etc.) to the buyer at closing.
14. Water and Other Utility Bills
As buyer, you should receive evidence of payment of water
and other utility bills. If these bills have not been paid, water
and utility service may be cut off.
15. Leases
If the property is rented, the seller should furnish you with
copies of all leases, including any modifications and
amendments. The leases are usually assigned to you at the
closing. The seller should also write a letter instruction the
tenants to pay rent to the new buyer. The seller should deliver
any deposits which he holds, and you should furnish a receipt.
The seller should also provide you with an affidavit stating that
no rents have been paid in advance.
16. Service Contracts
The seller should provide copies of any service contracts
that relate to the property, such as contracts for cleaning or
maintenance. The seller should either cancel these contracts or
assign them to you.
17. Abstract of Title or Title Insurance Policy
The abstract of title or the title insurance policy is another
important closing document. As already discussed, an abstract
is a written history of the title to a particular property. A title
insurance policy usually shows the name of the party insured
and the character of his title, along with a description of the
property. The policy lists mortgages, easements, liens, or
restrictions affecting the property and also contains printed
conditions and stipulations.
18. Escrow Agreement
Unit Seven, Page 29
Many real estate transactions involve an escrow agreement
that is prepared prior to the closing and executed by both
parties to the transaction.
The following is a sample escrow agreement:
ESCROW AGREEMENT
Whereas _ of hereinafter
referred to as seller(s), have sold to
of hereinafter referred to as Buyer(s), the
following described property, to wit:
pursuant to that certain entered into
by the parties on the day of , 19 and
annexed hereto and incorporated by reference and
subject to the covenants and conditions therein, it is
agreed that Seller(s) will execute and deliver into escrow
a full and sufficient , on even date,
which shall be securely held in escrow by
of until the purchase price shall
have been fully paid to Seller(s). Upon completion of
payment in full to the Seller(s), Seller(s) will furnish to
Buyer(s) an affidavit stating that the purchase price has
been paid in full and directing the escrow holder to
release any and all documents held in escrow and to
deliver same to Buyer(s).
It is further agreed that in the event that Buyer(s)
shall default in payment f the full purchase price, the
documents herein referred to shall be returned to
Seller(s) and the property described herein shall revert
to Seller(s) as if no agreement of sale had ever been
made, and any and all sums paid by Buyer(s) up to the
time of default shall be forfeited to Seller(s) as liquidated
damages for the breach of this agreement. And it is
agreed that in the event Seller(s) do not perform the
duties herein agreed to, and Buyer(s) have fully
performed any and all duties herein agreed to, then the
documents held by the escrow holder, and the property
Unit Seven, Page 30
herein referred to, shall be forfeited to Buyer(s) as
liquidated damages for the breach of this agreement.
It is agreed that performance of the conditions
herein above stated shall be completed on or before the
day of , 19 .
All charges and expenses incurred in connection
with this escrow are to be shared equally by the Seller(s)
and the Buyer(s).
Dated at , State, this day of
, 19 .
(Buyer)
(Seller)
Accepted by escrow holder this day of , 19
.
(Escrow
holder)
19. Minutes of Closing
It is often wise to keep a record of the events that occurred
at the closing. The minutes should also list the full names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of the parties present.
Anyone present at the closing can prepare the minutes, which
the parties to the transaction should review and sign. These
minutes can be useful if legal disputes arise later.
7.9 MAKING THE CLOSING GO SMOOTHLY
If all of the parties to the transaction have prepared will for
the closing, it will usually go quite smoothly. For example,
Miriam B. agreed to buy a lovely home in a good neighborhood
for $90,000. During the weeks before closing, Miriam carefully
reviewed and completed all the important matters that need to
Unit Seven, Page 31
be considered before closing. The closing meeting was
scheduled for 3:00 P.M. at the local title company.
When Miriam arrived at the meeting, she spent a few
minutes examining the documents to make sure that they were
in proper form and that they complied with the terms of the
contract of sale. Next, she carefully reviewed the closing
statement to make sure that the prorations had been calculated
accurately. She also reviewed her closing costs to verify that
they were correct.
After she was satisfied that everything was in order, Miriam
signed the necessary documents and presented a certified
check to the title company for the amount specified in her
closing statement. The seller delivered the deed to the property
and gave Miriam the keys.
Here, then are the essential components of the meeting:
1. Examining the documents
2. Receiving the closing statement
3. Paying closing debts
4. Paying the purchase price and delivering the
deed
5. Closing a mortgage loan
1. Examining the Documents
All parties check the documents to be exchanged at closing
to see that they are in proper form and comply with the
contract of sale. A final check should be made to make sure the
title is clear.
2. Receiving the Closing Statement
The closing statement or settlement sheet is one of the
primary documents of the real estate closing. It sets forth the
amount of money the buyer must pay at the closing and the
amount the seller will receive at the closing. It also sets forth the
division of items to be prorated between the buyer and seller
when property ownership changes hands. These items include
property insurance premiums, property taxes, accrued interest,
utility bills, rents, and operating expenses.
Unit Seven, Page 32
The buyer receives credit for the earnest money, existing
mortgages that are assumed, interest accrued and unpaid on
existing mortgages, unearned rents that have already been
collected, and deposits from tenants.
The seller usually receives a credit for the full purchase
price. The seller is also entitled to credits for unearned
insurance premiums, fuel on hand, and any items paid in
advance by the seller, such as taxes and service contracts.
Some charges are allocated to either the buyer or the seller,
depending upon local custom and the terms of the contract of
sale.
Examples of closing statements for both the buyer and seller
are included on the adjacent page.
3. Paying Closing Costs
Both buyer and seller must pay certain costs at closing. The
buyer typically pays for the following items: the loan application
fee, the title insurance policy for the mortgage, the premium for
hazard insurance, the credit report, the appraisal, the recording
fees for the deed and mortgage, and his attorney's fee.
The seller typically pays for the following items: the affidavit
of title, costs of removing clouds on the title, recording fees for
quit claim deeds, the owner's title insurance policy, the real
estate broker's commission, and the attorney's fee.
Escrow fees are often divided between the buyer and seller.
Certain transactions might also involve additional closing costs.
4. Paying the Purchase Price and Delivering the Deed
After all of the closing documents have been reviewed and
accepted, the buyer pays the seller the balance of the purchase
price as shown on the closing statement. Payment is usually in
the form of cash or a cashier's check. The seller then delivers
the deed and other necessary documents to the buyer. The
buyer also receives the keys and the right to take possession of
the property.
Unit Seven, Page 33
5. Closing a Mortgage Loan
Closing procedures and the allocation of closing costs vary
according to the type of closing. For example, if new mortgage
financing is required, there will be an actual closing of the loan.
A mortgage loan is closed by delivery of the loan
documents to the lender and disbursement of the funds to the
borrower. Mortgage loan closing expenses are usually paid by
the borrower. The expenses include the loan origination fee,
costs for title examination and title insurance, the credit report,
the mortgage recording fee, the appraisal, and other processing
fees.
As an investor, you should be aware of the Real Estate
Settlement Procedures Act (RESPA), which became effective
throughout the United States in 1975. The RESPA requires that
buyers and sellers be given advanced disclosure of settlement
costs. This disclosure eliminates kickbacks and fees for
services not performed during the closing process. The RESPA
covers almost every owner-occupied residential loan,
conventional as well as FHA and VA. Lenders must comply
with RESPA regulations.
7.10 CONSIDERATIONS AFTER CLOSING
After closing, the buyer should immediately record his deed,
along with any other necessary documents. The seller should
record any purchase money mortgage (a mortgage used as part
of the purchase consideration). The task of recording is usually
carried out by the closing agent. If title insurance is involved, a
policy should be issued in the name of the buyer as soon as
possible. The buyer should have water, gas, and electric bills
changed to his name. Any tenants should be notified of the
change in ownership. The buyer should also verify that the
property is adequately insured.
Usually the buyer's right to possess the property begins at
the point at which the deed is delivered to him. The seller
should turn over the keys to the buyer and give him any
necessary information, papers, and so forth. Any existing leases
should also be turned over to the buyer at the time of closing.
Unit Seven, Page 34
In some areas, after the transaction has been closed, the
buyer's attorney writes a closing letter to the buyer. The letter
encloses and describes the various closing documents. The
letter also reminds the buyer of any matters that still need to be
taken care of.
The buyer should keep the closing statement for income tax
records, and put the deed, title policy, and other important
documents in a safe place.
7.11 A TITLE CLOSING CHECKLIST
The following sample checklist is not meant to be
comprehensive, and since the closing procedure varies from
state to state, many of the items on the sample checklist are not
necessary for certain transactions. It is also comforting to
remember that most of the details of closing are carried out be
experienced professionals. Still, this checklist can help you
prepare for closing.
1. Considerations Before Closing:
Execute contract of sale.
Obtain legal description of the property.
Deposit earnest money.
Obtain abstract of title or title insurance policy.
Review unrecorded instruments that may affect the title.
Obtain certificates showing satisfaction of mechanic's
liens, chattel liens, judgments, or mortgages.
Obtain seller's affidavit of title.
Obtain survey.
Inspect the property.
Obtain evidence of compliance with fire, health, building
and zoning laws, ordinances, and restrictive covenants.
Obtain pest control report.
Obtain soil test report.
Obtain certificate of occupancy.
Review plans and specifications.
Unit Seven, Page 35
Complete chattel lien search.
Obtain indemnity agreement.
Obtain insurance policy assignment, cancellation, or binder.
Obtain corporate resolutions if seller is a corporation.
Obtain partnership agreement if seller is a partnership.
Obtain trust agreement if seller is a trustee.
Prepare power of attorney.
Obtain bulk sales affidavit.
Review tenant roster, rent roll, outstanding leases, and
assignment of leases.
Obtain list of operating costs.
Obtain inventory of supplies.
Obtain evidence of fuel on hand.
Obtain service contracts.
Obtain latest water, gas, and electric meter readings.
Obtain most recent tax bill.
Obtain recorded of any unpaid assessments.
Obtain receipt for broker's commission.
Obtain payoff statements on encumbrances to be paid at
closing.
Obtain any subordination agreements.
Obtain credit approval.
Obtain appraisal.
2. Considerations at Closing
Execute escrow instructions.
Examine closing documents.
Make final title check.
Execute note.
Execute mortgage or trust deed.
Execute warranty deed.
Execute bill of sale for personal property.
Sign closing statements.
Pay purchase price.
Pay escrow fees, closing costs, commissions, and attorney's
fees.
Obtain keys.
Obtain deposits from tenants.
Obtain existing warranties (on roof, plumbing, appliances, etc.)
Prepare minutes of the closing meeting.
Unit Seven, Page 36
3. Considerations after Closing
Record all necessary documents.
Change utility bills to buyer's name.
Notify tenants of change in ownership.
Verify adequacy of insurance.
Keep important documents in a safe place.
7.12 HOW WELL HAVE YOU LEARNED?
Test your learning by answering the following questions. If
you do not remember the answer to a specific question, you
can look back through the lesson to find it. Feel free to write
your answers in the space provided, or use a separate piece of
paper. Do not skip this step! You will retain the information
learned from this lesson much longer if you write your answers
down.
1. Why does a real estate investor need to understand the
process of closing?
2. What is the difference between a settlement meeting and
closing through escrow?
3. Who are some of the professionals that handle the details of
a real estate closing?
4. How is the closing date determined?
5. Why is a title search necessary?
6. What is the benefit of having title insurance?
7. Name five important considerations before closing.
8. Name five important documents involved in a closing.
9. What is a bill of sale? When is it used?
10. What information is set forth in the closing statement?
Unit Seven, Page 37
11. Which closing costs are paid by the buyer, and which are
paid by the seller?
12. What are some important considerations after the closing?
7.13 PUTTING IT ALL INTO PRACTICE
The information contained in this unit will be more
meaningful if you take immediate action to apply it to your
investment program. The following assignments will help you
understand and expand upon the things you have learned.
Completing these assignments will increase your confidence and
move you closer to your investment objectives. It may not be
necessary for you to do all of these assignments -- but skimping
on your efforts will limit your growth. The more aggressive you
are in expanding your understandings, the more successful you
will be.
1. Get the facts. Call a real estate broker or other real
estate professional and get information about the most common
closing procedures in your areas. Are settlement meetings
common, or are closings usually conducted through escrows?
Is the closing agent more commonly a title company officer, an
escrow agent, a loan officer, a real estate broker, an attorney,
or some other person? What are the names of several good
closing agents who could give you additional information?
2. Ask the experts. Contact several reputable closing
agents. Get to know them. Have them explain the process for
closing a typical real estate transaction. Ask questions about
anything you do not understand. Find out how closing costs are
calculated. Obtain sample forms that would be used in a typical
closing. Choose a closing agent that you like and trust and
develop a good working relationship with him.
3. Visit the recorder's office. Go the place in your area
where all of the documents affecting title to property are
recorded. The information recorded there is of public record.
Ask to see the books where the documents are recorded.
Have someone explain how to search the records to find the
Unit Seven, Page 38
history of a specific property title. You might use your home as
an example.
4. Visit a title company. Talk to someone who prepares
title reports to learn how it is done. Have a title officer or other
employee explain the use of title insurance. Ask for any free
literature that will help you learn more about the role of a title
company and the process of closing.
5. Contact a lending institution. Talk to a loan officer about
real estate closings that involve institutional financing. Ask about
the allocation of closing costs. Obtain any free literature
available.
6. Contact public officials. Call the public department in
your area that is responsible for compliance with building
codes, zoning regulations, and other ordinances. Make a list of
public officials who might need to make inspections or issue
permits when you buy or sell a property.
7. Build a team. Contact other professionals who might be
of assistance in closing a real estate transaction. Make a list of
reliable closing agents, real estate brokers, title company
officers, attorneys, escrow agents, loan officers, appraisers,
insurance agents, and public officials. Develop a good working
relationship with the ones you like and build a team of qualified
professionals who can help you accomplish your investment
objectives.
8. Develop a checklist. Develop your own checklist of
important considerations and documents that relate to a typical
closing process in your particular area.
9. Collect sample forms. Gather sample forms and
documents that would be used in a typical closing. Become
familiar with the different documents that you will sign at
closing. Be sure to ask questions about anything you do not
understand.
Unit Seven, Page 39
10. Attend a closing. Ask a closing agent to let you observe
a closing or settlement meeting. After the meeting, ask
questions about anything you did not understand.
7.14 THE TEN MOST ASKED QUESTIONS ABOUT
CLOSINGS
1. "When does legal title to a property pass from the seller to
the buyer?"
The title conveys the right to possession, ownership, and
control of property. In most cases the buyer has no right to
take possession of property he has contracted to purchase until
he secures legal title to the property. In a typical closing, the
title to the property passes when the deed is delivered and
recorded. If the closing involves an escrow, the title passes to
the buyer when all the conditions set forth in the escrow
instructions have been met.
2. "How can I choose the most beneficial closing date?"
The closing date which is usually set forth in the contract of
sale is negotiable. You will need to allow enough time between
the execution of the contract of sale and the closing to obtain
title insurance, arrange for financing, and draft the necessary
documents. Prorations are usually made as of the date of
closing, although the parties can mutually agree to a different
proration date if they wish. Closing costs can often be reduced
by choosing a particular day or time of the month to close the
transaction. For example, a closing date near the end of the
month will usually reduce closing costs for the buyer. Consult
with your closing agent to find the specific date that will be most
beneficial to you.
3. "When is a survey of the property necessary?"
Some contracts of sale require the seller to provide a survey
to the buyer. Many lending institutions also require a survey
Unit Seven, Page 40
before they will lend money on a particular property. A survey
is most useful in large-scale transactions, but it is also becoming
quite common in residential transactions. Generally, a buyer
should request a survey whenever there is a question
concerning boundaries, encroachment, or zoning violations.
4. "Does a title insurance policy provide any benefits that are
not available from an abstract of title?"
An abstract of title is a history of transactions affecting
property, as reflected in the public records. Title insurance
provides protection against potential title defects which the
public records do not disclose. Examples of hidden defects not
shown in the public records include forgery of documents,
documents that were never delivered to the public depository,
incapacity of a party, fraud, unprobated or lost wills,
undisclosed or missing heirs, mistakes in recording, deeds by
minors, irregularity of tax sales, lack of service in legal
proceedings, and defects in powers of attorney. An owner's
title insurance policy protects the owner against losses if any
claims from these hidden defects are made against his property.
5. "When should I seek the assistance of an attorney?"
In many states, real estate closings are conducted by
attorneys. In other areas, attorneys are used to draft and review
documents and to provide counsel on a variety of legal issues.
Most real estate transactions involve legal issues relating to one
or more of the following: proper execution of the contract of
sale; examination of the tile; evaluation of any title defects;
possible refusal by one party or the other to comply with the
contract; various income, estate, and gift tax problems; zoning
regulations; legal documents; closing statements; and proper
delivery and recording. Although many real estate transactions
can be conducted without legal counsel, you may need the
assistance of an attorney to protect your interests.
6. "How can I reduce the amount of closing costs?"
If you are a skillful negotiator, you can often reduce the
amount of closing costs by having the other party pay certain
Unit Seven, Page 41
costs as a condition of closing the transaction. Since the
professionals involved in the closing process often charge for
their services at different rates, you can also reduce your
closing costs by "shopping around." Finally, you can reduce
your closing costs by selecting the most beneficial closing date.
7. "Is it better to assume the existing hazard insurance policy or
to obtain a new policy?"
In some cases the buyer will want to assume the existing
insurance policy. The seller will usually agree to such an
arrangement if the buyer reimburses him for a prorated amount
of the premium. If the buyer chooses to assume an existing
policy, the seller should assign the policy to the buyer and
obtain confirmation from the insurance company that it accepts
this assignment.
Many insurance policies are tailored to meet individual
needs. A buyer might desire insurance that covers personal
property or protects against liability. In this case, an assignment
of existing coverage may not be satisfactory and the buyer
might need to have his own insurance agent prepare a new
policy.
8. "What documents will I sign at closing?"
Each real estate transaction is unique and requires different
closing documents. The buyer will usually sign some type of
mortgage or note. The seller will usually sign a bill of sale for
personal property and some type of deed. Both parties will sign
a closing statement and any other documents that are pertinent
to the transaction. Either party should feel free to ask questions
about anything that he does not understand. In some cases it is
wise to have an attorney review the documents before they are
executed at closing.
9. "Who is liable for any damage to the property until the time
that title passes to buyer?"
The seller is responsible to maintain the property in a
reasonable condition between the date of the contract of sale
Unit Seven, Page 42
and the date of closing. He has an obligation to prevent decay,
not allow voluntary waste, and prevent damage to the premises.
If the seller allows the property to deteriorate, the buyer may
sue for damages.
10. "What additional precautions are necessary if the property I
am buying is currently rented or leased to someone else?"
If you are buying a property rented to someone else, the
seller should bring the leases to the closing and assign them to
you. The seller should also send a letter to the tenants naming
you as the new lessor, and giving instructions regarding the
payment of rent and other contractual matters. The seller should
deliver any deposits to you and you should issue appropriate
receipts. The seller should also give you an affidavit stating that
no rents have been paid in advance and no special concessions
have been granted to any of the tenants. You should inspect the
property to verify that the tenants' occupancies are consistent
with the terms and conditions of their leases, and to find out
whether the furniture and appliances belong to the tenants or go
with the property.
We wish you the best of success as you master the art and
science of surviving the closing process!
UNIT EIGHT
CREATIVE
MANAGEMENT
PART A
Unit 8A, Page 2
UNIT EIGHT
CREATIVE
MANAGEMENT
PART A
8.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
For the investor who chooses to "turn" properties rather than to
keep them for ongoing profits, this unit may be a distraction.
But sooner or later, every real estate investor bumps into the
inevitable task of learning property management skills.
Good property management is the heart of a successful real
estate investment program. Landlords who don't understand
this principle frequently find that they have more problems than
Unit 8A, Page 3
they want to handle. Their properties lose money, drain their
energy, and turn the unskilled manager into a flexible seller who
is eager to sell at any price simply to get away from the
consequences of his poor business judgment.
Fortunately, good management is easy to learn and simple to
practice. It begins with preparation and forethought and
continues with firm adherence to a sound plan for controlling
your time and your tenants. This unit covers the best ways to
attract and rent to the best tenants for your investment program
and discusses how to deal with those tenants once they move
into your property. They will teach you how to be truly
successful as a landlord or landlady.
The agenda for Part A of this unit is to concentrate on learning
how to prepare a property for tenants, set rental policies,
advertise, and pre-screen prospective tenants.
A FEW TERMS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Tenant turnover: When one tenant moves out and another
moves in.
Tenant turnover rate: The frequency with which tenants move
in and out. For the type of houses discussed in this unit, an
average tenant turnover rate is about once every two years. A
low tenant turnover rate would be once in four or five years,
while a high turnover tenant rate would be more than once
a year.
Vacancy loss: The amount of loss experienced by a landlord
while a rental stands empty. This is the sum of lost rent, cost of
refurbishing and repairs, salaries for any workers hired to help
prepare the property for new tenants, advertising, utilities paid
by the landlord during the vacancy, costs for checking out new
applicants (including telephone expense), and any other
expenses involved in placing new tenants in the property.
Vacancy period: The time during which a property is
Unit 8A, Page 4
unrented.
8.2 VITAL POINTS ABOUT MANAGING REAL
ESTATE
As you read through this unit, keep the following key points
clearly in mind; they will guide your thinking and help you to
have a proper perspective on the material.
M Learning the skills of good property management is as
important to real estate success as learning the skills of finding
bargains and negotiating favorable terms.
M Buying property in a good location will help bring good
tenants to the property.
M Keeping your property in good condition will help bring
good tenants to the property.
M People with a good, solid work background usually make
more reliable tenants.
M It is vital to set your rental policies before you rent the
house. Decide in advance whether you will allow children or
pets, for example, and make your policy clear to the potential
tenant.
M Whenever possible, collect both the first and the last month's
rent in advance, plus a deposit. Do not confuse the deposit with
the last month's rent.
M Use a variety of ways of advertising your rental to increase
your chances of finding tenants quickly.
M Before you show the rental to a prospective tenant, screen
him or her over the telephone.
M Remember that renting homes to tenants is a business. It is
your approach to eventual financial independence. Approach all
challenges in the business as a wise businessperson would.
Unit 8A, Page 5
8.3 KEYS FOR MANAGING REAL ESTATE
If you've thoroughly read and understood all the units up to
now, you've built a strong foundation of knowledge about
investment real estate. Now you're ready to enter that
wonderful dream castle of wealth and power that all this study
supports. But before you can enter your castle, you'll need a
key; in fact, you'll need several keys to ascend into higher and
higher levels of your real estate dream future.
"Keys," you say? "Where do I get them?"
The keys you need to unlock your future are already in your
hand--the contents of this unit on real estate management.
Unfortunately, although management is probably the single
biggest factor in the success or failure of an investment real
estate program, most people actually pay it the least attention.
In a way, this is understandable. Learning to recognize a good
buy, hunting for desirable properties, and learning how to
negotiate the best price and terms are exciting. Most people
also have a basic economic interest in learning the guidelines
that will make them knowledgeable buyers and good
bargainers. When it comes to the offers and documentation you
need to close a sale, you're motivated by the need to
understand all the legal technicalities you have to hurdle before
you can reach your goal of property ownership.
Then, once the first flush of excitement wears off, when the
property is yours and you can truly call yourself an investor at
last, comes the moment of truth. Now that you own this
property, what will you do with it?
Unfortunately, large numbers of investors neglect to inform
themselves about this step until it's too late. Caught up in the
thrill of potential success, they overlook (until it's unavoidable)
the day-to-day effort required to get them there. A surprising
number of people simply rush out and buy a house, a condo, or
an apartment building without ever considering what will
happen after the closing.
Unit 8A, Page 6
Granted, a landlord's job looks fairly simple from the outside:
He leases the unit to a good tenant who will pay the rent every
month. He then takes the rent money, pays the mortgage,
pockets anything that's left over, and sits back until next rent
collection day.
But appearances can be deceiving. The truth is that properties
bought to keep bring a profit only when they are carefully and
consistently managed.
From experience, both our own and that of others, we know
that the best way to avoid becoming an anxious seller/landlord
is to know what it takes to become a successful property
manager. For every wrong move the failed property owner
makes, there is a right move we can choose instead, a way to
increase our profits instead of our problems. These moves are
the keys to successful management that you'll be studying in this
unit. To help manage your property and attract tenants you will
want to use the following five keys:
M 1. Prepare the property
M 2. Set your rental policies
M 3. Advertise
M 4. Show the property
M 5. Pre-screen your applicants
8.4 KEY 1: PREPARE THE PROPERTY
AN ILLUSTRATION
Heidi I. bought a three-bedroom home in an older subdivision
just outside a Midwestern town. The house needed much
attention both inside and out--the paint inside was so old Heidi
wasn't positive what its original color had been, and the outside
paint was cracking and peeling. One of the toilets ran
continually, and the kitchen faucet emitted a constant stream of
water. The carpets were so filthy Heidi wondered if they had
ever been cleaned.
Heidi's cash flow was tight, and she needed to get a tenant
Unit 8A, Page 7
into the home immediately. But she knew it would be a waste
of time to show the property to prospective tenants. If anyone
was interested in such a mess, it wouldn't be the kind of tenant
Heidi wanted, and they certainly wouldn't pay the $495 per
month she needed.
Her first order of business, she knew, was to get the property
prepared to show. She took three days off work to do some
basic cleaning and inside painting. At the same time, she hired a
young man who lived next door--and who was temporarily out
of work--to correct the plumbing problems and to do the
outside painting.
At the end of three long and tiring days their work was done,
and the house was ready to show. Less than a week later the
rental was occupied by a young family who were thrilled to
have a home that smelled so new and fresh. Heidi's work paid
off even more as the months passed and her tenants took pains
to keep the home as nice as it was when they entered it.
The first step in becoming a good manager is preparing your
property to appeal to the tenants you want to attract. Even
before you take possession, plan what you will do to make
your rental attractive to the type of people you want to rent it
to. To do this, of course, you have to know who your potential
tenants are.
The best property for residential rental is the basic
bread-and-butter home which will appeal to the broad
spectrum of renting families. You'll find the most success
investing in a two or three bedroom house with one or two
bathrooms, a yard, and a garage or carport. The best property
for residential rental will be in a quiet neighborhood of similar
homes that are mostly owner-occupied, near schools and
shopping, and convenient to transportation. It probably won't
be the nicest house on the street; in fact, it may be the most
run-down.
Now, who will live in this house? A lot of people will want to,
especially after you've done whatever it takes to put it into
good shape. But the people you want to rent it to will be as
Unit 8A, Page 8
close as possible to the ideal tenants.
Many of today's good tenants are people who would have
been buying their own homes a few years ago. But today, high
prices and high interest rates have delayed their entry into the
housing market. (They don't understand that they could buy a
nice property for "nothing down," if they would only learn how.)
Meanwhile, they've started a family and want some
stability. They want to live in a neighborhood of people like
themselves, send their children to the local schools with their
young friends from down the block, and put down some roots.
Tenants like these usually aren't professional, career-oriented,
college graduates. You won't find many "yuppies" looking for a
rental house in the suburbs, and the few who do are simply
looking for a temporary shelter until they move on to better
things. Don't get the mistaken idea that your ideal tenant is a
highly-paid, ambitious attorney, doctor, or executive who can
afford to pay the highest rent.
8.41 BEWARE OF YUPPIES
Yuppies are more apt to rent a luxury townhouse with a pool,
tennis courts, sauna, reception room, and a 24-hour
maintenance service. They are the most demanding tenants
you'll ever see. The instant any small problem comes up--the
kitchen faucet drips, there are ants in the garage, the neighbor's
dog barks at night--they expect you or your handyman to come
right out, whether it's the middle of the night or your mother-
in-law's birthday, and solve the problem immediately.
Some of these high-achiever tenants also make a hobby of
renter's rights. If they don't receive the sort of service they've
decided they deserve, they're apt to organize a rent strike or
take their landlord to court. They're not so much concerned
with settling into a stable life-style as they are about getting
everything they feel is coming to them, plus as much more as
they can maneuver you into giving them.
That's not to say that no one should ever rent to anyone with a
Unit 8A, Page 9
college degree. But if you're concentrating on bread-and-butter
rentals, your unit is not what upwardly mobile professionals
want. You'll be doing both them and yourself a favor if you
avoid renting to them.
8.42 LOOK FOR STABLE WORKERS
Of course, you don't want to rent to people at the other end
of the scale--the chronically unemployed or people whose
credit history includes poor payment records or skipping out on
debts and other obligations.
What you do want to look for in a tenant is good, solid,
working-class stability. By and large, you find this in blue-collar
and lower-middle-class families. These people want to maintain
a decent life-style for their families and improve it if possible,
but they don't expect anyone, including their landlord, to give
them a free ride through life. They know they have to work for
everything they want, and they're willing to do it.
People in this category often work in factories, on assembly
lines, or as mechanics. They may have a technical job in a
hospital or production plant. They may be enlisted members of
one of the armed forces, or they may even be immigrants from
a foreign country who are overjoyed at the opportunity to live
and work in America.
Manual labor doesn't scare people from these backgrounds
because they were raised on it. In fact, they take pride in a job
well done. These people are most apt to take over the
maintenance chores for your property. They easily assume that
since it's their home, they're responsible for it, and they take
pride in keeping their home clean and attractive. There are
ways, too, that you can foster that attitude, which we'll go into
more thoroughly later in this unit.
8.43 HOW TO FIND OUT WHAT TENANTS WANT
AND ARE WILLING TO PAY
Unit 8A, Page 10
Now that you know who your ideal tenants are, you need to
decide what will attract them to your rental. In some areas,
where housing is very tight, you may not have to think about
this at all. If your unit is located near a thriving industrial center
where vacancies are hard to come by, simply letting people
know you have an empty house may bring a flood of excellent
applicants.
Most rental property isn't quite that well located, however.
Usually a landlord has to expect to put in a few days getting a
house (or apartment) ready to rent to new tenants. The simple
secret to success here is to keep that time as short as possible
and the amount of money you spend to a minimum. Remember,
every day the house stands vacant is a day you don't receive
rent, while mortgage and insurance payments continue. You
have to keep your vacancy loss down in order to manage real
estate profitably.
When you are buying rental property, try to convince the
sellers to give you possession of the property before the
closing. That way, you can have the house ready to rent the day
you sign the mortgage papers. If the sellers have been living
there and are selling because of a move, this may not be
difficult. Or, if the house is rented to tenants who will have to
move, they may be persuaded to leave a few days
early--perhaps by paying a small bonus or offering to supply a
truck or trailer if they move by a certain date.
Analyze the market now. What work has to be done to put
your rental in competition with others on the market? The best
way to answer that question is to analyze the competition. You
can get a lot of information, of course, by talking to other
investors. Ask them which of their houses rents most quickly
and has the shortest vacancy periods. Ask them if tenants give
any particular reasons for liking those rentals better than
others. Ask if prospective tenants mention points they're
looking for in a home.
Information from other investors will give you some
secondhand ideas of what tenants like, but there is no substitute
for personal experience. In order to thoroughly understand the
Unit 8A, Page 11
rental market, you're going to have to become personally
acquainted with it. You must understand the rental market if
you intend to profit from it.
This is where you put yourself into your future tenants' shoes.
In effect, you're going to play a real-life game of "Let's
Pretend." For one weekend, become the kind of person you
will eventually rent to.
On your first day off, imagine that you're an average
working-class parent looking for a home for your
family. Suppose that your family income is about what a typical
two-earner couple earns in your area, and you can afford to
spend between a quarter and a third of your income on rent. (If
you have no idea what this amount might be, ask around. By
now you should know several investors who can estimate what
their average tenant earns, or perhaps you can ask your
banker.
Your first step will be to read the "Homes for Rent" section of
your paper. Choose at least six houses that sound similar to
yours and that are as close as possible to the rent you've
decided you can "afford." (If no rent amounts are listed, you'll
simply have to look at the houses whose descriptions sound
closest to the one you will be offering for rent.) Make
appointments to see them, pretending that you're a prospective
tenant. If most homes in your area seem to be rented through
rental services, visit one of these and purchase the current
listings. It will be a small investment for the amount of
knowledge you will gain.
Next, visit the homes you have chosen. Although you are
pretending that you might be living there, remember that you
really won't. Just as you do when you choose houses to make
offers on, keep in mind that you are not looking for a place for
yourself. You are looking for the points that make a good or
bad rental property.
As you inspect each of these houses, try to learn something
about its "tenant appeal." Ask the person in charge of renting it
about the previous tenants. How long did they stay? Why did
Unit 8A, Page 12
they leave? Find out how long the house has been vacant, or
when it will be available for a new occupant.
Make your own observations as well. Is the house clean and
attractive? Is the yard well kept? Is the neighborhood
convenient and desirable? How does it compare to the other
rentals you've seen?
Find out how firm the landlord is about the rent and deposit.
You might hint that you've seen another house you like just as
well that rents for $25 or $50 less per month or that you'd be
able to move in if only you could pay the security deposit at a
later date.
If you find one or two landlords who are flexible about rents
or deposits, you may have run into some careless individuals
who are too anxious to fill a vacancy. However, if all the
landlords you contact are willing to bargain over the amount of
rent they will accept or how soon you must pay deposits, you
can be pretty sure that the rental market is currently soft in the
area. Either there are a lot of vacancies in proportion to the
number of tenants in the market, or rents are just beginning to
rise but haven't been firmly established at a higher level yet.
By the end of your tour, you will have a good idea of what the
available rentals look like and what market rents are. Now
you'll be ready to decide what to do to make your unit
competitive--assuming, of course, that your rental doesn't need
extensive fix-up work.
Were all the houses you looked at sparkling clean and
neat? Then yours had better be, too. Were all the rooms in
every house freshly painted? If so, you had better plan on
painting. Was every yard neat and well-trimmed? Remember
that the yard is the first thing people see when they drive up,
and if it's not well cared for, it will make a poor impression
before they even see the inside of the house. In fact, an
unattractive yard will motivate some people to drive right on by
without even looking inside.
Unit 8A, Page 13
8.44 HOW TO OUTDO THE COMPETITION
You'll find that some landlords aren't too particular about how
an empty house looks. The way the previous tenants left it is the
way the new tenants will receive it. More professional landlords
may slap on a coat of paint and clean the carpets and perhaps
the stove. It doesn't take much to compete with these rentals,
and if the vacancy rate is fairly low, about all you will have to
do to keep up with the competition is to get your unit into as
good shape as the best of the others.
Where tenants have more choice, you will have to be more
imaginative. Find ways to make your house the most attractive
one on the market. For instance, you might set your rent at the
low end of the local range. You could plant some attractive
bushes in the yard or arrange a few houseplants inside. You
might install a nice shower curtain and matching window
curtains in the bathroom. If your house is short on storage
space, add a couple of standing cupboards in the bedrooms,
put up some shelves in the garage, or install a metal storage
shed in the backyard. You don't have to add a lot of expensive
amenities, but think up some little touches that add "home
appeal" to your rental and make it stand out from the
competition.
Make a simple checklist to go over as you finalize your
property prior to putting it on the market. List each of the areas
of the house and itemize the elements you need to look for. For
example: front hall: walls and floor; living room, dining area,
family room: walls, carpet/flooring, drapes; kitchen: walls,
floor, curtains, stove, oven, sink, cabinets, disposer; bathroom:
walls, floor, curtains, tub, toilet, sink; bedrooms: walls,
carpet/flooring, curtains, closets; garage/basement: walls,
floor, shelving; other items: fireplace, mirrors, windows;
outside: grass, shrubbery/trees.
This checklist, which you can call your "Move-In Ready
Checklist," will help you decide whether your house is ready to
put on the rental market. Remember, you may not have to do
all these things to be competitive in your individual market, but
Unit 8A, Page 14
the more of them you do, the better chance you have of renting
your house quickly and at a fair rent.
A word of warning: do not advertise your house for rent until
it's as ready as you can make it, unless your rental market is so
tight that people are lining up to move in before the previous
occupant has started packing. The first impression a house
makes is the most lasting one, and most people have very little
imagination. If they see a filthy carpet, marred walls, and a pile
of rubbish in the driveway, they simply will not be able to
visualize how the place will look when you're through cleaning
it. You can tell them about the beautiful shrubs, fresh carpet,
and tasteful color scheme the house will have by next week, but
their judgment of the house will be that it's too dirty and
neglected.
Sometimes, though, even your best efforts will be inadequate
for some tenant. Robert J. recently advertised a single-family
home for rent in a fairly new housing tract. A prospective tenant
phoned and asked detailed questions about the yard. Robert
replied, truthfully, that the house had been purchased
unlandscaped; grass and several young trees had since been
planted, but the trees were still small. When the tenant
inspected the house, she paid absolutely no attention to the
sparkling clean attractive interior of the house. Gazing wistfully
out the patio door, she sighed, "I guess not. Those little trees
just won't give any shade at all!"
As a practical matter, you should usually expect to repair
holes in plaster, paint any rooms that need it, clean the carpet
and the stove, mow the lawn, remove any weeds and rubbish
from the premises, and remove or replace any dying shrubs.
When you're doing these things, remember that you are not
doing this to make the sort of attractive home you want for
yourself. You want to appeal to the largest possible number of
prospective tenants, and their tastes are likely to vary widely.
That's why, if you plant anything, you should stick to
low-maintenance, hardy shrubs. Don't plant your favorite
flowering shrub, the one that requires constant feeding and
pruning, because the blossoms are so pretty for two weeks
every spring. Your tenants may have no interest in or time for
Unit 8A, Page 15
gardening.
DON'T GO TOO FAR, HOWEVER!
Don't get carried away with extravagant plans for redecorating
the interior of your rental. There's no telling what color your
tenants may like or think goes well with their furniture. If you
have the kind of flair that makes a purple wall and orange
carpet blend with scarlet drapes, the best place to display it is
in your own home. For a rental, off-white walls work well with
everything. In fact, a shade called Navaho White will actually
reflect a slight tone of whatever dominant color is in the room
with it.
Carpets, too, should be toned down if you have to replace
them. An unpatterned combination of dark gold and brown
looks good with practically anything and doesn't show dirt and
spills easily. If you supply drapes, white or gold go best with
this carpet and the off-white walls and make your rooms look
light and bright.
8.45 H0W TO GET OUT OF DOING THE WORK
We've been saying that "you" will do all these things, but of
course you may choose to hire a handyman to do your painting,
yardwork, and repairs. This decision depends on the answers
to two questions. First, are you capable of doing the
work? Second, can you afford to hire someone else to do it?
If it's at all possible, the first couple of times you prepare a
house (or apartment) for rent do everything yourself, or at least
as much of it as you reasonably can. Naturally, it will save you
money, but doing this job yourself has another advantage. It
gives you hands-on experience with the work that needs to be
done--how difficult it is (not very) and how long it takes. You
can't get the experience any other way. Then in the future, when
you have other people do the work for you, it will be easy for
Unit 8A, Page 16
you to tell when one of your workers isn't doing the job the
way it should be done, or better yet, when someone is doing an
outstanding job for you.
In time, of course, you will probably hire someone else to
prepare your houses for rent. When that time comes, there are
a few simple guidelines that will make hiring the right person
easier. First of all, look for someone who can do a variety of
things. Professional painters and plumbers may do terrific work,
but they're specialists, and they charge accordingly. All you
need is someone who can do the job about as well as you can,
or a little better, and who won't charge a small fortune. This
person should be able to paint, do simple carpentry, yardwork,
and clean.
Second, get references. Talk to at least three other people
who have employed this person recently, and ask detailed
questions. What sort of work did they have done? Was the
work done neatly, to their specifications, and on schedule? Did
they have any complaints or problems after the work was
finished? Would they hire this person again? If you can, try to
visit these people and look at the jobs your applicant did for
them.
Most importantly, look for someone who will be available on
reasonably short notice. Ideally, of course, you should have a
month's notice before any tenants leave and your house is on
the rental market again. But life isn't always ideal. There may be
times when emergencies force tenants to leave on short notice,
or someone might just disappear and you won't know they're
gone until you try to contact them to ask why rent is overdue.
At those times you need a handyman who can make time for
you with little or no notice, not someone whose schedule is
filled up three months in advance.
Once your house is in ideal shape to show, you want to keep
it that way until your new tenants have moved in. Someone
should water the grass and plants regularly, pull weeds, and
mow the lawn. This would be a good job for a teenager. If you
don't have one of your own, see if you can find one in the
neighborhood of your rental. This would be a good security
Unit 8A, Page 17
measure as well, since you could pay the youngster a few
dollars a week to keep an eye on your house and pick up litter
as well as keep the yard fresh. If there aren't any local
teenagers, ask if one of the adult neighbors would agree to
keep an eye on your property when you aren't around.
8.5 KEY 2: SETTING YOUR RENTAL POLICIES
When you have your house ready to show, you'll naturally
want to let people know about it. Your thoughts will turn to
advertising. But before you take out any ads, you'd better make
some decisions about your rental policies. This will make your
ads easier to write and will cut down on the time you might
otherwise waste showing the property to people you wouldn't
accept as tenants.
Lee and Nelda P. have been in the real estate investment
business for a long time, and they have learned from sad
experience the importance of setting rental policies before they
even try to attract tenants.
One of their first tenants was a nice older lady who had three
cats. Lee and Nelda had never set a policy on pets, and they
said nothing as the cats slowly began to multiply. She always
paid her rent on time and never caused any trouble. In fact, she
seemed almost like the perfect tenant.
After three years of renting form Lee and Nelda, however,
she had a stroke and had to be placed in a nursing home. Lee
and Nelda were appalled to discover that the lady had a grand
total of eighteen cats in the apartment. Cat hair was all over the
place; the draperies had been torn; and the whole place had a
disgusting smell.
It took considerable effort--all unreimbursed--for Lee and
Nelda to clean the place up. They could have saved themselves
a lot of trouble if they had a policy on pets, on regular
inspections of the apartment, and on a cleaning deposit.
Unit 8A, Page 18
8.51 Pets
One of the first major decisions you will have to make is
whether or not you will accept tenants with pets. Many
landlords simply refuse to consider renting to anyone who
keeps an animal of any kind, and they have good reasons for
this. Animals, especially cats and dogs, can damage carpets
and drapes, mess up yards, annoy neighbors, and often leave
unpleasant odors behind them.
You will be well within your rights to adopt and enforce a
strict "no pets" policy. On the other hand, will that policy be
competitive where you rent? Do other landlords allow their
tenants to have animals? If they do, and you don't, you may be
letting yourself in for longer vacancy periods. Remember, the
bread-and-butter house appeals to families, and most of the
children in these families are interested in keeping a family pet.
Many of them already have a well-loved cat or faithful dog and
won't consider moving somewhere where Rover or Fluffy isn't
welcome. Think carefully before you cut yourself from a large
pool of good potential tenants.
Another factor to consider is that if most landlords in your
area refuse to rent to pet owners, you could cut your vacancy
time considerably by allowing pets. An ad that says "cat or dog
ok" will draw all those people who have or want an animal and
can't rent from the other landlords.
Of course, if you allow pets, you'll have to take some
measures to protect yourself. In the first place, you should
always demand an extra deposit, and perhaps higher rent to
cover any damage the animals might do. The range of pet
deposits is usually between $100 and $200, although some
investors insist on an entire extra month's rent. You may also be
able to ask for $50 to $100 more on the monthly rent for each
pet.
Even with the extra income, it is wise to limit the size and
number of animals you'll accept. You could limit your tenants to
two cats or one dog, and the dog shouldn't be more than two
feet high at the shoulder or weigh more than forty pounds.
Unit 8A, Page 19
When you get into larger dogs, such as Great Danes and Saint
Bernards, there's really no way to limit the amount of damage
they can do to your property, especially the yard. Animals like
these need large areas to run in and can destroy an
average-sized yard in a week or two.
Finally, insist on seeing the animal or animals yourself. Write
the pet's name and description right into the rental agreement
and also include a clause that says something like this: "The
above-described animal(s) is/are the only animal(s) allowed to
reside on the above premises under the terms of this agreement.
No other animal(s) will be added to tenant's household or
substituted for any of the above-described animal(s), even
temporarily, without written permission from landlord."
This may seem a little stringent to those with no experience as
landlords, but consider this. Bonnie C. wrote an agreement that
simply allowed the tenants to keep a dog because they owned
a miniature dachshund when they moved in. But one month
later she learned that the dachshund has been replaced with a
huge Doberman! The tenant was eager to explain: "The kids
were just heartbroken when Schatzie got run over, so we let
them pick out a new pet, and they fell in love with Bruno."
Bonnie wanted to contest it, but she really didn't have any say.
Their agreement allowed them one dog, and they had one dog.
So, specify which animal, how many, and the size of each, and
then make it plain that your permission must be obtained before
any substitutions or additions are made to the menagerie.
8.52 Children
As we've said many times in this unit, we prefer
bread-and-butter homes because they appeal to families with
children. These are the tenants who are most stable and most
prepared to settle down in a house and stay on for years.
But perhaps your situation is different. You may be buying
houses somewhere like St. Petersburg, Florida, and have
property in an area where all the residents are elderly retired
people. You don't want to rent to someone whose noisy brood
will upset everyone on the street. Or perhaps you have an
Unit 8A, Page 20
apartment building, and you know no one likes to live
downstairs from the thudding of little feet.
You'll have to be careful, and be sure to check with your
attorney. Because of the housing shortage, many communities
and whole states now have legislation or court decisions that
make it difficult to refuse to rent to families with children. You
may have no choice but to accept children, whether you
approve of them or not.
Children needn't be a problem in your rental, though. Most
children don't cause that much damage. As long as you have a
strong rental agreement and a sizable deposit, the children's
parents will be responsible for any damage that exceeds
reasonable wear and tear.
8.53 Number of Occupants
This is one area in which you can keep some control over
whom you rent to. It's best to allow no more than two tenants
for each bedroom in the house, and insist that they must be in
some sort of familial relationship to one another. This allows a
normal family to occupy your house and, at the same time,
prevents them from renting out a room to someone you don't
even know.
The limit of two tenants per bedroom is not an arbitrary
guideline picked out of a hat. If you allow more than this, you'll
find that they will put more wear and tear on your property than
it can sustain. The appliances, carpet, doors, and yard get
heavier wear than they were designed to withstand when large
numbers of people are using them.
About three years ago, John L. noticed that a house next to
one of his properties was beginning to deteriorate much more
rapidly than any other house on the street. When John asked
his tenants if there was a problem next door to them, they
explained that the house had recently been rented to a family
with twelve children, ranging in age from about one to eighteen
years.
Unit 8A, Page 21
The tenants said they believed the house had four bedrooms
and two bathrooms, and while the people living there were
nice, quiet and hardworking, they just didn't seem to able to
keep any grass growing with so many children and their friends
running across the yard. In addition, teenage boys were
constantly working on cars in the driveway and side yards.
There were never fewer than five cars on the property, and
often more, since the parents, the oldest daughter, and two or
three of the boys each had one.
Recently, John's tenants informed him that the large family had
moved out of the house next door to them, and the house was
going to be put up for sale. Thinking he might be able to get a
good price on it, John went over to take a look at it.
What he saw immediately changed his mind about any
possibility of buying the house. A crew of four men was already
working there, and they estimated that it would take them about
a month to put the house in salable condition. Ceilings and walls
had to be replastered, floors had to be recarpeted and retiled,
and the kitchen cabinets had to be replaced. So much use, and
an occasional accident multiplied by fourteen people, had
practically worn out everything in the house.
In addition, the entire structure had to be painted inside and
out and new shrubs and grass had to be installed. The main
bathroom had to be entirely gutted and rebuilt. So many
showers had been taken in it that it never had a chance to dry
out. The cabinets had warped, the linoleum had peeled off the
floor, and the wallboard and ceiling were disintegrating from the
moisture. The flush mechanism on the toilet was worn out, and
the bathtub caulking was gone.
With the price of repairs and new landscaping, the owner of
that house would have had to sell it for top market price in
order to break even. Even when all the work had been done,
though, it still looked rough around the edges, and the owner
wasn't able to get his money out of it. Unfortunately, he had
been an amateur landlord whose rental agreement did not
require the tenants to maintain or repair the property. Even
more effective would have been to limit the number of people
Unit 8A, Page 22
he allowed to live in the house in the first place.
8.54 Utilities
The next thing you must decide is who will pay the utility bills.
It's always best to make your tenants responsible for these
since they will be the ones using the water, gas, and electricity.
Require that they subscribe to a garbage service, too, if this is
not included in property taxes or other bills.
As always, there are exceptions to the rule that tenants pay for
their own utilities. If you're dealing with a large vacancy factor,
it may be worth it to you to pay utilities in order to fill your
rental. Also, if you have a multi-unit property with only one gas
or water meter for the whole building, it is more difficult to
allocate these expenses against the various units. If you find
yourself in a situation where you must supply utilities when you
rent, look for a trade-off later on. For instance, you could tell
the tenants at the end of their first year with you that you won't
raise their rent if they will take over their own utility bills.
8.55 Discrimination
This has been said many times before, but it bears repeating
here. You cannot legally refuse to rent to anyone on the basis
of their sex, marital status, race, color, ethnic descent, or
religion. In addition, various parts of the country prohibit
discriminating on the basis of age, sexual preference, and
political activities. (This last is the result of a lawsuit brought by
a renter who was refused an apartment because he was a
leading activist in a tenants' drive to force rent control on local
apartment owners.)
You may refuse to rent to someone because he or she:
M 1. Does not have an income that meets the minimum
standards you have established. A safe standard is that the
prospective tenant's income must be at least three to four times
the amount of your rent.
M 2. Has a poor credit record. This includes being late with
rent payments at a previous residence.
Unit 8A, Page 23
M 3. Has a history of eviction from other rentals.
M 4. Does not have the money to pay the full deposit.
M 5. Appears unable to control children.
M 6. Lies when filling out the application.
M 7. Has a hobby or occupation that could be annoying or
dangerous to your property or the neighborhood at large. For
example, a rock musician who practices at home with full
amplifiers would normally be considered annoying to the
neighborhood. A heavy-equipment driver who owns his own
caterpillar and parks it at home could damage the pavement or
yard, while a house painter who stores paint and remover in the
garage could create a fire hazard.
M 8. Did not keep previous residence neat and clean.
M 9. Is personally unappealing to you. If you simply don't like
an individual, you can refuse to rent to that person as long as
your dislike doesn't extend to every member of a particular
minority group to which that person belongs. For example, you
can turn away a white male Anglo-Saxon Protestant if he rubs
you the wrong way, as long as you would rent to most other
white male Protestant Anglo-Saxons and your reason for
refusing him is not based in any way on his being a man, white
Anglo-Saxon, or Protestant. Check current laws.
M 10. Has not held a job steadily enough or for a long enough
time. How steadily or how long needs to be up to you, as long
as you establish a fair standard that is applied to every
applicant. It would be unreasonable, as well as foolish, to insist
that every tenant you accept must have worked at the same job
for the last ten years. But it is entirely acceptable to require
tenants to be able to show an unbroken employment record for
three years, unless they are just out of school. That doesn't
mean that it must be the same job, but simply that the person
has been working somewhere, without any long unexplained
gaps, during the past three years. You could also put some sort
of limit on the number of jobs, such as no more than three
Unit 8A, Page 24
employers in the last three years.
Once you have established all your rental policies, write them
down. Then show your list to your attorney to be sure you
haven't accidentally violated any local landlord-tenant
regulations. Make several copies of your policy list, and keep
them in a file folder because you will be using them later on
when you check out your applicants for your rental.
8.56 Set Your Rent
You're almost ready to advertise your rental now, but first you
must do one final and very important task. You must decide
how much rent to charge.
The survey you took of the competition should have given you
the most vital piece of information you need for this: the amount
for which similar properties are renting. Unless your house is
exceptional, or there is an acute housing shortage in your area,
you'll have a very hard time getting anyone to pay more rent for
your house than they would for other comparable rentals.
Even if there is a housing shortage and you believe you can
easily charge $50 to $100 more per month than other landlords
are getting, proceed with caution. Tenants may rent from you as
a last resort after they have checked out every other possibility,
which means you will have a longer vacancy period. Also,
when they do rent from you they may resent your higher rent so
much that they become bad tenants. Finally, the tenants who
rent from you as a last resort will probably be looking for a
cheaper place to live from the moment they move in. A high
tenant turnover rate coupled with longer vacancies can easily
wipe out any profit you expect from the higher rent, while
adding to the amount of time and work you have to put into
your property.
Houses in one Indiana town rent for $500 a month. Since
there are very few vacancies, Gus R. decided to charge $600 a
month for his rental. Prospective tenants typically looked at
every other house in town, considered renting an apartment or
staying with friends or relatives a while longer, and even
Unit 8A, Page 25
discussed moving to another town where rents are lower or
salaries higher, before some of them became desperate enough
to accept Gus's terms. As soon as a family did move in, they
put their name on waiting lists with Frank Z. and Sally D., who
both charge $500 rent for the properties they own.
At the same time, the tenants started thinking that if they had
to pay such a high rent, they'd really be better off buying a
house, and they started exploring their chances for borrowing a
down payment from Grandpa. They began talking to everyone
they knew about their desire to buy a home so they could get
away from their rent-gouging landlord. They also bought a copy
of Nothing Down to find out how to buy real estate without
cash.
At the end of the year, each of Frank's and Sally's houses had
brought in $6,000. Each of them lost only one tenant, both
because of job transfers, and the vacancies were filled
immediately from the waiting lists, which meant no advertising
costs. The new tenants were so happy to find affordable
housing that they didn't mind cleaning up after the previous
tenants themselves.
In the same year, Gus had three families of tenants move out,
one into their own home and two to houses that rented for
$500. His rental stood empty for a total of six weeks. Each
time it was vacant, Gus experienced a longer vacancy period
caused by his higher rents. He also had to thoroughly clean the
house each time, shampooing carpets and reseeding the lawn,
to make his house look attractive enough to be worth the higher
rent. Once he had to hire someone to do all the cleaning and
yard work because he was too busy to do it himself.
Gus took in $6,300 for his house that year because of his
higher rents. But his advertising costs and his cleaning and
maintenance costs came to $400. On top of that, Gus had to
spend time showing the house, doing some of the cleaning
himself, and interviewing and checking out tenants.
Conservatively, he put in fifty to sixty hours on these chores
during the year. That's a lot of work to do when you're losing
Unit 8A, Page 26
money. Gus could probably have found and purchased at least
one more rental in those hours. If he had used that time to buy a
$60,000 house at 10% below market value, he would have
increased his net worth by $6,000 in the hours he used to lose
$400.
8.57 AN ASIDE: CONSIDER THE LEASE OPTION
If you want to increase the amount of income you receive
from your rental property, a better way to do it is to offer the
house on a lease option. Briefly, here's how it works: tenants
lease a house with an option to buy it under specified terms.
They pay a higher rent, with all or most of the excess being
credited toward their down payment. For instance, if market
rents are $500, your tenants might pay $700, and $200 a
month is credited toward their down payment. At the end of the
option period, the tenants have three choices. They can renew
the option; they can pay a lump sum to make up the rest of their
down payment, thereby buying the house from you; or they can
move out so that you can put new lease-option tenants into the
house. Whichever choice they make, the extra $200 a month
they paid in rent belongs to you, and you do not have to give it
up.
There are many other ins and outs of lease options, and you
should study the principles carefully and discuss them with your
own attorney before you rent property on these terms. But it is
not a difficult subject to understand or to explain to tenants, and
many investors rely on this techniques to bring them higher
rents. Oddly enough, very few tenants ever actually exercise
their options and buy the houses they lease on these terms.
That's unfortunate for them, since it is such a simple and
relatively inexpensive means of buying a first home. However,
that shouldn't stop you from offering them the opportunity, and
you will receive a better return on your investment property by
doing so.
8.58 Don't Forget the Deposits
Unit 8A, Page 27
Whether or not you use a lease option, you still have to decide
how much rent to charge. If your property is in good shape and
there isn't a large local vacancy problem, there's no reason why
you can't set your rent at or near the top of the range for similar
houses. You should also plan on charging a deposit that's at
least equal to an additional month's rent. That means before
people can move in they have to pay you an amount equal to
two months' rent.
The deposit is commonly called "first and last months' rent in
advance," but it isn't. The second monthly rental amount is a
security deposit to protect you against loss and damages to
your property. Think of it as a damage deposit, and refer to it
that way. If you and your tenants get into the habit of calling the
deposit the last month's rent, your tenants will assume they
don't have to pay rent for their last month in your house. You
may think the same way. Then when they do move out, you'll
end up paying for any damages out of your own pocket and
trying to collect from people who feel no further obligation
toward you or your property. Also, in some parts of the
country, if a deposit is called "last month's rent" or a rent
deposit, that's all it can be used for.
Recently, in order to avoid this sort of confusion, a number of
investors have started charging two deposits. One, equal to a
month's rent, is the rent deposit and may be used to make the
tenant's final payment. A second, separate damage deposit is
charged to cover any damages caused by tenants or excessive
cleaning needed after they leave. This usually ranges from
one-half to one month's rent.
In addition, you will have to decide how much extra you want
to charge for pet rent and deposits if any. This is usually
between one-tenth and one-fifth extra on the monthly rent and
anywhere from $100 to a full month's rent for the damage
deposit. Deciding what figure to set this at will depend to a
large extent on what practices are common in your rental
market. If very few landlords rent to pet owners, you can go
for the higher figures. But if most rental houses accept animals,
you may have to settle for a lower amount from your renters, or
nothing extra at all.
Unit 8A, Page 28
8.6 KEY 3: ADVERTISING
Wallace O. bought a nice duplex in a growing area of town.
The real estate agent was extremely enthusiastic about the
property. "You'll be able to rent this place out immediately," the
agent said. "People will be knocking down your door to get a
chance to live here."
Wallace took the agent's word for it. He placed a small "For
Rent" sign in the window of each side of the duplex and sat
back and waited. Nothing happened. A week went by, then
two, then three. Wallace got worried, then almost sick.
Finally, in the fourth week, Wallace got a call. He was
ecstatic. "I'm calling about the duplex you have for rent," a
voice said on the phone. "Would you be willing to let my family
of thirteen live in both sides for the price of one side?"
Wallace was almost tempted. After all, he hadn't received any
better offers. But he knew such an arrangement would ruin him
and probably ruin the duplex. Instead, he did what he should
have done from the beginning: He began to aggressively
advertise.
Once you decide on your rental policies and your rental
amount you can confidently advertise your property. Investors
who own rental property in tight rental markets may not need a
great deal of help in attracting tenants, but advertising
techniques are helpful to know, since real estate markets do
change. And who wants to get caught in the trap Wallace was
in? The following approaches have proven effective at keeping
vacancies filled.
8.61 Newspaper
Probably the most obvious place to advertise is in the
classified section of the local daily paper. It's simple. All you
have to do is call a phone number that's normally listed right at
the beginning of the section, and a helpful clerk will guide you in
wording your ad and deciding how many days it should run.
Unit 8A, Page 29
Most people try to keep their ad as short as possible and run
it the minimum number of days in order to hold down costs. If
you share that concern, simply list the main features of the
house and your rental policies: "3 bdrm., 1-1/2 ba., fence, gar.,
nr. sch., shop, sm. pet ok, $500 + dep., 555-0000 after 6
p.m." The best days to advertise are Fridays, Saturdays, and
Sundays, since most families look for homes during the
weekends.
However, doing what everyone else does could be a false
economy. Prospective tenants quickly learn that traipsing from
one rental to another looking for a place to live can be pretty
tiring. If your ad is one of a long list of similar notices, many
prospects will give up before they even see it. You want people
to be motivated to see your house first and get a deposit down
before someone else can snatch it up. To attract attention,
consider running a more creative ad, and let it run all week so
that you can pick up those people who have days off in the
middle of the week.
For a short course in creative ad writing, study the "Homes for
Sale" section of the classifieds, and see what real estate brokers
do to attract buyers to their offices. Some of those ads sound
like everyone's dream home, and Realtors wouldn't spend time
writing them and money running them if they didn't work. You
probably won't want to compose anything as elaborate and
flowery as some of those ads get, but reading them will give
you an idea of what appeals to people in a home.
When you sit down to write your own advertisement, focus on
the desirable points of your property. Is your suburb near a
large city and your house close to public transportation? "Easy
commute" might attract tenants. Are there schools, recreational
facilities, and various children's activities within walking
distance? "No more carpools" could appeal to harried parents.
A house out on the edge of town could offer "a breath of
country living," one set back from the road behind trees
features "peace and privacy," and one in the middle of a
bustling development might be in "friendly neighborhood
surroundings.
"
Unit 8A, Page 30
Don't make misleading statements. They'll be disproved as
soon as anyone sees your rental anyway. But there's certainly
no harm in wording your ad so that it stands out from the
crowd and entices people to come to you before they end their
search.
8.62 Signs
Many landlords like to put a "Home for Rent" sign right on the
property so that people driving through the neighborhood will
see it. This may or may not attract renters and could cause
trouble. If the house is empty, such a sign can be an open
invitation to vandals and transients in some communities.
Besides, people looking for a home are not very likely to
cruise the streets trying to spot a house with a sign on it. You
may attract an occasional family checking out a neighborhood
to see if they would like to live there, but that doesn't happen
very often. However, a small sign costs very little, so if your
rental is in an extremely low-crime area, you may want to try it.
You might just be lucky and find a very good tenant that way.
Signs work better for apartment houses, especially those with
resident managers. Very often apartment hunters will go from
building to building looking for vacancies.
8.63 Word of Mouth
More effective than a sign is telling the people who live on the
street that you're looking for a new tenant. They may have
friends, relatives, or co-workers who would like to live nearby.
DeeAnn J. hired a neighbor's teenager to mow the lawn or
shovel the walks and keep an eye on the place while her rental
was vacant. This gave her a natural opening to speak to several
of the neighbors. She simply knocked on the doors and said,
"Hello, my name is DeeAnn Johnson, and I own the house at
1234 Sunny Lane. The Smith's son Bobby is looking after the
place for me until I find new tenants. I'd appreciate it, if you
notice anything wrong over there, if you'd tell Bobby about it.
Or you could call me; here's my card. Incidentally, if you know
Unit 8A, Page 31
someone who might like to rent a home on this street, be sure
and have them get in touch with me."
Investors who like this technique but are too busy to walk up
and down talking to the neighbors every time they have a
vacancy use a form letter or postcard to accomplish the same
ends. You can get directories that list everyone's name by their
address from the telephone company. Or consult directories in
the library, copy out the information you want, and make up
mailing lists for the streets your houses are on. If you're too
busy even for that and don't have anyone to help you, simply
address your notes to "Resident," and begin them with a general
salutation such as "Dear Neighbor." Then simply repeat much
the same information as above, altering the form slightly. Your
letter might look like this:
Dear Neighbor:
My name is DeeAnn Johnson and I own the house near you at
1234 Sunny Lane. This letter is to inform you that my property
is vacant and being cared for by Bobby Smith at 1236 Sunny
Lane until I find new tenants. If you notice anything wrong with
my empty property, I would appreciate it if you would either
tell Bobby or contact me directly. My telephone number is on
the enclosed card, and you may reach me at any time between
9 a.m. and 10 p.m. If you know of anyone who would be
interested in renting this property from me, please don't hesitate
to give them my number. Thank you for your time and attention.
Sincerely,
DeeAnn Johnson
Of course, some investors don't want the people who live
near their rentals to know who owns the property. These
people don't want angry neighbors calling them about their
tenant's barking dogs, loud parties, or unruly children. If you
feel this way, don't use this technique.
Unit 8A, Page 32
However, the landlord who cares about his property and his
reputation in the community should be in touch with the people
who live near his rentals. These people can be valuable links in
your information network. Those who own their own homes,
especially, have an interest in keeping their neighborhood
attractive, and so should you, since this directly affects the
desirability and value of your own property. Such people will
usually let you know if your tenants are neglecting the lawn,
letting their dog tunnel under the fence, or keeping a motorcycle
in the living room. You may have to fend off a few calls from
the local busybody who complains every time a child's ball
lands in her prize tulips; on the other hand, if you treat people
like this calmly and courteously, they are also the first to let you
know about tenants who load all their belongings into a truck
and disappear in the middle of the night.
Whether or not you choose to include the people who live
near your rental in your information network, don't hesitate to
inform the rest of the members of the network when you're
looking for new tenants. Tell everyone you meet in the course
of the day. You never know when your supermarket checker
or florist's assistant is looking for a house or knows someone
else who is. Don't forget, too, to tell the tenants of your other
properties that you have a vacancy. If you're the kind of fair
landlord most tenants appreciate, they won't hesitate to tell their
own contacts when their nice landlord has another of his or her
neat little properties available.
8.64 Property Rental Firms
In most large urban areas, and some smaller cities, many
people now look for rental homes through property rental firms.
These usually have names like "Homefinders" or "Rental
Assistance Agency" and are listed in the Yellow Pages of the
telephone book under "Real Estate Rental Services.
"
These companies generally make their money by a
subscription fee they charge to prospective tenants who use
their services. People can go into their offices and buy a list of
all the available properties handled by the service. The cost
Unit 8A, Page 33
ranges from $5 or $10 for a week's listings to $25 or $50 for a
three-month subscription. These rates and terms vary from one
part of the country to another and can go even higher in some
places like New York City, where finding a decent rental can
be extremely difficult and expensive. However, the bottom line
to you, the investor, is that it costs you nothing, or at most a
very minimal fee, to have your property listed with these
services.
When you advertise through a property rental firm you simply
supply them with the information on your vacancy, much as you
do when running a classified ad in the newspaper. Since it costs
nothing to place the listing, however, you can give a much more
complete description of your property.
You may have to go back to your studies of creative ad
composition to write a description that stands out, but this
shouldn't be too difficult. Most of your competition will merely
state facts about their properties, without trying to appeal to the
applicants' imaginations. Where they go into details about their
all-electric kitchen with built-in microwave or state that there is
shop space in the garage, you simply supply a more colorful
description, such as "Labor-saving kitchen is working mother's
dream" or "Handyman's delight hobby space." Rather than
merely listing physical facts, such phrases appeal to emotional
needs which is what all good advertising does.
8.65 Bulletin Boards
Most communities have bulletin boards where people can
post public notices. If you've never noticed any, check around
in supermarkets, laundromats, bowling alleys, or almost any
place where people go regularly to spend some time. Use your
imagination.
For instance, most senior citizens' centers have notice boards.
You might think your house is too big for one or two retired
people, but you could be wrong. A lot of older people today
are joining in groups to share housing so that they can save
money, and three widows or widowers who are having trouble
meeting the rent for three separate apartments could turn out to
Unit 8A, Page 34
be your best tenants. Also, remember this: Even if none of the
senior citizens want to rent your property, some of them may
have children, grandchildren, nieces, nephews, or friends who
could become your tenants.
When you advertise on bulletin boards, some places will
restrict you to one card about the size of a 3" x 5" file card. On
that you can state as much information as your card will hold.
Remember, though, that people often browse the bulletin board
in a hurry, especially if they're in the middle of their weekly
grocery shopping. Rather than fill your card with small writing
or typing that describes your property in detail, use something
more eye-catching, particularly if the board is crowded with
cards and messages. You might try printing the words "House
for Rent" in large letters with a colored marking pen. (Red is
usually a good attention-getting color, unless half the cards on
the board are written in red. If they are, try purple, orange, or
some other bright color that stands out.) Under that, you might
put a minimum of information in much smaller letters, such as,
"Spacious 3 bdrm., beautiful yard, $500, Gorham School
District."
A technique that makes bulletin board cards much more
effective enables people to simply tear off your phone number.
Make a series of cuts up from the bottom of the card, or paste
on a strip of paper that has been cut in this way. Then write
your phone number between each of the cuts. This way, if
someone is interested but has no pen handy, he or she can still
take your number. It also decreases the chance that someone
will take the whole card which would prevent others from
seeing it.
8.66 Chamber of Commerce
Many people check with the chamber of commerce as soon
as they move into town, or even before. See if you can't leave a
notice of your rental there. If you own several properties, ask
to have your business cards or a small flyer included in the
information packet distributed to people who inquire for
information about your town.
Unit 8A, Page 35
8.67 Military Housing Offices
If you live near a military installation of any size, you can list
your vacancy with the base housing referral officer. You'll find
the number for the base in the U. S. government section of your
phone book, listed alphabetically by branch or service, and
there may be a separate listing for housing. If not, simply call
the main base number and ask for the housing office.
When you reach the housing referral office, explain that you
are a landlord with a vacant house you would like to rent.
Someone will take your name and address and explain the
procedures they use. Then the information on your rental will be
given to all service members and civilian base personnel who
ask for information about rentals in the community.
When you list your rental with military housing offices, they
have no jurisdiction over the amount of rent you charge or any
other normal tenant policies you establish. They do require you
to sign a statement of nondiscrimination, and failure to comply
with this policy will mean that your rentals will no longer be
listed with that office.
The military also requires its personnel to be able to leave
housing on two weeks' notice in the event of a military transfer.
This doesn't have to be a drawback. After all, it's better to have
a tenant who can leave with two weeks' notice than it is to have
a vacant rental property.
8.68 Real Estate Offices
Some real estate offices handle both sale and rental property.
If your agent works in an office that does this, you may be able
to have his office list your property and show it to prospective
tenants. However, they will probably charge you a management
fee, or at least a one-time commission, of up to 10% of a
month's rent for this service.
Most real estate offices, remember, are in business to sell
property, not to encourage house hunters to rent. When they
do handle rental property, they usually do so only as a favor to
Unit 8A, Page 36
large clients or as a service to buyers who need a temporary
home while they are looking for a house to buy and waiting for
the sale to close. Many of the rentals they do handle belong to
the broker who owns the office.
If you're exploring every possible way to rent out your
property, though, it never hurts to ask real estate offices to help
you. Be prepared, however, for the agent who tries to talk you
into putting the property up for sale instead of renting it out.
This agent may simply be looking for a listing or may be in the
market for a piece of investment for himself. You should also
be aware that when prospective tenants walk into a real estate
office looking for a rental, some agents will try to convince them
to buy a house rather than renting yours. The result can be that
three months after your tenants settle in, they inform you that
the nice agent who rented them the house has now found them
a place they can afford to buy.
8.7 KEY 4: SHOWING THE PROPERTY
Once you've settled on the ways to advertise, you have to be
prepared to show your property to prospective tenants. The
first time you do this you're likely to be a little anxious. Your
first worry will probably be wondering if anyone will respond to
your advertising, and your second one is apt to be how many
times you'll have to show the house before you find a tenant
and can start collecting some rent.
Don't let these worries get out of hand. If you've followed our
advice and bought, prepared, and advertised your rental
correctly, you will get results. The most important factor now is
not to get too impatient.
Juan R. was the proud new owner of a three-bedroom
investment home in a large city in the Northwest. He did some
minor cosmetic repairs, set his rental policies, and advertised in
the weekend edition of the paper for tenants. His telephone
started ringing almost immediately. "Tell me more about your
rental home. When can I come see it?"
Unit 8A, Page 37
Juan set up appointment after appointment. He was
disappointed when some of the people didn't come, but he
gave his best sales pitch when he was able to take people
through. "Take a look at this living room! It's much larger than
normal--plenty of room to entertain guests in here. And the
kitchen--look at all the counter space; and the appliances are
nearly new. Here in the first bedroom..."
He went on and on, pointing out all the best features of the
home. But the people's response was always the same: "We'll
get back to you," or "I'll tell you what--we'll take it if you drop
the price by $100." Juan knew he was asking a fair price. After
showing the house to eight people in two days, Juan began to
get discouraged.
Then a more experienced friend took him aside and gave him
some tips. "Maybe you should play a little more hard to get,"
the friend said. "Don't follow them around selling the house to
them. Let the house sell itself."
That sounded like good advice. But the friend wasn't through.
"One other thing: You're a busy man. You're going to wear
yourself out running back and forth to
your rental. Just set a two-hour block of time and have all the
prospects meet you then."
Juan took his friend's advice. He was still friendly and
courteous, but he didn't push the home so much. He
encouraged all his prospective tenants to meet him in the same
evening. He found that was a much better use of his time--and
it created a little competition among the prospects. With his
new approach, he had the home rented out in less than a week.
Impatient rental property owners like Juan are apt to make
mistakes. They push the house so eagerly that renters looking it
over begin to wonder if something is wrong with the house. Or
worse yet, prospects decide that if the landlord is so anxious to
get tenants, they can manipulate the situation to their own
advantage.
Unit 8A, Page 38
8.71 Take Control from the Beginning
This is where your own ambition can be your worst enemy.
Of course you want to start that rental income flowing, and
naturally you want to finish working on this house so you can
concentrate on buying the next one. But this is the time to
remain cool, calm, and patient. Your first contact with future
tenants will set the tone for your entire relationship with them.
You must get off to the right start if you want to avoid
unpleasant, and possibly costly, developments in the future.
This is not to say that you should be rude, overbearing, or
nasty. Nothing is gained by alienating people before they even
move in, no matter how tight the rental market is. But you do
want to establish from the beginning that you are a businesslike
person and that you manage your rentals as a business. The
best way to do this is to maintain a professional image for
yourself and your rental business from the very beginning. You
want your tenants to realize during their initial contact with you
that you are fair but firm in all ways.
One way to establish this is to make it plain that you, not your
tenants, control your time. When you compose your
advertisement, don't include your home or office address or the
address of the property. Instead, give your telephone number
so that people will have to make an appointment to look at
your house.
When you give your telephone number, that doesn't mean that
you have to sit by the phone twenty-four hours a day. Instead,
you can either state the hours during which calls will be taken
when you write your ad, or you can use an answering machine.
Many investors get excellent results with a tape that says
something like this: "Hello, this is Paul Stimpson. If you're
calling about the house for rent, please leave your name and a
number where I can reach you after five o'clock. I will answer
your questions and set up an appointment if you wish to see it."
If you do answer the calls yourself, you should still set up
appointments. Even if you have nothing else to do all day, it's
best to give the impression that you are busy and have to
Unit 8A, Page 39
schedule your time carefully. This keeps your tenants from
expecting you to be on call at all times. If they think you're a
very busy person who handles many more important things than
one rental house, they may think twice about calling you for
minor problems that they can take care of themselves.
Another approach is to schedule a time when you will be at
the property and will show it to everyone who comes. This
technique was first popularized by author and investor Dave
Glubetich, who calls it a "rental open house." In this case, your
answering machine message could say something like: "Hello,
this is Sally Stringham. If you're interested in the house I have
for rent, I will show it to anyone who arrives between 2 and 5
p.m. on Saturday, March 3rd. The house is located at 905
Homewood Drive, which is six blocks east of the stoplight at
Third Street and Midtown Avenue. Please leave your name and
the time of your call if you plan to stop by."
This method usually works best when there is a fair amount of
competition for rentals. Asking people to give their names is
simply a way to weed out the less serious prospects. Those
who leave a message at least intend to look at your house at the
time they make the call, and the number of names will let you
know about how many applicants to expect. If no one leaves a
name, you will know not to waste your time sitting at the
property all afternoon.
8.72 Let Prospects Show Themselves Your House
If you can't get away but want people to be able to see your
house at their own convenience, you could allow them to pick
up a key at your office. When you do this, make sure the
people leave a cash deposit of at least $25. This deposit will be
refunded to them if they return the key within one hour. It's not
safe to allow strangers to handle your keys for any longer than
that.
People who do pay the deposit and go through the house on
their own must also give you their present address, driver's
license number, and car license. Verify their identification and
license number, and keep this information in the record file for
Unit 8A, Page 40
that house for at least two years or until the locks are changed.
If you don't have an office, or if you work someplace where
visitors can't come and go easily such as in a factory or a
classified area, do business from a booth in your favorite
restaurant. Tell applicants, "I'll be at Perry's Cafe from 1 to 2,
and you can pick up the key from me then if you can have it
back to me before I leave. Just ask the hostess; she'll know
where I am." Then, of course, be sure the hostess knows who
you are and that you expect someone to ask for you. If your
prospective tenants can't make it back before your lunch hour
is up, have them leave the key with the restaurant hostess or
manager who can hold it for you until the next day. (Naturally,
the person who does favors like this for you should be paid
accordingly, in tips, with an occasional gift, or with increased
business from you and your friends, whichever is appropriate.)
Another approach that is sometimes used by investors without
an office is to name an important, well-known building in the
area. "Do you know where the Metropolitan Bank Building is?"
you might ask. "I'll meet you in the lobby at 3 o'clock." It is then
your choice whether you want to follow the applicants in your
own car and show the house personally or give them the key
and wait around the office building until they return.
8.73 Enlist a Helpful Hand
Finally, you can ask a neighbor who lives near your rental to
show the property for you. Naturally, you would want
to screen people yourself before telling them where the key is,
in order to avoid wasting your helpful neighbor's time. This
neighbor might be paid $50 or so when the house is rented,
depending on how much time he or she spends and how many
people look at the house before it is finally rented. It would be
better to pay this way than by the hour so that the person is
motivated to help you rent out your property and receive
payment as soon as possible.
8.8 KEY 5: PRE-SCREENING YOUR APPLICANTS
As a novice investor, Tracy C. was delighted to show her
Unit 8A, Page 41
vacant rental to anyone who seemed to be the least bit
interested. She learned all too quickly that that approach can
eat up a lot of time without bringing many positive results--but
she wasn't sure what she could do instead.
Then she learned about pre-screening applicants over the
telephone. Instead of showing her rental home to anyone who
asked, she found out first if they were even qualified to rent it.
To help her, she developed a list of questions that enabled her
to eliminate a number of prospective tenants without even
meeting them. For instance, her rental had only two bedrooms,
and she wasn't interested in renting to a family with more than
four people. So she asked, right up front, "How many people
are in your family?" If the answer was more than four, she said,
"I'm sorry, but the house is so small that as a matter of policy I
simply can't allow more than four people to live in it."
As she went down her list, she gradually eliminated a number
of prospects, thus saving her the time and trouble of showing
the house to people who didn't qualify anyway.
All landlords can learn from Tracy's example: When you talk
to prospects on the telephone, do some pre-screening so that
you don't waste your time, and theirs, showing your property to
people who aren't really interested. Ask them the following
questions:
M 1. How many people are in your family?
M 2. Do you have any pets?
M 3. How many cars or other vehicles do you have?
(If there isn't enough parking for all their vehicles, you must
discuss this with them. Some tenants will park their recreational
vehicles on your lawn if there's no driveway curb space, and
some cities prohibit large RVs from parking in the street. They
may be able to store their RV in a special rental lot, but these
arrangements must be made and understood before they move
in.)
Unit 8A, Page 42
M 4. When do you want to move?
M 5. Where are you living now?
M 6. Why do you want to move from there?
M 7. How much are you currently paying for housing?
Write down these questions, plus any others you might want
to ask. Leave space beside each question and a space at the
bottom for your own notes. Then make several copies. Keep
these sheets, plus a pen or pencil, near your telephone so that
you can jot down people's answers and any thoughts you have
during your initial conversation with them. These are you prescreening
notes and will be a useful record later on.
The answers to these questions will give you some idea of the
kind of people you're talking to. They will probably have some
questions of their own, also, such as:
1. What schools are near the house?
2. How large are the rooms?
3. How big is the yard? Is it fenced?
4. What color are the walls, drapes, and carpets?
5. Is the house air-conditioned?
6. How far is it from the nearest shopping center?
7. How close is it to various large employers in the area, major
highways, or certain recreation facilities?
8. Is there much traffic on the street?
9. How much is the deposit?
10. Could we pay you part of the rent now and the rest later?
The answer to the last question, of course, must be no, unless
you have some very particular reason for changing your
policy. We'll cover this later on.
Once you've concluded this initial interview, you will know
whether you want these people to examine the house (or
apartment). Write down the results of your conversation on
your page of pre-screening notes and keep it for later
reference, whether or not you make an appointment to show
Unit 8A, Page 43
them the house. If one or the other of you has already decided
not to rent the house, note why and file the sheet alphabetically
in a folder for turndowns.
This may sound like a lot of trouble to go to for someone you
may never see again, but there are two major reasons to keep
these notes.
First, the people may have revealed some information to you
that means you will never want to rent to them, such as they
are being evicted from their current home for nonpayment of
rent and excessive damage. Two years later they may apply to
rent from you again, and by that time you probably won't
remember their name. But when you double-check your
turndown file, there they are.
Second, keep your notes for your own protection. Perhaps
these people tell you that they have six children, and you are
renting a two-bedroom house for which you've set a limit of
four people. You simply write down, "Size of family exceeds
limit for this house," clip it to a copy of your rental policies, and
put it away.
Three months later, when these people assume they can't find
a home because they're being racially discriminated against and
they sue every landlord they've talked to, you are called into
court. When it's your turn to testify, you have your written notes
to support your story that you never saw these people in
person and had no way to be sure of their race. Your
evidence shows that your decision not to rent to them was
guided by your written policy on the number of people your
rental can reasonably house.
8.9 CONTROLLING THE APPOINTMENT
If the pre-screening conversation leads to an appointment to
see the property, ask that everyone who will be living
there come along. Most people do this anyway, but in some
cases you may spend an hour showing the house to a husband
or wife, for instance, and then be told, "Well, I like it, but I can't
Unit 8A, Page 44
sign anything until my spouse looks at it. Can we come back
tomorrow night?"
To avoid this, explain at the beginning that you have to
schedule your time, so you would prefer that the whole family
see the house together at once. You don't want to entrust your
property to anyone you can't meet beforehand, anyway, and it's
a good idea to see how the entire family interacts when they're
together.
When you set appointments to show your property, you know
that some of the people you'll be meeting in the next few days
are going to become very important to you. Somewhere among
them is the family that will become your tenants, live in your
house, and pay the rent that will cover your mortgage
payments. You hope that this relationship will be smooth,
friendly, and profitable for all of you and that it will last for
several years. By doing your best to prepare clean, reasonably
priced living quarters for these people, you have already started
doing your part to meet this goal. The ways you can continue to
do your part and encourage them to do theirs, so that all of you
will enjoy your new association, will be covered in the next
sections.
8.10 HOW WELL HAVE YOU LEARNED FROM
PART A?
How well have you learned the information in Part A of this
unit? Test yourself by answering the following questions. Do not
skip this step--the best way to make sure you remember these
concepts is to repeat them in writing. If you are uncertain of a
particular answer, look back through this unit until you find it.
1. Why is property management important to your real estate
investment program?
2. From the following list choose the best tenant for your
property.
a. A young assistant manager in an international corporation,
Unit 8A, Page 45
married to a recently-graduated pediatrician, with no children.
b. A divorced landscape designer who has worked for seven
different firms in the last two years, was previously unemployed
for eighteen months, and is living with a rock singer. They have
four children, one of their own and three from previous
marriages.
c. An auto mechanic married to a nurse. He was discharged
from the army and moved to your town eight months ago. They
have three children and a cocker spaniel.
3. What makes yuppies problem tenants in the standard
bread-and-butter home?
4. Your house needs interior paint and new drapes. There is
avocado carpeting throughout and oak paneling on some of the
walls. What colors will you choose for paint and drapes?
Explain your answer.
a. Different colors for every room.
b. Off-white paint in all the rooms, beige drapes in the living
room, and beige window shades for the rest of the house.
c. Tell the tenants they can choose their own paint and window
coverings, and you will pay for it.
5. Your house is vacant, but you have to work overtime at your
regular job. How can you get the house ready to be rented out?
6. Is it a good idea to allow tenants to have pets? If you do,
what should you do to protect yourself financially?
7. Can you refuse to rent your property out to someone you
disapprove of? On what grounds?
8. Rents for houses similar to yours range from $450 a month
to $625. You decide your house should bring in at least $600 a
month. What do you do to make your house attractive at that
rent?
9. You decide that the top rent in your area is still not enough.
How can you bring in $150 a month more for your property?
10. When is a lease option a good idea?
Unit 8A, Page 46
11. Why are deposits so important?
12. Your house is attractive inside, but the front yard is nothing
but patchy grass with brown spots and bare places. Should you
plant a few shrubs and new grass seed or leave it as it is? Why?
13. You have been camping out in your rental for three days,
patching plaster and painting. The kitchen is full of sandwich
wrappers and empty soda cans, there are flakes of old plaster
all over the dirty carpets, the bathrooms are filthy, and all the
drapes are at the cleaners. Your sister comes by and says she
has some friends who would just love to see the house today.
Do you agree to show it to them? Why, or why not?
`
14. There are over two dozen newspaper ads for houses
similar to yours at about the same rent. What advertising
approaches can you use to increase your chances of attracting
the best tenants?
15. How can you show your property to prospective tenants
when you don't have time to do it personally?
16. Your neighbor thinks he knows someone who might want
to rent your house. Do you wait for him to bring you the
applicant or continue with your own efforts to find a
tenant? Explain your answer.
17. The first people who look at your property offer you cash
for the full rent and deposit and want to move in right away. It
is eight o'clock Friday night. Do you let them move in over the
weekend? Why, or why not?
18. People have been calling about your rental all week, you
are tired, and it's your daughter's birthday. What should you do
to take a rest and still get the place rented out?
19. A man calls and wants to see your house. While you are
talking to him on the phone, you learn that he has eight children
and his wife has left him. While he is at work, his older children
are in charge of the younger ones. What do you do?
Unit 8A, Page 47
20. What are some good questions to ask in pre-screening
your applicants?
21. Someone picks up the key to look at your house and
leaves you a $25 deposit. Three hours later they call and say
their wallet was stolen with your key in it. Do you refund their
deposit, or use the money to have the lock changed? Explain
your answer.
8.11 PUTTING PART A INTO PRACTICE
Now that you have studied the first part of this unit, do the
following assignments. They will help you put into practice the
concepts you have learned. You need not do all of these
assignments--but the more you practice in this setting, the better
you will be able to perform when it really matters with your
own property.
If you are already a seasoned property manager, you may wish
to use this material to polish your skills or add a few new tricks
of the trade.
1. Ask an expert. Talk to someone who used to own rental
property but sold it. Ask this person why he or she got out of
real estate investing. After your conversation, make notes for
yourself on how these problems could have been avoided by
better management techniques.
2. Scout the competition. Spend a weekend visiting houses for
rent as though you were looking for a place to live. After each
house you visit, jot down notes on the condition of the house,
things you liked and didn't like about it, and ways you think you
could make that house more attractive without spending a lot of
money. Include the amount of the rent and deposits, whether
pets are accepted, why the previous tenants moved, why you
would or would not want to rent this house, and whether you
think the person who owns it is a good landlord and why.
3. Create your own textbook. Clip advertisements from the
"Homes for Rent" and "Homes for Sale" classified sections of
Unit 8A, Page 48
your newspaper every day for a week. Separate these into ads
that appeal to you and ads that leave you cold. Then sit down
and study them. What do the good ads have in common?
What's wrong with the poor ads? Practice writing an ad that
you think would appeal to a large number of renters.
4. Look for bargains. Visit local paint and hardware stores.
Ask to speak to the managers, and explain that you are a real
estate investor who will regularly need paint, tools, and fixtures
for your rental properties. Find out if any of the stores will
arrange a special discount for you. Next, check with local dry
cleaners to see if they have a "landlord's discount" policy for
drape cleaning. While you're there, ask if they ever have
unclaimed drapes that they might sell cheaply.
5. Compare buying to renting. Survey firms that rent steam
cleaners for carpets, plumber's snakes, and any other large
tools you think you might need occasionally. Learn what the
charges are for these items, and find out what it would cost you
to buy the same equipment. Remember, some of these things
you will need only once every year or two in the beginning, but
be aware that at some point it may become more economical to
own them. Don't buy anything until you really need it.
6. Set policy. Write down the policies you will use for deciding
whether to accept or reject tenants. Be specific. For example,
don't say, "Avoid too many people," but rather, "No more than
two family members per bedroom."
7. File it. Create files for copies of your Move-in Ready
Checklist and Pre-screening Notes. Add any questions you
may want to ask to the Pre-screening Notes and find a place
for these near your telephone.
8. Make calls. Contact several rental services in your area.
Find out their requirement and success rates. Ask how much
time passes before the average home is rented out--and ask
how many rentals are pulled from the service without being
rented at all. Make notes of your findings and save them in your
file.
UNIT EIGHT
CREATIVE
MANAGEMENT
PART B
Unit 8B, Page 2
UNIT EIGHT
CREATIVE MANAGEMENT
PART B
A QUICK REVIEW
How important is effective property management?
You got some clues in Part A, but in case you haven't
captured the entire vision yet, let use restate that managing
your property effectively is one of the most critical things
you can do to reach your financial goals.
Why?
You can go out and exercise all the creative financing in
the world, and you can purchase a portfolio stuffed with the
most prime properties in town. But if you don't have excellent
Unit 8B, Page 3
tenants in those properties, writing out a check to you each
month, your efforts won't mean much.
Think about why you are interested in investing in real
estate. You want to make money, right? Will your prime
properties bring you money? Only if you have excellent tenants
in each one.
There is a real art--a real business--to selecting good
tenants. Being a landlord involves much more than simply
thrusting a set of keys upon the first person who comes along
expressing a interest in renting your property. Being an effective
manager means taking the time to require each prospective
tenant to fill out an application form--and it means taking the
time to verify the information. It means making an intelligent
decision about which person you are going to trust with your
hard-won investment property. We will tell you how to do all
that.
Being an effective manager means setting up a good
system for keeping track of your tenants and properties. You
won't make money if you shove your receipts and notes about
your properties into a shoe box that only sees the light of day
when your accountant arrives to do the taxes. Being an
effective manager means setting up an effective record-keeping
system that enables you to keep track of each property with
ease. We will show you how.
Being an effective manager means knowing how to
conduct your relationship with your tenants. You might be
surprised by the fact that you shouldn't be pals with your
tenants: keep your relationship on a business level. You must be
fair, but firm. Unit B tells you how.
And, as carefully as you choose tenants, the day will
certainly arrive when your tenants need to leave--either
because they have chosen to move on, or because you need to
get rid of some bad apples. It's not easy, and it's certainly not
pleasant but we give you the keys to a systematic, smooth
departure.
Unit 8B, Page 4
So stick with us. What you'll learn in the next few pages
will mean the difference between your unmeasured success and
dismal failure!
A FEW MORE TERMS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Deposit: A sum of money that you require from tenants
when they move in as a type of "insurance policy" on your
property. When tenants move out, you can use their deposit to
make necessary repairs on the property. You can also require
special deposits, such as a pet deposit, to take care of
necessary cleaning, or a key deposit to pay for changing the
locks on your property if the tenants fail to return your keys.
Eviction: The legal process by which you force
undesirable tenants to leave.
Inspection The process of visiting each property on a
regular basis to check on the condition of the property and to
find out how the tenants are maintaining the property. Many
landlords inspect the property once each month when they
collect rent from the tenants, others inspect once each year
when they deliver a notice of rent increase.
Key Deposit: A deposit you collect from tenants when
they move in to guarantee that they will return all keys to you
when they vacate the property; the key deposit should be
enough to cover the cost of changing all locks on the property.
Move-In Ready Checklist: A checklist that the landlord
and tenants use when the tenants are ready to move in to
record the exact condition of the property at the time the
tenants take possession. The Move-In Ready Checklist should
record any flaw or damage to any part of the property, inside
or out, and should be used when tenants move out to verify any
damage that has occurred during tenancy.
Rental Agreement: The legal document that the tenants
sign when the agree to rent the property.
Unit 8B, Page 5
Rental Application: An application form filled out by
prospective tenants; the Rental Application asks for credit
information, employment information, and information on past
residences. Each prospective tenant should complete a Rental
Application, and the landlord should use the completed Rental
Applications to verify information on prospective tenants and to
make a selection among the prospective tenants.
Rental Policy Checklist: A list of criteria the landlord
insists on meeting in any tenant; tenants who do not meet the
criteria on the Rental Policy Checklist are not considered for
tenancy.
Tenant Policies: A list of rules provided by the landlord
that govern the tenant's behavior while renting the property.
Verification Permission Forms: Forms a landlord uses to
get written information that verifies a prospective tenant's
employment and banking status.
MORE VITAL POINTS ABOUT MANAGING
PROPERTIES
As you read this unit, keep the following key points in
mind as principles to guide your actions in property
management.
M There is more to good property management than simply
attracting tenants to your rental properties.
M Intelligent landlords know that it is better to allow a house to
stand vacant for a few extra days than to rent to the wrong
people.
M Finding the right tenants is one of the most important aspects
of your investment program.
M The relationship you maintain with your renters throughout
their tenancy is as important as the care you exercise in
selecting them to begin with.
Unit 8B, Page 6
M The more care you take in setting tenant ground rules in the
beginning, the fewer problems you will have later on.
M The more you reduce agreements and understandings to
writing, the fewer disagreements and misunderstandings you will
have down the road.
M Careful record keeping that enables you to keep track of
facts and figures concerning your property and tenants is
essential to your success as a landlord.
HOW TO BE AN EFFECTIVE PROPERTY MANAGER
In Part A of Creative Management, you learned how to
prepare your house for tenants, how to set rental policies, how
to advertise your property, and how to prescreen tenants. The
next step? You will need to begin meeting people--and, at this
point, you have no idea whi of them will become your tenants
and what your relationship with them will be like.
When you think about it, that's a little like telling someone
that her blind date is on the way, and leaving her to wonder
how it will work out. The thoughts that race through the minds
of the person waiting for a blind date and the person waiting to
meet prospective tenants are often similar: What will he be
like? How will he look? Will I like him? Will he like me? Will
this develop into a long, enjoyable relationship? Or will it be a
brief, uncomfortable encounter that leads to nothing?
These are all reasonable questions, even though you're
looking for someone to enter into a business relationship with,
not a prospective mate. You want to know if prospective
tenants are stable and dependable, neat and clean, people you
will like, and people who will like your house well enough to
want to rent from you. You'll be wondering whether the next
prospects you meet will be the ones who will move into your
rental, pay their rent promptly, and take care of the property as
though it were their own.
Unit 8B, Page 7
Worse yet, you'll worry whether these people will seem
to be all right--but, after moving in, will break your doors and
windows, stain your carpets, knock holes in your plaster, ruin
your appliances, destroy your yard, refuse to pay their rent on
time, and then disappear in the middle of the night with all the
draperies and the new hot water heater you installed.
Naturally, you want to protect yourself and your
investment from the worst tenants and allow only the best ones
a chance to live in your rental. Just like the person who dates a
lot of people in search of that perfect match, you'll have to be
prepared to go through plenty of applicants, and you'll need to
be prepared to turn down all the marginal ones. Remember the
T-shirt slogan that was popular a few years ago: "You have to
kiss a lot of frogs before you find a handsome prince."
In Part A of Creative Management, we discussed various
ways to show your house to prospective renters. You can host
an open house, allow people to pick up a key and visit the
property alone, or enlist a helpful neighbor to show your rental
for you. But one of the best ways is to personally walk through
the house with your first few prospects. Why? Their comments
and attitudes will teach you a great deal about your individual
property and how people react to it. And you'll find out plenty
about them during the walk through, too!
Ready to begin? In Part A we gave you five keys to
property management:
1. Prepare the property
2. Set your rental policies
3. Advertise
4. Show the property
5. Prescreen your applicants
Throughout this rest of this unit, use the following additional
keys as a guide.
8.9 KEY 6: WATCH FOR THE LITTLE THINGS
Unit 8B, Page 8
When you visit the house with prospective tenants, don't
push. Be available for answering questions and maintain a
friendly, courteous attitude, but don't follow people around
chattering constantly. You might point out one or two of the
most attractive features of the property, but then drop back.
Your main job now is to watch and listen.
You can learn a lot by watching people. Peter H., an
investor with a dozen single-family homes, says he can tell a lot
about a potential tenant just by watching. "Once in a while I
make a mistake and bring in tenants who let me down," he
says, "but such mistakes are rare. By carefully watching the
people as they go through the home, I can learn much about the
stability of the family and about how they will treat the home
when I'm not around. I may have turned down some `golden'
tenants over the years--I'll never know. But by being careful I
can sleep much better knowing I have good tenants."
8.91 Is Anyone in Charge Here?
Are the children well-behaved, and do the parents control
them? Do all the members of the family seem at ease and happy
with one another, or is there tension and arguing? The way
children and parents interact can tell you volumes about how
they'll treat your property. Take notes--you may need them
later.
Kids who show up looking grubby and ragged, who kick
doors, who trample candy into the rugs, and who wipe their
noses on dirty sleeves aren't going to turn into spotless angels
on moving day. Parents who ignore what the children are doing
especially if the children are whining, probably don't pay much
attention to what the kids do most of the time. What does this
mean to you? It could mean that the kids are free to paint on
the carpet and set fire to the drapes while Dad watches football
and Mom talks on the phone.
Parents who don't notice what the kids are doing until it's
too late and who then make a big scene (complete with yelling
or even hitting) are probably putting on a show for your benefit.
Unit 8B, Page 9
Responsible people warn their children ahead of time that they
have to behave, and then keep a constant eye on them to keep
them from getting seriously out of hand.
8.92 Happy Families Make Stable Tenants
At the same time, parents who fight in front of you, blame
each other for the children's behavior, or try to convince you
that one or the other spouse is irresponsible or difficult to live
with may be signaling that their marriage is in trouble. This isn't
always true, of course, but if you're alert for warnings, you
could avoid that phone call six months later: "Charley/Charlene
walked out and left me with all the bills, and I just can't pay the
rent by the first."
By the same token, people who have been married for
eleven years and who act like a couple of high-school
sweethearts may be on the verge of a separation. New
surroundings (including a new house) are frequently part of one
last attempt to renew a relationship that has become difficult for
one or both partners.
This makes it sound as though you can't take anyone at
face value--and unfortunately, that's often true. You can't avoid
every bad situation on the strength of a single hour with a family
but if you learn to watch for danger signals with practice you
will soon be able to tell a surprising amount about people from
a brief encounter. With practice, too, you'll find that you
develop what almost amounts to an instinct about tenants. It
won't be infallible--even the most experienced landlords
sometimes misjudge rental applicants--but it will make your job
easier as you become accustomed to making these kinds of
judgments. That's one more reason to get some experience in
handling your properties yourself.
8.10 KEY 7: A GOOD APPLICATION IS A MUST
Unit 8B, Page 10
Jason B.'s rental had been vacant for nearly four weeks,
and he was getting increasingly anxious. It seemed as though his
every thought was focused on that negative cash flow--and
flow was the right word for what he expected to happen to his
cash if the house remained vacant.
When he finally snagged some good prospects through a
newspaper ad, he rushed over to show them the house. They
were delighted. "This is just what we've been looking for," they
said. "Only one problem. We've already moved out of our
other place; our stuff is just sitting in a truck. Could we give you
a cash advance and move in tonight?"
Jason should have seen the danger signals, but he was too
busy enjoying a different vision in his mind: a negative flow
sealed up, with a new positive flow coming in.
"Sure thing," he said. "We'll take care of your rental
application after you're all settled."
The family did indeed move in that night. They moved out
three months later, when Jason finally forced them out. In the
interim they had paid nothing.
Needless to say, Jason learned quickly in his personal
school of hard knocks.
When you go out to show your property, take the correct
forms with you. After looking through the house, examining the
yard, and checking out the availability of local schools, some
people will say to you, "I'm sorry, it's just not for us," or "There
are a couple of other places we'd like to look at before we
make a decision."
Others, though, will say "This is exactly what we want.
Can we give you our deposit now and move in over the
weekend?"
That's music to your ears! Finally--no more phone calls,
showing the house, worrying about negative cash flow. But hold
on. Not so fast. No matter how long the house has been
Unit 8B, Page 11
vacant, never let anyone move in until you first take their
application and check them out thoroughly.
That's hard to do when someone waves several hundred
dollar bills under your nose and says, "See, we have the first
and last month's rent and the deposit money. Monday is the
first of the month, and we have to be out of our other place
over the weekend." But don't be tempted. It may be the last
money you see from them!
8.10-1 Don't Be Too Anxious
Experienced landlords confirm that when an unchecked
applicant offers you cash to move in immediately, it may be the
last money you ever see from that tenant. They also caution you
to be suspicious of the applicant who pays on a Friday evening
and moves in over the weekend. By the time banks and
businesses reopen on Monday morning and you can make a
few calls to find out who is in your house, it may be too late. It's
much harder to evict people who have moved in that it would
have been to refuse to rent to them in the first place.
Experienced landlords have a saying: "Checking out the
application and turning down the worst applicants is the
cheapest eviction you'll ever do."
That's where the forms come in. When a prospective
tenant expresses interest in renting property, give him a copy of
your Rental Policy Checklist. Tell him that whoever finally rents
your property will have to meet the criteria you have listed.
Then ask him to fill out a Rental Application. Each adult who
will be living in the house needs to provide complete
information. If a couple has been married for less than two
years, ask for the wife's previous name, address, occupation,
and the name of her ex-husband if she has been previously
married.
Don't forget to get information about the children. You
deserve to know the names and ages of everyone who will be
living there. Make a point of asking about children from any
previous marriages who live with the other parent most of the
Unit 8B, Page 12
year but who spend summers with your tenant. Some landlords
ask for additional rent if anyone other than the approved
tenants stays in their rental for longer than fourteen days. You
can decide whether you want to do this, and your decision
should depend at least in part on how many children are
involved.
For example, if a couple has two children and then has
custody of one more for the summer months, it would probably
not be a problem in your three-bedroom house. But if they
already have four children living with them and then add five
more during the summer, you should receive additional rent
(maybe $50 per extra child) for each month they live in your
house. Your alternative, of course, is simply to not rent to these
people at all and to wait for a tenant whose family situation is
more suitable for your property.
While you are getting information on the children, you
should also make a point of stating that you must be notified of
any changes in family arrangements. After all, your decision that
not more than six people can live in your three-bedroom rental
was made on the basis of wear and tear on your property. If
your male tenant's ex-wife marries a man who doesn't like her
five children, you could suddenly find yourself with eleven
people living in a house suited only for six.
You can say no. You are the one who will eventually
have to replace carpets and appliances that receive more wear
and tear than they were designed for. If you do decide to rent
to a larger family, you certainly deserve to receive a larger
deposit and higher rent to cover the cost of increased damage
to your property. Work out an application form for your
prospects. (We have provided a model for your use at the end
of this unit.) Have them list, besides names and previous
addresses, the names and telephone numbers of their two
previous landlords (the last one is not enough, since he might be
willing to give a good reference just to get rid of them), the
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of current and
previous employers and supervising person (within the past
three years), and both character and financial references
(banks, credit unions, and other credit references, together with
Unit 8B, Page 13
account numbers). Have them list also their current income level
and the amount of that income available for paying rent. Have
them also sign a statement allowing you to access their credit
report and to verify bank balances and employment. A sample
of separate forms for this kind of verification is given below.
VERIFICATION PERMISSION FORMS
Date
I/We hereby instruct Name of bank to release
information about my/our account balances and/or payment
record to Lanny Lord for purposes of establishing my/our
financial position in connection with an application to rent Mr.
Lord's property at 123 Hometown Drive.
Checking Account #
Date account opened
Average balance No. of returned checks
(Signature)
(Signature)
Date
I hereby instruct Name of Company to release
information about my employment to Linda Lord for purposes
of establishing my job stability in connection with an application
to rent Ms. Lord's property at 999 Comfy Corners.
Date Hired Current position
Present salary Prospects for continued employment
(Signature)
8.10-2 Don't Take Anything for Granted
When the applicants have completed your application
form (plus the verification forms), ask to see some photo
identification, such as a driver's license or work badge, for each
adult. Check the license plate number of their car against the
number they have given you. You want to be sure these people
are who they say they are, and that they haven't filled out the
Unit 8B, Page 14
papers in the name of a friend or relative who has better credit
and references than they do.
Once you have the completed rental application, insist on
checking all the information out. If the applicants try to
persuade you to allow them to move in first, don't give in.
Explain courteously that you are a business person--and that
regardless of how much you may trust these people, it would
be poor business practice to allow them to take possession of
your property before you have verified their credit and
references.
Then tell them that there will be a $10 charge to cover the
cost of obtaining their credit report. You may want to refund it
if they are approved and rent the house. However, this is a
small fee to cover the time and expense of checking their
application, and if they are the sort of people you want as
tenants, they won't object to this minimal expense.
You can get some information by telephone when
checking bank references, but you may need proof of your
applicants' permission before employers and financial
institutions will tell you everything you need to know.
Tell the prospective tenants that you expect to have the
results of their application in three to five business days, and
that you will be in touch with them if their application is
approved. This statement is a time-saving technique that
relieves you of the responsibility of trying to reach every single
applicant, whether approved or not. Most of them will
probably call you anyway if they don't hear from you, but you
won't be obligated to try to contact half a dozen people who
are never home because they're out looking for a new place to
live.
8.11 KEY 8: VERIFY THE FACTS
Unit 8B, Page 15
John C. had the Wilson's fill out an application for
tenancy in his rental unit, then looked it over after they left.
Everything on the application seemed satisfactory. Mr. Wilson
had been employed at the same firm for nearly six years. Mrs.
Wilson was a nurse at the local hospital. They had three
children and no unreasonable debts. They had been stable in
their residence, too--four years in the same place. They were
moving now, they said, only because they wanted to be closer
to their kids' junior high school.
After looking over the application, John decided to let the
Wilson's rent his home. It was always a bother to verify the
facts on applications, and the Wilson's really did seem like nice
people. Besides, he was anxious to get someone into the home
immediately. Every day the place was vacant it was taking $18
out of his pocket. He called the Wilson's to tell them they were
accepted, but no one was home.
The next day he decided to make one quick check with a
friend at a bank, simply to confirm this feeling. The bank officer
called back with shocking news: "Avoid those people at all
costs!" he said. "Mr. Wilson had a business on the side, and it
went belly up not too long ago. They have judgments against
them that you wouldn't believe!"
John heaved a sign of relief that he had been unable to
contact the Wilson's the night before. And he vowed never
again to violate the rule that good businessmen in almost all
businesses use: verify the facts of someone's application before
giving him credit or trusting him with something particularly
valuable.
Verifying the information prospective tenants give you is
the single most important thing you can do in renting out your
property. In fact, it is one of the most vital steps in your
investment success. Never skip this step or give it less than
your best effort. Your rental house or apartment is an asset
worth thousands of dollars, countless hours of time, and
substantial amounts of energy. Are you going to hand over
something this valuable to the first strangers who come along,
and then hope they'll take care of it for you?
Unit 8B, Page 16
Of course you won't. That would be like a banker
handing the combination for the main vault to loan applicants.
Remember, your rental is your property. In order to
receive the profits you deserve from it, you must allow only
they best, most hones, most responsible people you can fine to
live in it and take care of it for you.
8.11-1 Turn to the Pro's
How? Most towns of any size at all have at least one
credit bureau. You can find these listed in the yellow Pages
under "Credit Reporting Services." These companies will verify
job histories and check credit references for you. However,
they do charge for this service. Many require an annual
membership, which may cost anywhere from $50 to $500 a
year. When you're a member of the credit bureau, you can
request credit reports on anyone. There is often an additional
fee for each report, usually ranging from $5 to $25, depending
on how extensive a report you need and how quickly you need
it.
If you'd rather not pay the bureau's required fee, consider
joining a local association for landlords or apartment owners.
They often hold a membership in a credit bureau and allow
members to use it for a small charge per application. You might
also ask some of the members of your investment team for
help; your accountant, real estate agent, banker, or title officer
might be willing to send your applications through their credit
bureau if you pay the charge for each report.
If none of these alternatives is available, you'll have to do
your own investigation. Most of it can be handled with a few
phone calls and a letter or two, and is really fairly simple.
8.11-2 How to Check Out a Tenant
The first step, of course, is to verify income. When you
call the employer, however, don't use the phone number
supplied by the applicant. Look in the telephone directory and
verify that there actually is a business listed with the name and
Unit 8B, Page 17
address the applicant has given you. Some people will claim
they work at companies that don't exist and will give you a
phone number of a friend who has promised to give your
applicant a good reference as a highly paid employee.
If the phone number listed is different from the one on
your form, your applicant may have given you a department
number instead of the central number. Call the central number
listed in the directory first; tell whoever answers that you'd like
to verify employment on one of their workers.
Some companies will tell you that they give this
information only by mail. Sometimes you can get around this by
saying, "Oh, that's too bad. He has applied to rent a home from
me, and said he'd like to move this weekend. If I tell you what
he put on his application, could you just tell me whether the
information is correct?" If this tactic doesn't work and you want
to avoid the delay of sending for verification, call your applicant
at work and ask him to speak to the personnel office. If the
company isn't too large, it will often be lenient about its "mailonly"
policy if the employee asks it to.
On the application, your prospect listed his or her job title
and a supervisor's name. You can call the main telephone
number and ask, "Can you connect me with (supervisor's
name) in (department)?" This will at least help you find out if the
person named as your applicant's supervisor works there.
However, you can't be sure that anything the supervisor tells
you is the absolute truth. Many people have friendly bosses
who will stretch the truth a little--or even a lot--to help the
people they work with qualify for homes and credit. Ask your
applicant to show you some recent payroll stubs.
Once you've verified the employment of all adult
applicants, you may want to check with previous employers if
the applicant has not been with his present employer very long.
Use the same technique.
Next, talk to the applicant's present landlord. This doesn't
have to be a long conversation. Ask whether the applicants pay
their rent on time, how long they've lived there, and why they're
Unit 8B, Page 18
moving. Also try to find out how well they keep their home, and
whether the present landlord has any complaints about them.
Be cautious about the response, though, if the landlord has had
problems with them or asked them to move he may represent
them to you as good tenants so he can get rid of them.
The next place to check is with the previous landlord.
Even if this involves an expensive long-distance call, it's worth
it. Why? He may tell you what the present landlord won't. Ask
the same questions you asked of the present landlord, but dig a
little deeper and listen more closely. Since the previous landlord
no longer has a personal stake in getting rid of your applicants,
he is more likely to level with you.
Finally, of course, you want to check on bank accounts
and charge account references. Since records on national
charge accounts and credit cards are often kept in central
processing bureaus, it will make this job simpler if you can
check accounts with local firms. If this isn't possible, however,
you can call the local branch of an issuing bank or department
store and ask where to call or write for a credit rating.
Perhaps all this checking seems cynical and distrustful.
Most people are indeed honest and reliable--but what if that
one bad apple seeks to become your tenant? You will be glad
when you find out beforehand who is likely to be a good
tenant and who is not.
8.12 KEY 9: CHOOSING THE RIGHT TENANT
You have only one applicant who comes through your
tenant-checking process with high enough marks to be
accepted as your renter. But you'll probably find that two,
three, or even more look like good prospects. How do you
decide which one family will move into your house?
Your Rental Policy Checklist can help you make this
decision. When a prospect first fills out your application, you
should take one of these checklists and clip or staple it to the
application. On the back of the checklist, note anything you
Unit 8B, Page 19
may have noticed about the applicant. For instance, you might
write, "Children clean, quiet, well-behaved. Parents friendly and
reserved. Car old but runs smoothly." Or, your notes might
read "Baby had wet diaper, runny nose, dirty face. Other
children eating ice cream that dripped on floor. Parents paid no
attention, too busy arguing with each other." When the time
comes to make a decision, these reminders can help you.
8.12-1 Do All the Facts Add Up?
Look at the prescreening notes you made during your
initial telephone conversation with this applicant (as discussed in
Part A of Creative Management). Check for any discrepancies.
Did he tell you over the telephone that he had two children, and
did he arrive with five? Or did applicants ask over the phone
about distances or bus service to the junior high, high school,
and auto plant--and then put on their application that they have
only two grade-school children and that the adults work at the
post office and the supermarket? You have a right to be
suspicious. They may be planning to rent your house and then
share it with someone you don't know.
Few people will deliberately mislead you; most people
are just what they appear to be. But for your own protection,
you must be alert to those few who regard landlords as fair
game for any tricks they can get away with. A few applicants
will make honest mistakes that can be easily explained. If you
decide to turn down a tenant but have no better applicant in
sight, then, you can always discuss your reasons and consider
their explanation before making a final decision.
As you check out the actual application, make notes
about how well the prospective tenants meet your other
requirements. Does their income enable them to afford your
rent? Is their credit good? Do they have stable histories with
former landlords and on the job? If you find something in
someone's background that immediately eliminates them, write
it down, put their application aside, and concentrate on the
others.
Unit 8B, Page 20
To be fair to your applicants and yourself, don't simply
rent your property to the first person who checks out well.
Someone else may be better. Remember, too, that your first
choice may have put in applications with several landlords and
could decide to rent from someone else. Check out everyone
whose information meets your criteria and whose references
support the information on their application.
8.12-2 Contrast and Compare
Once you have all the information you can get on the best
applicants, compare everything you've learned about each of
them. Usually one or two will stand out as the people you most
want living in your house. But if for some reason this doesn't
happen, think carefully about everything you've learned about
all of them. Does one appear more stable than the others--has
he held the same job for, say, four years, while the others
change employers frequently? Does one have a larger income,
and would he therefore be more likely to be able to afford the
rent? Does one have very few credit cards and money in the
bank?
If everything appears to be fairly equal among all your
best applicants, then there is one final, very simple way to
choose among them. Call the one who contacted you first.
Introduce yourself and say something like, "I'm happy to tell
you that everything on your application to rent form me has
been approved. If you'll meet with me at noon tomorrow we
can sign the papers."
As we mentioned earlier, there is always the possibility
that your first-choice tenant has applied elsewhere and will
decide not to rent from you. If that's the case, simply call the
second person who contacted you; if necessary, go on to the
third. But never go so far down your list that you end up renting
to marginal applicants or those you've previously eliminated for
serious problems. It's better to leave your house vacant for a
few more days than to end up with bad renters.
8.13 KEY 10: FINALIZING THE RENTAL
Unit 8B, Page 21
When you meet with your new tenants to formally award
them your rental, you should bring several things with you. You
will need two copies of your Move-In Ready Checklist, two
copies of your Tenant Policies, two copies of your Rental
Agreement, receipt forms, carbon paper, two pens (in case one
gives out on you), a clipboard, and a full set of keys to the
house that you can give to the new tenants.
You must also ask the tenants to bring something. If they
are planning to move in right away, they should bring cash, a
certified check, or a money order for the entire first month's
rent and all deposits--for last month's rent, security, cleaning,
pets, or whatever you have decided to charge. If they will not
be moving in for a few days, you may accept a personal check
from them, but don't give them the keys until their check has
cleared the bank. As an extra precaution, you can also write on
the signed Rental Agreement, "This agreement not in effect until
tenant's check # in the amount of $ , dated , 19 , clears
landlord's bank. In the event check does not clear, this
agreement is canceled."
8.13-1 Be Sure You Get Everything That's Coming to You
If the tenants plan to move in on some date other than the
first of the month (or the beginning of the week, if you charge
weekly rent), you will need to make some adjustment so that
the tenants don't pay for a period when they don't have access
to your rental. This is called a proration and is very easy to do.
Simply divide the amount of the rent by the number of days in
the rental period (the month or the week) to arrive at a daily
rent rate. Then charge rent only for the days the tenant is
actually renting the property during that time period.
However, prorations are better done during the second
month of tenancy. When people first move in, you should get an
entire first month's rent. The you can prorate their second
month's rent to cover the amount of time they were actually in
possession of your property during the first month. Why? When
people first move in, you want to be sure that they are able to
afford your rental and deposits. You also want to reinforce the
Unit 8B, Page 22
fact that you are in control and that you expect them to abide
by your rules. Let them know that you expect to receive full
value for the service you are providing and that your policies
aren't open to negotiation.
Establish right from the start that all tenants must pay full
rent on the first of the month. This simplifies your rent collection
and record keeping chores, since you don't have to remember
a different due date for every property.
8.13-2 One Reasonable Exception For Deposits
As mentioned in Part A of Creative Management, there
may be times when you want to make exceptions to your
deposit policy. When you do, it will be because it is your
choice, and you should make this clear by suggesting it to the
tenants yourself.
Don Gibson, an investor and lecturer who owns a great
many inner-city rentals, outlines situations where this might
come up. Don rents mainly to people who are on welfare and
to older people whose income is derived from small pensions
and Social Security payments. He finds that these people often
make very good tenants, but they simply don't have the
resources to pay large deposits in a lump sum. In those cases,
he allows tenants to pay their deposits in four monthly
installments during the first four months of their tenancy. He
makes out a separate agreement and receipt form, which says
something like this:
Deposit in the amount of $ for the property at
(address) will be paid in four monthly installment, in
the amount of $ each. The first such installment
shall be paid on (date the tenant signs the
agreement), and each of the three following
installments shall be paid on the first day of the
three months following this date. Failure to make
any such installment payment within ten days of the
date it is due shall be considered a breach of the
Rental Agreement between tenant and landlord,
and shall be grounds for eviction.
Unit 8B, Page 23
Below this include lines where you can record the date
and amount of each installment, and spaces for all parties to
sign. You and the tenant should each have a copy of this
agreement, and you should initial the tenant's copy when each
installment is paid. When the full deposit has been paid, mark
both copies "Paid in full." Give the tenant one and keep the
other in your file for that property.
8.13-3 Before Taking Their Money
Before you collect any rents or deposits, go through these
steps with your new renters:
M 1. Establish the condition of the property
Take two blank copies of your Move-In Ready
Checklist, put a piece of carbon paper between them, and clip
them to your clipboard. Then inspect the property with your
applicants. Go through every room and around the outside of
the house, marking the condition of everything. Make sure that
everyone is in agreement about the state of repair and
cleanliness of everything, both inside and out. When you've
finished this inspection tour, sign your name at the bottom of the
checklist, and have your new renters sign theirs.
M 2. Make your policies clear
Next, give the applicants a copy of your Tenant Policies.
Explain to them that these written guidelines make clear the sort
of behavior you expect from them as tenants. You'll probably
have some ideas of your own on what these should be, but
we've included a list of suggestions below to help you get
started.
Read through the Tenant Policies with your applicants.
Make sure they understand every point, and make sure that
they are aware that they may be evicted from your house if they
do not abide by your policies. When you are finished, take both
copies, put carbon paper between them, and have the tenants
sign the acknowledgment statement at the bottom. Keep the
original in your files for later reference.
Unit 8B, Page 24
TENANT POLICIES (SAMPLE)
1. All rents must be paid no later than 5 p.m. on the first day
of the month in order to qualify for the discount rent
program. If rents are not paid by the fifth day of the
month, you may be liable for legal action.
2. No guests may stay longer than fourteen days, and no
animals may live on the premises without written
permission from the owner or owner's representative.
3. If you have permission to keep a pet, no other animals
may be added to or substituted for this pet without
written permission from the owner or owner's
representative.
4. Tenants will not erect permanent or semi-permanent
structures on the property or make excavations on the
property without written permission from the owner or
owner's representative.
5. Any serious structural damage to the property must be
reported to the owner or owner's representative within 24
hours of its occurrence. This includes fire, water damage,
and plumbing failures.
6. Tenants will subscribe to the city trash removal
service.
7. Tenants will keep the premises clean of trash and debris.
All trash will be stored in closed metal or plastic
containers which are no visible from the street until
regularly scheduled trash pickup dates. Trash containers
will be removed from the curb and returned to their
proper place within 12 hours after scheduled trash
pickups.
8. Tenants will not disturb other residents of the area. This
includes:
Unit 8B, Page 25
* Guests will not be entertained in the front yard or
driveway.
* Abandoned vehicles will not be stored on the
property.
* Animals must be kept under control at all times.
* Musical instruments, televisions, stereos, and
power tools will not be used at such times or in
such manner as to disturb neighbors. No such items
should be used where they can be heard outside
the walls of your own residence earlier than 8 a.m.
or later than 10 p.m.
* Parties or other gatherings must be confined to
areas and noise levels which do not intrude on your
neighbors' rights to peace and privacy.
9. Vehicles, either your own or your guests', may be parked
only in your assigned parking areas. Vehicles may not be
parked on the lawn.
10. Children's toys must be removed from the front of the
house and stored out of sight at night.
We have read and understand the above policies and agree to
abide by them. We understand that failure to follow any or all
of the above guidelines may be grounds for eviction.
Date
(Signed)
Date
(Signed)
M 3. Explain your Rental Agreement
Finally, give the renters a copy of your Rental Agreement.
Read through the entire Rental Agreement and explain any
clauses your tenant does not understand before signing. You
Unit 8B, Page 26
may wish to use the sample we've included, or you can make
up one of your own. As you gain experience, you can tailormake
your own basic agreement to suit your specific needs and
adapt it from time to time to each new situation.
The sample Rental Agreement we've included here can
be used either as a lease or as a short-term agreement. You
can adapt it to your needs by writing in the appropriate terms
and have all parties to the agreement initial the change. You
may prefer to use leases because of the security of having the
tenants stay for a set period, especially during times when there
are a lot of rentals available. On the other hand, a long-term
lease may lock you into an undesirable arrangement; it is more
difficult to get rid of bad tenants when they have a lease
guaranteeing them the use of the property for a year. The
decision is up to you. Consider the local market and your own
preferences when you decide whether to give tenants a lease or
a month-to-month tenancy.
On the lines for deposits, you'll find room to list all
charges the tenants must pay when they rent your house. There
is even room for a key deposit, which many landlords
recommend. This should be an amount equal to what it would
cost to have all the locks on the property changed. Refund the
key deposit to the tenants only after they have returned all the
keys you give them.
Under the "Rent" portion of the agreement, you will notice
a paragraph that describes the discount rent policy. This is a
simple technique used to motivate tenants to pay promptly. The
amount of the discount is up to you, but it should be enough to
mean something to the tenants. If rents for properties like yours
are in the range of $250 and $300 a month, a discount of $20
may be generous enough to encourage your tenants to pay you
by the first of the month. If, however, you own property in an
area where rents run $800 a month or more you'll probably
have to reduce the rent by $50 or even more to convince
renters that they're getting a real bargain when they pay on time.
Discount rents are used as a form of motivation by many
experts. We recommend that you use the discount rent policy
Unit 8B, Page 27
to encourage tenants themselves to take care of all minor
repairs to your property. A policy like this can save you the
aggravation of being called frequently to make simple repairs
the tenants ought to be able to handle themselves. Some
managers suggest that you insert a sentence under
"Maintenance, Repairs or Alterations" that states something like
this:
Tenant agrees to be responsible for all repairs and
maintenance for which the cost is less than $50. If
Tenant contacts Owner to request such repairs or
maintenance be made by Owner, Tenant forfeits
discount rent for that month and will pay the full
rental amount on the following month's rent
payment.
M 4. Get All Signatures
Once your applicants understand your Rental Agreement,
have all adults who will be living in the house sign the
agreement. You don't want to be left in an undefined situation if
only one person signs and then later moves out, leaving in your
house a spouse or roommate who never signed your
agreement. Make sure everyone understands that all adults
living in your property are equally responsible for paying your
rent and abiding by your rules. If one leaves, those who are left
will have to take care of the rent and maintenance without that
person's contribution.
After everyone signs, have the tenants pay you the rent
and deposits. Give them a receipt and their signed copies of the
Move-In Ready Checklist, Tenant Policies, and Rental
Agreement. You keep the originals. If they have paid you in
cash, by money order, or by other certified funds, give them
their set of keys; if they have given you a check, tell them you
will let them pick up the keys after their check has cleared your
bank. Be firm about this. Remember, it is easier to keep them
from moving in than it would be to get them out again if their
check isn't good.
Once you've turned over the keys, pat yourself on the
back; you're now an official landlord!
Unit 8B, Page 28
8.14 KEY 11: YOU ARE RUNNING A BUSINESS
Rickie F. had a hard time keeping records. The discipline
of record keeping was boring to her. "I got into real estate to
become free, not to shackle myself with logs and ledgers," she
said. Unfortunately, she didn't realize that the road to financial
independence is paved with hard work.
Because of her attitude, when she had income from her
rental, she simply put it in her regular checkbook. When she
had expenses to pay, she simply wrote a check from that same
checkbook. But she failed to note where the income originated;
and she didn't indicate what the expenditures were for.
After a scant three months, she could tell that she had a
serious negative cash flow problem on her hands--but did it
come from the rental property or from her life-style itself? She
had no idea. Only when she changed her approach to record
keeping (finally) did she get a grasp on where her money was.
And only then was she able to make the changes necessary to
correct the cash flow problem.
Landlord (or landlady) isn't merely a word used to
describe a person who owns a house that someone else lives in.
It's also the job title of an independent business person. As the
owner of your own business, you have the right to set your own
policies and hours, the opportunity to see a small initial
investment grow into a large fortune, and the privilege of
enjoying your profits in any way you please.
Don't forget, though, that the quickest way to lose your
business is to handle it poorly. Mismanagement can set you on
the road to the poorhouse faster than you can say, "Incomplete
paperwork and poor tenant relations." The following business
practices will help you stay on top of things.
8.14-1 Keep Careful Records
Unit 8B, Page 29
Let's tackle the paperwork first. According to the Small
Business Administration, 80 percent of business failures are due
to poor record keeping. To those lucky people who were born
with the souls of accountants, neglecting your paperwork
probably sounds like the result of sloppy habits, loose morals,
and blind stupidity. But to the rest of us, it's a very real
problem, and one that needs a quick solution.
Writing down numbers is fun when you're adding up your
profits. But in order to have profits to add up, you must keep
careful track of what's going on in every facet of your business.
When you own rental homes, you need to know who has paid
rent and who hasn't, what payments are due on your property
and when, which property is vacant, which tenants have given
notice, which tenants are due for a rent raise, whose lease
option is about to expire, which house is due for a paint job,
and whether you owe money to any workers or suppliers.
That sounds like a lot to keep track of. It is, especially if
you own dozens of properties. That's why you must begin at
the beginning, when you first start investing, to set up a simple,
easily updated record system. Form the habit of recording
everything for your first house or apartment; add each new
purchase to the record system immediately. That way, you'll
always know what's going on in your business.
How Important is this? You may think that if you own
only one rental, it will be easy to keep track of everything in
your head, or that you can throw all your receipts and notes
into a shoe box and let your accountant straighten it out at tax
time. That may be true if you rent your property to the first
applicant and everything goes smoothly all year.
But what if you rent to someone in November who
moves out the following July, and you then show the house to
several people, one of whom rents it sometime in August?
You'll probably need something to remind you if the house was
vacant for two weeks or three, how much paint you bought in
July, and what your advertising costs were. Did the handyman's
charge for the broken window come out of the previous
tenant's deposit, or did you pay if yourself? Did you get your
Unit 8B, Page 30
temporary deposit back for the short time you had the
electricity in your name so you could show the house at night?
How much mileage are you entitled to for trips you made
connected with your real estate business?
In addition, as mentioned in Part A of Creative
Management, a time may come when you need to prove that
you didn't discriminate illegally when you rejected an applicant.
Or someone who applied to rent one of your houses may
someday apply to you again. Why was it the Joneses didn't
move into your house three years ago?
The first time you rent out a house, the situation may be
so new to you that you'll think details like this will stay in your
mind forever. You'll be surprised, though, at how quickly you'll
forget even the names of former tenants, let alone people who
just looked at your property buy didn't rent. Worse yet is when
you can't recall which property has a long-term note coming
due, and you need to decide whether to sell or refinance. If you
do know which property it is, do you have the facts and figures
that will tell you which course would be more profitable? The
more houses you have, the harder it gets to keep all the details
straight.
8.14-2 What System Do You Really Need?
There are a lot of good property management systems on
the market that will help you keep track of all pertinent facts.
You can even find some excellent programs you can use on a
computer. It's not necessary in the beginning to invest several
hundred dollars in a management system, however. You'll
probably experiment and find the system that's most
comfortable for you as you gain experience. To start, you can
set up a simple but perfectly adequate system using a few file
folders, a cardboard box or small filing cabinet, a few ledger
sheets, a checkbook, and a pocket-sized notebook. You can
pick up most of these things for a few dollars at any office
supply store.
You'll need a separate file folder for each property. Put
all the paperwork for that property into the folder. You may
Unit 8B, Page 31
prefer to keep legal papers, such as the original of the deed and
any notes you've signed on that house, in a safety deposit box
or at your attorney's office. But you should keep copies of the
mortgage and any other notes in your folder. Include the
payment book, and receipts for any expenses against that
property (such as advertising costs and repair bills), and the
papers that relate to the current tenants. No matter what, you
must put all these papers into their proper files as soon as you
receive them.
When you come back from renting your house, you will
have your copies of the forms you used during the initial
telephone interview, the tenant's application (along with the
notes you made while checking it out), the Move-In Ready
Checklist signed by the tenants, and your copy of the signed
Rental Agreement. Staple them together and put them into the
folder for that property.
You will need a separate folder for unused copies of each
of the forms you use, a folder for rejected tenants, a folder for
tenants who applied and were approved but then decided not
to rent the house after all, and, eventually, a file for former
tenants. It's also a good idea to start a file for ads you have
used and ads written by others that you've seen and liked.
For your first house, you'll probably set up fewer than ten
files, and each one will have only a few items in it (or sometimes
none at all). All your files can probably be kept in one filing
cabinet drawer or a small box. Later on, of course, depending
on how much property you buy, you may find that just one set
of folders, such as those for each house, takes up an entire
drawer in a full-sized filing cabinet.
8.14-3 Ledgers Keep Track of Your Money
The ledger sheets can be loose, individual pages or can
be bound into a book, depending on your preference. Some
landlords like to keep the ledger sheet in the property folder,
Unit 8B, Page 32
while others keep their ledger as a separate book. If you keep
the ledgers in a book, set aside a full page for each property.
Head the ledger sheet with the address of the property,
and add the unit number if you have an apartment building.
(Naturally, if you own apartments, you will have a separate
ledger sheet for each unit, as well as one for the entire building.)
At the top of the ledger sheet write down any important
information, such as "Interest-only note expires 8/12/91" or
"Lease-option expires 3/17/91." Use red ink to make sure
these notes catch your eye every time you look at the record.
Then use the ledger sheet to record income and expenses
for that rental. If you cannot do this every day, do it at least
once a month, no later than the third day of the month. You will
find that with discipline, it soon becomes habit to record your
rental income, mortgage payments, and expenses. Remind
yourself that the only way to know how well you're doing, and
the only way you can increase your wealth, is to keep track of
it every single month.
When you record the first income from a new tenant,
don't forget to note down any and all deposits, including any
option consideration. Since the deposit is not considered
income to you unless you keep it after the tenant moves out,
don't record it in the income column. Do record it on your
ledger, though, so you don't overlook it when a tenant gives
notice or exercises an option.
Your checkbook is also a record. Some investors keep a
separate checkbook for each property, but that could become
cumbersome; it's much simpler in most cases to have one
account for all your properties. Since you are running a
business, this account can be in your business name; if you
haven't created a separate business name, of course, you can
simply open a separate account under your own name. Use
your business account to deposit your rents and pay the
expenses for all your investment real estate, but do not use it for
your personal real estate, such as your home.
Unit 8B, Page 33
If it's necessary to occasionally transfer funds into this
account from another account, always make a notation in your
deposit record of where the money came from. For instance,
you might have a deposit of $20,000 with the notation,
"Personal loan from Uncle Stephen Alsop," or a $300 deposit
from "personal savings," or $200 from "tenant security deposit,
J. Doe, 123 Main."
You'll notice that we mentioned a transfer of funds from a
tenant security deposit. Some areas require landlords to hold
tenant deposits in a separate savings account until the tenant
moves and all charges are settled. In other places, a property
owner can simply put that money into a business account and
use it for any purpose, as long as all monies due to a tenant are
repaid within a specified number of days before deposits must
be settled.
Many banks and savings and loans now offer
checkbooks that make carbon copies of every check you
write. These are very handy if you don't have time to note every
expense in the ledger on a daily basis. You can simply write the
necessary checks and then transfer them to your ledger when
you do your monthly accounts. Make a notation regarding the
transaction on the line that says "Memo" (usually at the lower
left hand corner of the check), so that you will remember the
transaction when you make your permanent record. Three
checks to Johnson's Paint in one month may be confusing
unless they are identified by the property addresses each order
applies to.
As time goes on, of course, you will probably buy such
items as paint in large lots and use it on several properties over
the course of a year. In the beginning, though, you need to
itemize expenses and apply them directly to individual
properties. This helps you learn where your money is going and
what kind of expenses you incur for each of your rentals. With
experience, you will learn to recognize what charges are normal
and when your spending is getting out of line.
8.14-4 Use Your Notebook Every Day
Unit 8B, Page 34
The final item you will need is a pocket-sized notebook to
help you keep track of daily details such as mileage or auto
expenses, chores that need to be done, and appointments to
keep. Some investors use one car solely for their investment
business, which makes this form of record keeping somewhat
simpler. Most of us, though, start out by using the family car or
truck for everything. That makes a daily record of business
expenses doubly important at tax time.
Every time you use your car to go anywhere related to
your real estate investments, note the date, the mileage on your
speedometer when you start, any other driving expenses, and
the ending mileage. Make a note of why you took the trip and
what you did. An example would be, "Oct. 23. Start for home,
52,811. Money S&L 52,817. 999 Maple, 52,822. 111 Oak,
52,827. Post office, 52,830. Bank, 52,831. Home, 52,833."
Under that you might note, "Turnpike toll, 75 cents. Malona
Bridge toll, 40 cents. Postage, 22 cents. Parking, Money S&L,
35 cents." Your record of the day's business might read,
"Money S&L, discussed loan on 555 Parker. Need financial
statement. Visited tenants at 999 Maple, inspected property, all
in order. Showed 111 Oak to Smiths and Bakers. Mailed
payment and deposited rent on 999 Maple."
As you can see, this daily record can also be used to
record small expenses for which you might not receive a
receipt. If you make copies of a document, pay a parking
meter, or buy your real estate agent a cup of coffee from a
vending machine, note all these items and use them as
deductions on your taxes. It may sound petty, but when tax
time rolls around, you'd be surprised how much these small
daily expenditures can add up. You simply need some sort of
written record to back you up.
Writing down these daily transactions can help you in
other ways, too. Periodically sit down and review where you
go, what you do, and how much it costs you. Have you been
driving to another town to show property, then coming back for
a meeting with your broker, going back to show the property
again, then using the copy machine at the drug store, driving ten
miles in another direction to meet with a loan officer, then going
Unit 8B, Page 35
back to your vacancy yet again? Maybe there's a more
efficient way to use your time. If you find a steadily increasing
need to visit your local copy center, perhaps it's time to invest
in your own copy machine. When the time you spend inspecting
and cleaning up properties could be better spent finding and
negotiating new purchases, you should consider hiring a
handyman or an assistant. If you're spending most of your time
dealing with tenants, it may be time to turn to a professional
property management service. But be careful not to buy nor
hire prematurely.
8.15 KEY 12: TENANT RELATIONS
When Troy V. began his investment program, he found it
nearly impossible to separate himself from the troubles of his
tenants--and troubles were something they had continually. One
month the Robey's came to him with a real problem: Mrs.
Robey's mother had passed away and had had no insurance.
The Robey's had to pay the huge costs of funeral, casket, plot,
and burial out of their limited income. Could they miss their
rental payment for the month and make it up the following
month? Troy said they could--but he never saw the money.
Another month the Mehta family approached him with
another problem: Mr. Mehta had been temporarily laid off.
Could they be just ten days late with their rent? Troy agreed--
but they were twenty-five days late, which threw their finances
so out of whack that they were nearly a month late with their
rent for four months running.
When the Toccalinos asked for a loan of $100 for a
family emergency, Troy was so soft-hearted that he couldn't
say no. They are paying it back at the rate of $10 per month,
but Troy can ill afford to pretend he's a bank.
When Mrs. Dall's brother lost his job, she asked Troy if
her brother and his family could temporarily move in with her
and her family. Troy agreed. "But only for a couple of weeks,"
Troy said. Mrs. Dall was very grateful--but her brother stayed
Unit 8B, Page 36
for nine weeks, rent free, putting a lot of unnecessary wear and
tear on the rental unit.
Slowly but surely Troy learned his lesson. As he tallied up
his income and outgo for that year, he saw that his generosity
was quickly putting him into the poorhouse. And he realized
that if he didn't start acting like a bona-fide businessman, he
would lose everything he had worked so hard for.
Once you've accepted tenants, the papers have been
signed, you've received the first month's rent and deposits, and
they've moved in, your job isn't over. You've just begun! For
better or for worse, you and your tenants have entered into a
long-term relationship. Whether it will be better or worse is
largely up to you.
In dealing with tenants, the best rule is to be firm but fair.
Many first-time landlords are so happy to have real live tenants
that they are inclined to go a little overboard. Don't feel bad if
your instinct tells you to be lenient with your first tenants. Just
remember that this is one time you can't afford to follow your
naturally friendly tendencies. On the other hand, a few property
owners are apt to be overbearing and suspicious with their first
renters. This is also understandable--after all, you've handed
over an important asset worth many thousands of dollars to
comparative strangers, and you're worried about whether
they're going to take good care of your property.
You don't want to be downright nasty to new tenants.
This can backfire in a hurry--either by driving people away or
by creating an adversary relationship right from the beginning.
Regardless of how you treat them, some tenants see any
landlord as a natural enemy no matter what. If you make it easy
for them to hate you, they may convince themselves that they're
justified in taking advantage of you in any way possible.
The secret of to being a successful landlord is similar to
the secret of being a good schoolteacher. Establish that you
have the upper hand in the beginning; later, you can relax and
be more friendly. Never cross over into the area where you're
so friendly that your tenants lose respect for you.
Unit 8B, Page 37
8.15-1 Your Tenant Is Not Your Pal
Avoid becoming social friends with your tenants.
Regardless of what you've seen on old I Love Lucy shows,
that sort of relationship rarely works. If you play cards or go
bowling with your renters, your tenant friends are apt to expect
you to do them favors. Letting the rent slide "just this once" can
get to be a regular habit. Requests for extra repairs,
unnecessary paint jobs, or special amenities (such as new
carpet or drapes) are likely to crop up.
If you say yes to these friendly favors, you can put your
business at risk. On the other hand, if you say no, you may
alienate your friends. You know the choice you have to make,
but it's a lot simpler if you don't put yourself in this position to
begin with.
You'll also avoid the unpleasant consequences that can
occur when such a friendship goes off the rails, whether for
personal or business reason. A dispute over a golf score, a
political campaign, or a raised rent can all lead to quarrels, and
the more friendly you've been in the past, the more bitter the
breakup of your friendship can be. When the person you're
arguing with is living in your property, the consequences can be
especially unpleasant. Your tenant may decide to get even or
"show you" by withholding rent, forcing you to go to court with
an eviction procedure, or trashing your house and then
disappearing in the middle of the night.
8.15-2 Keep Romance Out Of It
One thing is for sure: love and landlording don't mix. The
advice about your social life goes triple for romantic
entanglements. It doesn't matter if one of your tenants is the
best thing you've ever seen off a movie screen: carrying on with
a tenant can be the quickest route to landlord's lament.
If either or both of you are married, you already
understand that a romance is off-limits. The moral
Unit 8B, Page 38
considerations are up to you, of course, but you have to realize
that scandal and divorce are bad for business. If you get an
unsavory reputation, some of your tenants will become
suspicious of you, especially those who think you might have an
eye on their spouses. Unexpected vacancies will crop up.
When word gets around, some people won't even apply to rent
your property. And your own spouse could initiate a divorce
that leaves you wondering how you could have been so foolish
as to throw away your whole life so cheaply.
What if both you and your tenant are single? It's still a
dangerous game. In the first flush of passion, you may offer the
loved one all sorts of valuable gifts, including free rent, unlimited
use of your handyman, new appliances, and a free redecorating
job. If the romance cools, what does that leave you? A messy
financial problem to complicate your emotional upheaval, that's
what.
If your ex-love moves out, you have only a vacancy to
cope with. It's what may happen before you reach the vacancy
stage that can be dangerous. You could find yourself with a
tenant who won't pay rent for months and who refuses to
move--either in hopes that the romance will revive, or as a way
of getting even for a broken heart.
If it was a bitter breakup, your property could be
damaged. An angry former sweetheart might very well decide
to get back at you by vandalizing your rental. Unhappy lovers
have splashed paint on walls, broken mirrors and windows,
pulled fixtures from ceilings, slashed drapes, and poured
chemicals on carpets. One even burned out an oven.
8.16 KEY 13: THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROFITS
IS ALL YOURS
Maintaining the proper tenant relationship is more
involved than keeping a firm, friendly, but nonsocial attitude. In
all your dealings, remember that your primary motive as an
Unit 8B, Page 39
investor is to collect current income from your rental while
increasing its future potential. This future potential must be in the
form of higher rents in years to come and increased market
value when you decide to refinance or sell your property.
Obviously, natural market forces will take care of some
increase in value. If you have followed investment guidelines
and used good judgment, your property will continue to
appreciate--but only if it is kept in good condition. If you allow
your investment to deteriorate, it won't appreciate at the same
rate as similar nearby properties--and it could even depreciate.
Morris A. owned a six-plex in a quiet Texas town near
Dallas. It gave him a small positive cash flow, which he used to
help pay old debts from a business gone sour. But the more he
kept abreast of his debt obligations, the more he let the six-plex
go. Instead of putting any money back into the property for
maintenance and repairs, he milked the six-plex dry to feed his
other needs. When a tenant notified him of a building problem,
he ignored them or put them off. And he was so busy with
other concerns that he almost never inspected the property; he
rarely even drove by.
Gradually the quality of the building diminished, then the
quality of his tenants went down. And when he finally found
himself in a position where he had to sell, he discovered to his
horror that the property had depreciated in value, rather than
growing. He ended up taking a heartbreaking loss, simply
because he had failed to keep the property nice from month to
month and year to year.
Repairs and maintenance must be an ongoing priority and
will be one of your primary responsibilities for as long as you
own the property. You don't have to personally do each and
every repair job. But you do have to see to it that someone
does required repairs promptly and well; if you don't, minor
maintenance chores will mushroom into major rehabilitation
projects.
8.16-1 You Can Share Your Responsibility
Unit 8B, Page 40
Here's where your relationship with your tenants becomes
important. As stated in your Rental Agreement, tenants are
responsible for repairing all damage caused by them, their
children, and their guests. If any of these people break a
window, pull the towel racks off the bathroom wall or back a
car into the garage door and crack it, they must get it fixed or
pay to have someone else fix it.
Furthermore, you must require that the work be done
within a reasonable length of time and in a professional manner.
How can you guarantee that? Make all work subject to your
inspection and approval. Another option is to personally hire
someone to make repairs, and then bill the cost of repairs to the
tenants.
You will also want to take care of normal wear and tear
before it gets out of hand. To do this, you must know when
problems arise that are your responsibility. It's essential that you
set up a good information system. Your tenants will have to be
part of this system, and you will need to either take a regular
personal role in it or delegate some of your information duties
to someone else. Whichever method you choose, you must be
the one responsible for seeing that this system exists and that it
works.
8.16-2 Be Receptive to All Information
Make it easy for your tenants to notify you when they
have a problem. You don't need to be constantly available, but
your tenants must be able to leave messages for you. A
telephone answering machine can be an invaluable aid in you
business; it enables you to screen messages and decide whether
a situation is an emergency that demands your immediate
attention or whether it can wait until a more convenient time.
When your tenants do notify you of problems, don't
ignore them. Let them know that you are paying attention to
them and to the condition of your property. Depending on the
Unit 8B, Page 41
type and extent of the problem, this may mean no more than a
phone call the next day to remind tenants that the problem is
their responsibility and to suggest a business or workman that
might help them. Or it could mean an immediate visit to your
rental to personally inspect the damage. The important point is
that tenants know you keep control of your business at all
times.
When you do respond to tenant complaints, don't lose
your temper. It's sometimes difficult to be objective about
damage or expensive repairs to your property, but try to
remember that most people aren't deliberately destructive. If
the damage was the result of accident or carelessness on the
part of your tenants, they are responsible for getting it fixed. If it
wasn't their fault, there's nothing they could have don't to
prevent it. Either way, taking out your anger or disappointment
on them won't solve anything. Your priority should be to
identify the problem and make arrangements to correct it, not
to assign blame or vent your emotions on your tenants. After
all, you don't want to make them so afraid of how you'll react
that they hesitate to inform you when something else at your
property needs to be fixed.
8.16-3 Regular Inspections Are a Must
Your next step in your information system is a program of
regular inspection. One easy way to accomplish that is to
simply collect the monthly rents in person. Let your tenants
know that when you collect the rent, you will also make a brief
walk-through inspection of their home. This should motivate
them to have the premises in good condition for your visit, and
at the same time give you an opportunity to see if anything has
come up that demands your attention.
If you see something the tenants should take care of,
mention it to them then, and make a note to follow up on it
later. Keep this note in the property file for that rental so that
you won't forget on your next visit to verify that the problem
has been corrected.
Unit 8B, Page 42
Monthly rent collection and inspection is also a good way
to encourage your tenants to pay their rent on time. If you have
impressed them with the fact that you're a very busy person,
but that you make a special point of setting aside the first day of
the month to collect rents and inspect your properties, they will
make an effort to have the money ready and waiting for you
when you arrive. What happens if the tenant doesn't have the
rent on the day of your visit? Without losing your temper,
explain to the tenants that they have forfeited their discount for
that month and that you expect the money to be delivered to
you no later than the fifth of the month. Then proceed with your
inspection. Some landlords at this point become extremely hard
to please. They point out every minor flaw they can find--the
tenants' housekeeping, the way the children keep their rooms,
or the fact that there are dandelions in the lawn. They may not
say anything directly, but they leave the unmistakable
impression that when the rent isn't paid on time, they become
very hard to deal with. You may not be comfortable with such
an approach, but do take care that your tenants don't mistake
you for a patsy.
As your business grows and you acquire more properties,
you will probably need to hire an assistant to take over this
monthly rent collection and inspection. Or you may prefer to
have your tenants mail their rent or arrange for an automatic
deposit into your bank account.
8.16-4 You Can't Delegate All Your Duties
Even if no one collects the rents personally, someone
should still see your property every month. Once you hire a
regular handyman, have him visit each property, ask if there is
anything that needs to be taken care of, and take an
independent look around. He can write any comments about
the unit in a daily log book and report them to you later.
Even though you have employees taking care of these
details for you, never forget that these are your properties and
that you are ultimately responsible. You should still make a
personal tour of every rental you own at least once each year,
in order to be sure that each is being maintained to your
Unit 8B, Page 43
standards. If you use a yearly lease, you could visit when the
lease is to be renewed. Or you could personally deliver the
notices of the annual rent increase and take the opportunity to
inspect the property then.
As you initiate this system, you may find that some tenants
don't make repairs they're responsible for due to a lack of time,
money, or knowledge. If you find that maintenance has been
neglected for two consecutive months, ask what the problem is
and suggest a solution. If you find--or suspect--that the tenant
can't afford the charges for labor or materials, offer to pay
these charges and allow the tenant to pay you back in monthly
installments that will be added to the rent. Tell him that if the
work isn't done by the next monthly inspection, you will hire
someone to do the work and bill it to the tenant.
If the problem is a lack of tools, simply rent them some of
yours. Many landlords keep a supply of basic tools as well as a
couple of extra lawn mowers and vacuum cleaners that they
rent out to tenants who need them. You can often pick up
inexpensive items like this at yard sales or flea markets--or
store your old model instead of getting rid of it when you buy a
new one for yourself.
8.17 KEY 14: YOUR TENANTS HAVE
RESPONSIBILITIES, TOO
Your basic responsibility is to supply decent, affordable
housing and keep it in good repair. Your tenants also have a
basic responsibility: to pay the rent on time, with no excuses
and no requests for extensions. Don't be shy about reminding
them of this. You've worked long and hard for that money, and
you deserve it.
After Troy V. discovered how important it was to run his
business like a business, he turned his approach around
completely. It wasn't easy, but he found that his tenants were
generally able to adapt to a landlord who required prompt rent
payments. Those who were not able to adapt moved away and
Unit 8B, Page 44
were replaced by people who were quickly taught what to
expect.
Not that Troy became a grouch, never smiling, never
caring. He still cared deeply. But he knew that his bills would
come due every month, just as the tenant's bills did, and that if
he didn't pay he would lose his properties.
He came to realize that he was performing an important
service to let his tenants stay in his rentals. They paid him for
that service by giving him the rent every month. But his business
could be no different from that of any other: if the payment did
not come, the service had to be discontinued.
When a tenant tells a hard-luck story about unexpected
expenses, it can be difficult to tell them you won't wait a week
or two for the rent. However, you have an agreement with your
tenants. You agreed to supply them with a place to live, and
they agreed to pay you rent on the first of the month. You don't
impose on that agreement by asking them to let your brotherin-
law move in with them because he can't find an apartment,
do you? Of course not. Why, then, should they impose on your
agreement with their personal troubles?
Imagine calling the bank that holds the mortgage on your
rental and explaining to a collections officer that your tenants
had to spend the rent money on dental surgery. What do you
suppose the banker will say? Probably not, "That's all right. We
can wait for our payment until your tenants have the money."
When it comes to financial matters, you hold the same
position with your tenants regarding their rent that your lender
holds with you regarding the mortgage payments. That money is
due when the agreement says it is due, and failure to pay as
agreed automatically invokes penalties. This is exactly the sort
of situation where you would have problems if you were on too
friendly terms with your renters. You must impress on them that
in the matter of rents, you cannot be swayed by emotional
appeals. It is a business matter, and it will be handled in a
businesslike manner.
Unit 8B, Page 45
8.17-1 Act Firmly to Head off Problems
First, say no if a tenant asks for an extension. The second
step? Refuse to allow the tenant to pay the discount rent if the
payment is even one day late; insist on receiving the full rent
amount. If the tenant is buying the property from you on a
lease-option, cancel the option immediately. If the rent isn't paid
by the fifth of the month, serve the tenants with a Three-day
Notice to Quit.
A Three-day Notice to Quit informs the tenants that they
have three days to either pay the rent in full or move out--that
is, to quit the premises. It will either motivate late payers to
come up with the rent within three days, or it will be the first
step in their eviction. We'll discuss eviction in more detail later
in this unit, but for now, know that you should never accept any
partial payment of the money owed to you if you think you may
go through with an eviction. If you do accept any money, it will
negate everything you have done up to that point, and you will
have to start the eviction process over again the next time a
payment is late.
8.17-2 You Deserve a Raise
In addition to receiving your rent on time, you should also
get regular raises. Landlords with negative cash flows are
usually keenly aware of this, but no owner should neglect this
important aspect of management. After all, financial
independence is the whole point of your personal investment
program. Increased rents are what bring you profits, to be used
either on additional investments or on a more enjoyable
standard of living. You should raise your rents regularly, at least
once a year.
Don't worry that your tenants will resent this increase.
Their own wages increase, all other costs go up, and people
expect that their rent will occasionally increase, too. You can
make the increase less painful for them, however, if you give
them a simple explanation with the increase notice; you might
mention that taxes and insurance costs have gone up and that
Unit 8B, Page 46
you need to charge a higher rent to cover all the costs of the
property.
Many investors recommend that you increase rents in odd
increments. If a house rents for $400 a month, for example,
don't simply raise the rent by $40--that's obviously a 10
percent increase, and looks completely arbitrary. If you raise
the rent by $43, though, the odd amount leaves the impression
that you must have added up costs to arrive at such an uneven
sum.
If you are carrying a negative cash flow, you'll naturally
want to bring your rental income closer to the break-even
figure. In deciding how much to increase rents, consider what
local market rates are and what your tenants have been paying.
Don't hit them with such a big increase that they decide to move
out unless you want them to. It's best not to increase rents more
that about $10 above what similar properties are being
advertised for. If you increase rents more than that, your
tenants will begin to think it might pay them to look for a new
home.
Once you've chosen a figure, simply compose a letter for
each of your tenants. Send or deliver it to them at least thirty
days before the increase goes into effect. Your letter might say
something like this:
January 25, 19
Dear John and June Olsen:
Due to rising costs, including property taxes
and insurance, I find that I must raise the rent you
are paying on 123 Hometown Drive by $43 a
month. This will bring your total monthly rent to
$443.
This increase will go into effect on March
first. If you have any questions or problems about
this, please contact me at your earliest convenience.
Sincerely,
Lawrence Marcus
Either deliver these notices personally or send them by
Certified Mail. As mentioned earlier, personal delivery gives
Unit 8B, Page 47
you a perfect chance to look over the property and see how
the tenants have been taking care of it.
Although it seems logical to schedule these rent increases
for the tenants' one-year anniversary in your house and to
continue to raise their rent every year in that month, that's not
always the best idea. That means you have to keep track of
when each tenant moved into each house. It's much more
efficient for you to raise all the rents during the same month
every year.
Which month? Well, there's a certain psychology to that.
You want to raise rent during a month when people won't want
to move--when they would rather pay a little more rent than
pull up stakes. Most families with children prefer to do their
moving during school vacations so that the children's education
isn't disrupted. Very few people like to move during the worst
weather months. Even fewer want to move at Christmas time,
of course, but you don't want to be a complete Scrooge about
it--"Merry Christmas, your rent is going up!" Many landlords
prefer to wait until about the end of January. That gives the
tenants the month of February to either decide to move or get
used to paying more rent. The children still have about four
months of school before the next long vacation, and the
weather is usually at its worst point of the year.
Unless your increase is totally beyond the reach of your
tenants, they'll usually adjust to the higher rent and decide to
stay on. If your increase is reasonable and fair, there's no
reason you shouldn't get the higher rent. If your tenants decide
they can't afford it, it's time to rent the property to someone
who can pay you what it's actually worth.
8.17-3 Beware of Rent Controls
Unit 8B, Page 48
If you have the misfortune of living in an area where rent
controls prevail, you will need to comply with local regulations
concerning raising rents. Well-meaning policy-makers often
impose rent controls on property owners in the interest of
protecting the well-being of renters in their jurisdictions (or
voting districts). Usually just the opposite effect is brought
about. Rent controls almost always result in depressing the
income real estate market, which in turn lowers the quality of
shelter available.
If your area is governed in this way, you will have to
make the best of it. Be sure to sharpen your pencil when
investing in real estate in such areas.
8.18 KEY 15: DON'T FORGET TO SAY THANK YOU
Oma L. likes people. She likes the tenants in her rental
homes. And she especially likes them when they take good
care of the rental and pay their rent on time!
Oma has worked out several creative ways to reward
good tenants. At Christmas time she will send a basket of fruit
or a box of candy with a card attached. "Thank you," the card
will say, "for being such a good tenant! Rent on time, every
time! Clean house! Attractive yard! Merry Christmas and a
prosperous new year to you and your family!"
On every anniversary of the tenant's arrival, Oma does
something nice for them. Often the nice gesture will directly
improve the house, which upgrades its value and makes the
tenants feel good at the same time. One year she will paint the
interior. Another year she will buy new carpets, or clean the old
ones. She will plant new trees or shrubs. On rare occasions, for
long-term tenants, she will even knock off half the rental fee on
the anniversary month.
Oma's tenant relations are terrific. And her rentals are
looking better year after year!
Unit 8B, Page 49
When your tenants stay with you, pay their rent on time,
and do their best to maintain your rental without causing you
unnecessary problems, you have ideal renters. You want to
keep these people, and they deserve a solid indication of your
appreciation.
Like Oma L., many investors give tenants presents every
year to mark their "anniversary" months. These can be gifts that
please the tenants and that improve the rental at the same time.
For instance, one expert gives his best tenants free use of the
handyman for an entire day to do any chores or cleaning the
tenants choose.
Look around the house and notice little things that need
doing, and then use those things as a gift. For instance, you
might have all the carpets and drapes cleaned for them, or
install a new Formica top on the kitchen counters. One year
your present might be a fresh paint job; another year, a new
vanity cabinet in the bathroom.
Naturally, you'll have to give the tenants notice when
you're going to do something like this to their home. A week or
two ahead of time, sent them a little note worded something like
this:
Dear Charles and Rhonda Orvick,
On October first it will be three years since
you moved into your home at 999 Comfy Drive.
You've been excellent tenants. To thank you for
keeping the property up so well and always paying
your rent promptly, I'd like to mark our third
anniversary together by giving you your choice of a
free carpet cleaning or painting your living room and
kitchen. Please call me any time between 9 a.m.
and 7 p.m. to tell me your choice and to arrange a
convenient time for the work to be done.
Sincerely,
Lawrence Marcus
Giving the tenants a choice, when possible, increases their
feeling that your house is truly their home, and that you take
Unit 8B, Page 50
their wishes into consideration as much as you can. After all,
they won't be too thrilled over having the carpets cleaned if they
just spent the entire past weekend struggling with a rental steam
cleaner to do the whole house themselves.
You can give tenants a certain amount of choice even
when you've made a fairly firm decision on what your house
needs and what you can afford. If the bathroom vanity needs
replacing, for example, you can go to a local store and choose
samples of the models you would be willing to buy within your
price range. Then let your tenants go to the same store and pick
from those you selected.
8.18-1 You Can Be a Nice Guy--Within Reason
Another way to keep your tenants happy is to be
cooperative, as much as possible when they want to make a
few changes around your house. Everyone likes to redecorate
from time to time, so if your tenants tell you they'd like to
repaint their walls, offer to pay for the paint--but let them know
that the choice of colors is subject to your approval (you don't
want anyone turning the living room into a purple grotto with
orange trim).
If they want to landscape the backyard, lend them some
garden tools and open a small account for them at a local
garden supply store. You might tell them that they can charge
$100 or $200 worth of seeds and plants and that you will pay,
as long as you can see their plans and approve of the work they
want to do. This way you can keep them from trying to turn the
yard into a mid-western cactus garden that will die in the first
frost, or from training ivy up the back of the house where it will
damage the walls.
When your tenants do jobs like this, you get the benefit of
their free labor on improvements that enhance the value of your
property. There's a psychological benefit, too, when you
cooperate with good tenants on projects that they want to do.
They begin to feel that your rental is really their home when they
can fix it up the way they like it. The more time and energy they
invest in your property, and the closer it is to the way they want
Unit 8B, Page 51
their home to be, the longer they will stay and the more effort
they will put into maintaining it. And if you've helped them,
they'll see you as a good, kind landlord who tries to keep the
tenants happy.
When they think of you this way, tenants are much less
likely to resent the rules you do enforce and the rent raises you
ask for. There are two ways tenants react to a rent increase
notice. The may say, "Darn that Linda, she can't spend a penny
on this place! It's turning into a slum, and now she wants even
more money for this dump. Maybe we should look for a better
place." Or they may say, "Well, Linda's so nice, and she does a
lot for us. I guess she wouldn't ask for more rent if she didn't
really need it. Besides, I'd hate to move just when we've got the
house so nice." It's up to you. Which reaction would you rather
have?
8.19 KEY 16: HELP YOUR TENANTS LEAVE
The day will come when even your most stable tenants
give you notice. You can expect an average family of renters to
move every two to three years. This average will change where
housing is hard to find and in some small towns where there are
very few rentals, families often stay in the same house for years.
Under normal circumstances, though, you should be prepared
for vacancies in about one-third to one-half of your properties
every year.
If you hate vacancies and can afford to charge lowerthan-
market rents, you can tilt the odds more in your favor, of
course. When the average house rents for $500 a month and
you're asking only $425 you give tenants a powerful incentive
to stay with you. But why would you want to do this? If you
bring your rents up closer to market level, the extra income will
cover the cost of having someone else manage your property
and handle the vacancies for you, and give you a better positive
cash flow besides.
When tenants do give notice, make sure they do it in the
right way. You must have a full month's written notice before
Unit 8B, Page 52
they move out, not a casual initial phone call saying they might
move out in a few weeks followed by a second call telling you
that they're definitely leaving next week. The first time they
bring up the subject of moving, remind them that if they are to
receive a full deposit refund, they must give you definite notice,
in writing, an entire month prior to the exact date they will
vacate your house.
The subject of the last month's rent deposit will almost
certainly come up at this point. The tenants are almost sure to
say, "Well, our deposit included our last month's rent, so, since
we're moving at the end of May, we've already paid our May
rent."
No. They haven't. They have paid an amount equal to an
extra month's rent as a security deposit. That's why so many
landlords charge a deposit that's a different amount than a
month's rent and why they call it something other than "last
month's rent"--cleaning deposit for example.
Explain to the tenants that you expect to receive the
regular rent payment for their last month. Tell them that after
they have moved out and returned the keys, any money coming
to them will be refunded in full, along with a written statement of
any changes you deducted from their deposit.
8.19-1 Paperwork Makes Moving Easier
As soon as you receive the formal notice to move, give
your tenants a copy of your Move-Out Checklist (a sample
found on the next page). This will tell them what you expect
them to do and in what condition they must leave the property
in order to receive a full refund of all their deposits. Send them
the Move-Out Checklist with a letter similar to this one:
Dear :
I have received your notice to vacate (address)
by (date) . In order to receive a refund of your full
deposit, you must leave the property in as good a
condition as you found it, aside from normal wear and
Unit 8B, Page 53
tear. The enclosed checklist will show you what is
expected. I hope this will help you prepare for your
move.
As soon as you return the keys, the house will be
inspected. If any further work needs to be done, charges
will be computed and deducted form your deposit. An
itemized list will be sent to you, along with any refund you
have coming, no later than days after all keys have
been returned.
You have been good tenants, and I wish you
happiness in your new home.
Sincerely,
Lawrence Marcus
Local laws vary; you will have to check with your
attorney on how many days you have before you must refund
any remaining balance on a deposit. Some areas allow a full
month, and others allow as few as seven days; you can usually
expect to have at least two weeks.
As soon as your tenants notify you that the house is
empty, make an appointment with them to go through the house
together. Take your copy of the Move-out Checklist included
below, together with the record you mad when the tenants
moved in, and inspect to determine the current condition of the
property.
MOVE-OUT CHECKLIST
WALLS, CEILINGS, BASEBOARDS, DOORS, AND
DOOR FRAMES--To be cleaned of all dirt and other
marks. Nails and hooks removed and all holes filled or
patched with a material that matches the color of the
surface.
Entrance ____ Kitchen ____ Living rm. ____ Dining rm.
____ Family rm. ____ Hall ____ Bdrm. #1 ____ Bdrm.
#2 ____ Bdrm. #3 ____ Bath #1 ____ Bath #2 ____
Other ____
Unit 8B, Page 54
CLOSETS, CUPBOARDS, MEDICINE CABINETS--To be
completely cleared of all items and wiped clean, including
shelves. Sliding door tracks to be cleaned out and any
debris remove.
Hall ____ Bdrm #1 ____ Bdrm #2 ____ Bdrm #3
____ Linen ____
Bath #1 ____ Bath #2 ____ Kitchen ____
Garage ____
Basement ____ Other ____
BATHROOMS--Tubs, shower stalls, toilets, and washbowls
to be free of any dirt, scum, or water rings. Shower
doors, soap racks, and door tracks to be cleaned and
free of debris. Mirrors wiped clean.
BATH #1: Tub or shower ____ Shower door
____ Toilet ____ Sink ____ Mirror
BATH #2: Tub or shower ____ Shower door
____ Toilet ____ Sink ____ Mirror
KITCHEN--All drawers to be cleared of all items and wiped
clean. All appliances to be clean, inside and out, and
empty. Counters, work surfaces, and sink to be clean
and clear of debris. Cupboard and drawer faces to be
wiped clean.
Stove top ____ Stove burners ____ Oven ____
Broiler ____ Refrigerator ____ Dishwasher___
Drawers ____ Counters ____
Work Surfaces ____ Sink ____ Cupboard and
drawer faces ____
WINDOWS--All windows, window sills, and window frames
to be washed. Windows are to be left closed and
locked. Screens or storm window, as appropriate, to be
washed and placed on the correct windows.
Front door ____ Back door ____ Side door ____
Kitchen ____ Living rm. ____ Dining rm. ____
Family rm. ____ Bdrm. #1 ___
Bdrm. #2 ____ Bdrm. #3 ____ Bath #1 ____
Bath #2 ____ Garage ____ Basement ____
Other ____
LIGHT FIXTURES--All light fixtures to be clean and in place.
Front porch ____ Back porch ____ Entrance ____
Kitchen ____ Living rm. ____ Dining rm. ____ Family
rm. ____ Hall ____ Bdrm. #1 ____ Bdrm. #2 ____
Unit 8B, Page 55
Bdrm. #3 ____ Bath #1____ Bath #2 ____ Garage
____ Basement ____ Other ____
FLOORS--Carpets to be steam cleaned, all spots removed.
Linoleum floors to be stripped of wax and cleaned.
Cement and wooden floors to be swept clean and hosed
down or mopped, as appropriate.
Front porch ____ Back porch ____ Entrance ____
Kitchen ____ Living rm. ____ Dining rm. ____ Family
rm. ____ Hall ____ Bdrm. #1 ____ Garage ____
Basement ____ Other ____
GENERAL--The premises, including the yard, must be free of
trash, garbage, holes, or pet droppings. You will be charged for
the removal of these and of any furniture, clothing, or other
items left after you move out.
Be prepared for the fact that the walls will probably need
painting, the carpets will most likely show signs of traffic, and
the woodwork may be a little scuffed. These are unavoidable
facts of life, and shouldn't count against your tenants unless
there are obvious signs of negligence. Make notes of any work
that you think should be charged to the tenants, and show them
why by pointing out the difference between the condition of the
house when they moved in and the way it is now. At the end of
this inspection they should hand over all keys, including any
copies they have had made.
If for some reason your tenants can't accompany you on
this inspection, you should still make a written record of any
items that need to be replaced or repaired at their cost. When
they return the keys to you, give or send them a copy of this
list.
When your departing tenants return their keys, be sure
they have returned as many keys as you gave them. If they
don't, keep their entire key deposit to pay for changing all the
locks.
Even if your tenants return as many keys as you gave
them, you should still change all the locks and it should be your
first order of business. There is no way for you to know how
Unit 8B, Page 56
many copies they might have given to friends or relatives. One
landlady paying an evening visit to her newly vacated property
interrupted an embarrassingly intimate scene: her former
tenant's teenager had given a key to a boyfriend, who was now
using the empty house to entertain his latest conquest!
8.19-2 Clean Vacant Houses
As soon as the house is empty and you have completed
your inspection, take care of any necessary cleaning, painting,
or repairs. Remember: the house or apartment is not ready to
be shown to prospective tenants until it is ready for occupancy.
Every day it stands empty costs you money in lost rents, so it is
important to immediately get everything done and be ready to
interview new applicants.
When you've taken care of any work that will be charged
to the old tenants, immediately itemize the costs, deduct them
from the deposits, and refund any balance remaining. If you
can't get the work done in the time allowed by local law, make
your best estimate and deduct that. Remember to allow a
charge for your own labor if you're doing the work yourself.
Charge the going rate for general handymen, or whatever you
think is fair, but don't cheat yourself. Your time is worth money,
and you deserve to be fairly paid for your efforts.
8.20 KEY 17: WHEN YOU INVITE TENANTS TO
LEAVE
If you follow the screening procedures and management
techniques outlined in both parts of Creative Management and
couple them with your good judgment, you'll be able to greatly
lower your risk of getting undesirable tenants. But just as the
most perfect-looking apple might reveal a rotten spot after you
bite into it, the most seemingly desirable tenants might have
hidden flaws.
Unit 8B, Page 57
When your shiny apple of a tenant becomes rotten, what
do you do? Most people immediately think of eviction, but
there may be another solution. After all, eviction is a legal
process that may drag out for months and involve costly and
time-consuming legal action. Meanwhile, your rotten tenant is
living in your property without paying rent, or is causing so
much trouble that the neighbors are threatening to sue you for
maintaining a public nuisance.
8.20-1 Talk Before You Act
Your first reaction to a tenant gone bad should always be
attempt at reasonable problem-solving. Visit the tenant at the
property and try to find out what the problem is. Remind the
tenant that he signed a legal contract to pay the rent and abide
by your rules and regulations, and ask why this isn't being done.
Listen to what he says, and see whether you can come to an
understanding. Just make sure the "understanding" doesn't
involve you losing your rent or allowing the tenants to destroy
your house.
When the problem is financial some managers
recommend putting the problem right back in the tenant's lap.
Look very concerned, express sorrow and sympathy, and then
say something like, "Gee, that's terrible." If you don't pay the
rent by Friday, I'm not going to be able to pay the bank. If we
can't come up with that mortgage payment, they're likely to
start a foreclosure action, and then we'll both lose the house.
What do you think we ought to do?"
If the tenants can't come up with a solution, the next step
is simply to get them out of the house. Serve them with a
Three-day Notice to Quit as soon as the rent is five days past
due. If they don't seem to be planning to move, try giving them
some encouragement before you start formal eviction
procedures. Explain that if you have to proceed with the
eviction, it will go on their credit record and you won't be able
to give them a reference for another rental. Tell them if they'll
move right away, however, they can avoid these unpleasant
consequences.
Unit 8B, Page 58
If your tenants refuse to move because they can't afford
to, it might be cheaper in the long run for you to offer them
some assistance. Landlording expert Leigh Robinson suggests
you offer them $100 to move. Visit the tenants with a one
hundred dollar bill and a pair of scissors. Cut the bill in two
right before their eyes, give them half, and tell them they can
have the other half when they vacate your property. Less
dramatic, but equally effective, measures might include offering
to store their possessions for them until they have a place to
move to or offering to pay the price of a rental truck or trailer
for them on moving day.
8.20-2 Control Your Temper
Whatever you do, don't allow your emotions to rule. It
can be exasperating to have tenants who refuse to pay, who are
trashing your property, or who are ruining your good
relationship with their neighbors. But don't let your temper and
frustration get the upper hand the way Sonny U's did.
Sonny, a farmer, inherited his parents' house in town. He
divided it into apartments and rented the upper story to a
woman who stopped paying rent after her second month in
residence. This upper story could be reached only by an
outside staircase. After five months of receiving no rent, Sonny
drove his tractor into town and parked it in the alley behind the
house. He waited until his non-paying tenant went out, and then
he drove the tractor into her access stairway, totally destroying
it. She couldn't get in and couldn't reach her clothes, food, or,
as she later told the court, her checkbook. Sonny ended up
paying a judgment for causing his tenant unnecessary
inconvenience and mental anguish.
Don't let yourself be drawn into this sort of retaliation
against tenants. Removing the doors from the tenants' house or
apartment, changing their locks, removing their possessions
while they are gone, shutting off their utilities, and threatening or
causing bodily harm to them, their guests, or their pets are all
illegal activities. Harassment or attacks of any sort from you will
only make a bad situation worse. It can also cause the tenants
Unit 8B, Page 59
to strike back, either at you or your property, and can lead to
major losses.
If your peaceful efforts to remove your tenants don't
work and/or drive you close to your breaking point, remove
yourself from the situation. You don't have to suffer undue
strain. After all, there are other things in your life besides this
one unpleasant matter--even though, at the time, it's difficult to
think of anything else.
You'll need to work closely with your attorney all through
the eviction process, so let your attorney handle the unpleasant
details. He or she is more detached and can be more objective
than you can in this situation, and will represent you better than
you can if you're under an emotional strain. Your attorney will
be able to help you with such intimidating tactics as finding a
sheriff, marshall or deputy who will serve the necessary papers
in full uniform. Many peace officers earn a few extra dollars by
performing such chores in their off-duty hours, and your lawyer
will know who they are.
Remember, too, that once you start an eviction process,
you can't accept any money from the tenants you're trying to
get rid of. If they offer you as little as a dollar, and you take it, it
can automatically cancel the notice you have already filed and
you will have to start again from the beginning.
8.20-3 Prepare Yourself for Court Appearances
Occasionally, really bad tenants will refuse to move out
until you take them to court and get a judge's eviction order.
The courts are run by people, and regardless of how laws are
written, the human factor affects every legal hearing.
Unfortunately, some people regard landlords as greedy,
heartless monsters who stop at nothing to take advantage of
poor, defenseless renters who can't afford to own their own
homes. To keep that kind of a perception from influencing your
case, you must present yourself and your eviction in the best
possible light. Here are four things you should keep in mind to
make your case stronger.
Unit 8B, Page 60
M 1. Never lose your temper or become abusive toward
your tenants in court. You want to be dignified and business
like about this; don't give anyone reason for thinking that you
are pursuing the eviction out of any personal grudge or
prejudice. Your position must be firm but unemotional: You
have a mortgage to pay. Your tenant signed a contract agreeing
to pay a certain amount of rent. Your tenant's failure to live up
to that agreement leaves you no option but to ask the tenant to
leave so that you can rent the property to someone who will
make regular payments. You simply cannot afford to let the
tenant live in your house for free, no matter how personally
sympathetic you feel toward him and his situation.
If the reason for the eviction is the tenant's failure to abide
by the written rules of the tenancy, your approach must be
much the same. The tenant knew the rules, agreed to follow
them, and has not done so. The result has been unpleasant for
the neighbors, damaging to your property, or a combination of
the two. The tenant was warned, failed to change, and has left
you no alternative but to ask for eviction.
M 2. Use some subtle courtroom psychology. You don't
want to present yourself as a billionaire slum-lord riding
roughshod over a pitiful, penniless renter. An eviction hearing is
not the place to show up in a custom-tailored silk suit,
handmade shoes, and your heaviest gold and diamond jewelry.
If you do, you'll look like a stereotypical greedy landlord
bleeding your tenants so you can pay for your personal yacht
and Jamaican vacation hideaway. On the other hand, you can
do yourself just as much damage by going too far in the other
direction. Don't show up in court wearing greasy old work
clothes and paint-splattered shoes with holes in the soles. Most
people have enough respect for the courts to appear at their
best when they're called before a judge--and most judges
expect it.
Dress nicely, then, but not too nicely! You want to
present yourself as an average person who is working a little
harder than average to try to get ahead in the world--and one
to whom a couple of months' lost rent could mean financial
disaster.
Unit 8B, Page 61
M 3. Show respect for everyone involved in the hearing.
If the tenant has a legal representative, don't be drawn into a
heated argument with him. He's just doing his job of making the
tenant's case look better--even if he makes outrageous
accusations and distorts facts. Remain calm and answer
factually, backing up your statements with your written records,
and the truth of your position will become apparent.
M 4. The final and most important item to remember is
that you must have solid evidence to support your case.
Keeping good records will pay off for you if you ever have to
take a tenant to court. Whenever you think you might be
heading for a problem with a tenant, start collecting evidence in
the property file for that rental. Make detailed notes regarding
every aspect of your problem, including dates and places of
discussions you've had with the tenants or their neighbors, and
copies of any warning letters or legal documents you sent the
tenant. Keep track of every excuse or promise the tenant gives
you, and follow it up with a written confirmation of your
understanding. Send the original to the tenant, and keep the
copy on file. It doesn't have to be anything elaborate; you might
use a note similar to this one:
Dear Tim and Tina Baxter:
After our conversation this morning, I was left
with the understanding that Tim has been
temporarily laid off from his job with Smith
Machinery, but will be going back to work in two
weeks. Meanwhile, you are trying to borrow some
money from Tina's parents and expect to have the
rent for me by the fifth of this month. I will expect
payment no later than that date, and if you cannot
make it, notify me immediately.
Sincerely,
Lawrence Marcus
With evidence like this, you will build the strongest
possible case for your side. Once you've gone through the
eviction hearing and gotten your tenant out, put it behind you.
You may be awarded a judgment, but don't make collecting it
Unit 8B, Page 62
the crusade of you life. The important thing now is to put your
property back into rentable condition and find a good, stable
tenant who will make regular payments before you lose any
more money.
8.21 KEY 18: STOP MANAGING
Travis N. had twelve rental homes, two duplexes, a fourplex,
and two six-plexes. He was a good manager, utilizing the
techniques we've talked about in this unit, but the management
of all those properties was running him ragged. He still
maintained a full-time job, and he was still trying to expand his
portfolio. But it seemed he never had time to do more than run
in place. Rather than improve his situation--and rather than
enjoy his life--he felt he was falling far short of his long-term
goals.
A friend suggested that Travis hire a professional
management firm to relieve him of some of the hassles, but
Travis just did not want to let go. "No one knows these
properties the way I do," he said. "No one can do it the way I
can."
He may have been right, of course. But he was also right
that he was not making any progress toward his broader goals.
And he hated to get out of bed in the morning.
Finally he relaxed his hold on the management of his
properties. He got several referrals for good management firms,
interviewed officers of those firms, talked to a number of their
customer, and signed on the one that seemed best.
The result has been exhilarating. "The monkey is off my
back," he said. "I don't know how in the world I managed all
those properties for so long." Now he has been able to quit his
job and focus even more clearly on buying more excellent
properties. He is clearly on the road to financial independence.
Odd as it may sound, the final step in managing your
rental property successfully is to give up management. By the
time you've handled several sets of tenants on your own, you'll
Unit 8B, Page 63
be thoroughly familiar with what it takes to go through the entire
process. The experience you'll get is an important part of the
knowledge you'll use in judging whether someone else is doing
a good job of managing your properties for you, and in
understanding and helping that person when problems occur.
But once you have the experience, doing your own
management is simply a waste of time that can be better spent
adding to your portfolio. As soon as you have the experience
under your own belt, and as soon as your cash flow allows, hire
a good management company to take some of the load off your
back.
They will charge you for the service, of course--
anywhere from 5% to 10% of the gross income. But if you
have prepared your bottom line well, it will be a bargain--
because it will liberate you from the tasks of management and
leave you in a supervisory capacity.
After you've selected a management company, you still
need to take care of certain details regarding your properties.
Go over the monthly and yearly rental income and expense
statements, and question any items you don't understand. Keep
track of everything the management company does in your
name. And don't forget to make regular inspections of your
property, paying particular attention to the kinds of tenants the
company is putting into your houses.
Aside from these few chores, you will instead be able to
forget about management most of the time, and concentrate
instead on your primary goal: finding and negotiating enough
good property buys to make you independently wealthy. And
that, after all, is why you are involved in rental real estate!
A NOTE ON EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT
Investing in income real estate is a proven system. It
works. It isn't some collection of questionable methods
contrived by an intellectual who has never tried to put them to
work. Many thousands of people have used investment real
estate to realize their dreams of financial freedom.
Unit 8B, Page 64
That's what we want for you. And that's why we've
included such comprehensive material on management.
Because you'll never reach your financial goals, regardless of
how many properties you buy, if you don't know how to
manage them properly. Here are some key points to keep in
mind:
M You need to do your homework. Find out everything you
can about the neighborhood where your property is located.
Make acquaintance with the close neighbors. They can become
your allies later, and can provide you with important information
you might need about your tenants.
M Do your homework, too, when it comes time to choose
tenants. No matter how long your house or rental unit has been
vacant, don't lunge at the first person who come along
expressing interest. No matter how desperate you are to get
your house rented, take the time to check the information on
the application form your tenants fill out! It's much better to
have your house vacant for another week than to rent to
tenants who turn out to be a disaster.
M Remember that you are running a business. The methods of
effective management might seem a little rough to you, but
you're not purchasing and managing properties for the social
aspect of it, are you? No. You're purchasing properties to
make money. You need to choose tenants who will help you
make money, and you need to deal with them in a way that will
protect your investment. It's as simple as that.
M At the same time, you can manage in a win/win way. You'll
win because tenants will pay you to maintain your real estate
investment. The tenants will win because you're providing them
with a home they can enjoy for a price they feel comfortable
with. But when a tenant seeks to play a win/lose game with
you, insist on your right to be a winner, too. If the tenant cannot
play the game that way, it's time to deal him out.
Unit 8B, Page 65
8.22 HOW WELL HAVE YOU LEARNED FROM
PART B?
The better you've learned the information and concepts in
this unit, the more you will be able to apply them. Test your
learning by answering the following questions. Do not skip this
step--the best way to help the information stay in your head is
to reprocess it through your fingertips! (NOTE: If you are
uncertain of an answer, check back through this unit. Answers
can be found in the preceding pages.)
1. Why is selecting good tenants such a crucial element in your
investment program?
2. Two men with three children come to look at your rental.
They explain that one of the men will rent the house, and that
until he goes back to his wife, the second man will stay with the
first man. Do you rent the house to the first man under these
conditions? Why, or why not?
3. Two women and a child inspect your rental. They are nice,
likable people with good jobs, and the child is very wellbehaved.
The women tell you that they consider themselves
married to each other, and they will both sign your lease. Do
you have any grounds to refuse them the house if they are your
best applicants? Why, or why not?
4. It is the Friday night of Memorial Day weekend. Your house
has been standing empty for three weeks, and your family
wants to go on a camping trip over the holiday. A family offers
you all cash for rent and deposits plus a $100 cash bonus if you
will let them move in over the holiday weekend and check their
application later. Do you let them move in? Why, or why not?
5. Why is it essential that you verify the information prospective
tenants give you on their application forms?
6. You are verifying the information on an application. The
renters' present landlady tells you they are excellent people who
always pay their rent on time, keep their home beautifully clean,
and have outstandingly nice children. Then you speak to their
Unit 8B, Page 66
former landlord, he tells you they were constantly behind on
their rent, never cleaned the house, allowed their children to
destroy the landscaping, and were finally evicted owing three
months' rent. Which one do you believe? Why?
7. You have two families that check out perfectly. One is white,
with two children; the husband is a garage mechanic, the wife is
a part-time secretary taking night courses in bookkeeping, and
both have held their jobs for four years. The other family is
black, with one child; the husband is assistant manager at a
local bank, and the wife is in her second year of law school.
They have been in the area for sixteen months. Which
applicants do you favor, and why?
8. In checking over an application, you consult your file of
applicants you have turned down in the past. You find that
these same people applied to you two years ago and that you
rejected them because of poor credit and a weak job history.
None of the information on their current application agrees with
anything on their previous one. Do you continue checking them
out? Why?
9. How can you make certain that new tenants understand
exactly what's expected of them?
10. What are the main functions of the Move-In Ready
Checklist?
11. What is the discount rent program, and how does it work?
12. Your best tenant phones with the news that he just got a
good promotion at work, and he wants you to come to a big
party to celebrate. What do you do? Explain you answer.
a. Accept, and ask how to dress.
b. Tell him curtly that you don't have time for such
nonsense.
c. Congratulate him genuinely, and politely say that
you're sorry, but you have other plans that night.
13. You are a married man; a gorgeous female tenant tells you
she doesn't have the rent money, but offers to make it up to you
Unit 8B, Page 67
some other way. Which is the wisest response? Explain you
answer.
a. Sit down and ask her what she has in mind.
b. Tell her you don't have time to discuss it now, but
you'll come back when your schedule isn't so
crowded.
c. Threaten to call the police and charge her with
soliciting.
d. Tell her you must receive cash payment by the fifth
of the month. Then tell your wife what happened,
and ask her to collect from this tenant in the future.
14. How often should you or your representative inspect each
of your properties?
15. You go to one of you houses and find the tenants have
installed paneling in the living room. It looks good, but they
didn't have your permission. What do you tell them? Explain
your answer.
a. Nothing.
b. They must tear the paneling down and restore the
wall to its original state.
c. Next time they do anything to the house, they must
ask you first, and you might even pay for some of
the materials.
d. You are going to serve them with an eviction notice
for breaking the terms of your Rental Agreement.
16. Every day you accumulate small pieces of paper containing
receipts, notes about properties, and lists of appointments.
What is the best thing to do with these? Explain your answer.
a. Pile them on the dresser when you empty your
pockets at night.
b. Leave them in the bottom of your briefcase or
purse until you get around to sorting them out.
c. Sit down at the end of each day and transfer them
to the appropriate file folder or ledger sheet.
d. Put them all into a folder labeled "Miscellaneous"
and sort them out at the end of the month.
Unit 8B, Page 68
17. You send all your tenants notice of a rent increase, and
most of them accept it quietly. However, one calls you and
insists that an increase of $37 a month over the $340 she pays
now is too much, and she can't afford it. What is your
response?
18. How often should you consider making a rent increase?
19. What is a good way to increase the rent amount without
making the increase seem arbitrary? When is the best time to
raise the rent?
20. A very nice family has lived in one of your rentals for the
past five years. In that time they have been late with their rent
only twice, and both times paid before the fifth of the month.
When you offer them new kitchen countertops to mark their
fifth anniversary in your house, they say they would prefer that
you install a swing set for their young children this year, and
wait until next year for the countertops. Which would be the
best solution? Explain your answer.
a. Tell them they must accept the countertops or
nothing.
b. Give them the swing set.
c. Present them with a "Good Tenant's Bonus" in cash
equal to the amount you would have paid for the
countertops, and let them buy what they want.
21. What are some good ways to thank tenants for being good
renters?
22. Your excellent tenants of four years move out and you
refund all their deposits. Later, while painting the kitchen, your
handyman discovers that the dishwasher has been broken for
some time, and it looks as though the tenants were at fault.
What can you do?
a. Contact the tenants and ask them to pay for fixing
the dishwasher.
b. Call your insurance agent to see if your policy
covers repairs to the dishwasher.
c. Ask your attorney to file a lawsuit against the
former tenants.
Unit 8B, Page 69
d. Rewrite your Move-Out Inspection Checklist to
remind you to look inside the appliances when
tenants move.
23. Give three reasons why good record keeping is so
important.
24. You have to go to court to testify against a tenant who
stopped paying rent three months ago. What should you take
with you?
25. What is the best way to handle a tenant who falls behind in
paying rent?
26. You now own twenty properties and have plans to buy ten
more this year. How much time should you put into property
management? Explain your answer.
a. Whatever it takes.
b. Five hours a week, and anything you can't get done
in that time will have to wait until next week.
c. Two hours a month to check the accounts from a
property management firm.
d. None.
8.23 PUTTING PART B INTO PRACTICE
The information in this unit has given you a pretty
comprehensive guide to managing properties. But book learning
will take you only so far--you have to get out and practice what
you've learned if you want to make the information truly work
for you.
How can you "practice" the details of landlording if you
don't actually own properties you need to manage? The answer
is incredibly simple. Do the following assignments, and do
nothing more. We don't expect you to go out and buy real
estate before you are ready just so you'll have something to
manage. We are asking that you do a few simple exercises just
for practice, just to see how some of the techniques associated
with good management work.
Unit 8B, Page 70
Of course, if you already own a property or two, you
should start practicing the techniques you've learned
immediately. You may already have tenants you shouldn't have-
-tenants you wouldn't have rented to if you had known how to
properly screen. Don't waste precious time worrying about
what "should have been." Start this minute to practice effective
management techniques, and vow to do better the next time!
In the meantime, go ahead with the following assignments.
You need not do all of them; select those that will be most
helpful to you in your circumstances. But don't skimp in your
efforts. You'll be hurting only yourself.
1. Sharpen your eyes. When you are waiting
somewhere--a store, an office building, the local shopping mall-
-watch people around you. What can you tell about them and
their relationships with others from their clothes, posture,
words, or actions? Make notes of what you see, just for
practice.
2. Shop for credit help. Contact local credit bureaus and
ask them what their membership and reporting fees are. Get in
touch with apartment owner's or landlord associations and ask
them if they have a group membership in a credit bureau. Find
out how you can use the credit bureau membership. Talk to the
professionals on your investment team and see if any of them
can help you get credit reports. Look for someone you know
who has worked in lending and credit--whether in a bank, a
department store, a finance company, or a collection office--
and talk to him or her about what is involved in checking credit.
Ask for any tips or shortcuts, and examples of the most
common problems.
3. Assemble your tools. Go to an office supply store and
buy a dozen folders, a receipt book, two or three pens, some
carbon paper, and a small notebook. Label your file folders
with the names of the forms you will use, and find a suitable
container for them. A box works well, as does a single drawer
in a filing cabinet.
Unit 8B, Page 71
4. Create more tools. Study the sample forms provided
in this management unit, and decide on any changes or
additions you would make. Type up your individualized forms,
make two dozen copies of each, and file them in their
appropriate folders.
5. Learn the laws. Review Parts A and B of this unit and
jot down the local laws you will need to know, such as whether
a landlord is required to keep tenant deposits in a separate
bank account, how long you may keep deposits before
refunding them to tenants who have moved, and what the exact
deadlines and procedures are for evictions in your state. Then
make an appointment to discuss these matters with an attorney
or other qualified advisor.
6. Fill out the application form. Get a copy of the Rental
Application Form and fill it out, using the situation of a friend or
family member to supply the details.
7. Figure proration. Suppose that you are renting out a
home for $525 a month and that new tenants are moving in on
the ninth of May. Prorate their rent to show what they owe for
May's rent. Or, if you are collecting a full month's rent for the
first month, prorate what they will owe for June.
8. Adapt tenant policies. Review the Tenant Policies
contained in this unit. Adapt them to your own needs and
desires.
9. Fill out an agreement. Get a copy of a Lease-Rental
Agreement and fill it out. Carefully evaluate each line to make
sure you agree with it terms.
10. Fill out a checklist. Get a copy of the Move-In Ready
Checklist and fill it out on your own home. Become familiar
with the kinds of problems to look for.
11. Make a list. Think of all the ways you can say thank
you to good tenants. Put them down in a list, and file it away for
future reference.
Unit 8B, Page 72
THE MOST FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
ABOUT MANAGING PROPERTIES
The following questions are among those most frequently
asked concerning property management.
1. "The house I bought has no refrigerator, washer, or dryer.
Do I have to supply these appliances for my tenants?"
That depends. Make careful note of what other landlords
in your area supply when you do your survey of the
competition. You'll buy them. However, if you find out they
haven't got something like this they need, you can always offer
to rent them one until they can buy their own.
2. "The carpets in my new rental are a little worn in places. Do
I have to replace them all?"
That depends on the amount and extent of damage.
Again, check the competition. If your carpets are about
average compared with others, don't worry about it. However,
if they're worn down to the nap or have holes in them, you'll
probably have to do something. Don't recarpet the entire house
unless it really needs it. Carpet stores and large department
stores often have remnants available at bargain prices, and
many of these are pieces large enough to do an entire room.
Remember, there's nothing wrong with giving the living room a
different kind of carpet than that in the bedroom.
3. "Do I have to allow animals in my rentals? I've heard real
horror stories from other landlords about this."
That's entirely up to you. The main reason we suggest you
do allow them is that it enlarges the pool of potential tenants. If
you screen the pet and charge higher rent and an extra pet
deposit, and if you include in your rental agreement a clause
that makes the tenant responsible for all damage caused by the
pet, you should be protected.
4. "Do I have to supply things like vacuum cleaners and lawn
mowers for my tenants?"
You shouldn't have to. People who want to live in houses
with carpets and yards usually expect to provide these tools for
Unit 8B, Page 73
themselves. If they don't own them already, they should be
encouraged to buy them. However, if you find out they haven't
got something like this they need, you can always offer to rent
them one until they can buy their own.
5. "The house I bought came with a set of play equipment in the
yard. Should I leave this in place to make it more attractive to
families with children?"
No. Children often get hurt on such equipment, and if you
supply it, you could be held liable for any injuries. Remove it
immediately. The same advice goes for tree houses, swimming
pools, and any other potentially harmful "attractions."
6. "There's some kind of plant disease in the shrubs around my
rental, and the only way to cure it is to remove all the plants and
burn them. Should I do this right away?"
Unless the disease is one that would spread rapidly to
every yard on the block, probably not. It would be better to
rent the house first, and then replace the shrubs. If you do it
while the house is vacant, it will decrease your chances of
attracting a tenant until the yard work is done, prolonging your
vacancy period.
7. "All the rentals in my area rent for about $500 a month, but I
think this is unrealistically low compared to what house
payments would be for these people. Why shouldn't I be the
first landlord to start a trend toward higher rents?"
There's no reason you can't try this, if you go about it
right. If you're successful, most of the landlords in your area will
probably follow your lead soon. Remember, though, that you're
going against the market trend, and you should proceed
carefully. Your house will have to offer more than those that
rent for less, whether it's a better location, a better kitchen, or
extra amenities, unless housing is very scarce. Start by charging
only a little more than the others, perhaps $25 a month, and be
prepared to wait longer to find a tenant. Set yourself a cutoff
date--a day when, if the house is still vacant, you can drop your
rent back down to $500 and wait out the average vacancy
period without endangering your financial position. If you can't
do this and really need more than the market rent, why not try a
lease option?
Unit 8B, Page 74
8. "Why should I rent to people with children? Don't children
cause property damage?"
Children don't necessarily cause any more property
damage than adults. In fact, children usually do less harm to
your property than some classes of older people. The reason
we recommend families with children is that these people are
more likely to settle down and stay with you for longer periods,
causing you fewer vacancy problems. Adults without children
are more apt to move on a whim, to split up and go their
separate ways, to quit their jobs without finding another
position first, to invite other people to move in with them
without your knowledge, or to throw wild parties where
irresponsible strangers are inclined to cause damage far beyond
what most children are capable of. While some adults with
children also behave in these ways, it happens less often. The
responsibility of taking care of the children and holding down
jobs to support them calms most people down considerably.
9. "How can I ensure that my rental will attract only the most
stable, solid citizens?"
You can't. While following a solid management program
and practicing reasonable care will eliminate most tenant
problems, there simply are no guarantees that you will never get
a bad renter. Every business has its risks, and this is one of
them in real estate investment. The best that you can do is to
buy a property carefully, maintain it well, screen applicants to
the best of your ability, and be prepared to act if anything goes
wrong. This is one of the few opportunities you have in today's
economy to exercise so much control over your own financial
well-being, and you must be prepared to accept the
responsibility as well as the profits.
10. "What if I take an instant dislike to a prospective tenant?
Do I still have to rent to him if no one better applies?"
That depends on why you don't like the prospective
tenant and on how many other applicants are almost as good. If
your dislike is based on a personal prejudice, such as race or
religion, you have no legal grounds on which to refuse the
applicant. On the other hand, if you object to a tenant whose
personality is totally impossible for you to deal with, you may
be able to support a refusal on grounds of personal preference.
Unit 8B, Page 75
You should consider this very carefully, though: you will most
likely have very little contact with the tenant once the house is
rented. Your rental decisions should be based on business
considerations, not the sort of personal tastes you would use in
choosing a friend.
11. "What should I do if people take a rental application home
with them and send it back to me with some of the information
missing?"
Call them and find out why they didn't supply all of the
information you asked for. Don't start checking them out until
you either have all the facts or a reasonable, believable
explanation for why the application is incomplete.
12. "I don't know anything about checking credit, and I don't
have an interest in learning, but I don't want to join a local
credit bureau, either. Is there any other way I can get the credit
facts on applicants?"
Not really, unless you can afford to hire someone to do it
for you. Consider asking an employment agency that provides
temporaries for someone with credit experience in a bank,
finance company, or collection agency.
13. "My sister and her husband just separated. He's a good
guy, and I have nothing against him. He asked me if he could
stay in one of my vacancies until he finds an apartment, and said
he would clean up the house and keep an eye on it for me until
I find a tenant. Is there any reason I shouldn't do this?"
Unfortunately, there is. You may have nothing against the
man, but are you sure he doesn't want to get back at your
entire family for his marital problems? People going through
separation and divorce often act in irrational ways. Also, once
he has moved in, it may be difficult to get him to move out of
your rental until he's ready.
If you're sure you can depend on him and really want to
help, draft a written agreement that covers exactly what work
he intends to do, the quality of work that you will accept, and
the amount of notice that you will give him to leave. Also insert
a clause that will make him responsible for losses to you if he
breaks the agreement or does damage to your property.
Unit 8B, Page 76
14. "I was really impressed with a couple, and I allowed them
to move in before I finished checking their application. Now
I've completed my investigation, and I discovered some
unsettling facts. Although they've been good risks since they
moved to my town, they had a lot of financial trouble in another
state about two years ago, were evicted, and skipped out on
their bills. Is there anything I can do about this now?"
Yes. You have several alternatives. One is to talk to
them, tell them you just learned of their former financial
problems, and ask for their side of the story. You may find that
they had temporary problems that are under control now. Then
keep a close eye on them in the future to see that they stay in
control. If they made misleading statements on their application
in an attempt to hide their former difficulties and you don't want
to give them the benefit of the doubt, you may have grounds for
eviction. You could also raise their rent by such a large
percentage that they will decide on their own to leave.
15. "I rented a house to an elderly couple living on a pension,
and the husband has since died. The widow doesn't want to
move, but wants to ask her son and daughter-in-law to move in
with her. Should I allow this?"
There's no reason you shouldn't. Simply tell her that you'll
have to treat it as a new tenancy. Have the son and his wife fill
out an application, check it out as carefully as you would any
new application, and have all of them sign a new Rental
Agreement. If the children don't meet the same requirements
you would apply to anyone else, you'll have to ask the widow
to continue living alone or to come up with different roommates
who meet your requirements.
16. "The people who live next door to one of my rentals call me
three or four times a week with complaints about my tenants. I
have talked to my tenants, and they claim they behave like
every other family on the street. They say the complaining
homeowners are overly fussy and nosey. What should I do?"
The first thing you should do is talk to some of your
tenants' other neighbors. Explain what's been going on, tell them
that you don't want your tenants doing anything they shouldn't,
and ask for outside opinions. If you find that your tenants have
not really been causing a problem, you will have to tell the
Unit 8B, Page 77
unhappy neighbors that your tenants have a right to conduct
their lives in privacy. If you find that your tenants are at fault,
warn them to change their ways and tell them that continued
disturbances may be grounds for eviction.
17. "My state law requires that all tenant deposits must be
accounted for and refunds made within seven days after the
tenants vacate. My handyman sometimes needs as much as two
weeks' notice to schedule a job. I've asked him to estimate the
cost of repairs so I can make the refunds, but he doesn't always
stay within the estimates he gives me. I've been losing money on
almost every vacancy. How do you change a state law?"
Talk to your local state representative or state senator.
Join with other landlords and start a political campaign to get
the law changed. In the meantime, there are other things you
can do. Look for a new handyman, or give your old one more
notice. Review your handyman's previous bills for vacancy
repairs and maintenance; you may find that you can estimate
about how much the overruns average, and you can include that
in your estimate. For example, you might find that your
handyman's labor charges usually run about 15 percent above
the estimate. Add 15 percent when you make out the tenants'
statements, and put (est.) next to the charge. If the bill comes to
less than your estimate, you can simply forward the difference
to your former tenants.
18. "I went to inspect some of my houses the other day, and
found that one of the tenants has painted his living room a
horrible shade of pink with red trim. it doesn't go with anything,
and I'm afraid it will take ten coats of paint to cover that red.
How can I get him to change it?"
As long as he lives there, you don't have to. Obviously,
he likes it, or he wouldn't have done it. However, write him a
strong letter informing him that his paint job is against the terms
of his tenancy because he didn't get your permission. Tell him
that he must either change it immediately or guarantee in writing
that he will pay the expense and assume the responsibility of
restoring the premises to their original condition--to your
satisfaction--when he moves. End you letter with a strong
warning that in the future he must get your written approval for
Unit 8B, Page 78
all changes (cosmetic or otherwise) to your property or you will
be forced to evict him for violation of your rental policies.
19. "I finally got rid of a family that hasn't paid rent for four
months. It burns me up every time I think of the money and
time I lost on these people. I'd like to get back at them and give
them a little taste of the kind of trouble they caused me, but
they've moved out of state. Can I hire a skip tracer to track
them down and then garnishee their wages to pay me back?
That depends on whether you can get a legal judgment
for damages and loss against them. Consult an attorney. In the
meantime, be glad that you've ended an unpleasant situation;
concentrate your energies on getting better tenants this time.
Even if you find these people, there's no guarantee you will be
paid back: many people with bad debts simply move on every
time one of their creditors catches up with them. If you continue
to pursue them, you may find yourself involved in an endless
game of hide and seek, and they have the whole United States
to hide in. This kind of game will only cost you more time,
money, and energy, with no way to know if you will ever be
able to collect the debt. If your initial efforts to collect from
them are unsuccessful, write them off as a bad debt and put the
whole business out of your mind. There are many more
pleasant and profitable ways to spend your time. Rather than
trying to get even, use the time and money you would spend
pursuing them to find and buy another property. That way you'll
be independently wealthy that much sooner, and they'll still be
insecure renters hiding from their debts. As you relax on some
sunny tropical beach, you can compare your life to theirs and
feel smugly triumphant. This is what is meant by the saying,
"Living well is the best revenge."
Unit 8B, Page 79
RENTAL APPLICATION
Please fill out all information requested. The application will not be considered unless completely filled
out. Date____________
Name__________________________________ Soc. Sec. No.___________
Address_______________________________ Driver's License No.:
(street)
____________________________zip_______ ________________________
(city) (state)
Phone numbers: work___________________ home_____________________
Names of others who will be living on premises (if applicable):
Co-Tenant:___________________________ Soc. Sec. No.____________
License No.:_____________
Name_________________________________ (relationship)____________
Name_________________________________ (relationship)____________
How long have you lived at current address? From______to________
Name of current landlord________________________Phone___________
How long at previous address? From_______to_______.
Name of previous landlord_______________________Phone___________
Car make______Year____model__________license plate no.__________
Occupation Information:
In each case indicate name and nature of employment or business, address and phone number, starting
and ending dates, name of immediate supervisor and phone number, and ending monthly gross income:
Current:________________________________________________________
Unit 8B, Page 80
________________________________________________________________
Previous:_______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Co-Tenant:______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Credit References:
Banks (list names of banks, address and phone numbers, account
numbers):_______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Credit references (revolving accounts, credit cards--list business and account
numbers):__________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Character References (list at least two persons who can attest to your good character; give relationship
and phone numbers):______
________________________________________________________________
History:
1. Have you ever filed a petition for bankruptcy? Y___N___
2. Have you ever been evicted from a rental property? Y___N___
3. Have you ever had a prison record? Y___N___
4. Have you ever willfully withheld rent when due? Y___N___
Declarations: I declare that the information given in this application is true, and that any
misrepresentations by me will be grounds for terminating any future rental agreement entered into on the
basis of this information. I further give permission for the person or persons receiving this application to
make contact with persons I have listed as references and verify any information herein provided. I
further give permission for a credit check to be made of my file in any credit bureau.
Applicant____________________ Co-Applicant_____________________
(signed) (signed)
Print names:_________________ _____________________
Unit 8B, Page 81
Date signed:_________________ __________________
Unit 8B, Page 82
RESIDENTIAL RENTAL AGREEMENT
This Residential Rental Agreement entered into this_______day of ______________19___,
between______________________ hereinafter called Lessor,
and______________________________________________
of__________________________________County of,_________State of _________, hereinafter
called Lessee:
WITNESSETH
Lessor does hereby lease and rent unto Lessee, and Lessee does hereby take as tenant under Lessor,
the dwelling accommodations known as
situated at________, County of________, State of____, to
be used by Lessee as a lawful private dwelling from the______th day of _____19___, to the____th
day of______ , 19___inclusive, a term of three months more or less; thereafter from month to month
unless terminated by at least 30 days written notice from either party to the other. Said
accommodations are rented for occupancy of____Adults and____Children.
IN CONSIDERATION WHEREOF, and of the covenants hereinafter expressed, it is covenanted and
agreed as follows:
1. Lessee agrees to pay to Lessor, or Lessor's agent, in advance, at the office of Lessor or said agent
or by mail to Lessor at_____________________________________, on the first day of each month
of said term, as rent for said premises, the sum of ________________________Dollars
($_____) per month; the time of payment of each monthly installment is made the essence of this
agreement. Lessee may deduct twenty dollars ($20.00) per month discount if rent is paid on time (in no
case later than the fifth of the month or with a postmark no later than the fifth of the month).
2. Lessee shall not permit any unlawful and immoral practice to be committed on premises; nor shall he
permit them to be used as a boarding or lodging house, for rooming or school purposes, nor for any
purpose which will increase the insurance rate; nor shall he permit to be kept or used on the premises
inflammable fluids or explosives without the consent of Lessor; nor permit them to be used for any
purpose which will injure the reputation of the building or which will disturb the tenants of the building or
the inhabitants of the neighborhood.
3. Lessee has examined the premises and is satisfied with the physical condition and his taking
possession is conclusive evidence of receipt of them in good order and repair (any exceptions are to be
described by Lessee in writing and made part of this agreement), and the Lessee agrees to keep said
premises in a clean and satisfactory condition, and, upon termination of this tenancy, will leave said
premises, equipment and furnishings in as good condition as when entered upon, except for reasonable
Unit 8B, Page 83
wear and tear or damage by the elements or by fire; and in the event of damage or injury to said
premises, except as otherwise provided herein, said Lessee shall pay for all such damages. Note that
Lessee will be responsible for each instance of repair or maintenance within the unit that costs less than
$20.00. Should any instance of ongoing repairs or maintenance in the unit exceed a cost of $20.00 or
more, the Lessor shall pay for same.
4. Lessee agrees to pay all electric power and light, gas and telephone charges; and for dry-cleaning of
drapes and professional cleaning of carpets during tenancy, and immediately prior to termination,
except as noted after this paragraph. In addition, Lessee agrees that the professional cleaning of the
carpets upon termination of the tenancy will be paid for out of the security deposit paid to Lessor by
Lessee at the beginning of the tenancy. Lessee also agrees to arrange for cleaning the premises upon
termination of the tenancy, including stove, oven, fridge, walls, sinks, toilets, floors, closets, window
ledges, etc., and to leave the yard free of debris or clutter of any kind. Should the Lessor determine,
upon inspection, that this cleaning has not been accomplished to the satisfaction of the Lessor, then
Lessee shall agree to pay for cleaning such premises by professional cleaners at the current reasonable
rate per day.
5. Lessee shall not have the right or power to sublet the premises or any part thereof, or to transfer or
assign this rental agreement without the written consent of Lessor; nor shall he offer any portion of the
premises for a sublease by placing on the same any "to rent," "furnished room," "rooms to let" or similar
sign or notice or by advertising the same in any newspaper or place or manner whatsoever without the
consent in writing of the Lessor.
6. It is expressly agreed and understood by the Lessor and Lessee that the Lessor shall not be liable for
any damage or injury by water or fire or any other cause which may be sustained by the Lessee or
other person or for any damage or injury resulting from carelessness, negligence or improper conduct
on the part of any other tenant or agents or employees. LESSOR STRONGLY ADVISES LESSEE
TO OBTAIN HIS OWN RENTERS POLICY OF INSURANCE TO COVER THE POSSIBILITY
OF LOSS OF PERSONAL PROPERTY OR INJURY DURING THE TENANCY. Note that it is
expressly agreed by Lessee that no waterbed(s) shall be brought onto the premises without the written
consent of the Lessor, which consent shall be given only upon presentation of written evidence that the
Lessee has taken out a policy of waterbed insurance covering any eventual damages to the premises.
7. Should the Lessee fail to pay the rent, or any part thereof, as the same becomes due, or violate any
other term or condition of this rental agreement, Lessor shall then have the right, at his option, to
re-enter the leased premises and terminate the rental agreement; such re-entry shall not bar the right of
recovery of rent or damage for breach of covenant, nor shall the receipt of rent after conditions broken
be deemed a waiver or forfeiture. Rent unpaid after the fifth of the month shall be considered late and
shall cause the Lessee to forfeit the right to the discount for prompt payment of rent. The full rent shall
then be immediately due and payable, and if it is not paid by the fifth of the month, Lessor shall issue a
three-day notice to pay or quit the premises. Note that rent may be paid by personal check, money
Unit 8B, Page 84
order, cashiers check, or (in the case of payment in person) by cash. In the event rent is paid by
personal check and the check is bounced, Lessee shall incur a bad-check charge of $10.00 payable to
the Lessor, and Lessee shall forfeit thereafter the right to pay rent with personal check. Note also: in
the event of a bounced rent check Lessee shall pay rent immediately by cashier's check, money order,
or in the form of cash, and if the date of payment of such rent falls after the fifth of the month in which
the rent in due, the Lessee shall forfeit the rental discount for that month.
8. Should the Lessor be compelled to commence or sustain an action at law to collect said rents or part
thereof, or for damages, or to dispossess Lessee or to recover possession of said premises, the Lessee
shall pay all costs in connection therewith, including reasonable attorney's fees.
9. It is mutually understood and agreed that the Lessor and his agents shall have access to the leased
premises at all reasonable times to inspect and protect the same, to show the same to a prospective
purchaser, tenant, or mortgagee, and to make repairs. The Lessor agrees to show every courtesy to
Lessee in this regard by making every reasonable effort to reach Lessee for the purposes of setting up a
convenient appointment.
10. Lessee agrees not to keep or maintain a dog, cat, or any other animal or pet on the leased premises
without the written consent of the Lessor.
11. Lessee shall comply with all the reasonable rules and regulations now in force by Lessor, and
posted in or about the premises, or otherwise brought to the attention or notice of the Lessee, both in
regard to the building as a whole and as the premises herein leased.
12. In the event the leased premises are furnished with furniture of the Lessor an inventory of the
furniture shall be included after this paragraph, and it is hereby agreed that all furnishings are received in
good condition, unless otherwise expressly stated, and the Lessee agrees to return the same at the
expiration hereof in like condition, reasonable wear and tear excepted. Note also that where premises
are equipped with a disposer unit, the Lessee shall be responsible to keep said unit in good working
order. Where Lessee causes said unit to become clogged or stuck, or where Lessee causes drains in
premises to become clogged, it shall be the responsibility of the Lessee to arrange for professional
repairs to same at Lessee's expense.13. Lessee agrees, prior to occupancy, to pay Lessor a security
deposit of:
_______________________________________Dollars ($______). Lessor may apply this deposit
against any of the following obligations of the Lessee: (1) rent owed and past due; (2) damages done to
the premises by Lessee or by persons invited on the property by him, beyond ordinary wear and tear;
(3) reasonable costs of cleaning premises following termination of tenancy if not completed to the
satisfaction of the Lessor; (4) damages to the Lessor resulting from early termination of this agreement
by the Lessee; (5) the cost of having the carpets professionally cleaned. Within 45 days following first
written notice of intent to terminate this agreement by the Lessee, the Lessor shall refund to the Lessee
the security deposit, less any amount withheld therefrom as permitted herein, together with an itemized
Unit 8B, Page 85
statement of items withheld. NOTE: SECURITY DEPOSIT SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED BY
LESSEE TO BE THE LAST MONTH'S RENT. RENT FOR THE LAST MONTH OF
TENANCY MUST BE PAID ACCORDING TO THE PROVISIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
14. Lessee agrees to keep flower beds adjacent to premises free of weeds and debris. Note that it is
expressly forbidden to keep blocked or unsightly vehicles on premises or to carry out
mechanical/overhaul work on premises.
15. It is expressly stipulated that there are no terms of this agreement different from any of the
preceding numbered paragraphs or in addition thereto, except the following:
16. All covenants and representations herein are binding and inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors,
administrators and assigns of the Lessor and Lessee.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have hereunto set their signatures and seals, the day and
year first above written.
_______________________________ ____________________________
_______________________________ ____________________________
(Lessee) (Lessor)
UNIT NINE
PORTFOLIO BALANCE
AND CONTROL:
CREATIVE END GAMES
UNIT NINE
PORTFOLIO BALANCE
AND CONTROL:
CREATIVE END GAMES
9.1 WHAT YOU WILL LEARN IN THIS UNIT
The real estate investor who seeks true financial
independence begins by building a portfolio of real estate
Unit Nine, page 3
properties and then controlling his investments through wise
management practices. Unfortunately, many novice investors
either buy or sell real estate without any organized plan to
balance their portfolio and control its profits. Such investors will
likely never achieve their ultimate objective of financial freedom.
The purpose of this unit is to teach you how to build a
balanced portfolio and control your properties for maximum
profit. It will show:
* What a real estate portfolio is.
* What steps you must take in order to build a portfolio.
* Why diversification of your portfolio will produce
optimum profits and minimum risks.
* Which personal and property risks can be controlled.
* How earning excellent profits through your real estate
portfolio is related to your ability to control overall cash flow.
* How tax laws and regulations influence the growth of your
portfolio equity.
* How to use professional advisers to increase your portfolio
profits.
* How to use options and development strategies in real estate
investing.
The fear of managing a large investment program can
keep an otherwise successful investor from financial
independence. In studying this unit, imagine yourself as the
purchaser of the properties discussed. As you become more
familiar with the ideas, and as you apply them in a risk-free
environment (which will be provided for you at the end of this
report), you will see your fear of portfolio management quickly
evaporating.
Financial independence is as close as the pages you are
reading. Study this material well and you will be on your way to
financial freedom.
9.2 A FEW TERMS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Capital appreciation: The increased value of a capital
Unit Nine, page 4
investment such as real estate. Real estate usually increases in
value as the inflation rate goes up. It also increases in value if
the potential economic profits from that asset improve. You
must learn to manage your portfolio in such a way that the value
of the individual real estate properties increases, even when the
inflation rate is low.
Capital depreciation: In certain economic situations,
the value of a real estate property or other capital asset can
decrease in value. This depreciation in value is generally
associated with a lower investment return on the property, a
decline in total neighborhood real estate values, or a change for
the worse in the use of that real estate.
Capital gains tax: When you sell a property and realize
a gain, you are taxed on that gain as if it is ordinary income,
except that taxes from a long-term capital gain (for properties
held at least one year) is capped at 28% (which helps only
those who are in an income tax bracket higher than that).
Check current regulations.
Diversification: The process of including in your real
estate portfolio various properties of different size, character,
and location. Diversification helps you minimize risk and
maximize investment return.
Entrepreneurial profit: The profit earned from selling a
short-term investment without waiting for long-term
appreciation. You should avoid building a portfolio of real
estate properties exclusively upon anticipated entrepreneurial
profits.
Feasibility research: The process of determining the
profit potential for a specific real estate property or project.
You should conduct on all investment properties, regardless of
the length of time you expect to hold the asset in your portfolio.
Investment risk: The risk associated with real estate
property. If an asset is mismanaged, the profit on that property
can diminish rapidly. When building, controlling, and managing
a portfolio of properties, you must balance the risk of any one
Unit Nine, page 5
property against your overall investment objectives.
Non-recourse debt: Debt that has recourse only upon
the investment equity in the event the investor defaults. When
building a real estate portfolio, you must use caution in
guaranteeing the payment of investment obligations against
personal assets. The best way to insure the safety of the overall
portfolio is to use an exculpatory clause which (provides for
non-recourse) in as many property financing arrangements as
possible.
Portfolio planning: The planning stage in an investment
program, in which numerous investment properties are
considered. Portfolio planning must be done before you buy or
sell a single property.
Portfolio strategy: The decisions made to manage real
estate properties in such a way that your financial goals will be
realized. Your portfolio strategy must be adjusted on an
ongoing basis in response to individual property performance.
Property management: The process of managing the
liabilities and asset of a single property in order to achieve your
overall portfolio investment objectives. As your real estate
portfolio increases in size, you will need to devote more time to
portfolio strategy and less time to individual property
management. When this change begins to occur, you should
seriously consider retaining a professional property
management firm.
Refinancing: Taking out a new loan on a property or
modifying the existing one on it. Refinancing is used when an
existing property loan is mostly paid off, or when the repayment
on terms on new financing are more attractive than the existing
terms. As a portfolio increases in size and is held for an
extended period of time, refinancing may be used to generate
further investment capital to control portfolio growth.
Risk: The hazard of investment loss. As your property
portfolio increases in size, the risk associated with any one
investment property should decrease through diversification.
Unit Nine, page 6
Tax-free exchanging: Disposing of an individual
property by exchanging the property for an investment property
of like kind and increased market value. Exchanging properties
instead of selling them should always be considered in portfolio
strategy whenever possible since it may save you a
considerable amount in taxes.
9.3 KEY POINTS ABOUT PORTFOLIO BALANCE
AND CONTROL
As you read this unit, keep the following key points
clearly in mind. They will guide your thinking and help you to
keep a proper perspective on the information you will be
assimilating.
* Real estate portfolio consists of a number of properties
purchased individually.
* Managing your entire investment program through portfolio
control is as important as managing a single rental investment
property.
* The more you understand the risk of loss associated with
an individual property, the easier it will be for you to control the
risk of losing your entire portfolio.
* Cash flow from individual investment properties should be
funneled into building your real estate portfolio.
* Diversification can be achieved through the purchase of
many small investment properties.
* Outside investment advisers and professionals can provide
valuable assistance as you try to maintain portfolio balance and
meet your overall investment objectives.
* Your financial independence will be conditioned upon your
ability to balance a portfolio of properties and control their
growth.
Unit Nine, page 7
9.4 HOW TO BALANCE YOUR PORTFOLIO AND
CONTROL ITS PROFITS
WHAT IS A REAL ESTATE PORTFOLIO?
A portfolio of real estate properties consists of all the
real estate investments owned and controlled by an investor. It
may include development property, rental property, fix-up
properties, and properties held for long-term appreciation. The
portfolio with the safest risk is one that contains a wellmanaged
mixture of several different kinds of properties.
The investor who attempts to achieve financial
independence without considering the impact of an individual
investment upon his total investment program is setting himself
up for failure. This is why portfolio planning is so important.
Mark M. attended a short real-estate investment
seminar and became excited about the prospect of gaining
financial freedom through the purchase of real estate properties.
He hoped to control a large number of rental properties and
then use the equity in those properties to retire, travel, and
generally enjoy life. This was the extent of Mark's portfolio
planning.
Being aggressive by nature, Mark had little trouble
buying more and more properties using nothing-down
techniques. Within nine months Mark owned a portfolio of eight
singe-family homes, one duplex, two four-plex apartments, a
six-unit rental property, a small office building, two pieces of
raw ground suitable for residential development, and a
conversion office building. The six-unit rental property
generated a positive cash flow of $325 per month, and two of
the single-family rentals each showed a positive cash flow of
approximately $50 per month. The office building broke even.
Unfortunately, all of the other properties showed negative cash
flows. Because Mark had not used any system of control to
balance the kinds of properties, disaster was waiting in the
wings. He had owned the properties too short a time to
experience much equity growth through normal appreciation.
Unit Nine, page 8
Mark had made some cosmetic repairs and earned some equity
that way, but his total investment equity was in the early growth
stage. His cash flow is summarized on the adjacent page.
By the end of the ninth month, Mark was elated to find
that he controlled over $1,000,000 worth of real estate that
would appreciate a substantial amount each year.
Unfortunately, Mark had a major problem. He could not pay
more than $350 to $400 each month to meet the negative cash
flow his properties generated. This required dramatic and
immediate action.
He decided to sell some of his properties in order to
pay the monthly debt he had and to try eliminating some of the
negative cash flows. Because he needed cash immediately,
Mark found that he had to sell properties at a discount and sell
first those properties with the best cash-flow.
It took Mark a little over two months to sell the sixplex
apartment property, the office building, and four of his
single-family rentals. The paper equity he had in those
properties was over $20,000, but due to the discounts he had
to offer on the properties he ended up with just under $5,000.
He also still had a negative cash flow of approximately $800
each month. He could afford to supplement the cash flow by
$400, so it took less than a year to deplete the cash reserve he
had. By this time, he had to sell more of his properties, but was
able to raise less cash than the time before because he had
already sold his best properties.
In just under two years, Mark had lost the entire equity
in all of his properties and ended up losing two of the properties
through foreclosure. One of these properties remained to haunt
him because it had been foreclosed with a deficiency judgment
against Mark personally.
None of this would have happened if mark had
understood portfolio planning and portfolio management.
Investing in real estate can be a good way to achieve
financial freedom and independence, but it must be done
Unit Nine, page 9
wisely. Making a single property purchase will not provide the
independence you hope to achieve, but neither will buying a
large number of properties, unless you do it in a systematic and
controlled way.
Before you buy a single piece of property, you must
make some intelligent decisions about the kinds of property you
should buy to meet your financial objectives. (This is called
portfolio planning.) Then, once you have purchased these
properties you must manage them with those objectives in
mind. (This is call portfolio strategy.)
Portfolio planning should consider not only your
investment objectives, but also your resources. When portfolio
planning is done properly, it will eliminate the situation that
Mark found himself in. If Mark had carefully planned his
portfolio to balance the growth of his investment equity against
his investment resources, he would have saved a great deal of
money and preserved his portfolio.
Once a portfolio is put together using portfolio strategy,
you may change your investment objectives as you make
decisions to hold, sell, exchange, or refinance your properties.
Your portfolio strategy may change as the number of
properties you own grows and the amount of equity in the
properties increases. Later on in this unit, we will discuss
techniques that can be used to balance and control portfolio
size and profits.
9.5 HOW TO DEFINE YOUR INVESTMENT
OBJECTIVES
As you evaluate your investment goals, you should
place them in order of priority. As you do so, you will begin to
see what kind of goals you need.
Most investors adopt one or more of four objectives
Unit Nine, page 10
for their investment program. They may want:
* Income through property cash flow,
* Tax savings,
* Equity growth through mortgage reduction, and/or
* Capital appreciation.
1. Income through property cash flow. James C.
began investing in real estate with the ultimate objective of
achieving financial independence. James had regular
employment that provided him with the resources to support a
small amount of negative cash flow -- no more than $200 a
month -- as his portfolio was increasing. This $200 would need
to cover all the cash requirements of his portfolio of properties.
In the beginning stages of his portfolio growth, James decided
to use this $200 to supplement the cash needs of individual
properties. He decided, however, that within two years he
wanted to begin receiving a monthly cash benefits from his
portfolio that could be used for personal consumption without
disturbing the equity in his portfolio.
James first purchased a duplex rental property that
required a cash input (negative cash flow) of just over $60 each
month. He did some cosmetic repairs, and within four months
he was able to raise the rent on the two units enough to break
even. At the same time, he made another purchase of a singlefamily
rental property that broke even immediately. When he
improved the landscaping of the property, he was able to raise
the rent by $90. His third purchase was a four-plex apartment
property that had a negative cash flow of $140 each month. It
took James eleven months to turn the cash flow on this
property to a positive income of $205 a month.
Less than two years had elapsed and James had a
positive cash flow from his three properties of $405 each
month. Following his previous investment decision, he began
using $200 for personal consumption and allocated the
remaining $205 to help provide for the cash requirements of
future property purchases.
Because James based his investment decisions on his
Unit Nine, page 11
resources and on realistic cash income objectives, he was able
to balance the growth of his portfolio with his resources and
achieve the cash benefit he desired.
2. Tax savings. One characteristic of investment
property is that it provides a tax break. When James began
purchasing investment properties, he decided to use the tax
benefits from property ownership to increase his take-home
pay from work. He could then use this tax savings to build a
cash reserve to purchase larger investment properties that might
require a small down payment. The three properties that James
owned at the end of two years showed a total tax loss of $800
each month. Since James was in a tax bracket of 35 percent
(combined state and federal), this $800 loss resulted in an
actual tax savings of $280 each month. James set aside these
funds for future use in his portfolio purchases. Be sure to check
current tax rates.
3. Equity growth through mortgage reduction. As an
investor pays toward the principal amount of his debt each
month, he is creating equity growth in his real estate portfolio.
This growth is generally small when the loan required to
purchase the property is relatively new. But as more of the debt
on the property is paid off, the equity increases.
When James first purchased the first three properties in
his real estate portfolio, most of the monthly amount he paid on
the loans went toward interest. But some of this payment
included a small principal payment. By the end of the second
year, James was paying a total principal amount each month of
over $125. The equity on his properties thereby built at a rate
of $125 a month.
4. Capital appreciation. It used to be that most
investors believed that the capital appreciation of the properties
in their real estate portfolios would be the major source of longterm
profits. Today, most investors look to the current return
on investment as the chief factor. Still, in some areas of the
country there could be considerable appreciate of real
property. Moreover, through careful buying, investors can go
into deals with a strong equity gain, almost as if the property
Unit Nine, page 12
had appreciated instantly. In either case, investors might well
have an objective to control a portfolio that increases in value
each month through capital appreciation. At some time in the
future, they plan to convert this equity appreciation into more
and larger properties.
When James purchased his first three properties, he
made sure that he bought each at or below market value. He
knew that if he paid more than the fair market price for the
properties, the appreciation of those properties would first go
to recover the excess purchase price. James also used wise
management techniques to lower expenses, do cosmetic
upgrading, and raise rents. This contributed to an immediate
increase in value. James paid $59,000 for the duplex when he
purchased it, $38,00 for the single-family rental, and $88,000
for the four-plex apartments. He purchased all three of these
properties with no cash of his own invested. By the end of the
second year, the capital appreciation of the three properties
showed the following:
Property Purchase Price Fair Market Value
Duplex $ 59,000 $ 73,000
Single Rental $ 38,000 $ 51,000
Four-plex $ 88,000
$119,000
Total $185,000
$243,000
As you can see, James was able to realize a capital
appreciation profit of $58,000 during the first two years he
owned his portfolio. As value of James's portfolio continued to
appreciate at approximately 8 to 10 percent per year, his three
properties experienced a capital appreciation of approximately
$1,620 or more each month after the second year.
9.6 EXPANDED GOALS OF PORTFOLIO
OWNERSHIP
After you've looked at the basic investment objectives,
you'll want to consider a larger list of goals you hope to achieve
Unit Nine, page 13
through ownership of your portfolio.
What specific goals do you want to achieve by
investing in real estate? Do you want a retirement income?
How about money for college or charity? Whatever your goals
may be, achieving them will depend to a large degree on how
you mix your portfolio. One property may best serve as a tax
shelter, another as a source of regular cash income, and still
another for long-term equity growth. et's discuss some of the
benefits a property investment might offer:
* Protection of purchasing power
* Diversification
* Tax shelter
* Regular cash return
* Capital gain
* Retirement income
* Estate building
* Investment for use
* Equity growth
* Entrepreneurial profit
You may have a portfolio plan that includes the
selection of one or more properties to realize each of the above
benefits. Your major objective may be for long-term estate
building and retirement income, with other benefits derived from
specific property purchases. As long as these purchases are
balanced against your long-term investment objectives and
investment resources, you will attain your ultimate goal of
financial independence.
9.61. Protection of purchasing power
As you put your portfolio together, make sure you buy
only those properties that will appreciate in value at least as
much as the inflation rate. This ensures that you will be able to
convert the equity in your portfolio into other investments or
assets or into personal use without suffering the negative effects
of inflation. By using the principle of leverage learned in earlier
lessons, you can increase your equity even faster.
Unit Nine, page 14
Greg and Carol A. decided that they wanted to build a
real estate portfolio that would provide for retirement within
fifteen years. As the first investment in their portfolio they
purchased a three-unit apartment building at slightly below
market value with no money down and a total purchase price of
$78,000. It was located in a growing area and was one of the
lower-priced properties there. They were confident that the
property would continue to appreciate at a rate that at least
equaled the normal inflation rate, preserving the purchasing
power of their investment.
9.62. Diversification
Diversification (which we will discuss in more detail
later) decreases the risk of owning anyone property and
increases the potential yield or return on it. (Note: Unless you
are a very experienced investor, your diversification should be
limited to additional purchases of the same type of property.)
Both Greg and Carol understood this principle and
established a plan whereby they would diversify their
investment holdings among properties of different sizes and in
several locations. They felt that they could use this strategy to
convert their properties into a retirement income.
Since the three-unit apartment property didn't have a
negative cash flow, they immediately began looking for a
second property. They selected a single-family rental located in
a relatively new neighborhood in a community some five miles
away from their first property. Most of the properties in that
area were owner-occupied, and Greg and Carol felt the
appreciation of the property would be excellent and that their
investment was safe. This particular property required a cash
down payment of $1,100; the purchase price was $51,000.
They were able to rent the property for an amount that left them
with a negative cash flow of $65 per month, but they felt they
could afford this and believed that the diversification the
property provided in their investment program was worth it.
9.63. Tax shelter
Unit Nine, page 15
One of the real benefits of a real estate portfolio is that
the properties often provide a "tax loss" that can be used to
shelter other income. Part of the decision Greg and Carol made
to purchase the single-family rental with a negative cash flow
was based upon the tax savings they would receive from it and
their three-unit rental property. The loss attributed to the first
two properties in their portfolio was $375 per month. Since
Greg and Carol were at the time in a 38 percent tax bracket,
the actual cash savings from the shelter benefit of the two
properties was calculated as follows: 38% x $375/month =
$142.50. That was $77.50 above the $65 negative cash flow.
Be sure to check current tax rates.
9.64. Regular cash return
Regular cash return is the normal positive cash flow
from rental property. This return is in addition to the tax benefits
the real estate provides. Most investors plan to include in their
portfolios some properties that will give them a regular cash
return. This cash return is then either recycled into additional
investments or used for personal financial needs.
Greg and Carol recognized a need for a positive cash
flow from their portfolio of $500 per month beginning four
years after their investment program began. They were going to
need that money to pay the college expenses of their oldest
son.
They decided to purchase a third property, and located
a small office building in a growing business community. It was
leased to substantial clients, and vacancy was rare. They were
able to purchase the property for nothing down, and with an
increase in rental rates, the property would provide an
immediate cash flow of $85 each month. By raising the rental
rate each year, they realistically expected that this property
would have a cash flow in excess of $500 a month by the time
their son entered college.
Unit Nine, page 16
9.65. Capital gain
Currently you will be taxed on capital gains as if the
gains were ordinary income, except that there is a 28% cap on
long-term capital gains. Over the years, the capital gains tax
rules have changed and varied considerably. Real estate
investors must watch these changes closely in order to take
advantage of the tax laws where possible (check current tax
rates).
Greg and Carol agreed that their investment program
was based on selling some of their smaller properties and using
the funds both for reinvestment in larger properties and for
meeting personal financial obligations. Whenever they got ready
to sell any property they looked at their length of ownership
and then evaluated the impact of capital gains on the proposed
sale.
9.66. Retirement income
Greg and Carol wanted to be able to retire by the time
they were 55 or 60. At that time, they wanted to own a home
free and clear and have a regular income of at least $7,500 per
month to travel and enjoy their life. With the proper growth of
their portfolio these goals seemed attainable. They began
looking, therefore, to purchase a fourth property. About a year
after they had started investing in real estate, Greg and Carol
found a twelve-unit rental property owned by an elderly couple.
They talked to the owner and found that he wanted to have a
house free and clear for the down payment on the property.
They were happy to tell him they had a house to trade. When
Greg and Carol had purchased the single-family rental property
they had included a substitution of collateral clause. This
allowed them to transfer the collateral for the loan on the rental
house to the twelve-unit apartment building. In this way, they
were able to purchase the twelve-plex for no money down, and
they exchanged their small equity in the single-family house for
the equity in the apartment building.
When the apartment property was added to their
portfolio of properties, Greg and Carol had increased the
Unit Nine, page 17
positive cash flow they received by some $375 per month, and
they had a property that was appreciating at more than
$25,000 per year. They were well on their way to meeting their
retirement objectives.
9.67. Estate building
You build an estate in much the same way you build a
retirement program. You start by looking for substantial
property that will appreciate with time. Greg and Carol wanted
to provide an estate that would fund their retirement program
and at the same time provide for some of the financial need of
their children. Their selection of properties effectively
accomplished both goals.
9.68. Investment for use
Most investors want to use a portion of the cash return
form their portfolios for personal needs and desires. As long as
you make this goal part of your portfolio planning, this is a
legitimate use of funds.
When Greg and Carol decided to invest in properties
that would provide for the educational needs of their children,
their investment decision was based on "investment for use."
Later, after Greg and Carol had started their investment
program, they wanted to use a portion of the cash flow from
their investments to buy a news luxury automobile. They didn't
want to disturb any cash flow being developed for other uses
(such as education), so they looked at the cash flow from their
twelve-unit apartment. They found that they had enough cash
flow from the property to buy the vehicle.
9.69. Equity growth
As an investment appreciates in value the equity in the
investment also increases, particularly if the investor uses
leveraged financing.
Greg and Carol continued their investment program by
adding a six-plex rental property that was priced well below
Unit Nine, page 18
market. It required a certain amount of money for repairs and
cosmetic upgrading before rents could be raised, but Greg and
Carol had the money because they had been leaving a sizable
portion of their portfolio cash flow in the bank. They felt the
expenditure was worth it because the increased rents generated
an immediate equity growth in the property and at the same
time turned a slightly negative cash flow property into a positive
cash flow situation.
9.6-10. Entrepreneurial profit
Sometimes an investor buys a property with the idea of
selling it immediately for a profit. This area of real estate
investment carries some risks that must be minimized, but the
profits can be substantial. Unless the risks are very low and you
know what you are doing, it is best not to jeopardize your
portfolio through entrepreneurial profit enterprises that are too
risky.
Greg and Carol were not developers, but as they
increased their portfolio they gained some valuable experience
and knowledge. As they were looking for residential property,
they found a piece of property that could be sold for immediate
profit if they could get the zoning changed. They obtained an
option on the property and completed the pre-development
process taught elsewhere in these reports. Within four months,
they turned their $2,000 investment into $25,000. They
decided to use $20,000 of this money to purchase additional
rental properties, and $5,000 for personal enjoyment.
As you can see, building an investment portfolio
involves a process of continually defining and redefining your
investment objectives, using portfolio planning and strategy to
achieve your goals.
9.7 BASIC INVESTMENT CRITERIA
Whatever goals and objectives you may set for a
property, you will want to make sure the property meets certain
Unit Nine, page 19
basic investment criteria. These criteria are liquidity,
profitability, and safety of principal.
9.71. Liquidity
As an investor, you must have the ability to alter your
investment strategy, purchase additional properties or convert a
portion of your equity into liquid assets. This is the reason why
all the properties in you portfolio must be wise purchases. If it
becomes necessary to liquidate any of these properties, you
can do it without a loss of equity. At the beginning of this
lesson, we reviewed a situation in which an investor -- Mark
M. -- acquired properties too quickly and without enough
planning, and when liquidity became crucial, he lost a
substantial portion of his equity.
Any decision to add a property to a portfolio must
consider its liquidity. If Mark had reviewed this investment
objective, he immediately would have seen the folly of his
investment purchases. When James purchased the duplex,
single-family rental, and four-plex, he was aware of the need
for liquidity. This was one of the primary reasons why he
immediately lowered operating expenses and raise rents. In this
way, the property showed a positive cash flow with excellent
long-term financing. He knew that if he needed to sell these
properties he would be able to do so easily.
9.72. Profitability
Profit in real estate is measured in terms of cash flow,
tax savings, equity buildup, and appreciation.
When James purchased his first three properties, he
was looking to make a profit in all four ways. As James's
portfolio of properties increases, he will undoubtedly change his
objectives and place a higher emphasis on one or more of the
different types of profit. We remember that James wanted to
use at least $200 of the property cash flow for personal
consumption. Thus, he began by placing a higher priority on
cash flow from the properties.
Unit Nine, page 20
As you make your own portfolio decisions, you must
make those decisions in terms of profitability.
9.73. Safety of principal
Keeping the principal safe involves, first, the
preservation of the original equity, and second, the preservation
of the equity earned in the property. One of the many mistakes
Mark made in purchasing his fifteen properties was failing to
consider the safety of his principal. No investor will achieve
financial independence who is not concerned with the safety of
his principal investment.
James made sure his investment properties provided
liquidity, profitability, and safety of principal. He didn't purchase
as many properties as Mark, but the total benefit from his
investment portfolio was much greater.
9.8 HOW TO BUILD A PORTFOLIO
A real estate portfolio must be build on a solid financial
foundation. Consequently, before building a portfolio, you need
to ask yourself three vital questions:
M How much regular capital can I contribute to building a
portfolio?
M Will personal emergencies endanger my portfolio?
M What effect will my current liabilities have on my
portfolio growth?
9.81. How much regular capital can I contribute to building a
portfolio?
To invest in real estate, you need capital for down
payments, to offset negative cash flow, for cosmetic repairs,
and for similar expenses. If you have little or no immediate cash
or capital to meet these needs (either your own or a partner's),
you can still build a portfolio, but you must do it at a slower
Unit Nine, page 21
pace.
Young portfolios are like babies--they need to be
nourished until they can take care of themselves.
Portfolio planning should allow for a period of time
when cash must be drawn from other sources to supplement
the cash requirements needed by the properties in the portfolio.
If this is not possible, you must make certain that each
investment will generate a positive cash flow from the day it is
purchased.
9.82. Will personal emergencies endanger my portfolio?
Several years ago, an investor by the name of William
O. began investing in small rental properties. Since he could not
afford to supplement the cash flow of those properties, he used
extreme caution in selecting his investments. Shortly after he
began investing, however, his three-year old son was diagnosed
as having cancer. Luckily the disease was at a treatable stage,
and William had health insurance that paid a major portion of
the bills. Still, William wisely delayed expanding his portfolio
until he was sure of the expenses he would have to pay for his
sons's treatment.
The odds against emergencies like this are low, but
gambling should be restricted to the casino; make sure you
have something to fall back on.
9.83. What effect will a current liability have on my portfolio
growth?
If you have a large amount of short-term credit
payments, your ability to add properties to your portfolio will
be limited. Furthermore, your increased debt will make new
loans very difficult to obtain and you will not be able to add any
capital to your portfolio. If you currently have a severe cash
drain, build your portfolio slowly, using part of the portfolio
profits to retire the short-term debt.
You should ask yourself these three questions each
Unit Nine, page 22
time you consider buying a property. Too many real estate
investors consider them when starting their investment program,
but set the questions aside as their portfolios grow. The result
can be disastrous.
There is probably no greater truth in portfolio, balance
and control than this:
A REAL ESTATE PORTFOLIO THAT
PRODUCES PROFITS IS BUILT BY ADDING
ONE PROPERTY AT A TIME.
What you need, then, is a system you can adapt each
time you purchase a property. The ideas you have been
learning in this course comprise just such a system. If you
follow these steps carefully and prudently, your chances for
achieving your goals with real estate are greatly enhanced.
9.9 CREATIVE ENDGAMES: STRATEGIES TO
INCREASE EARNINGS
We end this course with a number of different strategies
that you can use in diversifying your approach to portfolio
development. We will consider, in turn, six strategies:
M Split and Double
M Controlling Your Portfolio Growth Through
Diversification
M Exercising Risk Control
M Using Teams to Help You Control Your Portfolio
M Using Options
M Developing Real Estate for Profit
9.91. SPLIT AND DOUBLE
In building your portfolio, you might want to try a
technique called "split and double." This technique could enable
you to convert the equity of a single property into a property of
at least double the value.
Here's how the technique works. Dean P. purchased a
Unit Nine, page 23
small duplex for $58,000. Then, using the techniques taught in
this course, he increased the value of the property to $67,000
within nine months. At the end of nine months, Dean exchanged
his equity of $9,000 for the down-payment on a four-plex
valued at more than $120,000. The four-plex was an excellent
investment and carried its own weight in his investment
portfolio.
Now Dean had the same $9,000 equity in the portfolio,
but the assets of the portfolio were valued at over $120,000
instead of $67,000. With an 8 percent appreciation rate, the
value of Dean's real estate portfolio was increasing at
approximately $800 per month, with the four-plex as the sole
asset. (When the duplex was the sole asset, the portfolio was
appreciating at only $447 per month.)
Of course, this "split and double" technique should be
combined with balance and control in order to avoid the major
problems that Mark (the first example in this report) met with
his fifteen properties. Each investor must build his portfolio of
properties around both short-term and long-term investment
goals.
If your short-term goals are equity growth and capital
appreciation, the properties you place in your portfolio will
generally be highly leveraged, high-appreciation properties with
low cash flows. As the portfolio grows in size and matures in
age, you will buy properties that have lower financing and
better cash flows.
9.92. CONTROLLING YOUR PORTFOLIO GROWTH
THROUGH DIVERSIFICATION
One of the best ways to protect yourself as a real
estate investor is to place in your portfolio properties of
different value, geographical location, and size. Diversifying
your portfolio in this way also increases your profits. Exactly
how you diversify --which properties you choose and when
you buy them--is based on your investment objectives. But
remember: specializing is the key to establishing yourself as a
Unit Nine, page 24
successful real estate investor. Diversifying in the sense of
buying different kinds or properties (office buildings, shopping
centers, etc.) is for experienced investors only.
There are two basic reasons why diversification is in
your best interests financially. Diversification (1) decreases the
risk and (2) increases the yield.
1. Decreased risk. The more properties you own, the
less dependent you are upon the performance of any one
property. Thus, the chance that you will lose your entire
portfolio because of one bad investment decreases with every
profitable new property you buy.
George R. began investing by first drawing up a
portfolio plan. Basing his decisions on this plan, he began
placing properties in his portfolio that to the best of his
knowledge, would break even immediately and within twelve
months generate a positive cash flow. George was a
knowledgeable investor, but he did make a mistake from time
to time. After George had placed six properties in his portfolio,
he bought a duplex that he believed he could improve through
cosmetic fix-up. However, he wasn't able to rent the duplex
until the cosmetic repairs were done, and once he got into the
project, he found that the needed repairs were more structural
than cosmetic. George had neither the cash nor the desire to do
the structural repairs, and so returned the property to the
previous owner (which he could do because the exculpatory
clause in his purchase agreement allowed him to do that.)
Consequently, he lost his original investment of $1,800 and the
$1,692 he had paid on the mortgage during the three months he
held the property.
If George had only had the one property in his
portfolio, the $3,492 he lost might have destroyed his entire
investment program. But by the time that George made the
investment, the other six properties were generating enough
cash to cover the monthly payment deficit. Furthermore, he had
saved the $1,800 down payment from earlier cash flows. He
still realized a loss of almost $3,500, but thanks to
diversification, he only lost that one investment, not his entire
Unit Nine, page 25
portfolio.
In beginning, you should select small properties in
different geographical locations. Then as your portfolio grows,
you can use the split-and-double technique discussed earlier to
consolidate some properties while maintaining a diversified
portfolio.
2. Increased yield. Diversifying your portfolio increases
your profits in three important ways:
First, if you have purchased your properties using
nothing-down or little-down techniques, you could enjoy
appreciation on several properties instead of only one.
Second, the portfolio is more liquid. You can sell,
exchange, or refinance one or more of the properties while
leaving the other investments alone to appreciate or bring in
rents. For example, Jerry K. had build a portfolio of seven
different investment properties. Five of the properties were
single-family homes used as rentals, one was a duplex, and one
was an eight-unit apartment building. One day, Jerry found an
additional six-unit apartment building that could be bought for
less than $5,000 down. He didn't want to disturb the equity in
his investments if at all possible, so he decided to refinance one
of the first properties he had purchased.
With funds from the refinancing, he was able to
purchase the six-unit apartment building, and with the positive
cash flow from the rest of the portfolio, he was able to pay for
the $5,000 loan. Without his portfolio, Jerry would have had a
much more difficult time refinancing such a large property and
the refinancing expense would have been much higher because
it would have been tied to the total mortgage price of the new
loan.
Third, diversification allows you to meet more than one
investment objective. Most investors have different objectives
to meet at different time. If the investor needs cash for
education, he doesn't need to sell or refinance his entire
portfolio to get the money.
Unit Nine, page 26
Darlene S. had built a portfolio of five small properties.
As one of her investment goals, she had planned to eventually
take out sufficient equity to fund a retirement trip for her
parents. Because she was diversified, she was able to sell one
of her properties to pay for the trip when the time came. If she
had not diversified her portfolio, she would have had to take
more dramatic and expensive steps to accomplish the same
goal.
9.93. EXERCISING RISK CONTROL
Whether a real estate investment succeeds or fails
depends on both the investment and the investor. Both elements
are critical, and both have their own forms of risk.
Category 1. Investment Property Risk
The risks associated with the investment property itself
include:
* Insurable risk
* Investment (business) risk
* Financial risk
1. Insurable risk. You can lose your investment if fire,
flood, or some other natural disaster destroys the property.
This risk is low, however, and can be controlled by purchasing
an insurance policy against such loss.
2. Investment (business) risk. If an investment property
is not managed correctly, expenses associated with owning the
property can very rapidly eat up any profits in it. If that
happens, the property is not worth the same market value as it
was when you bought it. For example, if tenants are not kept
happy or if the property is not protected against the wrong kind
of tenants, the vacancy rate may increase or rental rates go
down. In either case, the property loses value.
This investment risk can be controlled through effective
management techniques. Early in your investing career you may
Unit Nine, page 27
need to manage your portfolio personally, but once you can
afford professional management, you should do so. Your time
can then be used to control and balance your portfolio of
properties.
3. Financial risk. Risk increases as the ratio of debt
service to net operating income increases. High leverage
financing can produce exceptional by high rates of return on the
actual cash invested, but it can also increase the risk of
investment loss if you cannot meet the debt payments.
The best way to control this risk is to use options when
purchasing property you plan to resell immediately, to obtain
realistic and reasonable financing terms when purchasing the
property, and to include an exculpatory clause if possible.
Category 2. Investor Risk
There are many things an investor can do, foolishly, to
increase the possibility his investments will fail. The main risks
are in:
* Being too aggressive
* Speculating rather than investing
* Investing with too little capital
1. Being too aggressive. If an investor fails to plan his
portfolio and map out his investment strategy, he may purchase
too much property too quickly, acting out of emotion rather
than reason. Remember Mark, at the beginning of this report?
This was his problem, and the reason he lost his entire portfolio.
The key to building a successful portfolio is to start small,
buying one property at a time, doing so only after a careful
review of your financial resources.
2. Speculating rather than investing. Some neophyte
investors are tempted to try making their fortune on a single
transaction. The potential is certainly there, but the risks are
very large.
Still, speculating can be done--if you never commit
Unit Nine, page 28
more than 10 to 15 percent of your real estate investment
capital in such projects. Another safeguard is to use options. In
this way, you can try making it big all at once with minimal
capital investment and risk.
3. Investing with too little capital. One of the major
problems for many investors trying to build a real estate
portfolio is that they do not have the capital necessary to
increase the growth of their portfolio as rapidly as they want.
Capital cannot be created simply by imagination. It is possible,
however, to expand your portfolio by arranging joint ventures,
employing partnership arrangements and using wise nothingdown
techniques.
9.94. USING TEAMS TO HELP YOU CONTROL YOUR
PORTFOLIO
As your portfolio increases in size and value, you will
find it necessary to use outside professional help in reaching
your investment objectives. These professionals all charge a fee
for their help, but if they provide a margin of safety and increase
profits, their advice is worth every dime. The professionals that
you will find most helpful are:
M Accountant
M Appraiser
M Architect/engineer
M Broker
M Insurance broker
M Property manager
M Lawyer
9.94-1. Accountant
A professional accountant can audit and analyze your
finances, prepare your taxes, draft loan documents and financial
reports, and make valuable suggestions for improving the cash
flow of the entire portfolio.
When Steven and Sally M. began building their
Unit Nine, page 29
portfolio, they realized that they would need the help of an
accountant, but they knew they wouldn't be able to afford one
until the portfolio was producing a regular cash income. As
soon as this happened (after the purchase of their fifth
property), they engaged a professional accountant for an hourly
fee. The accountant showed them how to organize their
portfolio and prepare their tax records. His fee was more than
offset by the tax savings his advice and expertise earned for
them.
9.94-2. Appraiser
An appraiser can estimate property values for
exchanges, sales, and refinancing. He can also do marketability
studies and make feasibility reports for the development of
portfolio assets. Most appraisers can be hired on a one-time
basis and are paid a fee based on the work performed.
9.94-3. Architect/Engineer
An architect or engineer is most helpful in you have a
portfolio that includes some development real estate. In fact, it
is dangerous to buy such properties without securing the
services of an engineer or architect. They can also provide
valuable cost estimates for completing development work.
9.94-4. Broker
Many real estate investors want to sell their properties
by themselves. But the portfolio increases in value and size, a
real estate broker can be a real asset. He can help market
properties. He can watch for properties you might want to
purchase. And he can provide valuable information only a
broker would have access to. It is important, however, that the
broker follow your guidelines. If he is unfamiliar with nothingdown
techniques but is willing to learn, give him a try. After a
few purchases, the broker may have learned enough about
nothing-down techniques to provide a valuable service for your
portfolio.
9.94-5. Insurance broker
Unit Nine, page 30
Insurance brokers are paid by the companies that
insure your properties. You will want to decrease your
insurable risk by working with a qualified insurance broker who
can provide the liability and casualty insurance you need.
9.94-6. Property manager
As you increase the number of rental units in your
portfolio, you will want to consider engaging a professional
property management firm. Good property managers can
increase your rental receipts and lower your overall expense
costs. Steven and Sally learned that with a professional
property management firm, they were able to dedicate more
time to portfolio management and increase their total equity
much faster.
9.94-7. Lawyer
A lawyer can assist your accountant in his work and
help in estate planning and tax shelter selection. He can also
protect you by reviewing legal documents and sales
agreements.
When Steven and Sally retained a lawyer, they went to
one familiar with real estate transactions. However, before
retaining the lawyer, they made sure that he was comfortable
with their portfolio strategy and investment objectives. Once
they knew they could trust his advice, they never purchased or
sold a property without consulting him.
The key to using professionals is finding people you feel
comfortable with and who will increase your profits. As long as
the value of the services they provide equals or exceed their
fees, they can be worthwhile additions to your portfolio
management team.
9.95. USING OPTIONS
The astute investor will always have "options" on his/her
mind. An option allows you to gain control of a property
Unit Nine, page 31
without having to purchase it until a later date. When you
negotiate an option with a seller, you pay a certain sum of
money for the right to purchase the property for a designated
price within a specified time frame.
For example, let's say that you locate a twelve-unit
apartment complex offered for $360,000 and your analysis
indicates that the property would be an excellent addition to
your portfolio. However, for financial reasons you cannot swing
the deal for at least eighteen months. What can you do to hold
on to that opportunity? You can offer the seller an option for,
say, $3,000, to be exercised within eighteen months at a price
of $400,000. The future purchase price is something you guess
would be appropriate at that time. If the seller accepts, he might
be guessing that his property might not quite appreciate that
much in a year-and-a-half, or he might simply be betting that
you will actually follow through with the deal and he will have
sold his property for an acceptable price. If you do not follow
through, then he will be $3,000 ahead of the game and have the
use of that money for up to eighteen months without having any
tax liability for it until after the option is exercised or expires.
Meanwhile, you have "control" of the property in that
no one else can purchase it during the option period unless you
decide to let it go. If someone does come along and make a
better offer, you could always sell your right to buy the
property for a "price," which might be many thousands of
dollars. To prepare for this possibility, you should make sure
that your option agreement contains wording that allows you
the right to sell your option to another party. Also, make sure
that you record your option agreement with the county recorder
so that the seller cannot option is off or sell it to someone else in
the meantime.
During the option period you have no management
hassles or concerns with the property, since the owner has not
sold it yet. You do not have to worry about taxes, either. It is a
good way to have your cake and eat it, too. We have provided
a copy of an option agreement at the end of this unit. You can
obtain similar forms from your local office supply store.
Unit Nine, page 32
Here is an example of how an option can work to your
advantage in the words of Bob Allen:
"Some time back, I was looking at a 100-acre parcel
of ground in a growing area which the seller wanted to sell in
one large package for development of housing tracts. He
wanted $18,000 an acre, total price of $1,800,000. There
were no loans against the property. $1,800,000 is a very large
amount of money. And it would probably take from three to
five years to be able to develop that 100 acres of ground in this
particular community. This would mean that if I purchased that
ground now, I'd either have to have $1,800,000 in cash to
invest and to tie up for a five-year period of time, or I would
have to pay interest on that land as I purchased if from the
seller. And that is not palatable either; 10 percent interest on
$1,800,000 is well over $180,000 a year in interest alone just
to carry the land. I proposed to him that I pay him the cash and
have him deliver five acres free-and-clear (5 acres x $18,000 =
$90,000). Inherent in the purchase of the initial five acres was
an option to be able to purchase 10-acre tracts thereafter each
year for the next five years until the entire project would either
be developed or the options would be relinquished.
"In other words, I would buy a tract of land with a
$90,000 down payment. I could develop it, build houses on it,
take my profit and buy another ten-acre tract of land. If I
continued to have success, I could roll my option to the next
parcel of ground and continue rolling that option from tact to
tract to tract until the final 10-acre parcel was completely
developed. I would not have to have high interest carrying
costs, but the options that I would negotiate with the seller
would be at higher and higher prices per acre until at the end of
five years the seller would still make the same amount of money
but would eliminate the necessity for me to have to carry that in
monthly interest payments.
"This form of an option is called the 'rolling option.' I
buy one piece of property with the option to buy another piece
within a certain period of time and to roll that option to the next
piece of ground until the entire parcel is finished. This approach
is very common and predominant in the land development
Unit Nine, page 33
business."
There are many variations to this form of agreement.
For example, you do not have to offer money for the option
amount. You could offer other real estate property or paper or
personal property, with the pledged consideration passing to
the seller at the end of the option period. You also can use the
ordinary Earnest Money Agreement as a short-term option.
9.96. DEVELOPING REAL ESTATE FOR PROFIT
In earlier reports we have walked through the crucial
steps of finding and purchasing good real estate investments. By
applying the ideas we have discussed, you will be able to
gradually establish the financial independence you have
dreamed about for so long.
One way is to establish that independence is through
developing your own properties. Developing is not without its
risks, however, and first time investors enter the development
arena with no more chance of success than a bull in a bull fight.
They are excited about the possibilities and eager to begin
earning large profits. But they fail to realize that the profits can
be earned only if they understand the perils and pitfalls.
How can you generate profits in an area of real estate
that is known for its tremendous risks and liabilities? This final
section will discuss a plan that will show you:
* Which properties hold potential development profits
and which ones don't.
* What you must include in your purchase agreement
in order to protect your future profits.
* How zoning can make or break your real estate
development.
* How to control development property with no risk
and no finance charges.
Unit Nine, page 34
* Why one developer can make a profit when another
developer can't - with the same real estate!
Profits through development may be as close as the
ground you are standing one. Increase your understanding,
practice what you learn, and profit from your real estate
developments.
As you read this section, keep the following points
clearly in mind. They will help you understand and apply the
concepts discussed.
* Good development property may be found in all
locations. Developing a property if your site analysis says "no"
is an invitation to failure.
* Analyzing the market demand for the completed
development is an important as finding a property that can be
developed. Profits from real estate development may be eaten
up by interest and carrying costs. It is vital, therefore, that you
gauge a property's marketability before you begin developing it.
Otherwise, you aren't developing--you are speculating!
* Zoning laws were not passed down from heaven.
Don't be afraid to try to change them. You won't succeed every
time, but when you do, the profits can be immediate and
sometimes enormous.
* Developing a property consists of several vital steps.
Don't skip any of them. You may regret it all the way to the
poorhouse.
9.96-1 HOW TO RECOGNIZE GOOD
DEVELOPMENT REAL ESTATE AND TURN IT
INTO A PROFIT
So you'd like to make money--a lot of money--by
developing real estate? If you know what you're doing, it can
certainly be done.
Chuck M. did by predeveloping properties in
Unit Nine, page 35
Wisconsin. In his first experience, he found seventeen acres of
farm land that had gradually been surrounded by a growing city.
The owners had purchased the land years before, but had done
nothing with it. It was still zoned as farm land, Chuck paid a
good price for it as such. He immediately went to the zoning
commission, requested and received a zoning change, and
immediately resold the property for a $168,000 profit. He was
off to a running start toward his first million.
Can others do the same? Absolutely! This section will
show how to make it happen.
WHAT IS A GOOD DEVELOPMENT PROPERTY?
Real estate that can be developed for profit is more
than just bare ground. It is property that someone else wants--
they just don't know it yet!
Success in development depends first and foremost on
your ability to locate unimproved real estate that can be quickly
developed and marketed. To take the opposite approach--to
buy real estate without knowing how you are going to use it,
who you are going to sell it to, and how long the entire process
will take is a quick road to unproductive debt and the fulfillment
of your wildest nightmares!
Development property can be divided into two main
categories. First is the type of property that can be immediately
resold, once the use is defined, without further development.
This type is commonly referred to as "pre development
property." The second type of property is called "completion
development property"--the developer retains ownership until
the development of the property is completed and ready for
use. Both types of development can be very profitable.
Let's look at these two major categories and decide
what characteristics each possesses.
Pre development property
Highest and best use not established
Unit Nine, page 36
Zoning may be changed, altered, or varied
May be an infill development
Purchase price set according to existing zoning
Market demand is very high for proposed use
Completion development property
Highest and best use established but not functional
Zoning changes completed
May be infill or growth development
Purchase price set, allowing for profits from construction and
marketing
Market demand is very high for completed use
CATEGORY 1 - PRE DEVELOPMENT PROPERTY
Highest and Best Use Not Established
Pre-development has characteristically been used in a
way that has not brought the owner the highest return it could.
When Mary and Helen F. were growing up on their farm
outside of town, for example, their father always told them that
the value of the land was in what it produced. Both girls
eventually married and later inherited the property from their
father. As the years went by, Mary's and Helen's new families
moved form the area and leased the farm to a neighbor who
continued to grow hay on it. Although the town eventually grew
up to and around the farm, Mary and Helen continued to lease
Unit Nine, page 37
the ground out for less than $100 per acre. If the twenty acre
farm were developed into building lots, the value of the ground
would be as high as $30,000 per acre. In this case, Mary and
Helen are not using the property to its highest and best use.
Charles A., on the other hand, turned a vacant lot into a
modern office building worth over $300,000. When he
graduated from law school, he established his law practice in a
large metropolitan city. After looking around for office space,
he decided to build an office building he could use and rent out
to other attorneys. Within tow weeks he found a piece of
vacant ground that was part of a public school parking lot. The
school had closed down years earlier, and the buildings and
immediate surrounding property had been sold to a private
research foundation. However, the property that Charles
wanted was still owned by the school and he was able to buy it
for $36,000. The rent from the office building he built on the lot
more than paid the monthly premiums on the loan he took out
to build it.
A good way to begin your development career is to
drive through your own city and write down the addresses of all
the vacant ground that interests you, listing the existing use and
any proposed uses that may seem compatible with the
neighborhood. Once you have done this, you can begin looking
at zoning.
Zoning May Be Changed, Altered, or Varied
When looking for pre-development property, you need
to check the local zoning laws to see if your proposed "highest
and best use" of the property would be permitted. If it isn't, the
land may be worthless as an investment--you would be able to
sell it only for the price determined by its existing, undeveloped
use.
Let's return to the discussion of Mary's and Helen's
twenty acre farm. They finally decided to sell their farm and to
divide the sales proceeds between them. A professional
appraiser told them that the property was worth $3,000 per
acre as a farm. It had never been annexed as part of the city,
Unit Nine, page 38
and neither Mary nor Helen know how to complete this
process. (They hadn't considered annexing it earlier because
their taxes would have gone up considerably.) The two sisters
received an offer to purchase their property for $4,800 per
acre. The offer contained certain contingency clauses and
option rights that allowed the new owner to apply for
annexation and to request certain city zoning. The sisters
accepted the offer, and after about ninety days the closing was
completed. The new owner promptly resold the property to a
local builder for $14,800 per acre. His total pre-development
profits: $200,000.
As a developer, you always need to look for those
properties where the existing zoning may be changed to permit
a "higher and better use." Your ability to purchase and market
such properties is your ticket to financial wealth.
May Be an Infill Development
As towns grow into cities and cities expand into urban
areas, development is not always consistent and uniform. When
certain properties surrounded by new developments, the vacant
property is said to be an "infill property." Because the property
was never developed, chances are that the highest and best use
was never established, since the existing zoning on the property
have been established many years ago. These properties are
prime candidates for healthy profits.
Mark R., for example, owned a chain of convenience
stores in the western United States. He operated the business
with his sons and wanted to expand into several metropolitan
areas. Mark explained his desires to a close friend, and asked
him if he knew of any properties in central locations. Mark's
friend said that he would look candidly "but I'd like to make a
profit on the transactions myself," the friend candidly told him.
Mark said that he didn't mind, as long as he got the property at
a fair and reasonable price.
The friend, Lou H., began looking for properties that
might be good locations for convenience stores. Lou found two
Unit Nine, page 39
properties and he got options to purchase both of them, along
with the right to change the zoning if he desired. Both of the
properties were infill properties surrounded on all sides by
developed commercial and residential developments. When the
transactions were completed, Lou had changed the zoning on
only one property (the other didn't need it), but he made a
profit on both of them. And Mark was very pleased with the
new properties he had acquired.
Purchase Price Set According to Existing Zoning
If the owner has established the purchase price of a
pre-development property according to the existing permitted
uses, and you can improve those uses through zoning changes
or variances, then you may be able to make a quick profit by
immediately reselling the property.
In the mid 1970s, Gary C. moved to a city in the
Midwest. He discovered this characteristic of pre-development
property almost be accident. Having read some books and
having attended several seminars on real estate, Gary was
convinced he could make a profit by having homes built and
then selling them in the retail market. He found an oversized lot
in a beautiful area of the city and made an offer to purchase it.
He included language in his offer that allowed him to apply for a
building permit and to request variances to the zoning. After
having the property surveyed, he found that the lot he was
going to purchase was only fourteen feet short of being wide
enough for two lots. He went before the planning commission
and requested a variance that would let him build two houses
on the property with each house having a lot that was seven
feet narrower.
His variance was granted. After the meeting, a neighbor
in the area asked him if he would sell one of the lots. Gary said
he would and quoted him a price. The price was low enough
that the neighbor asked to buy both lots. Because the price was
almost double what Gary was going to pay for the lots, he
agreed. A simple trip to the Planning Commission had netted
Gary a profit of may thousands of dollars even before closing
on the purchase of the property.
Unit Nine, page 40
If you want to make an immediate profit on predevelopment
property, buy the property at the price set by the
existing zoning uses, then use legal means to improve the use of
the property and thus increase its price.
Market Demand Is Very High for Proposed Use
Even if the property meets all the characteristics we
have just reviewed, you won't be able to make a profit from an
immediate resale unless the demand for the best use of the
property is very high.
For example, the neighbor who purchased Gary's new
loan was confident that there was a demand for new housing in
the area. If this had not been the case, he would not have
purchased the property.
Let's consider what happens when the demand for a
proposed use is not high. A few years ago a young college
graduate named Marlyn J. decided to develop real estate
residential lots. The property was in a nice area that was
experiencing some growth. When Marlyn closed on the
property she wasn't sure when she would be able to sell the
lots, but she was confident that she could do so. In this she was
a little naive. She should have paid attention to the large number
of new homes on the market and the fact that very few new
houses were being started. There were actually several
developments with completed roads and utilities that still many
unsold lots.
Marlyn went ahead and marked up the property
enough to give her a good profit and still allow a builder a
discount for buying all the lots and putting in the utilities.
Because lots were not selling, Marlyn ended up holding the
property for almost three years before she sold it. Although she
sold it for slightly more than she paid for it, she still lost a good
amount of money. She had financed almost 90 percent of the
purchase price and had paid 16 percent interest for almost
three years. When her accountant did her taxes, she had lost
almost $11,000 on her development.
Unit Nine, page 41
This does not have to happen if you gauge the market
demand correctly before you close the purchase. If you are
wise, you will also further protect you profits by using some of
the tips on financing you will learn later in the report.
CATEGORY 2 - COMPLETION DEVELOPMENT
PROPERTY
Highest and Best Use Established but not Functional
Sometimes when you establish the highest and best use
for a property, you will discover that you can generate higher
profits by controlling the property through actual construction of
the building or buildings that will occupy the site. Here's an
example.
Dan S. was a builder who had constructed several
large shopping centers for a hefty profit. He was more than
ready, therefore, to purchase two acres from another developer
who had gone through the entire predevelopment process. He
bought the property as shopping center property and paid a
very reasonable price for it. After he finished the shopping
center he sold it to a management company and made a profit
both on the buildings and on the property.
You, too, can make a profit from "completion
development property," but you need the expertise and
professional experience to complete the development. The
profits you will make are deprived from actually developing the
total construction project, not in just preparing the property for
construction.
Zoning Changes Completed
As a developer of completion development property,
you are not concerned with changing or altering the zoning. The
use to which you intend to put the property is already permitted
by existing zoning.
Ron R. bought a residential subdivision of twenty-two
Unit Nine, page 42
building lots for $18,000 per acre. It had been filed with the
county recorder, which meant that all zoning requirements had
been established and met. No work had been done in the
subdivision, so he put in all the water, gas, and power lines, as
well as the roads, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. When he
finished, Ron sold the twenty-two lots to five different builders.
Even though Ron didn't build the houses, the investment was
still a completion development property for him, since he
completed the utility work necessary to sell the lots.
May Be Infill or Growth Development
Infill property, as we discussed earlier, is property that
has been surrounded by other developments. "Growth
property" on the other hand, is property that is developed as
the city expands into the area. If all the zoning requirements for
the best use of such properties have already been met, the
developer need not be concerned with whether the property is
infill or growth property.
Wally N. owned a development company that built
movie theaters and then leased them to major distributors.
Wally bought sites for the theaters in urban areas surrounded
by other developments and in new shopping malls and strip
shopping centers that were part of major residential
developments in California. As much as possible, he tried to
find infill properties located in the inner cities because the cities
would often provide special financing to get these sites
developed. Cities generally believe that the completion
development of infill properties strengthens the cities and
surrounding areas.
Purchase Price Set, Allowing for Profits from Construction and
Marketing
The purchase price of a property is largely determined
when the zoning is established for the highest and best use of
the property. The actual sales price of the property must also
take into account the cost of the property's construction and
marketing.
Unit Nine, page 43
Trisha H. built townhouses in small twenty fifty unit
developments. Whenever Trisha bought the property for her
townhouses, she projected profits from the actual construction
of the townhouses and from the sales commissions or marketing
fees for the individual units. She was not concerned with
making a profit on the ground, only on the actual completed
units. Because she sold these units through her own company,
she also expected to make a profit from the marketing or sales
of the units.
Market Demand is Very High for Completed Use
This is the most important factor to consider when
contemplating buying property and building on it. If you build
something you can't sell, lease, or exchange, your profits will
evaporate very rapidly. You must be able to assess market
demand, not only for your type of property, but for your
specific property as it will be constructed.
By now you probably have decided that you would feel
more comfortable pre-developing a property. And, in fact, we
suggest that novice investors concentrate on these kinds of
properties. They require the least amount of experience and can
still generate substantial profits. But if you feel that you have the
skills and interest to specialize in development property, go for
it. But first thoroughly assess your ability to follow through on
the construction and marketing of a project.
9.96-2 HOW DO YOU ESTIMATE MARKET
ACCEPTANCE?
To determine a realistic estimate of the market demand
for your property, you must inspect the site. This includes a
physical inspection of the property and a perusal of the
property's legal description. In doing so, you are trying to
assess the property's development possibilities and
marketability.
The importance of doing site analysis on every property
you consider can't be over-stressed. The experience of Ted G.
Unit Nine, page 44
illustrates. Ted had sold real estate for just over six months
when he decided to go into real estate development. He had
been successful in selling a few homes, and thought he could
make a profit buying and selling pre-development real estate.
While Ted drove around town, he found many potential
development sites. He completed a handwritten site analysis on
each one. After his sixth site analysis, he was sure that he had
found a property that would make an ideal fast-food outlet. He
obtained the property through a real estate option that allowed
him to do whatever was necessary in order to develop the
property. His option was for six months, plus extensions, and
during that time Ted changed the zoning and sold the property
with a simultaneous closing to a major fast-food franchise. His
profit was over $36,000. Ted's homework in preparing a site
analysis was a major reason why he was successful in his first
development experience.
A good site analysis will consider the property's:
* Legal description
* Physical land characteristics
* Land Parcel Characteristics
* Development possibilities
* Market ability and best use analysis
* Financing
* Construction
* Marketing
As you can see, the data you must collect is lengthy,
but it is important. If you are concerned only with predevelopment
property, you will still need to complicated form
for this, just a pad of paper and pen. Or use the form we're
providing in this section. (We're including the form here to give
you an overview. You'll understand all the parts better once
you've studied the entire section.)
SITE ANALYSIS FORM
1. What is the property's legal description?
Unit Nine, page 45
2. What are the property's physical characteristics?
a. Soil quality?
b. Topography?
c. Subsurface conditions?
3. What are the land parcel characteristics?
a. Size of property?
b. Slope?
c. Access to transportation?
d. Nature of adjoining property?
e. Zoning and building codes?
4. What are the development possibilities?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5. What is the best use of the property?
What is its marketability at that best use?
a. Economic growth patterns?
b. Employment trends?
c. Housing market?
6. What financing can be arranged?
7. What construction is needed?
Who can best do that construction?
8. What is my marketing plan?
Legal Description
Unit Nine, page 46
This may sound basic, but you need to make sure that
you are investigating the property. If you have the property's
address, you can go to the county recorder's office and get a
complete legal description. Once you have this information, you
can determine if the property is part of a larger piece of
property, and if it is the actual property you were looking at.
You will also be given the property owner's address.
Studying a property's legal description can often save
you a lot of time. Evan I., for example, drove by a piece of
property that appeared to be about 200 feet across the front
and 600 feet deep. He had a proposed use in mind for it, but
he needed to make sure it truly was at least 190 feet wide.
When Evan went to the courthouse, he found that the legal
description said the property was only 181 feet wide. Without
this information, he might have made a foolish decision to invest
in a property that wasn't suitable for his needs.
Physical Characteristics
When you are writing down information about the land
itself, you will be concerned with the following characteristics,
not only of the land you are looking at, but of the surrounding
property as well.
1. Soil quality. Note the type of soil. Is it sand, clay, or
something else? If you are going to develop residential lots,
you need not be too concerned with the ability of the soil to
withstand a heavy load. But you definitely would be concerned
if you were going to construct a twelve-story office building!
2. Topography. How does the ground lie? Is it level?
Would it be best suited to residential, commercial, or some
other type of development? This information may be critical
when you start to determine where the buildings will eventually
go on the property. Dick L. was interested in buying some
hillside property that could be subdivided "on paper" into
twelve individual lots. But after looking at the actual
topography, he found that the terrain would accommodate only
Unit Nine, page 47
seven lots. As you can see, the topography of a property can
make a dramatic difference in the value of the property.
3. Subsurface conditions. How high is the water table
in the area? Is there any mining nearby? In the early 1980s,
major "sink holes" appeared in several cities in the western part
of the country causing millions of dollars in damage. Eventually
someone will build some type of building on your development.
If the land proves unstable, you could be involved in a law suit.
Land Parcel Characteristics
An examination of the property and of its legal
description can provide you with some important information
about the land.
1. Size of property. This may be determined form the
legal description. If the parcel is part of a larger property, you
may want to purchase a survey of the property or at least make
your offer subject to that survey. If you don't have a survey,
you can use a fifty-foot tape and estimate the size. You will
need to know both the dimensions of the property and the total
number of square feet.
2. Slope. The slope of the property will indicate
whether the development will need to be filled in, cut back, or
have other earth-moving work completed.
3. Access to transportation. If you are developing
residential or commercial property, you need to know what
transportation routes are available. Failure to do so can be
costly. Mitchell F., for example, purchased a piece of property
for an office complex but did not check on the permitted access
from a state road. After closing on the property, he found that
he could not enter his new property from the state road. The
tenants of the building would have had to take a six-block
detour through a run-down section of the city in order to get to
the property. Needless to say, Mitchell never developed his
property, and to this date has not been able to sell it.
4. Nature of adjoining property. The value of any
Unit Nine, page 48
completed development will be partially determined by the
surrounding area. Beautiful lots in a run-down area will not
bring the same prices that they would in a well-cared-for area.
An office building's value will be determined by the rental
income of that property, and rents will vary according to the
tenant's perception of the neighborhood.
5. Zoning and building codes. Once you have located
the legal description of a property, you can go to the local
planning office and find out what zoning is permitted. Before
you do, though, look at all adjoining property and see if that
zoning may be more favorable than your present zoning. It is
extremely difficult to get a zoning change for one piece of
property when the other property in the area is zoned
differently.
Development Possibilities
As you complete your site analysis, begin to look at the
wide range of development possibilities. The following types of
projects have generated profits for developers all across the
country:
* Single family homes
* Townhouses
* Apartments
* Condominiums
* Office buildings
* Shopping centers
* Retail stores
* Medical buildings
* Industrial warehouses
* Distribution centers
* Manufacturing plants
* Recreational developments
* Mobile home parks
* Automobile service centers
* Automobile dealerships
* Theaters
Marketability and Best Use
Unit Nine, page 49
Once you have determined what kinds of developments
are possible on the property, narrow your choices down to that
use which will raise the value of the property, as high as
possible. Make sure, though that there is an above-average
demand for your proposed use of the property in the market
place. As you complete this analysis, pay special attention to
the following:
1. Economic growth patterns. This information will
help you determine in which areas the city is growing, where the
people are choosing to live and to shop.
Harold S. used this kind of information to escape a
serious debt and make a tidy profit. He was completing his first
site analysis and had selected several possible uses for the
property he was looking at. Almost all of the uses involved
selling residential living space. When he checked with the local
Board of Realtors, though, he found that fewer homes were
sold in the current year than in each of the past three years.
With this information he was able to determine that the highest
and best use of the property was probably not residential
housing. He went back to his list of possibilities and found that
he could get a conditional use permit for a medical building. The
hospital was directly across the street. No need to say more!
2. Employment trends. The employment rate in your
area has a definite influence on the highest and best use of
development property. If employment in your area is up, for
example, then developing shopping center or retail store would
be a logical choice, since more and more people will be
spending more and more money. Of course, the overall
demand for any development property is tied to the economy.
If the economy is doing well and expanding, then development
should be good. If the economy is down or stagnant, almost
any development could face some major problems.
3. Housing market. This part of your site analysis
considers the need for new housing. If growth patterns and
employment trends are up, you would naturally think that the
demand for housing would also be up. But this isn't necessarily
so. If an area has been overbuilt; meaning there is an over
Unit Nine, page 50
abundance of available housing on the market; the best use for
a property may be something other than residential.
Financing
When you are doing a site analysis, review the situation
of the seller. Will he be willing to carry the financing on the
project while you develop the property? You must also
determine if there are potential financing sources for the
completed development. If the highest and best use of the
property is deemed to be apartments, but there are no lenders
who are making income property loans at competitive rates,
you will need to look at another use for the property.
If financing seems difficult to arrange, consider seeking
a joint venture with the existing property owner. You give him a
percentage of the property, and he gives you the equity in the
real estate at no interest.
Whatever you choose as the highest and best use under
existing or proposed zoning, you need to consider the financing
arrangements. Pay special attention to the section later in this
report on protecting your profits through proper financing.
Construction
If you are a beginner in real estate development, you
may want to consider only pre-development property. But if
you want to do the final construction of a project, you must
consider your ability to follow through on the construction.
Skip P. had completed a site analysis and decided that
there was a terrific demand for a stand-alone movie theater on
a piece of infill development property. Skip had the resources
to finance the property purchase and building construction, but
he had no building or construction experience. So he went to
several friends and business acquaintances and asked for
references for good builders. When he found that three people
recommended the same individual, Skip offered him a
percentage of the profits on the project in return for building the
theater at cost. The builder agreed, and both Skip and the
Unit Nine, page 51
builder were able to turn Skip's theater idea into reality.
Don't be afraid to use professionals who can do the
construction for you. These people may be able to insure that
you get a quality development, and some may also even
participate in the financing.
Marketing
If you plan to build on a property, never put a dime
down unless you have a good plan for marketing the developed
property. However good the development concept is, it can
turn into a real lemon if you don't have a realistic plan for selling
the developed property for the highest amount, in the shortest
period of time. This may sound simple, but the lack of
marketing foresight has caused more developers to fail than any
other reason.
Answering the following questions will help you to
develop a workable marketing plan.
1. Have I really identified the highest and best use for
this property?
2. What is my competition for that kind of use? Is
there is glut of such properties in town? How about in
my area of town (meaning the area of the property)?
3. Who are my most likely customers for that use of the
property?
4. How can I find those customers who would be
willing to locate in my area?
5. What are my best selling points? How can I best
convince prospective customers that my development is
the one for them?
If you're still uncertain how to market your
development, you would be wise to engage the services of an
Unit Nine, page 52
expert. Find a Realtor who specializes in marketing the kind of
development you have in mind. Meet with him and pick his
brain. Learn all you can from him. Find out what his
commission rate is. Then, before you ever sign on the dotted
line with the seller of the property, sit with the Realtor and map
out the plan you'll use (or he'll use) in marketing your
development.
This point is so important we repeat it:
Have your marketing plan in mind before you exercise
your option to purchase the property.
9.96-3 WHAT MAKES ZONING THE KEY TO
SUCCESS?
Each local government has established zoning
regulations and laws to protect the interests of its citizens. As
we noted earlier, these regulations did not come down from
heaven written on stone tablets. Rather, they were decided
upon and voted into existence by local planning officials. Some
zoning regulations have been in existence for decades. Your
ability to work with these laws and regulations, and to change
them when possible, will be your ticket to large profits as a real
estate developer.
D&D Development, for example, was a company that
built middle income apartments. When two national major
employers moved their production and manufacturing facilities
to their city, D&D knew that more housing would be needed
and that development sites were available. D&D completed a
site analysis on a piece of property contiguous to a multiple
family area, but found that the property was zone only for single
family units. After completing their analysis, they requested a
zone change that allowed for eight apartment units on each
average sized lot. Permission was granted and D&D increased
the value of that property over 400 percent.
When you are considering developing property, the first
thing you should do is find out if you can upgrade the zoning.
Unit Nine, page 53
Here are the basic zones that a city will have.
* Residential single family
* Residential multiple family
* Commercial
* Industrial
* Rural
* Special (e.g. flood plain)
* Mixed use (e.g. PUD)
When you are checking the zoning on a property, look
beyond the use put to it by the present owner. It is possible that
the zoning laws have changed and the present use would not be
permitted if the property were transferred.
One aspect of the zoning laws that can make a profit
for the developer concerns "non conforming use." This allows
the zoning on a specific property to be changed without
changing the zoning of the entire area. If your site analysis and
property review have indicated that the highest and best use of
the property is for a use not currently permitted, try to apply for
a non conforming use permit.
When you are preparing to buy a property with an eye
to securing a nonconforming use permit, you may be able to
increase the value of the property without major expenses.
Make sure that you include contingency clauses in your
purchase agreement that allow you to back out if you are
denied the nonconforming use. This is essential, since your
profit comes from your ability to upgrade the zoning of the
property without getting a complete zone change.
How do you go about requesting a zone change or
variance? Any request for a variance or zone change must be
made at your local planning commission. Be prepared to argue
the best case you can for your proposed zone change, because
you may face some opposition from neighbors or other
interested parties when you go before the hearing board. The
best thing to do in such a case is to work with these people,
showing them how your application is in the best interest of all
concerned.
Unit Nine, page 54
Here are a few ideas to help you work effectively and
successfully with your local zoning authority.
1. Prepare your case to show that you are asking for
reasonable relief from a hardship you did not create.
2. Strategically use experts and professional testimony
when arguing your case.
3. Go to neighboring property owners, explain what
you would like to do, and request their cooperation.
4. Prepare a petition or agreement to be signed by
neighboring property owners.
5. Consider negotiating with objectors at the hearing.
Most opposition to zoning changes comes from people
who tend to oppose any change. But if you can show them how
your change will not have a detrimental effect on their property,
most owners will be willing to cooperate.
William O. had found a piece of property bordering a
multi-family residential zone. It was currently zoned singlefamily
residential, but after completing his site analysis he
decided to apply for a zoning variance to have the property
zoned for multi-family residences.
He anticipated some opposition from neighbors, so he
went to as many as he could and described the type of
development he was contemplating. He explained how the
vacant property was presently an eyesore and that the
increased traffic would most often use the access through the
existing multi-family residential zone. At the hearing, he had a
professional appraiser explain how his development would not
decrease the value of the adjoining property, and local architect
explained how the proposed development would enhance the
entire neighborhood. When the opposition stood to object to
his request, William was prepared with a list of other property
Unit Nine, page 55
owners who had signed a petition requesting that his zoning
request be approved.
When the council voted on William's request, they
approved the variance five to two. If he had not, been
prepared, the opposition would probably have won, and
William would never have made his development profits.
Zoning laws can create the potential for substantial
profits in other ways as well. When an area is growing and
zoning regulations are put in place, certain parcels of ground are
sometimes left undeveloped because they do not meet the size
requirements or some other criteria that the new zone required.
A typical example would be a property in a commercial zone
that did not have the required one hundred feet of frontage and
ten thousand square feet in order to qualify for a commercial
structure. Such "undersized lots" and "substandard lands" exist
primarily in infill development areas and can often be purchased
for a song. If you can get a variance approved, you can enjoy
some very nice profits on your investment.
Henry M. lived in a metropolitan area in California. He
noticed a vacant lot that appeared to be about 75 or 80 feet
wide and possibly 100 feet deep. It was an excellent location
for a small real estate or insurance office. After conducting a
site analysis, he discovered that the lot was 23 feet too narrow
and 1800 square feet too small. The property owner also knew
this and was offering to sell the property for $2.40 per square
foot. Surrounding properties that met size and frontage
requirements were going for almost $6.00 per square foot.
Henry made an offer to the owner for $2.25 per square foot,
but with an option that allowed Henry the right to apply for any
variance necessary for the construction of a commercial
building.
When Henry went before the planning commission, he
explained that the property was "substandard," through no fault
of any property owner (but was large enough) to build on.
After a well-prepared presentation, he got the variance
approved and subsequently sold the property to a national
insurance company for $5.60 per square foot. He realized a
Unit Nine, page 56
profit of nearly $27,000 on the transaction.
As you can see, the profit potential in getting zoning
changed is substantial. You may not get every variance
approved, but when you do, you will instantly reap some large
profits.
9.96-4 HOW DO YOU WRITE AN OFFER FOR
DEVELOPMENT PROPERTY THAT MAKES SENSE?
When you have done a preliminary site analysis on a
property and are satisfied that the property may produce a
sizeable profit, you are prepared to negotiate with the owner
and make an offer on the property. Your major concern at this
point will be to control the property without penalty for nonperformance,
while still retaining the potential for earning large
profits. This can best be done by using either an option or an
earnest money agreement. In both cases, you will be concerned
with two types of clauses that will protect future profits and limit
future liabilities. The first is a contingency clause; the second
covers development rights.
Contingency Clauses
The cardinal rule in preparing any offer to purchase is
always to make provision for the unknown or unexpected.
Contingency clauses like the following are absolutely necessary.
"The buyer has the right to cancel this agreement if buyer is not
able to obtain zoning or use permits necessary for buyer's
development of the property."
"This sale is contingent upon buyer applying for any variance,
zoning change, or necessary use permit and receiving
appropriate approval of same. Buyer has sole discretion as to
what appropriate variances, zoning uses, and permits will be
required."
Unit Nine, page 57
"This sale is contingent upon buyer obtaining the necessary
financing to complete the development of the property
according to buyer's development plans."
Never make an offer that does not give you the right to
cancel the purchase without penalty if you are unable to
develop it to your highest and best use. Robert M. learned that
lesson the hard way. He found a piece of infill commercial
development property he considered a good buy. But this was
Robert's first experience in developing real estate, and he was
sure that the property owner would increase the price if he
knew what Robert was going to do with it. To keep from
revealing his plans, Robert left out a contingency clause in his
offer. He wasn't worried, though. He was "positive" there
would be no problem in getting the zoning variance he would
require.
Unfortunately, the planning commission turned him
down, and he was obligated to purchase a property that he had
no idea how to develop. He immediately changed from a
developer to a "speculator." Eventually he sold the property for
exactly what he paid for it, however, his interest and carrying
costs were over $7,800.
Don't ever be caught in this situation. It is better to pass
up a piece of property than to take a chance on getting burned.
Remember that the property owner probably wants to
sell the property as bad as you want to buy it. Use this
information to protect your profit from the start.
Development Rights
When you are making an offer to purchase or drawing
up an option agreement, be sure to include a clause that allows
you the right to represent the present property owner in any
zoning change, variance, use permit, or related matter. All of
these requests must be applied for in the name of the property
owner. If you can assure the owner know that you will perform
as promised and pay for all related expenses, the owner will
almost always give you these rights. A clause like the following
Unit Nine, page 58
will satisfy both your need and his.
"Present property owner grants the buyer of the
property permission to immediately apply for any
zoning change, variance, or use permit that the buyer of
the property deems appropriate. Buyer of the property
agrees to assume all responsibility for preparation of
any documentation or presentation that may be
required for said items. Buyer further agrees to pay any
and all expenses related to the above items."
When preparing your purchase or option agreement,
make sure you allow yourself plenty of time to complete your
development process. Remember, you may want to
immediately resell the property for a profit. It's always a good
idea, therefore, to get the longest closing time or option period
possible. If you think that your zoning request will take sixty
days, double that amount of time. Then include a provision
whereby you can pay an additional sum, which will apply to the
purchase, to extend the closing for an additional period of time.
Several years ago two young developers made an offer
to purchase a large piece of property surrounding a golf course.
They arranged to sell the property for a profit of $300,000, but
closings had to take place on the same day. The third party,
however could not close that day, and so two developers lost
the profit. Worse yet, they lost over $190,000 in nonrefundable
earnest money. They had placed themselves in a
corner by not allowing enough time for closing.
At this point, a word to the wise. Use an option
agreement whenever possible. An option is very difficult to
break, and it allows the new buyer to openly try to sell the
property once the option is signed.
If you can use an option agreement, try to make only a
small option deposit. You can explain to the property owner
that you will probably not exercise the option if you can't make
your development work. For this reason, you don't want to
spend a lot of money for an option that may not be used. If the
Unit Nine, page 59
seller balks, negotiate for an extension of your option in return
for a larger deposit. And make sure that all sums are applied to
the purchase price.
The key to a successful offer on development property
is protecting yourself at all times. Never allow yourself to be
squeezed into a corner by unforeseen events.
9.96-5 HOW DO YOU ARRANGE FINANCING THAT
PROTECTS YOUR PROFITS?
If you are interested in pre-development property, your
major concern will be to find interim financing that will hold the
property until you can resell the property for a profit. If you are
going to complete development of the property, you will also
need to arrange financing for the longer term.
Let's discuss first several alternatives that will help you
protect your pre-development purchase and maximize your
profits.
FINANCING ALTERNATIVES
Owner financing through purchase or option agreement
This is by far the best method of financing any predevelopment
property. A good purchase or option agreement
will allow you sufficient time to complete your development and
resell the property. Your purchase agreement should therefore
permit one or more extension periods in case you are unable to
resell the property right away.
Rena W. found a piece of property she was able to
rezone from residential to commercial. She had anticipated
selling the property to a grocery store chain, but they were
unable to make a firm commitment prior to Rena's closing date.
This was no real problem, however, Rena's option
agreement permitted her to extend the option period for three
periods of six months each. The $500 she had to pay for each
Unit Nine, page 60
option period was to go toward the purchase price. Although
the first grocery chain did not buy the property, a competing
grocery chain did buy during the second option period. Her
profit on the transaction was over $50,000.
If she had not sold the property by the end of eighteen
months, Rena would have been better off to have lost her
option money than to finance a $100,000 piece of property at
high interest rates, not knowing when she would be able to sell
the property. Remember, the cost to Rena of the entire option
period was really zero, as all option monies went toward the
purchase price of the property.
This same method can be used with earnest money
offers to purchase. Many smart developers never use any other
source of financing than this method when buying predevelopment
property.
Owner or third-party financing
If you really want to carry the property yourself, until
you can locate another buyer, consider financing the property
under a contract of sale with the owner. You may also interest
a third party to put up the money for a portion of the profits.
But be careful. If you don't sell the property when you expect,
your carrying costs may exceed any profits that the property
may produce.
Bank or conventional lending sources
As a last resort, you may want to investigate taking out
a land loan. Most lending institutions have shied away from this
type of loans during the past few years, but there are still a few
available. You will probably have to pay a high interest rate and
settle for a fairly low loan-to-value ratio. Unless you are
absolutely convinced that you will get exceptional profits from
the property, stay away from these types of loans. The cost of
financing by this method can decrease profits to zero!
PROTECTING YOUR PROFITS IN FINANCING
Unit Nine, page 61
It is impossible to say what type of financing you may
require to finish development. Rather than explain the many
types of loans that lenders may or may not have available, let's
discuss how you can protect your profits.
Always use your purchase agreement
Allow yourself sufficient time to develop short-term and
long-term financing for your project. This can be done with
contingency clauses and extension options written into the
purchase agreement. If you are going to develop a property
through construction and marketing, you should have all
financing arranged before closing your property purchase. If
you fail to do this, the interest will destroy your profits, and at
some time in the future, you may not be able to even arrange
financing.
When obtaining financing follow a financing plan
Under no condition close your purchase on a property
without having financing in place for all phases of the
development. If you need separate long-term financing on your
completed project, get a commitment on this financing prior to
closing your purchase. Work up a financial plan and stick to it.
Your failure to do so may come back to haunt you.
Barrett C. applied both these principles in a purchase
he made. He bought some property for a budget motel on a
busy interchange. He was confident that the motel would make
money and made sure he left himself enough time in the
purchase agreement too obtain both construction and long-term
financing. Because he used development financing wisely he
had all the financing he needed when he closed on the property,
and eventually received a sizeable monthly income form the
motel.
CONSTRUCTION FOR PROFIT - NOT PENALTY
The construction requirements different for different
types of projects, and each requires different construction
Unit Nine, page 62
methods and personnel. There is one requirement all will have,
however. They must be constructed for the lowest price that
still permits the best quality. You will invariably be penalized in
the future for shoddy or poor workmanship. If you are not a
general contractor yourself, make sure that you use a
contractor who is reliable, reputable, and bondable.
To protect yourself from liability on the project, make
sure the contractor is bonded for the entire amount of the
development. Then try to get the general contractor to
participate as a partner in the project. He will need to forgo his
usual construction profit, but the prospect of larger profits later
may be too attractive to pass up. If you can get him as a
partner, you will have a contractor who is going to make sure
your completed development is one that he himself would like
to own--because he does.
9.96-6 A NOTE ON THE RISKS AND REWARDS OF
DEVELOPING REAL ESTATE
Development of real estate can be a "risky game." You
can make a substantial profit from the development of real
estate, but only if you undertake projects that you can handle,
based on your experience, talents, and resources. For the
above reasons, we suggest that you concentrate on
predevelopment property. These offer the least risks and the
highest immediate rewards for the beginner.
The key is knowing what you're doing. And that's the
reason for this section.
If you don't know what you are going to do with the
property prior to closing your purchase, you can almost
assuredly count on losing money. However, if you follow the
plan given in this course, success-and wealth-is within your
reach.
Unit Nine, page 63
9.10 HOW WELL HAVE YOU LEARNED?
The better you've learned the ideas taught in this unit,
the more you will be able to apply them. Test how much you've
learned by answering the following questions, writing in the
space provided or on a separate sheet of paper. Do not skip
this step--to retain this valuable information, you need to review
it in writing.
If you are uncertain of a particular answer, look back
through the lesson. The answers to all the questions can be
found in the preceding pages of this lesson.
A. PORTFOLIO DEVELOPMENT
1. What is a real estate portfolio?
2. What two major problems usually arise when portfolio
strategy has not been planned in advance?
3. Name the four objectives most investors have in mind when
they make investment decisions.
4. What importance do liquidity, profitability, and safety of
principal have to portfolio planning?
5. Name at least six benefits you may want from your
portfolio. How do your investment goals determine the mix of
properties you acquire?
6. What does the term "investment for use" have to do with
defining investment objectives?
7. Before building a portfolio, what three questions should you
ask you self?
8. What steps should you follow in purchasing any property?
9. What type of properties should you place in your portfolio if
you are concentrating on long-term goals?
Unit Nine, page 64
10. What is portfolio diversification?
11. Why should you not rely upon the purchase of a single real
estate property to meet your investment objectives?
12. How can you control financial risk?
13. What are the three main aspects of investor risk?
14. How do you balance portfolio profits against portfolio cash
flow?
15. Why must the balance between cash flow and equity
appreciation be maintained in the portfolio?
16. What are the current tax rules regarding capital gains?
17. Why would an investor be willing to increase the value of
the properties in his portfolio without increasing the equity?
What does depreciation have to do with your answer?
18. How can a professional accountant help you manage your
portfolio?
19. Name at least four professionals who can assist you in your
real estate transactions. Name at least one benefit each can
provide.
B. OPTIONS AND REAL ESTATE DEVELOPMENT
1. What is the difference between "infill development" and
"growth development"?
2. What is substandard real estate?
3. Which category of development property may generate a
profit by a simple zone change?
Unit Nine, page 65
4. Which type of development property already conforms to
zoning ordinances that permit its highest and best use?
5. Why should the novice investor concentrate on making a
profit from pre-development property?
6. Where can you find the legal description for a parcel of
unimproved property?
7. Why is the nature of the adjoining property essential to the
site analysis of a particular property?
8. Why are zoning restrictions placed on real estate
development?
9. If employment is up, what type of development property will
be in high demand? Why?
10. What is the first thing you should look for in order to create
an immediate profit from development property?
11. How can a developer make a profit by applying for
"nonconforming use?"
12. What steps should a developer take in order to get a zoning
change or variance approved?
13. How can a developer make a profit with undersized lots
and substandard lands?
14. What is the cardinal rule in making an offer to purchase
development property?
15. What development rights should a purchaser include in any
option agreement or offer to purchase?
16. Which type of property rights should a purchaser obtain
whenever possible?
17. How can a developer provide for owner financing with zero
percent interest when developing a property?
Unit Nine, page 66
18. Why should you bring in a general contractor as a partner
in a completion development property?
19. How does a site analysis increase your chance of
generating a profit in real estate development?
20. How can interest and carrying costs eliminate any and all
profits from real estate development?
9.11 PUTTING IT ALL INTO PRACTICE
Now that you've learned the basic principles of
portfolio planning and the use of creative end-games like
options and real estate development, it's time to put your
understanding into practice. A safe way to do that is to do the
following assignments and nothing more. Do not yet purchase
properties for your personal portfolio or put options or
development strategies into place.
Simply go through the exercises outlined below,
pretending that you own a number of investment properties that
must be managed as are investment portfolio. In this way, you
will be able to see how balance and control in a real estate
portfolio actually works. Similarly, pretend that your portfolio
management includes transactions involving options and
development.
This exercise should help you feel confident in managing
a portfolio of your own right from the start.
Remember to take the investment process one step at a time
and to review the success of other investors in managing their
portfolios.
In the meantime, go ahead with these assignments.
They have been designed so that you can select those tasks that
will be of most benefit to you. But don't skimp on the number
of assignments that you do; you will be cheating only yourself.
Unit Nine, page 67
A. PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL
1. Read the paper. Look in the classified section of the
newspaper and find at least ten properties that are advertised
as rentals. Make a list of the phone numbers and any other
information given in the ads. These properties will become your
practice "real estate portfolio." Diversify your portfolio by
selecting properties in different locations and of different sizes.
2. Call the owners. Make an appointment to see each of the
properties on the list. Try to determine over the phone why the
owner is selling and how flexible he is. For each property, write
the address, property description, price, and other investment
information on a separate sheet of paper.
3. Visit the properties. Go see each of the properties, looking
for obvious reasons why the investor may be selling. Pay
attention to the neighborhood, the appearance of the property,
and similar factors. If the properties are already rented, look for
evidence of proper management.
4. Consider yourself the owner of all the properties. On each
sheet of paper list the reasons why the owner of the property is
selling. Then determine if the owner's decision is based on
remedial action or on long-term portfolio planning. (You will be
surprised at the answer.)
5. Define your peroneal investment objectives. Determine why
you want to own real estate. List the specific goals that you
want to achieve, both short-term and long-term. Then use the
principles taught in this lesson concerning cash flow, equity
build-up, tax savings, and capital appreciation to
determine how your investments will help you meet those goals.
6. Decide what properties you should purchase in order to
achieve your goals. Using the strategy taught in this report on
defining objectives and building a portfolio, see if you would
have purchased each of the ten properties on the list. What
benefits would each of the specific properties provide? If you
can't answer that question fully, follow the steps outline in this
Unit Nine, page 68
report for building a portfolio one step at a time. You may even
need to do a cash-flow analysis on some of the properties.
7. Discard the questionable properties. Based upon your
decisions made in the previous assignment, discard any of the
properties that you wouldn't have purchased to begin with. You
will probably be left with three to five good properties for your
portfolio.
8. Do some portfolio planning. By focusing on your investment
goals, determine how long you would have held each of the
remaining good properties if you had been the owner. Would
you now be selling, exchanging, or refinancing the properties in
question?
9. Compare your decisions with the present owners' reasons
for selling. Analyze the situation of the owners of each of the
properties left on your list. Describe the reason the existing
property owner is selling, and then compare that reason to what
you decided in assignment 8.
B. OPTIONS AND REAL ESTATE DEVELOPMENT
By now, you have learned how development profits are
made and lost. You have seen the perils, pitfalls, and potential
profits that exist in real estate development. But without actually
getting involved in a development project, you will really never
be able to assess your ability to make a profit.
Since you aren't prepared for the risks involved, make
a dry run first. This section of the report will allow you to
experience each phase of the development process without
risking anything.
If you happen to find a development property that can
generate the kind of profit you have read about, leave it alone
until you have finished the entire report. If the opportunity still
appears too good to pass up, bring in a partner that will help
you get started.
Now start the exercises. Depending on your
Unit Nine, page 69
experience, choose those assignments that will be of most help
to your total learning experience. Since your efforts in this
section of the report will help to eliminate a large percentage of
the risk you may face in the future, don't skimp in your efforts.
You'll be hurting only yourself.
1. Go to school. Review this report several times until
you've convinced you know how to eliminate the risk and
liability in development property investments.
2. Make a choice. Now that you understand the
difference between pre-development property and completion
development property, decide which you want to specialize in.
Remember that your best chance of success as a beginner may
be with pre-development property.
3. Go shopping. Go to an office supply store and buy a
notebook with dividers. Use a divider for each piece of
property that you will review. Also purchase several blank
"Earnest Money Offer to Purchase" and "Option Agreement"
legal forms.
4. Drive around. Drive around your city and locate
some vacant properties. Record the addresses and descriptions
of the properties on the forms in your notebook.
5. Fill out the site analysis forms. Reproduce a number
of the site analysis forms included earlier in the report. Using
one form for each property, evaluate each property. If you are
unsure of any item on the form, leave it blank. But recognize
that you will need all the forms fill out completely before you
select the five best properties.
6. Visit three real estate agents. Tell the agents that you
are exploring the possibility of investing in development
property. Tell the agents that you have several development
sites in mind, but that need to have certain information about the
properties before considering them further. Give the agents
copies of your site analysis form. Tell them that when they have
looked at the properties, you will review the information on the
forms with them. They may ask if you are interested in
Unit Nine, page 70
purchasing the properties right away. If they do, say that you
are, provided the information is correct and the properties are
potentially profitable. (This is true, since you may involve a
partner if the property truly is a good deal.)
7. Make a visit. Go to the local planning commission.
Request a copy of a zoning map of the entire city along with a
copy of the zoning regulations. Find out the time of the next
planning commission meeting at which zoning changes or
variances will be acted on. Ask what the procedures are to
request a zoning change or variance in your city and pick up the
appropriate forms.
8. Check the zoning of your potential properties. Using
the zoning map and your property addresses add the zoning
information to each site analysis form. While completing this
assignment, make sure that you note the zoning of adjoining
properties. Are they different from that of your subject
property? If so, make a note of it.
9. Attend the planning meeting. Attend the next
planning commission meeting where zoning changes will be
voted on. At the meeting particularly pay attention to how the
property owners present their cases. Note the type of
objections raised. Some day soon you may be presenting your
case.
10. Prepare three application forms. Using the forms
you obtained through the planning office, prepare application
forms for each of three properties for which you might like to
have the zoning changed. Complete the forms just as if you had
the property under option agreement.
11. Prepare your presentation. Select one of the three
properties and prepare a complete presentation that you would
use to present your case before the planning commission.
Include imaginary expert witnesses and neighborhood petitions.
Once this is completed, present your case to friends or family
and get their response.
12. Practice purchasing. Using the earnest money
Unit Nine, page 71
forms and option agreements that you purchased at the office
supply store, practice filling out purchase agreements on the
properties you've looked at. Include contingency clauses and
rights to develop in order to protect yourself if things don't
work out.
13. Make a list of the top five potential properties.
Using the information contained on your site analysis forms and
those completed by your real estate agents, select the top five
properties that seem to offer the best potential profits.
14. Select one property for completion development.
Decide on the highest and best use of one property and then
determine what type of financing would be required, where it
could possibly be obtained, what type of construction would go
on it, how the property would be marketed, who the general
contractor would be, and what your long-range profits might
be. This phase of developing property is more difficult, but you
should have some exposure to it.
9.12 THE TEN MOST-ASKED QUESTIONS ABOUT
MATERIAL IN THIS UNIT
A. PORTFOLIO BALANCE AND CONTROL
1. "This talk about large portfolios scares me. Is it really
necessary for me to own more than one investment property."
The key to financial success lies in suing portfolio
planning and strategy. As you define your investment
objectives, you will realize that you will need a combination of
properties to accomplish your objectives. If managed correctly,
this portfolio can increase in value and productivity far more
than if you managed only one property--or even a number of
properties separately. And you needn't be frightened. If you
adhere to the principles and cautions presented throughout this
course, you will be able to invest safely and securely, whether
in one property or one hundred.
2. "Why all the discussion about portfolio planning? Isn't it
Unit Nine, page 72
enough to define your investment objectives in general terms?"
The purchase or sale of any investment property that is
not based upon a portfolio plan of balance and control will
result in a haphazard growth at best. In many cases, your return
may become a loss if proper investment planning is not done.
By planning your portfolio in advance, you will know when to
sell, when to exchange, and when to refinance existing
properties. If you have not made a decision in advance as to
when these transactions should take place and how to
recognize when that time has arrived, you will realize few
investment objectives.
3. "Are all properties of equal value in an investment
portfolio?"
No. Each property should be purchased to meet
specific investment objectives. Since all your objectives are not
of equal weight, the properties purchased to meet them are not
of equal importance to your portfolio. The long-term benefit of
building an estate may be your priority objective, for example,
and the properties purchased to provide maximum capital
appreciation would be the most important properties you own.
If you have also decided to structure a steady cash income as a
secondary goal, you will need additional properties. These,
however, may be less important to your portfolio than those
which are needing your priority objective. Beyond this, though,
you should value your portfolio as a whole, using the
component properties to maximize your total investment return.
4. "You indicated that the highest profits from a portfolio will
come from equity appreciation. Why, then, should I worry
about purchasing properties that provide the other types
profits?"
Your goal in buying specific investment properties is to
obtain properties which will enable you to achieve all of your
objectives. These objectives can usually not be realized without
the benefits that come from tax shelters and investments for use.
There are many investment objectives that can't be achieved
unless the portfolio is diversified among a variety of properties
Unit Nine, page 73
purchased specifically for what they can contribute to the
portfolio as a whole.
5. "Do I need to study business management in order to
properly manage my portfolio?"
No. By now you should have learned the basic
principles necessary to manage, control, and balance your
portfolio, although your portfolio increases in value, you may
want to retain some professional advisers to supplement your
efforts. If you establish a proper plan at the beginning of your
investment program, your portfolio management will largely
become a matter of follow-through. It will help your
confidence, however, to associate with other real estate
professionals and to continue to enroll in real estate education
programs.
6. "Should taxes be the controlling factor in deciding when to
dispose of individual properties in my real estate portfolio?"
No. Each property should be sold, exchanged, or
refinanced based on your overall investment strategy. Tax
planning and strategy can be used to weaken the effect of tax
liabilities, but your decision to dispose of a property must be
based on your investment objectives. If you have established a
positive cash flow to meet personal financial objectives, for
example, then exchanging or selling a certain property may not
be the best decision for your portfolio. The problem many
investors have is that they rely on one or two investment
objectives in making all of their portfolio decisions, when their
decisions should consider all their investment goals.
7. "Other real estate owners that I have talked to don't seem to
understand portfolio balance and control. Is it really necessary
for me to develop these management techniques?"
Yes. You must learn to balance and control your
portfolio of properties if you want to realize your investment
goals with the least amount of risk in the shortest period of time.
True, many property owners never structure a total investment
Unit Nine, page 74
program. They invest in a certain property because it seems
prudent at the time. And their decision to dispose of that
property usually results from the need for cash. This process
may produce some property profits, but will usually decrease
the value of a total investment portfolio. The need to understand
and apply balance and control within a portfolio can't be
overemphasized.
8. "Professional advisers and consultants don't seem very
interested in associating with me when I tell them I want to start
my investment program with a single rental property. What
should I do?"
These professionals are usually very busy, and the
competent ones don't advertise for additional clients. If you
want to develop a team of professional consultants, you need to
convince them that, though your portfolio will be small at first, it
will increase in value with their help and assistance. You will be
pleased to find that most professionals who initially seem
uninterested will become excited to help you if they can see
future profit in working with you. Naturally, all professional
advisers won't be of equal value to you. You need to associate
with those who understand nothing-down techniques in
combination with portfolio planning and strategy.
9. "I don't think that I will have time to devote to the
management of a large portfolio. Is there any other alternative?"
You can always turn your investment program over to a
professional investment adviser. The problem with this
approach, though, is that the investment adviser will charge a
substantial fee for managing your investment program. He will
also make the portfolio strategy decisions based upon his
perception of your investment goals, even if that perception is
incorrect. It is in your interest to find the time to control and
balance your own portfolio. If you review the lesson material
presented in this course, you will find that making the necessary
decisions doesn't take a great deal of time.
10. "When I find a good property, how do I know if I should
include it in my portfolio?"
Unit Nine, page 75
Remember that each property added to your portfolio
should be acquired to accomplish a specific investment
objective. The units in this course should give you the
information you need to define those objectives.
B. OPTIONS AND REAL ESTATE DEVELOPMENT
1. "You have explained how interest and carrying costs may
eliminate all development profits. What can I do to secure
financing that will leave me profits, not poverty?"
The key is preparing a proper purchase agreement. If
you allow yourself sufficient latitude to cover the unexpected
and unknown, you are halfway to success already. You must
also get the present property owner to agree to extend the
closing of the property until you have obtained all necessary
zoning changes and use permits. If you can extend the closing
far enough, you may even have time to secure a new purchaser
for the property or to arrange to develop it to completion. It is
usually possible to get an owner to agree to time extensions and
contingency clauses when you first make your offer. On the
other hand, it is almost impossible to do so after you complete
your zoning and development process. Finally, try to get owner
financing. If the owner is extending the financing, you are, in
effect, borrowing his money at zero percent interest.
2. "Why would a property owner or seller agree to sell me the
property subject to my changing the zoning to a higher use,
when that change will automatically increase the value of the
property--and my purchase will not increase?"
Most owners with property for sale are anxious to sell.
They will have already set their price for the property and are
satisfied with that price. They will also realize that you will not
purchase the property at all if your terms are not met. In this
case, it is a "win-win offer"; the seller gets to sell his property
for a price he is already happy with, and you get to purchase a
property that will be worth more money after your development
work is completed.
Unit Nine, page 76
3. "I thought that a site analysis was performed by a
professional. Why should I do my own?"
Professionals such as lending institutions and real estate
appraisers perform site analysis for their own needs. Your site
analyses, however, will include items they will not consider,
such as market demand and alternative uses. Your work is not
designed to replace the reports prepared by the professionals;
rather, it allows you to estimate the potential market acceptance
and profits that might be achieved.
4. "Why should I purchase development property under option
rather than under an earnest money offer to purchase?"
Once you have the property under a purchase
agreement of any kind, you will begin to perform development
tasks that very possibly will increase the value of the property.
Unfortunately, earnest money agreements are easier for sellers
to breach. An option agreement leaves less latitude for the
seller to renege on the purchase terms. The option thus protects
you and your development work to a much greater extent.
5. "If it appears that a zoning change or variance will permit an
immediate profit by increasing the value of the property, why
hasn't the existing owner applied for the necessary change?"
Many times property owners are not aware that predevelopment
work can increase the value of their property. Or
if they do, they don't know how to get a change. As you come
to understand and apply property concepts, you become a
professional who can visualize higher and better uses for real
estate than the average owner. It is this ability that will make
you money in real estate development.
6. "Can I find good development property by myself?"
Yes, but it is not possible for you to be aware of all the
property that is listed for sale in you area unless you use other
professionals, such as real estate brokers. Your best chance of
success, in fact, will be to investigate every development
opportunity you become aware of--including those formed by
Unit Nine, page 77
other professionals. Yes, these people will earn commissions,
but you will still earn a profit, and sometimes that profit can be
enormous.
7. "Do I need a lot of money to begin developing property for
a profit?"
If you follow the concepts and principles taught in the
other units of this course, you will find that you can purchase
development property with little or no cash down. Predevelopment
property is especially accessible to "nothing
down" techniques. If you are going to develop completion
development property, however, you will need more capital,
more credit, and possibly a partner or two.
8. "Real estate development almost seems like a matter of
luck. How can I increase my chance of success?"
Succeeding in any area of real estate investing is not so
much a matter of luck as it is of education and application. It is
true that certain profits can be realized by being in the right
place at the right time, but this report--and this entire study
course--teaches you to know the "right place" when you see it
and when it's "the right time" to buy it. You are in control; you
make you own luck.
9. "The unimproved development property that I have found
already seems high in price. Can I still make a profit with such
real estate?"
Your profits in real estate development come from
finding the highest and best use for a certain piece of real estate.
If that real estate has not yet been qualified for its highest, best
use, there is still room for excellent profits. You must
understand, though, how to increase the valued of the property
by finding a better permitted use or developing an existing
permitted use. If you do, and if you protect yourself through
contingency clauses and development rights, you can still make
an excellent profit.
10. "If I decide to develop a property through to completion,
Unit Nine, page 78
why would I want a general contractor as a partner after the
project is finished?"
Remember that your profit from completion projects is
derived from such things as quality construction at reasonable
prices. If you have invited a good general contractor in as a
partner, you can expect realistic development costs, quality
work, and possibly even help with financing. If the general
contractor has helped in these areas, then he has earned his
keep--and he should be able to look forward, with you, to
long-term profits.